Canon imagePROGRAF iPF840 MFP M40 printer User's Guide

Add to my manuals
678 Pages

advertisement

Canon imagePROGRAF iPF840 MFP M40 printer User's Guide | Manualzz

Large Format Printer

User's Guide

Manuals for this printer

Setup Guide

Quick Guide

Basic Guide Electronic manual

User's Guide Electronic manual

Paper Reference Guide Electronic manual

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

15

29

Printing CAD Drawings.............................................................

52

Printing enlargements or reductions........................................

72

Printing at full size....................................................................

83

Borderless Printing...................................................................

92

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes....................

101

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet........................................

114

Centering originals..................................................................

128

and so on

Windows Software

157

Printer Driver...........................................................................

158

Preview...................................................................................

189

Free Layout.............................................................................

199

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy...............................

221

Print Plug-In for Office............................................................

230

and so on

Mac OS Software

267

Printer Driver...........................................................................

268

Preview...................................................................................

286

Free Layout.............................................................................

307

and so on

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

495

549

657

661

331

425

463

475

565

603

635

ver1.00 2015-04-01

ENG

2

Contents

Basic Printing Workflow

15

Printing procedure 16

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets ..................................................................................................................

16

Turning the Printer On and Off ..................................................................................................................................

17

Loading and Printing on Rolls ...................................................................................................................................

18

Loading and Printing on Sheets ...............................................................................................................................

21

Printing in Windows .................................................................................................................................................

22

Printing from Mac OS ...............................................................................................................................................

22

Canceling print jobs 24

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel ............................................................................................................

24

Canceling Print Jobs from Windows .........................................................................................................................

25

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS ..........................................................................................................................

25

Pausing Printing 27

Pausing Printing .......................................................................................................................................................

27

Enhanced Printing Options

29

Choosing Paper for Printing

30

Choosing a Paper for Printing ..................................................................................................................................

30

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver .......................................................................................................................

30

Using double-roll printing 31

About Double-roll Switching .....................................................................................................................................

31

Loading Roll Paper in the Printer Depending on the Purpose ...................................................................................

31

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper ..............................................................

32

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Windows) .......................................

32

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Mac OS) .........................................

37

Roll Paper Switching Method ...................................................................................................................................

39

Printing Photos and Office Documents 43

Printing Photos and Images .....................................................................................................................................

43

Printing Photos and Images (Windows) ..............................................................................................................

43

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS) ................................................................................................................

45

Printing Office Documents ........................................................................................................................................

47

Printing Office Documents (Windows) .................................................................................................................

47

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS) ...................................................................................................................

48

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ..................................................................................................................

50

Printing CAD Drawings 52

Printing CAD Drawings .............................................................................................................................................

52

Printing Line Drawings and Text ...............................................................................................................................

52

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) ........................................................................................................

53

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS) ..........................................................................................................

54

Printing from AutoCAD .............................................................................................................................................

56

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings ..........................................................................................................

57

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) ...................................................................................

58

HP-GL/2 Printing .....................................................................................................................................................

59

Adjusting Images 60

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ....................................................................................................................

60

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) .........................................................................................

61

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS) ...........................................................................................

64

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing .......................................................................

66

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) ......................................................................

68

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS) ........................................................................

70

Printing enlargements or reductions 72

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size ..............................................................................................................

72

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ........................................................................................

72

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width .....................................................................................................................

74

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ..............................................................................................

74

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) ................................................................................................

76

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ..........................................................................................................

78

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) ...................................................................................

79

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS) .....................................................................................

80

Printing at full size 83

Printing on Oversize Paper .......................................................................................................................................

83

Printing at Full Size (Windows) ............................................................................................................................

84

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS) ..............................................................................................................................

85

Borderless Printing at Actual Size .............................................................................................................................

87

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) ......................................................................................................

88

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS) ........................................................................................................

89

Borderless Printing 92

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size .......................................................................................................

92

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) .....................................................

93

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ..................................................................................

95

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ............................................................

96

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) .............................................................

98

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes 101

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) ...............................................................................

101

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) .........................................................

102

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS) ...........................................................

105

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ...................................................................................................................

108

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) ............................................................................................

108

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS) ..............................................................................................

111

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 114

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .........................................................................................................

114

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) ..................................................................................

115

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS) ....................................................................................

117

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously ......................................................................................................................

118

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) ...............................................................................................

118

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS) .................................................................................................

120

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ...........................................................................................................................

121

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ....................................................................................................

122

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS) ......................................................................................................

124

Printing Posters in Sections ....................................................................................................................................

126

Printing Large Posters (Windows) .....................................................................................................................

126

Centering originals 128

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls .......................................................................................................................

128

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) .................................................................................................

128

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS) ..................................................................................................

130

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ....................................................................................................................

132

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) .............................................................................................

132

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS) ...............................................................................................

134

Conserving roll paper 137

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees ........................................................................................

137

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) .................................................................

137

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS) ...................................................................

138

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins ........................................................

140

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) .................................

141

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS) ...................................

142

3

4

Checking Images Before Printing 145

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ...................................................................................................

145

Other useful settings 146

Printing With Watermarks .......................................................................................................................................

146

Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ...............................................................

147

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation ..................................................................................

148

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) ...........................................................

149

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS) .............................................................

150

Using Favorites ......................................................................................................................................................

152

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing .............................................................................................................................

152

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ......................................................................................................

153

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS) ........................................................................................................

154

Windows Software

157

Printer Driver 158

Printer Driver Settings ............................................................................................................................................

158

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver .....................................................................................................................

160

Confirming Print Settings .......................................................................................................................................

161

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ..................................................................................................

161

Using Favorites .....................................................................................................................................................

162

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .....................................................................................

164

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu ............................................................

165

Main Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................

166

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................

170

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box .................................................................................................................

170

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application .......................................................................................

172

Color Adjustment Sheet: Color ........................................................................................................................

172

Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color ................................................................................................................

173

Matching Sheet ...............................................................................................................................................

174

Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome ............................................................................................................

176

Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome ....................................................................................................

177

Page Setup Sheet .................................................................................................................................................

177

Output Method Dialog box ...............................................................................................................................

180

Paper Size Options Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................

181

Layout Sheet .........................................................................................................................................................

182

Page Options Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................

183

Special Settings Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................

184

Favorites Sheet .....................................................................................................................................................

185

Utility Sheet ...........................................................................................................................................................

186

Support Sheet .......................................................................................................................................................

187

Settings Summaries Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................

187

Device Settings Sheet ...........................................................................................................................................

188

Preview 189

The Features of Preview .........................................................................................................................................

189

Starting Preview .....................................................................................................................................................

189

Preview Main Window ............................................................................................................................................

190

Dialog Area ............................................................................................................................................................

192

Enlarge/Reduce the screen display ........................................................................................................................

193

Moving a Page .......................................................................................................................................................

193

Using the ruler ........................................................................................................................................................

193

Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees ....................................................................................................................

194

Printing with Selecting the Layout ...........................................................................................................................

195

Print on the Center .................................................................................................................................................

197

Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom .......................................................................................................................

198

Free Layout 199

The Features of Free Layout ...................................................................................................................................

199

Starting Free Layout ...............................................................................................................................................

199

Free Layout Main Window ......................................................................................................................................

201

Detailed Settings ....................................................................................................................................................

202

Preferences Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................................

203

Page Options Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................................

204

Zoom Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................................

205

Format Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................................

205

Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page .................................................................................................

207

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page .................................................

209

Selecting an Object ................................................................................................................................................

211

Changing the Object Size .......................................................................................................................................

211

Moving an Object ...................................................................................................................................................

212

Rotating an Object .................................................................................................................................................

212

Laying out Objects Automatically ............................................................................................................................

213

Aligning Objects .....................................................................................................................................................

213

Changing the Object Overlapping Order .................................................................................................................

215

Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ..............................................................................................................................

216

Folded Duplex Window ..........................................................................................................................................

217

Finished Size Settings Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................

218

Binding Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................

219

Prints using Folded Duplex .....................................................................................................................................

220

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 221

The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ......................................................................................

221

Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ..................................................................................................

221

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box .............................................................................................

222

Hot Folder ..............................................................................................................................................................

223

Creating a New Hot Folder .....................................................................................................................................

223

Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder .............................................................................................

226

Setting the Print Parameters ...................................................................................................................................

228

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER ..............................................................

229

Print Plug-In for Office 230

Print Plug-In for Officefeatures ................................................................................................................................

230

Steps to install .......................................................................................................................................................

230

Steps to uninstall ....................................................................................................................................................

233

When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed .........................................................................................................

233

To start from Microsoft Word ..................................................................................................................................

236

Print Matching Roll Width(Word) .............................................................................................................................

238

Borderless Printing(Word) .......................................................................................................................................

240

Multi-Page Printing(Word) .......................................................................................................................................

242

Register the settings (Word) ...................................................................................................................................

243

Print Using Registered Settings(Word) ....................................................................................................................

244

Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(Word) ...................................................................................................

246

To start from Microsoft PowerPoint .........................................................................................................................

247

Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint) ...................................................................................................................

249

Borderless Printing(PowerPoint) .............................................................................................................................

250

Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint) .............................................................................................................................

252

Register the settings (PowerPoint) ..........................................................................................................................

254

Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint) ..........................................................................................................

255

Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint) .........................................................................................

256

To start from Microsoft Excel ..................................................................................................................................

258

Print Entire Sheet(Excel) .........................................................................................................................................

259

Print Selected Area(Excel) ......................................................................................................................................

262

Configuring Binding (Excel) .....................................................................................................................................

264

Configuring Special Settings ...................................................................................................................................

265

Mac OS Software

267

Printer Driver 268

Printer Driver Settings ............................................................................................................................................

268

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver .....................................................................................................................

269

Confirming Print Settings .......................................................................................................................................

270

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ..................................................................................................

271

5

6

Using Favorites .....................................................................................................................................................

271

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .....................................................................................

272

Main Pane .............................................................................................................................................................

272

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box .................................................................................................................

276

View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application ..............................................................................................

278

Matching pane .................................................................................................................................................

278

Color Settings Pane: Color ..............................................................................................................................

280

Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ................................................................................................................

281

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome ..................................................................................................................

282

Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome ....................................................................................................

283

Page Setup Pane ..................................................................................................................................................

283

Additional Settings Pane .......................................................................................................................................

284

Preview 286

The Features of Preview .........................................................................................................................................

286

Starting Preview .....................................................................................................................................................

286

Preview Main Window ............................................................................................................................................

287

Paper Settings Panel ..............................................................................................................................................

290

Easy Settings ...................................................................................................................................................

291

Advanced Settings ...........................................................................................................................................

292

Output Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................

293

Color Settings Panel ...............................................................................................................................................

295

Color Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................

296

Matching ..........................................................................................................................................................

298

Driver Matching Mode .................................................................................................................................

299

ICC Matching Mode ....................................................................................................................................

300

ColorSync ...................................................................................................................................................

301

Preferences Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................................

301

Zoom Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................................

301

Go to Page Dialog Box ...........................................................................................................................................

302

Print with No Borders .............................................................................................................................................

302

Print on the Center .................................................................................................................................................

303

Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom .......................................................................................................................

303

Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees ..............................................................................................................................

304

Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper .........................................................................................................

304

Display with All .......................................................................................................................................................

304

Display with Actual Size ..........................................................................................................................................

305

Moving a Page .......................................................................................................................................................

305

Free Layout 307

The Features of Free Layout ...................................................................................................................................

307

Starting Free Layout ...............................................................................................................................................

307

Free Layout Main Window ......................................................................................................................................

308

Paper Settings Panel ..............................................................................................................................................

310

Easy Settings ...................................................................................................................................................

311

Advanced Settings ...........................................................................................................................................

312

Color Settings Panel ...............................................................................................................................................

313

Color Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................

314

Matching ..........................................................................................................................................................

316

Driver Matching Mode .................................................................................................................................

318

ICC Matching Mode ....................................................................................................................................

319

ColorSync ...................................................................................................................................................

320

Preferences Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................................

320

Page Setup Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................................

321

Zoom Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................................

322

Format Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................................

323

Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page .................................................................................................

323

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page .................................................

324

Selecting an Object ................................................................................................................................................

324

Changing the Object Size .......................................................................................................................................

324

Moving an Object ...................................................................................................................................................

325

Rotating an Object .................................................................................................................................................

325

Laying out Objects Automatically ............................................................................................................................

326

Aligning Objects .....................................................................................................................................................

326

Changing the Object Overlapping Order .................................................................................................................

328

Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ..............................................................................................................................

329

Handling and Use of Paper

331

Paper 332

Types of Paper .......................................................................................................................................................

332

Paper Sizes ............................................................................................................................................................

332

Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper .......................................................................

334

Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper Using Existing Settings ........................................

335

Displaying the Paper Reference Guide ...................................................................................................................

335

Updating paper information ....................................................................................................................................

338

Handling rolls 342

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ...........................................................................................................................

342

Loading Rolls in the Printer .....................................................................................................................................

345

Changing the Type of Paper ...................................................................................................................................

350

Specifying the Paper Length ..................................................................................................................................

352

Removing the Roll from the Printer .........................................................................................................................

352

Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls ......................................................................................................................

356

Feeding Roll Paper Manually ..................................................................................................................................

357

Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left .....................................................................................................

358

Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls ..................................................................................................................

358

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls ..................................................................................................................

360

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically ............................................................................................

366

Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls ...........................................................................................................................

367

Roll Holder Set .......................................................................................................................................................

368

Automatic Roll Switching ........................................................................................................................................

368

Handling sheets 369

Loading Sheets in the Printer .................................................................................................................................

369

Printing From a Desired Starting Point ....................................................................................................................

371

Removing Sheets ...................................................................................................................................................

373

Output Stacker 375

Wheeled Output Stacker ........................................................................................................................................

375

Using the Wheeled Output Stacker ...................................................................................................................

375

Media Configuration Tool (Windows) 378

The Features of Media Configuration Tool ...............................................................................................................

378

Installation Procedures ...........................................................................................................................................

378

Updating Media Information After Installation ..........................................................................................................

380

Media Configuration Tool Main Window ..................................................................................................................

384

Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper .......................................................

385

Adding Media Types .........................................................................................................................................

386

Changing Media Names ...................................................................................................................................

390

Deleting Media Types You Have Added .............................................................................................................

392

Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide .......................................................................................................

394

Changing the Display Order of Media Types ......................................................................................................

396

Applying a Saved Media Information File on Another Computer ........................................................................

398

Checking the update ..............................................................................................................................................

399

Media Configuration Tool (Mac OS) 400

The Features of Media Configuration Tool ...............................................................................................................

400

Procedures for Installing .........................................................................................................................................

400

Updating Media Information After Installation ..........................................................................................................

402

Media Configuration Tool Main Window ..................................................................................................................

406

Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper .......................................................

408

7

8

Adding Media Types .........................................................................................................................................

409

Changing Media Names ...................................................................................................................................

413

Deleting Media Types You Have Added .............................................................................................................

416

Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide .......................................................................................................

417

Changing the Display Order of Media Types ......................................................................................................

419

Applying a Saved Media Information File on Another Computer ........................................................................

421

Checking the update ..............................................................................................................................................

423

Control Panel

425

Operations and Display Screen 426

Control Panel .........................................................................................................................................................

426

Control Panel Display .............................................................................................................................................

428

How to View Instructions With Navigate .................................................................................................................

432

Checking Instructions During Printer Operations ....................................................................................................

434

Printer Menu 435

Printer Menu Operations ........................................................................................................................................

435

Menu Operations ...................................................................................................................................................

436

Menu Structure ......................................................................................................................................................

439

Menu Settings ........................................................................................................................................................

445

Status Print ............................................................................................................................................................

456

Printing Interface Setting Reports ...........................................................................................................................

459

Setting Control panel access lock ..........................................................................................................................

461

Printer Parts

463

Printer parts 464

Front ......................................................................................................................................................................

464

Back ......................................................................................................................................................................

466

Top Cover (Inside) ..................................................................................................................................................

467

Carriage .................................................................................................................................................................

468

Ink Tank Cover (Inside) ...........................................................................................................................................

468

Hard Disk 470

Printer Hard Disk Operations ..................................................................................................................................

470

Checking the Free Hard Disk Space .......................................................................................................................

471

Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk ..................................................................................................................

472

Optional accessories 474

Network Setting

475

Network Environment 476

Network Environment .............................................................................................................................................

476

Using RemoteUI 478

Using RemoteUI .....................................................................................................................................................

478

Initial Settings 480

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer ...............................................................................................................

480

Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel ..............................................................................

480

Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands ..........................................................................

481

Configuring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings .................................................................................................................

482

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows) ..............................................................................................

483

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Mac OS) ................................................................................................

483

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI .........................................................................

484

Mac OS Settings 487

Configuring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks ....................................................................................................

487

Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network ...................................................................................................

487

Other Settings 488

Specifying Printer-Related Information ....................................................................................................................

488

Configuring the Communication Mode Manually .....................................................................................................

489

Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur ...................................................................................

490

Initializing the Network Settings ..............................................................................................................................

490

Device Setup Utility (Windows) 491 imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .....................................................................................................................

491

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .......................................................................................................

491

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .................................................................

491

Print Job Management

495

Status Monitor (Windows) 496

The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ...................................................................................................

496

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ......................................................................................

497

Printmonitor (Mac OS) 499

The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .......................................................................................................

499

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ..........................................................................................

500

Accounting (Windows) 501

Accounting Manager ..............................................................................................................................................

501

Launching the Accounting Manager .......................................................................................................................

501

Accounting Manager Main Window ........................................................................................................................

502

Job List Area ..............................................................................................................................................

504

Accounting Manager Basic Procedures ..................................................................................................................

505

Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager ......................................................................................................

505

Setting the Unit Cost for Ink ..............................................................................................................................

506

Setting the Unit Cost for Paper .........................................................................................................................

507

Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper .................................................................................

508

Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager ..............................................................................

509

Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals ....................................................................................

509

Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition ..........................................................................................................

510

Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs ..........................................................

510

Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File ...................................................................................................................

510

Displaying Job Properties or Period Properties .......................................................................................................

511

Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data ..........................................................................................

512

Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed .........................................................................................

512

Basic Print Job Operations 513

Using the Printer Hard Disk ....................................................................................................................................

513

Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk .............................................................................................................

514

Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) ..............................................................................

517

Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold) ...................................................................................

519

Printing Saved Jobs ...............................................................................................................................................

521

Deleting Saved Jobs ..............................................................................................................................................

525

Moving Saved Jobs ................................................................................................................................................

528

Advanced Print Job Operations 532

Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver .........................................................................

532

Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box .................................................................................................

533

Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes ...................................................................................................................

534

Naming Personal Boxes .........................................................................................................................................

537

Displaying a List of Saved Jobs ..............................................................................................................................

539

Printing a List of Saved Jobs ..................................................................................................................................

542

Displaying Details of Saved Jobs ............................................................................................................................

543

Renaming Saved Jobs ...........................................................................................................................................

545

9

10

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

549

Adjusting the Printhead 550

Adjusting the Printhead ..........................................................................................................................................

550

Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors ......................................................................................

550

Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors ...........................................................................................

552

Adjustment When Installing the Printhead .........................................................................................................

553

Adjusting Line Misalignment ...................................................................................................................................

554

Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images ................................................................................................

556

Adjusting the feed amount

558

Adjusting the Feed Amount ....................................................................................................................................

558

Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method ..................................................................................................

558

Automatic Banding Adjustment ........................................................................................................................

559

Manual Banding Adjustment .............................................................................................................................

560

Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount .................................................................................................................

562

Adjusting Line Length .......................................................................................................................................

562

Adjusting the Vacuum Strength ..............................................................................................................................

564

Maintenance and Consumables

565

Ink Tanks 566

Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................................................................

566

Replacing Ink Tanks ...............................................................................................................................................

566

Checking Ink Tank Levels .......................................................................................................................................

575

When to Replace Ink Tanks ....................................................................................................................................

575

Printheads 577

Printhead ...............................................................................................................................................................

577

Checking for Nozzle Clogging ................................................................................................................................

577

Cleaning the Printhead ...........................................................................................................................................

578

Replacing the Printhead .........................................................................................................................................

579

Maintenance Cartridge 585

Maintenance Cartridge ...........................................................................................................................................

585

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .....................................................................................................................

585

Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity ......................................................................................

589

When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge .........................................................................................................

590

Cleaning the Printer 591

Cleaning the Printer Exterior ...................................................................................................................................

591

Cleaning Inside the Top Cover ................................................................................................................................

591

Other Maintenance 594

Preparing to Transfer the Printer .............................................................................................................................

594

Reinstalling the Printer ............................................................................................................................................

599

Updating the Firmware ...........................................................................................................................................

602

Troubleshooting

603

Frequently Asked Questions 604

Frequently Asked Questions ...................................................................................................................................

604

Problems Regarding Paper 605

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper ..................................................................................................................................

605

Clearing a Jammed Sheet ......................................................................................................................................

608

Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found .................................................................................................

610

Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot ..........................................................................................

612

Cannot load sheets ................................................................................................................................................

612

Paper is not cut neatly ............................................................................................................................................

612

Paper is not cut ......................................................................................................................................................

613

The size of clear film cannot be detected ...............................................................................................................

613

Printing does not start 614

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up ............................................................................................

614

The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent .........................................................................................

614

Ink Filling.. is displayed ...........................................................................................................................................

614

The display screen indicates Agitating ....................................................................................................................

615

The printer stops during a print job 616

An error message is shown on the Display Screen .................................................................................................

616

The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper ...............................................................................................................

616

Problems with the printing quality 617

Printing is faint ........................................................................................................................................................

617

Paper rubs against the Printhead ...........................................................................................................................

618

The edges of the paper are dirty .............................................................................................................................

618

The surface of the paper is dirty .............................................................................................................................

619

The back side of the paper is dirty ..........................................................................................................................

619

Printed colors are inaccurate ..................................................................................................................................

619

Banding in different colors occurs ..........................................................................................................................

620

Colors in printed images are uneven .......................................................................................................................

620

Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs ..................................................................................................

621

Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen ...............................................................................................................

621

The contrast becomes uneven during printing ........................................................................................................

624

The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction ..........................................................................

624

Images are printed crooked ....................................................................................................................................

624

Documents are printed in monochrome .................................................................................................................

624

Line thickness is not uniform ..................................................................................................................................

625

Lines are misaligned ...............................................................................................................................................

625

Cannot print over a network 626

Cannot connect the printer to the network .............................................................................................................

626

Cannot print over a TCP/IP network .......................................................................................................................

626

Cannot print over a Bonjour network ......................................................................................................................

626

Installation problems 627

Removing Installed Printer Drivers ..........................................................................................................................

627

HP-GL/2 problems 628

With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned ......................................................................................................................

628

Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2 jobs. ............................................................................................

628

Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print jobs .........................................................................................

628

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color) ...............................................................................................

628

Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2 printing ................................................................................

629

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specified .............................................................................................

629

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specified ......................................................

629

HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time ........................................................................................................................

629

The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving) ............................................................

629

Other problems 630

The printer does not go on .....................................................................................................................................

630

Cannot operate from the Control Panel ..................................................................................................................

630

The printer takes time to start up ............................................................................................................................

630

If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound .....................................................................................................................

631

Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared .................................................................

631

The printer consumes a lot of ink ...........................................................................................................................

631

Ink Level Detection .................................................................................................................................................

631

Error Message

635

Error Messages 636

Messages regarding paper 638

MediaType Mismatch .............................................................................................................................................

638

11

12

PaprTypeMismatch .................................................................................................................................................

638

The paper is too small. ...........................................................................................................................................

639

The paper is too small. ...........................................................................................................................................

639

PaprWidth Mismatch ..............................................................................................................................................

639

Paper size not detected. ........................................................................................................................................

640

Insufficient paper for job .........................................................................................................................................

640

This paper cannot be used as size is not supported. ..............................................................................................

641

Cannot print as selected. Another roll is in use. ......................................................................................................

641

Roll printing is selected. ..........................................................................................................................................

641

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. ......................................................................................................

641

Roll x is selected. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) .........................................................................................................

641

Roll x is empty. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) ............................................................................................................

642

No Roll Unit. ...........................................................................................................................................................

642

Sheet removed. ......................................................................................................................................................

643

Sheet printing is selected. ......................................................................................................................................

643

Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. .....................................................................................................

643

Paper jam. .............................................................................................................................................................

643

Roll x jam (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) ....................................................................................................................

644

Paper loaded askew. ..............................................................................................................................................

644

Paper cutting failed. ...............................................................................................................................................

644

End of paper feed. .................................................................................................................................................

645

Rel lever is in wrong position. .................................................................................................................................

645

Borderless printng not possible. .............................................................................................................................

645

Paper position not suitable for borderless printing. .................................................................................................

646

Roll feed unit error. .................................................................................................................................................

646

The roll feed unit is loose. .......................................................................................................................................

646

Messages regarding ink 647

Ink insufficient. .......................................................................................................................................................

647

No ink left. ..............................................................................................................................................................

647

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. Check ink tank. ...............................................................

647

Close Ink Tank Cover .............................................................................................................................................

647

Ink tank is empty. ...................................................................................................................................................

647

Not much ink is left. ...............................................................................................................................................

648

No ink tank loaded. ................................................................................................................................................

648

The following ink tanks cannot be recognized. .......................................................................................................

648

Wrong ink tank. ......................................................................................................................................................

648

Messages regarding printing or adjustment 649

Cannot print as specified. .......................................................................................................................................

649

Borderless printng not possible. Paper stretched or shrank. ...................................................................................

649

Before borderless printing, move the blue platen switch. ........................................................................................

649

Blue platen switch is dirty. ......................................................................................................................................

649

Move the blue platen switch No.xx to the right. (xx represents a number) ...............................................................

649

Check printed document. .......................................................................................................................................

649

Messages regarding printheads 650

Cannot adjust printhead. ........................................................................................................................................

650

Wrong printhead. ...................................................................................................................................................

650

Printhead error .......................................................................................................................................................

650

Cannot recognize print head. .................................................................................................................................

650

Execute printhead cleaning. ...................................................................................................................................

651

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge 652

Insert the maintenance cartridge. ...........................................................................................................................

652

Wrong maintenance cartridge. ...............................................................................................................................

652

Maint. cart. The level is low ....................................................................................................................................

652

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. .......................................................................................................................

652

Maintenance cartridge full. .....................................................................................................................................

652

Maintenance cartridge problem. .............................................................................................................................

652

Messages regarding the hard disk 653

Hard disk error. ......................................................................................................................................................

653

File read error. ........................................................................................................................................................

653

The mail box is full. .................................................................................................................................................

653

Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. ......................................................................................................

653

Mail box nearly full. .................................................................................................................................................

653

Maximum jobs stored. ............................................................................................................................................

653

Mail box full. Delete unwanted data ........................................................................................................................

653

Messages regarding HP-GL/2 654

This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2. ...............................................................................................

654

GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) ...............................................................................

654

GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. ..........................................................................................................

654

GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. .......................................................................................................

654

Other Messages 655

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ...................................................................................................................

655

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ...............................................................................................

655

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .............................................................................

655

Top cover is open. ..................................................................................................................................................

655

Prepare for parts replacement. ...............................................................................................................................

656

Parts replacement time has passed. ......................................................................................................................

656

Unknown file. .........................................................................................................................................................

656

Multi-sensor error ...................................................................................................................................................

656

Specifications

657

Printer Specifications 658

Specifications .........................................................................................................................................................

658

Print Area ...............................................................................................................................................................

659

Appendix

661

Safety Precautions 662

Safety Precautions .................................................................................................................................................

662

Legal Notices .........................................................................................................................................................

664

Manuals for this printer 666

Manuals for this printer ...........................................................................................................................................

666

About This User Manual .........................................................................................................................................

666

Disposal of the product 668

WEEE Directive ......................................................................................................................................................

668

13

14

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Printing procedure ...............................................................................

16

Canceling print jobs ............................................................................

24

Pausing Printing ..................................................................................

27

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

495

549

565

603

635

657

661

29

157

267

331

425

463

475

imagePROGRAF

15

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets iPF840

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets ...........................................................................................................

16

Turning the Printer On and Off ..........................................................................................................................

17

Loading and Printing on Rolls ...........................................................................................................................

18

Loading and Printing on Sheets ........................................................................................................................

21

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) ............................................................................

160

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS) ..............................................................................

269

Printing in Windows ..........................................................................................................................................

22

Printing from Mac OS .......................................................................................................................................

22

16

The printer supports both rolls and sheets.

This section introduces the main features of each, as well as the main printing methods available. Select rolls or sheets to suit your particular printing application.

Note

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, see " Types of Paper ."

➔ P.332

• A variety of other ways to print are available besides those introduced here. For details,

see " Enhanced Printing

Options ."

➔ P.29

Roll printing

Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media. Rolls are loaded on the Roll Holder, which are in turn loaded in the printer.

Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.

• Large-format printing

Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Office applications.

(See " Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) .")

➔ P.101

• Borderless printing

Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.

(See " Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size .")

➔ P.92

(See " Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width .")

➔ P.95

(See " Borderless Printing at Actual Size .")

➔ P.87

• Banner printing

You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

(See " Printing Multiple Pages Continuously .")

P.118

• 90-degree rotation before printing

Originals in portrait orientation are rotated 90 degrees when possible to use paper more efficiently.

(See " Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees .")

➔ P.137

• Enlarged/reduced printing

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.

(See " Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size .")

➔ P.72

(See " Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width .")

➔ P.74

(See " Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value .")

➔ P.78

• Free Layout (Windows) and imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Mac OS)

Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so on) next to each other.

(See " Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .")

➔ P.114

User's Guide

iPF840 Turning the Printer On and Off

Note

• Loading two rolls at once (in the Roll 1 (Upper) and Roll 2 (Lower) holders) offers the following advantages.

• Save the time and effort of switching paper

Loading roll paper of different media types or different sizes in the upper and lower rolls saves you the time and effort of replacing roll paper. You can select the desired roll paper in Paper Source in the printer driver.

(See " Page Setup Sheet (Windows) .")

P.177

(See " Page Setup Pane (Mac OS) .")

P.283

• Automatic selection of the right paper for the print job

Selecting Roll Paper (Auto) in Paper Source in the printer driver enables automatic selection and printing on the roll that suits the print job from the loaded rolls.

Additionally, loading two rolls of the same type enables nonstop printing of multiple jobs. After one roll is completely used, the printer switches to the other roll automatically and continues printing.

(See " Using double-roll printing .")

➔ P.31

Sheet printing

Sheets refer to individual sheets of paper.

Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer.

• Enlarged/reduced printing

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.

(See " Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size .")

➔ P.72

(See " Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value .")

➔ P.78

• Free Layout (Windows) and imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Mac OS)

Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so on) next to each other.

(See " Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .")

➔ P.114

Turning the printer on

1

Press the Power button to turn on the printer.

The printer will now start up.

After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, " Starting up Please wait.

" is displayed.

2

The printer goes online in preparation for printing after startup, and the Online lamp and paper source section lamp remain lit.

The printer will not go online in the following situations.

Take action as needed.

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

• The Top Cover is open

Close the Top Cover.

User's Guide

17

Loading and Printing on Rolls iPF840

• The Ink Tank Cover is open

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

• The Printhead is not installed

Please

see " Replacing the Printhead ."

➔ P.579

• Ink Tank is not installed

Please

see " Replacing Ink Tanks ."

➔ P.566

• " ERROR " is shown on the Display Screen

Turn off the printer and contact your Canon dealer.

• The Online lamp and Message lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display

Screen

Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly. Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.

• No paper is loaded

Load paper. (See " Loading and Printing on Rolls .")

➔ P.18

(See " Loading and Printing on

Sheets .")

➔ P.21

Turning the printer off

• Never disconnect the printer's power supply or unplug it during a print job. This may damage the printer.

1

Important

Make sure no print jobs are in progress.

If the Message Lamp is flashing, check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary.

(See " Error Messages .")

➔ P.636

If the Data Lamp is flashing, the printer is receiving a print job. Turn off the printer only after printing is finished.

2

Hold down the Power button for more than a second.

After " Shut Down.. Please Wait..

" is shown on the Display

Screen, the printer shuts off.

18 These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.

Follow these steps to load and print on rolls.

User's Guide

iPF840 Loading and Printing on Rolls

1

Note

• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide

. (See " Paper

Sizes .")

P.332

(See " Types of Paper .")

P.332

• To wait until the ink dries after printing before cutting the roll, set Drying Time in the printer driver.

(See " Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls .")

➔ P.358

• Once you have used all the paper on a roll, clean the platen. If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

P.591

Turn the printer on. (See " Turning the Printer On and

Off .")

➔ P.17

2

Load the roll on the Roll Holder.

(See " Attaching the Roll

Holder to Rolls .")

➔ P.342

3

Load the roll in the printer.

(See " Loading Rolls in the

Printer .")

➔ P.345

19

User's Guide

Loading and Printing on Rolls iPF840

4

Important

• When printing without borders, definitely set the blue Switch on the platen to the ● side. If the switch is

set incorrectly, print quality may deteriorate. (See " Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen .")

➔ P.621

Select the type of paper. (See " Changing the Type of Paper .")

P.350

Note

• If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On , specify the roll length after the type of paper.

(See " Specifying the Paper Length .")

➔ P.352

5

Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)

➔ P.160

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS)

➔ P.269

20

6

Send the print job.

Printing in Windows

P.22

User's Guide

iPF840 Loading and Printing on Sheets

Printing from Mac OS

➔ P.22

The printer now starts printing the print job.

These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing.

Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets.

Note

• For details on supported types and sizes of paper, see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide

. (See " Paper

Sizes .")

P.332

(See " Types of Paper .")

P.332

• Borderless printing is not supported on sheets. For the features and the main printing methods available for sheet

printing, see " Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets ."

➔ P.16

1

Turn the printer on. (See " Turning the Printer On and

Off .")

➔ P.17

2

Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)

➔ P.160

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS)

➔ P.269

3

Send the print job.

Printing in Windows

➔ P.22

Printing from Mac OS

➔ P.22

User's Guide

21

Printing in Windows iPF840

4

Load the sheet.

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

Start printing.

Print from the application menu.

Important

• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.

1

In the source application, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2

After confirming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.

Note

• The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the software application. In most cases, the dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application

22

• If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog box displayed after clicking Printer .

Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are displayed in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows.

• From the application

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

• From the operating system menu

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu .")

➔ P.165

Print from the application menu after registering the printer.

Important

• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing from Mac OS

Registering the printer

The printer needs to be registered in Print & Scan (identified as Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS X) in System Preferences before printing.

For instructions on registering the printer,

see " Configuring the Printer Driver Destination ."

➔ P.483

• During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnected.

Important

Printing from the application software

1

In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

Note

2

Select the printer in the Printer list.

3

Click Print to start printing.

As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.

User's Guide

23

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel iPF840

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel ....................................................................................................

24

Canceling Print Jobs from Windows .................................................................................................................

25

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS ...................................................................................................................

25

To cancel printing or reception of print jobs, press the Stop button on the Control Panel.

24

When you press the Stop button during printing, printer operation varies depending on the current status.

• If you press the Stop button before printing starts

Pressing the Stop button before printing starts will display a confirmation message. To cancel the print job, select Yes .

Rose Wine

Rose Wine

The Printer does not print.

• If you press the Stop button during printing

Pressing the Stop button during printing will display a confirmation message. To cancel the print job immediately, select Yes .

Printing

Rose Wine

Rose Wine

The printer stops immediately.

User's Guide

iPF840 Canceling Print Jobs from Windows

In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer.

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , you can cancel print jobs that have already been received by the printer or that are currently being printed.

1

Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.

Note

• You can proceed from the folder for configuring the printer settings in the OS you are using.

For example, in Windows 7, open the Devices and Printers window from the start menu and doubleclick the printer icon.

2

Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel .

3

If the job to cancel is not shown in the printer window (that is, if the print data has already been received by the printer), double-click the taskbar icon to display imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .

4

On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job .

Note

• The screen may differ slightly depending on the model you are using.

In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer.

Otherwise, you can cancel jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor if they have been received by the printer or are currently being printed.

Note

• Print jobs are shown in the printer window while they are being sent from the computer. After transmission, jobs are not displayed even during printing.

• Print jobs are displayed in the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window from the moment the printer starts receiving the print data until the moment printing is finished. They are not displayed before print data is sent to the printer, even if the computer has started preparing the print data.

1

Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.

25

User's Guide

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS iPF840

2

Either click × for the job to cancel printing or select the job to cancel printing and then click Delete to delete the job.

3

If there are no jobs to stop in the printer window (if sending the print data to the printer has finished), either click Settings , Utility , and then Open Printer

Utility , or click Utility to open the imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor.

4

Select the print job to cancel and click the print job.

to delete

26

Note

• The screen may differ slightly depending on the model you are using.

The job sent to the printer is canceled.

5

Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. In the printer window, click Resume or Resume Printer .

Important

• Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. If you do not restart job processing, the next job cannot be printed.

User's Guide

iPF840 Pausing Printing

During printing, if you set Pause Print in the Control Panel menu to On , printing is stopped at that point and the printer enters a state in which printing is paused.

(See " Control Panel Display .")

P.428

Printing from the job queue is not possible in this state.

To restore normal operation after this state, set Pause Print to Off .

Note

• In the following cases, the status is cleared even if you do not set Pause Print to Off , and printing from the job queue resumes.

• When paper is advanced

• When you execute Chg. Paper Type in the Paper Menu

1

During printing, on the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Job Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Pause Print , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On or Off , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

27

iPF840

28

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow 15

Enhanced Printing Options

Choosing Paper for Printing ................................................................

30

Using double-roll printing ....................................................................

31

Printing Photos and Office Documents ...............................................

43

Printing CAD Drawings .......................................................................

52

Adjusting Images ................................................................................

60

Printing enlargements or reductions ...................................................

72

Printing at full size ...............................................................................

83

Borderless Printing ..............................................................................

92

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes ...............................

101

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet ..................................................

114

Centering originals ............................................................................

128

Conserving roll paper ........................................................................

137

Checking Images Before Printing ......................................................

145

Other useful settings .........................................................................

146

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

495

549

565

603

635

657

661

157

267

331

425

463

475

29 imagePROGRAF

Choosing a Paper for Printing iPF840

Choosing a Paper for Printing ...........................................................................................................................

30

Changing the Type of Paper ................................................................................................................

350

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ................................................................................................................

30

➔ Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) .................................................................................

160

➔ Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS) ...................................................................................

269

Select the appropriate media type from the printer control panel or printer driver to match the paper loaded in the printer. The appropriate media type differs between the case of genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper and the case of paper other than Canon feed confirmed paper. Select the media type by following the description below.

For information on how to select the media type in the printer control panel, see Changing the Type of Paper

P.350

, and for information on how to select the media type in the printer driver, see

Printer Driver (Windows)

P.160

or

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS)

Specifying Paper in the

P.269

.

Important

• If you use paper other than Canon feed confirmed paper, Canon provides absolutely no guarantees regarding print quality or paper feed properties.

Note

• Genuine Canon paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are detailed in Paper Reference Guide .

• An error message is displayed on the printer Control Panel if the media type specified in the printer driver does not match the media type specified in the printer. Although you can print under these conditions, the printing results may not be suitable.

• Genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper

For genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper, select the settings that are optimized for that type of paper. For more information on the settings for genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper,

see

" Displaying the Paper Reference Guide ."

➔ P.335

• Paper other than Canon feed confirmed paper

For paper other than Canon feed confirmed paper, printing can be performed easily by selecting the existing

settings provided by the printer control panel or printer driver. For details, see " Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper ."

➔ P.334

If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.

For instructions on configuring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)

➔ P.160

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS)

➔ P.269

30

User's Guide

iPF840 About Double-roll Switching

About Double-roll Switching .............................................................................................................................

31

Loading Roll Paper in the Printer Depending on the Purpose ............................................................................

31

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper ......................................................

32

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Windows) ................................

32

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Mac OS) ..................................

37

Roll Paper Switching Method ...........................................................................................................................

39

With this printer, you can load roll paper in both the upper (roll paper 1) and lower (roll paper 2) rolls, and print by automatically switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 depending on the print job.

This printing by automatically switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 is called "double-roll switching".

• For an example of loading roll paper,

see " Loading Roll Paper in the Printer Depending on the Purpose ."

➔ P.31

• For details on the procedure for double-roll switching,

see " Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper ."

➔ P.32

• Details on how switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 is performed depending on the case are summarized in

" Roll Paper Switching Method "

➔ P.39

. Refer to this as necessary such as when the printing is not as you expected.

When performing double-roll switching, load the roll paper in the upper and lower printer rolls in one of the following ways depending on the purpose.

• When continuously printing large quantities of the same document, etc.

Load roll paper of the same width and same type in the upper and lower rolls.

Printing is performed by automatically switching to the other roll paper once the roll paper is out of paper.

Example of paper to load

Paper source

Upper

Roll Paper Width Media Type

A1/A2 Roll (594.0 mm) Plain Paper

Lower A1/A2 Roll (594.0 mm) Plain Paper

• When automatically switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 depending on the paper size specified in the print job

Load roll paper of different widths but the same type in the upper and lower rolls.

Example of paper to load

Paper source

Upper

Roll Paper Width Media Type

36-in. Roll (914.4 mm) Plain Paper

Lower A1/A2 Roll (594.0 mm) Plain Paper

• When automatically switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 depending on the type of media specified in the print job

Load roll paper of the same width but different types in the upper and lower rolls.

Alternately, load roll paper of different widths and different types in the upper and lower rolls.

Example of paper to load 1

Paper source

Upper

Roll Paper Width Media Type

A1/A2 Roll (594.0 mm) Plain Paper

Lower A1/A2 Roll (594.0 mm) Canon Coated Paper

31

User's Guide

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper iPF840

Example of paper to load 2

Paper source

Upper

Roll Paper Width Media Type

36-in. Roll (914.4 mm) Plain Paper

Lower A1/A2 Roll (594.0 mm) Canon Coated Paper

Important

• Double-roll switching cannot function if roll paper of a media type that cannot be automatically cut is fed to the platen.

For information on support for automatic cutting, refer to Paper Reference Guide

.

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

Note

For details on how to load roll paper in the printer, see " Handling rolls ."

P.342

• If roll paper of different widths and different types are loaded in the upper and lower rolls, printing is performed on the roll paper that matches the media types specified in the print job.

Since errors may occur or printing may be performed on the unintended roll depending on the settings, it is recommended in this case that you print by specifying the better suited roll paper 1 or roll paper 2 without using double-roll switching.

• For more information on how the paper sources are switched,

see " Roll Paper Switching Method ."

➔ P.39

Prints by automatically switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 depending on the type of media and size specified in the print job.

For details, refer to the following topics depending on the operating system you are using.

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Windows)

➔ P.32

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Mac OS)

P.37

32

This section describes how to print by automatically switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 depending on the print job.

Normally, refer to

Basic Printing Method

P.33

.

If you want to print by reducing as much margin of roll paper as possible, refer to

Method of Conserving More Paper

P.34

. In this case, you need to load roll paper of the same media type in the upper and lower rolls.

Important

• If you set Set./Adj. Menu > System Setup > Roll Switching to No RollSwitching in the control panel, printing may be performed on the unintended roll paper. It is recommended that you set this setting to Use Optimal Size in advance.

• Double-roll switching cannot function if roll paper of a media type that cannot be automatically cut is fed to the platen.

For information on support for automatic cutting, refer to Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper

Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Windows)

Basic Printing Method

Perform using the following procedure.

1

Load roll paper in the upper and lower printer rolls.

Note

• Load roll paper of width and media type that suits your purpose in the printer by referring to

Loading Roll

Paper in the Printer Depending on the Purpose

➔ P.31

.

For details on how to load roll paper in the printer, see " Handling rolls ."

➔ P.342

2

Choose Print in the application menu.

3

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

4

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5

Click the type of media to use for printing from the A Media Type list.

• Always specify the media type of the roll paper that is loaded in the printer.

Note

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7

In the A Page Size list, select and click the size of the original as specified in the application.

8

Select and click Roll Paper (Auto) from the L Paper Source list.

User's Guide

33

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Windows) iPF840

9

To use the function for automatically rotating portrait documents by 90 degrees, select the K Rotate Page

90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box. Furthermore, select and click the width of the roll paper loaded in the printer from the M Roll Paper Width list.

Note

• When Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) is selected, pages that were created in the portrait orientation are printed in the landscape orientation by rotating 90 degrees, which may save paper depending on the paper size.

Important

• When the Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) is selected, printing by rotating the document by

90 degrees is performed only when the width specified in Roll Paper Width accommodates the vertical length of the document.

Therefore, when using this function, you should set

Roll Paper Width correctly to the width of either of the rolls loaded in the printer.

• If the media types of the roll paper loaded in the upper and lower rolls are different, printing is performed on the roll paper that matches the media type specified in the print job.

If both the width and media type of the roll paper loaded in the upper and lower rolls are different when using the function for rotating the document by 90 degrees, you should correctly set the combination of roll paper width and media type for any one of the rolls loaded in the printer.

10

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

For more information on how the paper sources are switched depending on the print job, see " Roll Paper

Switching Method ."

➔ P.39

Method of Conserving More Paper

Determine the roll paper that better reduces the margins depending on the paper size specified in the print job.

Perform printing using the conditions that most reduce the paper margins among the combinations of roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 for the cases of rotating or not rotating pages by 90 degrees.

34

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Windows)

Important

• This function can be used with the Windows driver.

• With this method, the upper and lower rolls are switched depending on the paper size specified in the print job.

Therefore, you must use the same media type for the roll paper in the upper and lower rolls of the printer.

If you load different media types, an error may occur or the printing might not be as intended.

• If the margin from roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 is the same, printing is performed on roll paper 1.

Note

1

Load roll paper of the same media type in the upper and lower printer rolls.

For details on how to load roll paper in the printer, see " Handling rolls ."

➔ P.342

Note

2

Click start > Devices and Printers .

3

Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Printer

Properties to open the printer properties window.

4

Click the Device Settings tab to display the Device

Settings sheet.

5

Select the A Automatically switch paper sources (paper size priority) check box.

6

Click C Acquire Status .

The paper size information is acquired from the printer, and the width of the roll paper that is actually loaded in the printer is displayed.

Important

• When replacing the roll paper loaded in the printer, always click the Acquire Status button to get the roll paper width information. If the roll paper width is not set correctly, printing might not be as intended.

35

User's Guide

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Windows) iPF840

7

Click OK to close the dialog box.

8

Choose Print in the application menu.

9

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

10

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

11

In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

• Always specify the media type of the roll paper that is loaded in the printer.

Note

12

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

36

13

In the A Page Size list, select and click the size of the original as specified in the application.

14

Click to select Roll Paper (Auto) from the L Paper Source list.

15

Select the K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box as necessary.

16

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

P.161

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Mac OS)

Important

• If the same width and same media type of roll paper is loaded in the upper and lower rolls and Automatically switch paper sources (paper size priority) is enabled, printing is always performed on roll paper 1 (upper roll paper). If you want to load roll paper of the same width and media type in the upper and lower rolls and automatically switch between them, clear the Automatically switch paper sources (paper size priority) check box.

• If Fit Roll Paper Width is selected in Enlarged/Reduced Printing and Roll Paper (Auto) is selected in

Paper Source on the Page Setup sheet while you are performing enlarged/reduced printing with Automatically switch paper sources (paper size priority) enabled, printing is always performed from roll paper 1 (the upper roll paper).

• If you are performing borderless printing with Automatically switch paper sources (paper size priority) enabled, only Scale to fit Roll Paper Width can be selected in Borderless Printing Method on the

Page Setup sheet. In this case, printing is always performed from roll paper 1 (the upper roll paper). If a paper size or media type that does not support borderless printing is loaded in roll paper 1, you cannot perform borderless printing.

This section describes how to print by automatically switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 depending on the print job.

Important

• If you set Set./Adj. Menu > System Setup > Roll Switching to No RollSwitching in the control panel, printing may be performed on the unintended roll paper. It is recommended that you set this setting to Use Optimal Size in advance.

• Double-roll switching cannot function if roll paper of a media type that cannot be automatically cut is fed to the platen.

For information on support for automatic cutting, refer to Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper

Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

1

Load roll paper in the upper and lower printer rolls.

Note

• Load roll paper of width and media type that suits your purpose in the printer by referring to

Loading Roll

Paper in the Printer Depending on the Purpose

P.31

.

For details on how to load roll paper in the printer, see " Handling rolls ."

➔ P.342

2

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

User's Guide

37

Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper (Mac OS) iPF840

3

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

4

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application.

5

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

6

Choose Print in the application menu.

7

Access the Main pane.

8

Select the type of media to use for printing from the A Media Type list.

• Always specify the media type of the roll paper that is loaded in the printer.

Note

9

Access the Page Setup pane.

38

10

Click to select Roll Paper (Auto) from the A Paper Source list.

User's Guide

iPF840 Roll Paper Switching Method

11

To use the function for automatically rotating portrait documents by 90 degrees, select the L Rotate Page

90 degrees check box. Furthermore, select and click the width of the roll paper loaded in the printer from the B Roll Width list.

Note

• When Rotate Page 90 degrees is selected, pages that were created in the portrait orientation are printed in the landscape orientation by rotating 90 degrees, which may save paper depending on the paper size.

Important

• When the Rotate Page 90 degrees is selected, printing by rotating the document by 90 degrees is performed only when the width specified in Roll Width accommodates the vertical length of the document.

Therefore, when using this function, you should set

Roll Width correctly to the width of either of the rolls loaded in the printer.

• If the media types of the roll paper loaded in the upper and lower rolls are different, printing is performed on the roll paper that matches the media type specified in the print job.

If both the width and media type of the roll paper loaded in the upper and lower rolls are different when using the function for rotating the document by 90 degrees, you should correctly set the combination of roll paper width and media type for any one of the rolls loaded in the printer.

12

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

P.270

For more information on how the paper sources are switched depending on the print job, see " Roll Paper

Switching Method ."

➔ P.39

This section describes how the printer switches between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 depending on the case. Refer to this as necessary such as when the printing is not as you expected.

When Roll Paper (Auto) is selected from the Paper Source list in the printer driver, the more suitable roll paper loaded in the upper or lower roll of the printer is automatically selected depending on the print job.

Whether to use roll paper 1 or roll paper 2 is determined in order from "Condition 1" to "Condition 7" in the following table.

At this time, the result of the determination changes depending on the Set./Adj. Menu > System Setup > Warning > Detect Mismatch setting in the printer control panel is set to which one of the following.

The If the Detect Mismatch setting is set to Pause or Hold Job

➔ P.39

The If the Detect Mismatch setting is set to Warning or None

➔ P.41

Note

• If an error or a hold occurs, change the paper to match the print job.

• The following setting in the printer control panel is recommended in order to reduce paper waste.

• Set./Adj. Menu > System Setup > Roll Switching is set to Use Optimal Size

• Paper Menu > Paper Details >(Each media type)> Width Detection is set to On

• If the Automatically switch paper sources (paper size priority) check box is selected in the Device Settings sheet in the Windows driver, the following table should not be followed.

If the Detect Mismatch setting is set to Pause or Hold Job

Condition

Condition 1 Is the roll paper loaded in the printer long enough to print the paper size specified in the print job?

Status

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper 2 is long enough

Judgment result

The roll paper with enough length is selected

39

User's Guide

40

Roll Paper Switching Method iPF840

Condition

Condition 1 Is the roll paper loaded in the printer long enough to print the paper size specified in the print job?

Condition 2 Does the roll paper loaded in the printer match the media type specified in the print job?

Condition 3 What is the menu?

Roll Switching

Condition 4 Borderless printing is specified in the print job (if not specified, go to Condition 5)

Condition 5 Does the roll paper width specified in the print job match the width of roll paper loaded in the printer?

(Only for borderless printing or enlarged/reduced printing)

Condition 6 Does the width of roll paper loaded in the printer accommodate the width of the paper size specified in the print job?

setting in the printer

Condition 7 Are the widths of roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 different?

Status

Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 is long enough

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 are long enough

ManageRemainRoll is set to Off in the printer menu (the roll paper length cannot be identified)

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper 2 matches

Judgment result

Error

Go to Condition 2

The roll paper with the matched media type is selected

Error or hold Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 matches

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 match

Set to No RollSwitching

Go to Condition 3

The roll paper currently fed to the platen is selected (

*1 )

Go to Condition 4

The roll paper that can be used for borderless printing is selected

Error

Set to Use Optimal Size

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper 2 is paper that can be used for borderless printing

Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 is paper that can be used for borderless printing

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 are paper that can be used for borderless printing

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper 2 is roll paper of the width specified in the print job

Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 is roll paper of the width specified in the print job

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 are roll paper of the width specified in the print job

The roll paper width is not specified in the print job

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper 2 accommodates the paper size width specified in the print job

Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 accommodates the paper size width specified in the print job

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 accommodate the paper size width specified in the print job

The roll paper widths are different

Go to Condition 5

The roll paper with the matched roll paper width is selected

Error or hold

Go to Condition 6

The roll paper that accommodates the paper size width is selected

Error

Go to Condition 7

The roll paper with the smaller difference between the paper size width and the width specified in the print job is selected

User's Guide

iPF840 Roll Paper Switching Method

Condition

Condition 7 Are the widths of roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 different?

Status

The roll paper width is the same

Judgment result

The roll paper currently fed to the platen is selected (

*1 )

*1: In the following case, neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 is fed to the platen. In this case, roll paper 1 is selected.

• When the printer enters sleep mode and then resumes

• When the printer is turned on

• When cut sheet is supplied and ejected

If the Detect Mismatch setting is set to Warning or None

Condition

Condition 1 Is the roll paper loaded in the printer long enough to print the paper size specified in the print job?

Condition 2 Does the roll paper loaded in the printer match the media type specified in the print job?

Condition 3 What is the Roll Switching setting in the printer menu?

Condition 4 Borderless printing is specified in the print job (if not specified, go to Condition 5)

Condition 5 Does the roll paper width specified in the print job match the width of roll paper loaded in the printer?

(Only for borderless printing or enlarged/reduced printing)

Condition 6 Does the width of roll paper loaded in the printer accommodate the width of the paper size specified in the print job?

Status

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper

2 is long enough

Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 is long enough

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 are long enough

ManageRemainRoll is set to Off in the printer menu (the roll paper length cannot be identified)

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper

2 matches

Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 matches

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 match

Set to No RollSwitching

Set to Use Optimal Size

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper

2 is paper that can be used for borderless printing

Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 is paper that can be used for borderless printing

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 are paper that can be used for borderless printing

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper

2 is roll paper of the width specified in the print job

Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 is roll paper of the width specified in the print job

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 are roll paper of the width specified in the print job

The roll paper width is not specified in the print job

Only either roll paper 1 or roll paper

2 accommodates the paper size width specified in the print job

Judgment result

The roll paper with enough length is selected

Error

Go to Condition 2

The roll paper with the matched media type is selected

Go to Condition 3

The roll paper currently fed to the platen is se-

lected ( *1

)

Go to Condition 4

The roll paper that can be used for borderless printing is selected

Error

Go to Condition 5

The roll paper with the matched roll paper width is selected

Go to Condition 6

The roll paper that accommodates the paper size width is selected

41

User's Guide

Roll Paper Switching Method iPF840

Condition

Condition 6 Does the width of roll paper loaded in the printer accommodate the width of the paper size specified in the print job?

Status

Neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 accommodates the paper size width specified in the print job

Both roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 accommodate the paper size width specified in the print job

The roll paper widths are different

Judgment result

Go to Condition 7

Condition 7 Are the widths of roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 different?

The roll paper width is the same

The roll paper with the smaller difference between the paper size width and the width specified in the print job is selected

The roll paper currently fed to the platen is se-

lected ( *1

)

*1: In the following case, neither roll paper 1 nor roll paper 2 is fed to the platen. In this case, roll paper 1 is selected.

• When the printer enters sleep mode and then resumes

• When the printer is turned on

• When cut sheet is supplied and ejected

42

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Photos and Images

Printing Photos and Images .............................................................................................................................

43

Printing Photos and Images (Windows) .......................................................................................................

43

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS) .........................................................................................................

45

Printing Office Documents ................................................................................................................................

47

Printing Office Documents (Windows) ..........................................................................................................

47

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS) ...........................................................................................................

48

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ..........................................................................................................

50

By selecting the following Print Target from Easy Settings of the printer driver, you can easily configure the printing of illustrations and photos.

Print Target

Photo (Color)

Description

Print photographic images from digital cameras with an optimal setting.

Poster An optimal setting for posters. Print in vivid colors with impact and high saturation.

Faithful Color Reproduction Print with minimum color difference. Suitable for printing scanner images and when print results are too vivid.

Important

• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.

Note

• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings .

• You can also fine-tune these values as needed. ( Advanced Settings )

For details on Advanced Settings ,

see " Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ."

➔ P.66

For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing Photos and Images (Windows)

➔ P.43

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS)

➔ P.45

This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.

• Document: Photo image from a digital camera

• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Canon Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm

• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

User's Guide

43

Printing Photos and Images (Windows) iPF840

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Glossy Photo

Paper 170gsm .

In the A Media Type , choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper , Canon Coated

Paper , and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change pa-

per information by using the Media Configuration Tool. For details, see " Media Configuration Tool (Windows) ."

➔ P.378

5

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the E Print Target list.

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Settings .

Note

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

44

7

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click

10"x12" .

8

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

9

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, 10-in. Roll (254.0mm) .

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS)

10

Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions,

see " Printer Driver Settings ."

P.158

11

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

• For instructions on confirming print settings,

see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.

• Document: Photo image from a digital camera

• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Canon Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm

• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12" .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

45

User's Guide

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS) iPF840

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Glossy Photo

Paper 170gsm .

Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

• The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) are updated when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you

change paper information by using the Media Configuration Tool. For details, see " Media Configuration

Tool (Mac OS) ."

➔ P.400

8

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the E Print Target list.

Note

For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see " Printing Photos and Images ."

➔ P.43

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View set.

.

9

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

46

11

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Office Documents

12

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, 10 in. (254.0mm) is selected.

13

Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions,

see " Printer Driver Settings ."

➔ P.268

14

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

By selecting Office Document from Easy Settings of the printer driver, you can easily configure settings for printing office documents.

Print Target

Office Document

Description

Setting optimized for printing general office documents such as materials for distribution so that they can be viewed easily.

Note

• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings .

• You can also fine-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)

For details on Advanced Settings,

see " Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ."

P.66

This topic describes how to print office documents based on the following example.

• Document: Office document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Sheets

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

User's Guide

47

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS) iPF840

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Office Document in the E Print Target list.

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Settings .

Note

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

48

7

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 .

8

Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.

9

Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions,

see " Printer Driver Settings ."

P.158

10

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to print office documents based on the following example.

• Document: Office document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Sheets

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Office Documents (Mac OS)

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Cut Sheet .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Office Document in the E Print Target list.

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View set.

.

Note

User's Guide

49

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals iPF840

9

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

11

Click Cut Sheet in the A Paper Source list.

12

Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions,

see " Printer Driver Settings ."

➔ P.268

13

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots from web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.

This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster layout for printing.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the Printer

Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

50

User's Guide

iPF840 Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

4

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

5

Select the A Page Layout check box.

6

Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the A Page Layout list.

• This function cannot be used with a 64-bit version OS.

Note

7

When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

8

Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.

9

Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.

Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

• For details on how to edit and sort images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.

Note

10

Print from the PosterArtist menu.

51

User's Guide

Printing CAD Drawings iPF840

Printing CAD Drawings .....................................................................................................................................

52

Printing Line Drawings and Text ........................................................................................................................

52

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) .................................................................................................

53

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS) ...................................................................................................

54

Printing from AutoCAD .....................................................................................................................................

56

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings ..................................................................................................

57

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) ............................................................................

58

HP-GL/2 Printing ..............................................................................................................................................

59

Using this printer, you can print fine lines and text clearly and sharply. It's easy to produce highly precise drawings from CAD applications.

For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)

P.53

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS)

P.54

Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.

• Easy Settings

Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.

• Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Print targets for line drawings and text

Print Target

CAD (Color Line Drawing)

Description

Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD drawings clearly.

CAD (Monochrome Line

Drawing )

Settings optimized to print black lines in CAD drawings clearly.

Perspective, GIS Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS maps.

52

Note

• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings .

• You can also fine-tune these values as needed. ( Advanced Settings )

For details on Advanced Settings ,

see " Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ."

➔ P.66

• Print Quality

Choose the print quality.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)

The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

Highest

Print Quality Description

A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.

High

Standard

Fast

Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.

Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in Standard or Fast modes, but this mode offers exceptional printing quality.

Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are both important.

Printing takes less time than in Highest or High mode.

Choose this setting to print faster.

Printing in draft mode can help you work more efficiently when checking layouts.

For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)

➔ P.53

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS)

P.54

This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.

• Document: CAD drawing

• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) or CAD (Monochrome

Line Drawing ) in the E Print Target list.

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Settings .

Note

53

User's Guide

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS) iPF840

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7

In A Page Size , click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A3 .

8

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

9

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm) .

10

Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions,

see " Printer Driver Settings ."

P.158

11

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.

• Document: CAD drawing

• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

54

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS)

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3 .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) or CAD (Monochrome

Line Drawing ) in the E Print Target list.

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View set.

.

Note

9

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

55

User's Guide

Printing from AutoCAD iPF840

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

11

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

12

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is selected.

13

Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions,

see " Printer Driver Settings ."

➔ P.268

14

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

• You can conserve roll paper by configuring settings suitable for the document.

For details on how to conserve paper and print, see " Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees ."

➔ P.138

56

Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is software for printing optimally from AutoCAD with the printer driver.

By optimally controlling the processing resolution of raster data and the memory to be used in image processing of

AutoCAD, printing superior in reliability and productivity is realized.

If you install Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD on a computer on which supported AutoCAD is installed, it will be installed automatically.

Note

• Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is applied automatically when you print from AutoCAD, and optimal printing is performed.

• Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD can be used on Windows.

Confirming the Installation of Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD

You can confirm whether Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is installed by the following method.

1

From the File menu of AutoCAD, select Print .

User's Guide

iPF840 Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings

2

The Printing dialog box is displayed.

Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is installed if in Plotter of Printer/plotter this is displayed: iPFxxxx - Optimized driver - by Canon Inc.

.

Installation of Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD

If Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is not installed, install it by the following method.

1

Insert User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and start the installer.

2

In the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software .

3

Click Install of Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD.

4

Follow the instructions on the screen.

You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode .

Colors can be adjusted before printing as follows when Color Compatibility is selected.

Note

• Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print Priority to Line

Drawing/Text .

Color Compatibility

Color Setting Item

Color Setting

Color (CAD) 1

Color (CAD) 2

Color (CAD) 3

Color (CAD) 4

Color (CAD) 5

Color (CAD) 6

Description

Print in standard colors.

Print with approximate colors emulating Canon iPF750, iPF755, iPF650, iPF655, iPF760, iPF765.

Print with approximate colors emulating Canon iPF500, iPF600, iPF700, iPF510, iPF610, iPF710, iPF605, iPF720, iPF810, iPF820, iPF815, iPF825.

Print emulating the HP Designjet 4000/4500, in colors resembling colors produced by these printers.

Print emulating the HP Designjet T1100, in colors resembling colors produced by this printer.

Print emulating the Oce ColorWave 300, in colors resembling colors produced by this printer.

User's Guide

57

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) iPF840

Important

• If you have selected Color (CAD) 2 , Color (CAD) 3 , Color (CAD) 4 , Color (CAD) 5 , or Color (CAD) 6 , it is not possible to match the colors and image quality produced by the specified printer exactly.

For instructions on configuring Color Compatibility , refer to the following topics.

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows)

➔ P.58

You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode .

Note

• Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print Priority to Line

Drawing/Text .

• This section describes the procedure in Windows 7.

1

Click start > Devices and Printers .

2

Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Printer

Properties to open the printer properties window.

3

Click the Device Settings tab to display the Device

Settings sheet.

58

4

Click B Color Compatibility patibility dialog box.

to display the Color Com-

User's Guide

iPF840 HP-GL/2 Printing

5

Select the desired color settings in the A Color Compatibility list.

For details on color settings, see " Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings ."

➔ P.57

Note

For printing instructions, refer to the following topic.

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions

➔ P.68

This printer supports printing using the original Canon GARO printer control language and printing using HP-GL/2 and HP RTL emulation to print in colors resembling the colors produced by printers from other companies.

The printer automatically switches to the corresponding processing depending on whether a GARO or HP-GL/2 and HP RTL emulation job is received.

Note

• GARO is an abbreviation of Graphic Arts Language with Raster Operations.

• HP-GL/2 is an abbreviation of Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language/2, and HP RTL is an abbreviation of Hewlett-

Packard Raster Transfer Language.

• Emulation is good for obtaining results similar to printing on other printers.

When printing from applications that support HP-GL/2 output, specify HP-GL/2 in the application's plotter output settings.

HP-GL/2 and HP RTL emulation related settings such as the printer to emulate are configured from the printer Con-

trol Panel. (Refer to " Menu Structure

➔ P.439

" and " Menu Settings

➔ P.445

")

Note

• For instructions on configuring these settings, refer to the software documentation.

It may not be possible to print jobs with excessively large amounts of data correctly.

For information on CAD colors other than HP-GL/2 and HP RTL emulation, see " Menu Settings ."

P.445

User's Guide

59

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver iPF840

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ............................................................................................................

60

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) ..................................................................................

61

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS) ....................................................................................

64

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ...............................................................

66

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) ...............................................................

68

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS) .................................................................

70

60

Color settings specified in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings for each print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.

• Color Mode

Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.

The available options vary depending on the color mode.

Color Mode Description

Color Print in color.

Monochrome

Color (CAD)

Color Adjustment

You can select the color balance and color matching functions.

You can adjust the color balance.

You can adjust the color balance.

Monochrome (BK ink)

Monochrome Bitmap

No color correction (*1)

Print in grayscale.

A color mode optimized for line drawings

(2D-CAD). Lines in red, yellow, and other colors are printed especially clearly.

A color mode for printing line drawings.

Only Black ink is used.

Print in a color mode for CAD, using Color Ink, with all non-white portions printed in black.

Prints without performing color-matching in the printer driver.

You can adjust the color balance.

No color adjustment is supported.

You can adjust the color balance.

*1: If No color correction is selected, the Matching sheet / Matching pane is not displayed.

• Color Adjustment

You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.

Cyan

Adjustment Item Description

Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan , Magenta , and Yellow .

Magenta

Yellow

Gray Tone

Brightness

Contrast

Saturation

Adjust the grayscale, in a range from cool, blue tones to warm, red tones.

Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.

For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

Note

• Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the color adjustment target from Image , Graphics , and Text .

• Matching

You can choose the color-matching mode and method.

By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of on-screen images more closely.

User's Guide

iPF840 Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)

• If No color correction is selected under Color Mode , the Matching cannot be changed.

Important

Matching Mode

Driver Matching Mode

ICC Matching Mode

Host ICM Mode

ColorSync

Description

Enables printing of optimal color tones using a driver specific color profile.

Enables color matching using ICC profiles.

Select this if you want to print by specifying the input profile, printer profile, and matching method in detail.

Enables color matching by the host computer using the ICM function of Windows.

Select this if you want to print from an application that supports the ICM function.

Enables color matching by using the

ColorSync function of Mac OS.

Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing.

Remarks

You should normally select this mode.

This allows you to use ICC profiles for digital cameras and scanners, ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool, etc.

Available when using Windows.

Available when using Mac OS.

To select ColorSync , choose ColorSync on the Color Matching panel.

Auto

Perceptual

Saturation

Matching Method

Colorimetric

Colorimetric (No Wht-pnt Corr)

Description

Color-matching optimized for images, graphics, or text.

Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a feature. This is also an easyto-use mode when performing color adjustment using application software.

Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space. This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print. However, gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer.

Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.

The processing method of color-matching is identical to Colorimetric. Use this when you want to further reproduce the target paper material color of the image data. Generally, this also is called absolute colorimetric

Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.

Remarks

The available options and their display order vary depending on your selected color-matching mode, as well as the operating system.

For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)

➔ P.61

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS)

➔ P.64

61

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to finetune the color tone of photos before printing.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

User's Guide

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) iPF840

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

5

Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

6

Click Color in the G Color Mode list.

7

Click H log box.

Color Settings to display the Color Settings dia-

62

User's Guide

iPF840 Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)

8

On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.

Adjustment Item Description

D Cyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.

E Magenta

F Yellow

G Gray Tone

H Brightness

I Contrast

J Saturation

Adjust the gray tone. Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on.

Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.

For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

Note

• Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the color adjustment target from Image , Graphics , and Text .

9

Close the Color Settings dialog box.

10

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

11

Confirm the settings of A Page Size , L Paper Source , and so on.

12

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

User's Guide

63

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS) iPF840

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to finetune the color tone of photos before printing.

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

64

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

User's Guide

iPF840 Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS)

8

Click mode.

D Advanced Settings to switch the print

9

Click Color in the H Color Mode list.

10

Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.

11

On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.

D Cyan

Adjustment Item Description

Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.

E Magenta

F Yellow

G Gray Tone

H Brightness

I Contrast

J Saturation

Adjust the gray tone. Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on.

Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.

For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

Note

• Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the color adjustment target from Images , Graphics , and Text .

65

User's Guide

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing iPF840

12

Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.

13

Access the Page Setup pane.

14

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

66

You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.

• Advanced Settings

For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and colors to prioritize for printing.

Note

• Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose the printing application.

For details on Easy Settings , refer to the following topics.

Printing Photos and Images

P.43

Printing Line Drawings and Text

➔ P.52

Printing Office Documents

➔ P.47

• Print Priority

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

Print Priority (*1)

Image

Description

A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or for emphasizing photos or images in printed documents.

Line Drawing/Text

Office Document

Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for emphasizing detailed text in printed documents.

However, the quality may not be sufficient when printing photos or images that require a lot of color coverage. In this case, choose Image instead.

Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics, such as documents and presentation material created with typical office applications.

*1: Options suitable for the selected type of paper are listed under Print Priority.

• Print Quality

Choose the print quality.

User's Guide

iPF840 Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

Highest

Print Quality (*1) Description

A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.

Image

High

Print Priority

Image

Line Drawing/Text

Standard

Fast

Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.

Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in Standard or Fast modes, but this mode offers exceptional printing quality.

Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are both important.

Printing takes less time than in Highest or High mode.

Choose this setting to print faster.

Printing in draft mode can help you work more efficiently when checking layouts.

Image

Line Drawing/Text

Office Document

Image

Line Drawing/Text

*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.

• Color Settings

Setting Item

Color Mode (*1)

Color Adjustment

Color-Matching Modes

Options

Color

Monochrome

Color (CAD)

Monochrome (BK ink)

Monochrome Bitmap

No color correction

Cyan

Magenta

Yellow

Gray Tone

Brightness

Contrast

Saturation

Description

Choose whether to print in color or monochrome.

(See " Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver .")

P.60

You can adjust the levels of cyan, magenta, and yellow as well as the brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray tones.

If you choose Monochrome or Monochrome (BK ink) in Color Mode only Brightness and Contrast can be adjusted.

Image , Graphics , and Text are available as Object Adjustment options.

Choose the color-matching mode.

Color-Matching Method (*2)

Gamma

Driver Matching Mode

ICC Matching Mode

Host ICM Mode (Windows)

ColorSync (Mac OS)

Auto

Perceptual

Colorimetric

Saturation

2.2

1.8

Choose the color-matching method. The available options vary depending on your selection in Color-Matching Mode .

You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones in an image.

You can select only after Driver Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode .

*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.

*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.

• Enhancing printing quality

Setting Item

Highest quality

Thicken Fine Lines

Sharpen Text

Description

This prints at the highest resolution. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.

Prints making fine lines appear thicker.

Choose this option to print intricate text more distinctly.

67

User's Guide

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) iPF840

Setting Item

Reduce Print Unevenness (*1)

Unidirectional Printing

Economy Printing

Description

Choose this option to counteract uneven printing.

Prints by suppressing color variations and misaligned ruled lines. However, this takes more time than regular printing.

When this mode is selected, less ink is consumed than in regular printing, but the quality is diminished.

Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for example. Depending on the Media Type and Print Quality settings, this mode may not be available.

*1: Displayed in Mac OS.

Note

• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality , and select the Unidirectional Printing check box.

For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)

➔ P.68

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS)

➔ P.70

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. As an example, this topic describes how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

68

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

User's Guide

iPF840 Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)

5

Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

6

Click Line Drawing/Text in the E Print Priority list.

7

Click High (1200dpi) in the F Print Quality list.

• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

Note

8

Click Color (CAD) in the G Color Mode list.

9

To adjust the color, click H Color Settings .

For instructions on adjusting color, see " Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ."

➔ P.60

Note

10

Select the K Sharpen Text check box.

11

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

12

Confirm the settings of A Page Size , L Paper Source , and so on.

13

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

P.161

Note

User's Guide

69

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS) iPF840

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how print photographic images in monochrome.

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

In the application menu, choose Print .

6

Access the Main pane.

70

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

User's Guide

iPF840 Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS)

8

Click mode.

D Advanced Settings to switch the print

9

Click Image in the E Print Priority list.

10

Click High (600dpi) in the F Print Quality list.

• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

Note

11

Click Monochrome in the H Color Mode list.

12

To adjust the brightness and contrast, click I Set .

For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see " Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ."

➔ P.60

Note

13

Access the Page Setup pane.

14

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

User's Guide

71

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size iPF840

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size .......................................................................................................

72

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ................................................................................

72

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ..............................................................................................................

74

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) .......................................................................................

74

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) .........................................................................................

76

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ..................................................................................................

78

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) ............................................................................

79

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS) ..............................................................................

80

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

• Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

• Fit Paper Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

For instructions on printing with resizing to fit the paper size, refer to the following topics.

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)

P.72

Note

• To print with resizing to fit the paper size on Mac OS, use Scale to fit paper size in the Paper Handling panel provided by the OS.

For more information, see the Mac OS User Manual.

• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual size.

72

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

User's Guide

iPF840 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

8

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm) .

9

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 .

10

Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

11

Select the D Fit Paper Size check box.

12

Click ISO A3 in the G Paper Size list.

User's Guide

73

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width iPF840

13

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

• Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

• Fit Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.

74

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

• Document: Any type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

P.164

User's Guide

iPF840 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

8

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 or Letter (8.5"x11") .

75

User's Guide

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) iPF840

9

Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

Note

• If the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B Borderless Printing check box.

10

Click E Fit Roll Paper Width .

Note

• After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width , the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK .

• Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.

11

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

76

User's Guide

iPF840 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

9

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

77

User's Guide

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value iPF840

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

11

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

12

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, 16 in. (406.4mm) is selected.

13

Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14

Click F Fit Roll Paper Width .

15

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

P.270

Note

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

• Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

• Scaling

Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.

78

For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)

➔ P.79

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS)

➔ P.80

User's Guide

iPF840 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)

Note

• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual size.

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.

Important

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.

79

User's Guide

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS) iPF840

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

8

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm) .

9

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 .

10

Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

11

Click ISO A4 in the G Paper Size list.

12

Click F Scaling and enter 120 .

Note

• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portions off the bottom and right edges of the paper will not be printed.

• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting out sheet.

E Print Centered on the Lay-

80

13

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following example.

User's Guide

iPF840 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS)

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

User's Guide

81

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS) iPF840

8

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

9

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

11

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

12

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is selected.

13

Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14

Click G Scaling and enter 120 .

Note

• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of the paper will not be printed.

• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the J Print Centered check box.

15

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

82

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing on Oversize Paper

Printing on Oversize Paper ...............................................................................................................................

83

Printing at Full Size (Windows) .....................................................................................................................

84

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS) ......................................................................................................................

85

Borderless Printing at Actual Size .....................................................................................................................

87

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) ...............................................................................................

88

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS) ................................................................................................

89

You can print all areas of the original at full scale by selecting the paper size from Oversize (sizes where the margins needed for printer operation have been added to the page size).

We recommend when printing with a focus on image.

Note

• If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image near the edge will not be printed.

• Oversize

When printing on standard paper sizes, printing is performed by taking the margins necessary for printer operations inside the region of the original.

(See " Print Area .")

➔ P.659

For example, printing the A4 size (210 x 297

mm) original shown in Figure (b) gives the result as shown in Figure (a).

However, if Oversize paper is selected, printing is performed by taking the margins necessary for printer operations outside of the region of the original to give the result as shown in Figure (c).

The A4 size print as shown in Figure (b) can then be obtained by trimming the margins from the periphery after printing.

Important

• When printing on Oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size—a size that includes the margin required by the printer.

• Sheets: Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 28 mm (1.10 in) higher than the page size

• Rolls:Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 10 mm (0.39 in) higher than the page size

Note

• Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized printing.

(See " Paper Sizes .")

➔ P.332

• Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size ) is only available in Windows.

• If you are performing oversized printing in Mac OS, you need to configure printing on non-standard paper sizes.

• To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Paper Size.

Oversized printing is not available with Custom Size

. (See " Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes .")

➔ P.108

For instructions on oversize printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing at Full Size (Windows)

➔ P.84

User's Guide

83

Printing at Full Size (Windows) iPF840

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS)

➔ P.85

This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

84

6

Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.

7

In the Paper Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series .

8

Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing at Full Size (Mac OS)

9

Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the A Page Size list.

10

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

11

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm) .

12

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

85

User's Guide

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS) iPF840

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

9

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

86

11

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

12

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is selected.

13

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Borderless Printing at Actual Size

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths.

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• Although it normally prints borderless on the top, bottom, left, and right (4-edge borderless), in the following cases, it becomes borderless only on the left and right (2-edge borderless) because the top and bottom of the printed image are not automatically cut.

• When paper where the borderless printing is described as two edges only in the Paper Reference Guide

(paper where printed image areas cannot be cut cleanly) is selected

• When the following settings are made in the printer control panel

• Cutting Mode is Manual

• CutDustReduct.

is On

• When auto cut is configured as not performed in the printer driver

Important

• Borderless printing is not possible if details such as crop marks and margins are included as data on the periphery of the original.

• If the length of the image to print is short, then since the roll paper is fed out to a prescribed length before cutting in order to prevent cutting problems and ejection problems, the trailing edge of the roll paper might not be printed borderless.

• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

• If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size (Windows only) is selected while performing borderless printing, Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) cannot be selected. Note that if borderless printing is possible, then even if the original is rotated 90 degrees, it will be printed by automatically rotating the page by 90 degrees.

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.

• Print Image with Actual Size

Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. We recommend when focusing on image quality. You should create the original at a size larger by 3 mm on each side than the paper size.

Note

• Not all page sizes are available.

• When performing borderless printing without using Print Image with Actual Size , the image deteriorates slightly because the image is automatically enlarged.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)

➔ P.88

User's Guide

87

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) iPF840

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS)

➔ P.89

This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.

Important

• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Roll Paper Options dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.

• Document: Any type

• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Canon Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm

• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1

Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8 mm (10 ×

12 in) —that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)

Note

• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it fits inside the paper area to be printed on.

2

Choose Print in the application menu.

3

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

4

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

88

5

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Glossy Photo

Paper 170gsm .

6

Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

Important

• When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time using the following procedure.

• Click Advanced Settings in Media Type .

• Select an ink drying time in the list for the Between Pages setting of Drying Time .

User's Guide

iPF840 Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS)

7

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the source application. In this case, click

10"x12" .

9

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

10

Select the B Borderless Printing play the Information dialog box.

check box to dis-

11

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list—in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm) .

12

Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13

In C Borderless Printing Method , click F Print Image with Actual Size .

14

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

89

This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.

User's Guide

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS) iPF840

Important

• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Paper Detailed

Settings dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.

• Document: Any type

• Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)–Borderless

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Canon Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm

• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

90

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click 10"x12" - Borderless .

• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by -Borderless.

Note

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.

6

Choose Print in the application menu.

User's Guide

iPF840 Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS)

7

Access the Main pane.

8

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Glossy Photo

Paper 170gsm .

9

Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

Important

• When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time in Between

Pages in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

11

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for selected.

B Roll Width . In this case, 10 in. (254.0mm) is

12

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

User's Guide

91

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size iPF840

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size ................................................................................................

92

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) .............................................

93

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ...........................................................................

95

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ....................................................

96

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) ......................................................

98

Borderless Printing at Actual Size .....................................................................................................................

87

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) ...............................................................................................

88

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS) ................................................................................................

89

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths.

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• Although it normally prints borderless on the top, bottom, left, and right (4-edge borderless), in the following cases, it becomes borderless only on the left and right (2-edge borderless) because the top and bottom of the printed image are not automatically cut.

• When paper where the borderless printing is described as two edges only in the Paper Reference Guide

(paper where printed image areas cannot be cut cleanly) is selected

• When the following settings are made in the printer control panel

• Cutting Mode is Manual

• CutDustReduct.

is On

• When auto cut is configured as not performed in the printer driver

Important

• Borderless printing is not possible if details such as crop marks and margins are included as data on the periphery of the original.

• If the length of the image to print is short, then since the roll paper is fed out to a prescribed length before cutting in order to prevent cutting problems and ejection problems, the trailing edge of the roll paper might not be printed borderless.

• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

• If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size (Windows only) is selected while performing borderless printing, Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) cannot be selected. Note that if borderless printing is possible, then even if the original is rotated 90 degrees, it will be printed by automatically rotating the page by 90 degrees.

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.

92

User's Guide

iPF840 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)

• Fit Paper Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

Note

• The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)

P.93

Note

• To perform borderless printing with resizing to fit the paper size on Mac OS, select borderless in Paper

Size and use Scale to fit paper size in the Paper Handling panel provided by the OS.

For more information, see the Mac OS User Manual.

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.

Important

• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Roll Paper Options dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.

• Document: Any type

• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Canon Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm

• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1

In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.

• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

Note

2

Choose Print in the application menu.

93

User's Guide

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) iPF840

3

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

P.164

4

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Glossy Photo

Paper 170gsm .

6

Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

Important

• When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time using the following procedure.

• Click Advanced Settings in Media Type .

• Select an ink drying time in the list for the Between Pages setting of Drying Time .

7

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

94 8

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click

10"x12" .

9

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

User's Guide

iPF840 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

10

Select the B Borderless Printing play the Information dialog box.

check box to dis-

11

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list—in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm) .

12

Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13

In C Borderless Printing Method , click D Fit Paper Size .

14

Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.

15

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths.

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• Although it normally prints borderless on the top, bottom, left, and right (4-edge borderless), in the following cases, it becomes borderless only on the left and right (2-edge borderless) because the top and bottom of the printed image are not automatically cut.

• When paper where the borderless printing is described as two edges only in the Paper Reference Guide

(paper where printed image areas cannot be cut cleanly) is selected

• When the following settings are made in the printer control panel

• Cutting Mode is Manual

• CutDustReduct.

is On

• When auto cut is configured as not performed in the printer driver

95

User's Guide

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) iPF840

Important

• Borderless printing is not possible if details such as crop marks and margins are included as data on the periphery of the original.

• If the length of the image to print is short, then since the roll paper is fed out to a prescribed length before cutting in order to prevent cutting problems and ejection problems, the trailing edge of the roll paper might not be printed borderless.

• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

• If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size (Windows only) is selected while performing borderless printing, Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) cannot be selected. Note that if borderless printing is possible, then even if the original is rotated 90 degrees, it will be printed by automatically rotating the page by 90 degrees.

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.

• Scale to fit Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.

Note

• You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width (relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)

➔ P.96

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)

➔ P.98

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

Important

• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Roll Paper Options dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.

96

• Document: Any type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Canon Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm

• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1

In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.

• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)

2

Choose Print in the application menu.

3

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

4

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Glossy Photo

Paper 170gsm .

6

Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

Important

• When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time using the following procedure.

• Click Advanced Settings in Media Type .

• Select an ink drying time in the list for the Between Pages setting of Drying Time .

7

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 .

9

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

97

User's Guide

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) iPF840

10

Select the B Borderless Printing play the Information dialog box.

check box to dis-

11

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list—in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm) .

12

Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13

In C Borderless Printing Method , make sure E Scale to fit Roll Paper Width is selected.

14

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

Important

• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Paper Detailed

Settings dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.

• Document: Any type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Canon Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm

• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

98

User's Guide

iPF840 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .

• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to fit the roll width.

Note

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.

6

Choose Print in the application menu.

7

Access the Main pane.

8

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Glossy Photo

Paper 170gsm .

9

Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

Important

• When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time in Between

Pages in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.

99

User's Guide

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) iPF840

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

11

In the A Paper Source list, click Roll Paper 1 or Roll Paper 2 .

12

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, 10 in. (254.0mm) is selected.

13

Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14

Select F Fit Roll Paper Width .

15

Select the H Borderless Printing check box.

16

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

100

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) ........................................................................

101

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) ..................................................

102

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS) ....................................................

105

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ...........................................................................................................

108

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) .....................................................................................

108

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS) .......................................................................................

111

On this printer, large-format printing of up to 18.0 m is available using rolls.

If you use Print Plug-In for Office or PosterArtist, you can easily print maximum 18.0 m vertical or horizontal banners. (Refer to

" Print Plug-In for Officefeatures (Windows) "

P.230

and

" Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals "

P.50

.)

However, you may not be able to print 18.0 m due to restrictions in the settable document size according to the application software.

Fit Roll Paper Width

To match the width of vertical and horizontal banners with the width of rolls, use the printer driver function for automatically enlarging/reducing and printing.

For example, if you automatically enlarge a document created with application software such as Microsoft Word, you can print the full width of the roll easily.

For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)

➔ P.102

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS)

➔ P.105

• Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.

Important

• If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.

• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and choose

Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.

101

User's Guide

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) iPF840

By automatic enlargement of a document created with an application software by the printer driver, you can print maximum 18.0 m vertical or horizontal banners.

However, you may not be able to print 18.0 m due to restrictions in the settable document size according to the application software.

This topic describes how to print a banner about five times as long as the roll width based on the following example.

• Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word

• Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)

The print procedure is as follows.

1.

Register a Custom Paper Size in the printer driver.

Call a non-standard paper size registered in the printer driver with Custom Paper Size.

Once you register Custom Paper Size, you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list.

Custom Paper Size can be set up to 18.0 m.

2.

In the application, create an original in the size you registered.

3.

Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Registering a Custom Paper Size

This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1

Display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating

System Menu .")

➔ P.165

2

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

102

3

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

4

Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.

5

Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name . My Horizontal Banner is used in this example.

6

In Units , click mm .

7

Under Paper Size , enter 100 in Width and 500 in Height .

8

Click Add to add the paper size of My Horizontal Banner.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)

9

Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.

10

Close the printer driver dialog box.

Note

• Although you can even set Custom Size for the paper size, the maximum settable size is 3.2 m. The setting of

Custom Size is disabled when you exit the application software.

For more information, see " Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ."

➔ P.108

Creating the banner in the application

Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Paper Size you registered.

1

Start Microsoft Word.

2

Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.

3

Under Paper Size , click the Custom Paper Size you registered— My Horizontal Banner in this example.

• If My Horizontal Banner is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.

Important • In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper sizes, use the custom paper size setting in Custom and specify 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in)

4

Set the printing orientation to horizontal.

5

Create the banner.

Printing the banner

Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1

Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Poster in the E Print Target list.

User's Guide

103

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) iPF840

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7

In the A Page Size list, click the size you registered, My Horizontal Banner .

8

Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

Note

• If the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B Borderless Printing check box.

104

9

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

10

After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width , the Information dialog box is displayed.

11

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll (406.4mm) , and then click OK .

12

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS)

If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.

1

On the Layout sheet, click J Special Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.

2

In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes .

By automatic enlargement of a document created with an application software by the printer driver, you can print maximum 18.0 m vertical or horizontal banners.

This topic describes how to print a banner about five times as long as the roll width based on the following example.

• Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner

• Page Size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)

The print procedure is as follows.

1.

In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.

2.

In Page Setup , register Custom Paper Sizes .

Once you register Custom Paper Sizes , you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list.

Custom Paper Sizes can be set up to 18.0 m.

3.

Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Note

• The following instructions are for OS X v10.7. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version and settings of Mac OS X.

105

User's Guide

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS) iPF840

Register a Custom Paper Sizes

This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1

Create the document in the application.

2

Choose Print in the application menu.

3

Select the printer in the A Printer list.

4

Click Manage Custom Sizes in the F Paper Size to display the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box.

list

5

Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want to register. Here, enter 100*500 .

If the Untitled size is not listed at left, click + below the list.

6

Under Paper Size , enter 100 in Width and 500 in Height . Here, measurements are entered in millimeters.

7

Specify the margins by entering 3 in Non-Printable Area . Here, too, measurements are entered in millimeters.

8

Click OK to close the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box.

9

In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 100*500 , the size you registered.

10

In G Orientation , click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

11

If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click OK to close the dialog box.

106

Print the banner

Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS)

2

Access the Main pane.

3

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

4

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

5

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

6

Access the Page Setup pane.

7

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

8

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, 16 in. (406.4mm) is selected.

9

Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

10

Click F Fit Roll Paper Width .

107

User's Guide

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes iPF840

11

Confirm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

For printing on non-standard size paper, first register the paper size in the printer driver.

Once you register a paper size, you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list. The paper size can be set up to 18.0 m.

Note

• In Windows, although you can even set Custom Size for the paper size, the maximum settable size is 3.2 m. The setting of Custom Size is disabled when you exit the application software.

For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)

➔ P.108

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS)

➔ P.111

For printing on non-standard size paper, first register the paper size in the printer driver.

Call a non-standard paper size registered in the printer driver with Custom Paper Size.

Once you register Custom Paper Size, you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list.

Custom Paper Size can be set up to 18.0 m.

Note

• Although you also can set Custom Size for the paper size temporarily, the maximum settable size is 3.2 m. Also, the setting of Custom Size is disabled when you exit the application software.

Registering and Printing With a Custom Paper Size

This topic describes how to register a non-standard paper size by the name of 430 mm Square and print based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

• Paper: Sheets

• Media Type: Any type

• Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

1

Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.

2

Choose Print in the application menu.

3

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

108

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)

4

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

6

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, select from the E Print Target list.

7

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8

Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.

9

Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name . 430 mm Square is used in this example.

10

Select mm in Units .

11

Enter 430 (16.9 in) in both Width and Height .

• If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in either Width or Height , the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.

Note

12

Click Add to register 430 mm Square .

13

Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.

14

Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.

15

In the A Page Size list, click the size you added, 430 mm Square .

User's Guide

109

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) iPF840

16

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

Printing by using Custom Size

This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])

• Paper: Sheets

• Paper type: Any type

• Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

1

Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.

2

Choose Print in the application menu.

3

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

4

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

6

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, select from the E Print Target list.

110

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS)

7

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8

Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.

9

Click Custom Size in the A Page Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

10

Confirm that mm is selected in Units .

11

Enter 430 (16.9 in) in both Width and Height .

12

Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

13

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

For printing on non-standard size paper, first register the paper size in the printer driver.

Call a non-standard paper size registered in the printer driver with Custom Paper Sizes .

Once you register Custom Paper Sizes , you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list.

Custom Paper Sizes can be set up to 18.0 m.

This topic describes how to register a non-standard paper size by the name of 430*430 and print based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

• Paper: Sheets

• Media Type: Any type

• Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

Note

• The following instructions are for OS X v10.7. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version and settings of Mac OS X.

1

Create the document in the application.

2

Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.

111

User's Guide

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS) iPF840

3

Choose Print in the application menu.

4

Select the printer in the A Printer list.

5

Click Manage Custom Sizes in the F Paper Size to display the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box.

list

6

In Paper Size , enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter 430 mm in Height and Width .

7

In Non-Printable Area , enter 5 for the top and side margins and 23 for the bottom margin. Here, measurements are entered in millimeters.

8

Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box and enter the paper name—in this case, 430*430 .

9

Click OK to close the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box.

10

In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 430*430 , the size you registered.

11

If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

112

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS)

12

Access the Main pane.

13

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

14

After confirming that D Easy Settings is selected, select from the E Print Target list.

15

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

16

Access the Page Setup pane.

17

Click Cut Sheet in the A Paper Source list.

18

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

User's Guide

113

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other iPF840

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .................................................................................................

114

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) ...........................................................................

115

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS) ............................................................................

117

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously ..............................................................................................................

118

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) ........................................................................................

118

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS) ..........................................................................................

120

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ...................................................................................................................

121

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) .............................................................................................

122

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS) ..............................................................................................

124

Printing Posters in Sections ............................................................................................................................

126

Printing Large Posters (Windows) ..............................................................................................................

126

By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand meeting materials, and a variety of other printed documents.

• Free Layout (Windows)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple files—even multiple source applications—in a single-page layout.

114

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)

• Free Layout (Mac OS)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple files—even multiple source applications—in a single-page layout.

For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)

P.115

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS)

P.117

This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

User's Guide

115

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) iPF840

4

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

5

Select the A Page Layout check box.

6

Click Free Layout in the A Page Layout list.

7

When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF

Free Layout window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

116

8

Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Note

• Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1–7 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic.

9

Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

• For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout

functions, see " Free Layout ."

➔ P.199

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS)

This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before printing.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Access the Page Setup pane.

3

Select the N Free Layout check box.

4

Click M Print .

5

The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.

6

Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Note

• Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1 to 4 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic.

7

Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

• For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout

functions, see " Free Layout ."

➔ P.307

Note

117

User's Guide

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously iPF840

You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

• Banner Printing

118

• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.

Important • When using Banner Printing, some of the settings are disabled, including Borderless Printing, Enlarge/

Reduce Printing, and Layout.

For instructions on printing multiple pages continuously, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)

P.118

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS)

P.120

This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.

Important • When using Banner Printing, some of the settings are disabled, including Borderless Printing, Enlarge/Reduce

Printing, and Layout.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

5

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

6

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

7

Click N Roll Paper Options tions dialog box.

to display the Roll Paper Op-

8

Select the B Banner Printing check box.

9

Click OK .

10

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

User's Guide

119

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS) iPF840

This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Important

• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.

• When using Banner Printing, some of the settings are disabled, including Borderless Printing, Enlarge/Reduce

Printing, and Layout.

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

120

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet

7

In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

8

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

9

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

11

In the A Paper Source list, click Roll Paper 1 (Banner) or Roll Paper 2 (Banner) .

12

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

P.270

Note

To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original and dividing the sheet into areas for each page.

• Page Layout

Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.

121

User's Guide

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) iPF840

• This function cannot be combined with the following options.

Important • Borderless Printing

• Scaling Originals (Windows)

• Banner Printing (Windows)

• When printing using this function, the Print Centered setting is disabled.

Note

• You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.

• You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.

For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)

➔ P.122

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS)

➔ P.124

This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

122

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

6

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)

7

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8

In A Page Size , click the size of the original as specified in the application software. In this case, click ISO

A3 .

9

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

10

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm) .

11

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

12

Select the A Page Layout check box.

13

Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the A Page Layout list.

Note

• You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page Layout

Printing dialog box by clicking B Set . If you select a pattern to print borders, the size of the images are reduced about 5% to create space for the printed border. If None is selected, then the images are not reduced for printing.

14

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

123

User's Guide

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS) iPF840

This topic describes how to print four pages of an original on a single sheet, based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3 .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Layout pane.

124

7

Click 4 in the A Pages per Sheet list.

Note

• You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in B Layout Direction and C Border .

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS)

8

Access the Main pane.

9

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

10

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

11

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

12

Access the Page Setup pane.

13

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

14

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is selected.

15

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

125

User's Guide

Printing Posters in Sections iPF840

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.

• Page Layout

Choose poster printing.

Important

• When printing using this function, the Print Centered , Watermark , No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) , and Page Options settings are disabled.

For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing Large Posters (Windows)

P.126

• This method of poster printing is supported in Windows.

Note

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.

• Document: Poster

• Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

• Paper: Sheets

• Paper Size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

126

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Large Posters (Windows)

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

5

Click Poster in the E Print Target list.

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7

In A Page Size , click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A2 .

8

Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.

9

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

10

Select the A Page Layout check box.

11

Click Poster (2 x 2) in the A Page Layout list.

Note

• Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.

• Click B Set under A Page Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.

• On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.

• Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.

12

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

User's Guide

127

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls iPF840

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ................................................................................................................

128

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) .........................................................................................

128

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS) ...........................................................................................

130

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ............................................................................................................

132

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) ......................................................................................

132

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS) ........................................................................................

134

You can print originals centered on a page—for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing the original.

• Print Centered

If you use originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.

128

For instructions on centering originals when printing on roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)

➔ P.128

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS)

➔ P.130

This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.

• Document: Any type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 or Letter (8.5"x11") .

8

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

9

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll

(297.0mm) .

129

User's Guide

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS) iPF840

10

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

11

Select the E Print Centered check box.

12

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

130

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS)

3

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

9

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

11

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

12

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm) is selected.

13

Select the J Print Centered check box.

131

User's Guide

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets iPF840

14

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

You can print originals centered on a page—for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing the original.

• Print Centered

If you use paper larger than the original size or print originals after reduction, the printed images may be aligned in the upper-left corner of the paper. In this case, you can center originals on sheets when printing.

132

For instructions on centering originals when printing on cut sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)

➔ P.132

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS)

➔ P.134

This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Sheets

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 .

8

Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

9

Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.

10

Click F Scaling and enter 50 .

11

Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.

133

User's Guide

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS) iPF840

12

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

13

Select the E Print Centered check box.

14

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

Important

• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4

• Paper: Sheets

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Paper size: Non-standard

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

134

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS)

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Cut Sheet .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

9

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

10

Access the Page Setup pane.

11

Click Cut Sheet in the A Paper Source list.

12

Select the J Print Centered check box.

User's Guide

135

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS) iPF840

13

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

Important

• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size.

136

User's Guide

iPF840 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees ................................................................................

137

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) ..........................................................

137

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS) ............................................................

138

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins ................................................

140

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) ...........................................

141

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS) ............................................

142

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

• Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)

When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it fits within the roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.

Important

• If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to fit Roll Paper

Width to print rotated pages.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows)

P.137

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS)

P.138

This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.

• Document: Any type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to fit within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

137

User's Guide

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS) iPF840

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

138

6

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 or Letter (8.5"x11") .

7

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

8

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll

(297.0mm) .

9

Select the K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.

10

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

User's Guide

iPF840 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS)

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait orientation

90 degrees to fit within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

User's Guide

139

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins iPF840

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8

Access the Page Setup pane.

9

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

10

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm) is selected.

11

Select the L Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.

12

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

P.270

Note

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

• No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)

You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in originals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.

140

• Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.

Important • If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout

Note

• Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.

• Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents, depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

User's Guide

iPF840 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)

➔ P.141

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS)

P.142

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the following example.

• Document: Any type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

6

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 or Letter (8.5"x11") .

141

User's Guide

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS) iPF840

7

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

8

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll

(297.0mm) .

9

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

10

Select the G No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.

11

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

142

User's Guide

iPF840 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS)

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8

Access the Page Setup pane.

User's Guide

143

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS) iPF840

9

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

10

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm) is selected.

11

Select the K No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.

12

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

144

User's Guide

iPF840 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing

You can check the print layout on the preview screen.

• Open Preview When Print Job Starts (Windows)

While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust orientation or other settings, and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen.

• Under some settings and in some environments, PageComposer may be started.

Note

• Preview (Mac OS)

While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen.

For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows)

P.161

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS)

P.271

User's Guide

145

Printing With Watermarks iPF840

Printing With Watermarks ...............................................................................................................................

146

Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ........................................................

147

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation ..........................................................................

148

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) ....................................................

149

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS) ......................................................

150

Using Favorites ...............................................................................................................................................

152

➔ Using Favorites (Windows) ..................................................................................................................

162

➔ Using Favorites (Mac OS) ....................................................................................................................

271

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing .....................................................................................................................

152

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ...............................................................................................

153

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS) .................................................................................................

154

You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.

146

• Watermark

Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.

• Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.

Important

The following watermarks are provided:

• CONFIDENTIAL

• COPY

• DRAFT

• FILE COPY

• FINAL

• PRELIMINARY

• PROOF

• TOP SECRET

You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.

• Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame, if desired.

• Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.

• Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the document image. You can also print the watermark only on the first page, if desired.

Note

• Watermarks are supported in Windows.

• In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks.

For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)

Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)

➔ P.147

This topic describes how to print with watermarks, based on the following example of printing with a FILE COPY watermark.

• Document: Any type

• Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in[)

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Settings .

Note

6

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

User's Guide

147

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation iPF840

7

In A Page Size , click the size of the original as specified in the application software. In this case, click ISO

A2 .

8

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

9

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm) .

10

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

11

Select the C Watermark check box.

12

Click FILE COPY in the Watermarks list.

Note

• Click D Edit Watermark to open the Edit Watermark dialog box. In the Edit Watermark dialog box, you can create custom watermarks and change the position and angle of watermarks.

13

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.

• Orientation

Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape orientation, you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.

148

• Rotate 180 degrees

The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.

• Mirror

A mirror image of the original is printed.

User's Guide

iPF840 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows)

For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows)

➔ P.149

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS)

➔ P.150

This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the following example.

• Document: An original in landscape orientation

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

6

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

149

User's Guide

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS) iPF840

7

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO

A4 or Letter (8.5"x11") .

9

In H Orientation , click J Landscape .

10

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

11

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm) .

12

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the following example.

• Document: An original in landscape orientation

• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])

• Paper: Roll paper

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

150

User's Guide

iPF840 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS)

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

In C Paper Size , click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 .

4

In D Orientation , click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

5

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

6

Choose Print in the application menu.

7

Access the Main pane.

8

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

9

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

10

Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

151

User's Guide

Using Favorites iPF840

11

Access the Page Setup pane.

12

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

13

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for B Roll Width . In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is selected.

14

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

You can register print settings as Favorites to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations, or settings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.

• Favorites

Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing, and you can check the settings details.

Note

• You can also save the favorite settings as files. Using these files is a convenient way to print under the same conditions on another computer. (In Windows.)

For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

Using Favorites (Windows)

➔ P.162

Using Favorites (Mac OS)

➔ P.271

152

Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.

Note

• It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of paper that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide

. (See " Types of Paper .")

P.332

• Automatic Cutting

Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the roll, or you can print a cut line.

For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your operating system.

User's Guide

iPF840 Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)

➔ P.153

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS)

➔ P.154

This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as how to print a cut line for manual cutting.

Note

• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed. Follow the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a cut line instead.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

4

Select and click a roll paper in the L Paper Source list.

5

Click N Roll Paper Options tions dialog box.

to display the Roll Paper Op-

6

To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the A Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline .

7

Click OK to close the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

8

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

P.161

Note

Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.

153

User's Guide

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS) iPF840

This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as how to print a cut line for manual cutting.

Note

• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed. Follow the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a cut line instead.

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

Choose Print in the application menu.

6

Access the Page Setup pane.

154

7

Select and click a roll paper in the A Paper Source list.

User's Guide

iPF840 Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS)

8

Access the Main pane.

9

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

10

Click C Set dialog box.

to display the Paper Detailed Settings

11

To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline .

Important

• If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel.

12

Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.

13

Confirm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

For tips on confirming print settings, see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.270

Note

155

User's Guide

iPF840

156

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

15

29

Windows Software

Printer Driver .....................................................................................

158

Preview ..............................................................................................

189

Free Layout .......................................................................................

199

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .........................................

221

Print Plug-In for Office .......................................................................

230

➔ Status Monitor .............................................................................

496

Accounting ..................................................................................

501

Device Setup Utility .....................................................................

491

➔ Media Configuration Tool ............................................................

378

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

549

565

603

635

657

661

267

331

425

463

475

495

157 imagePROGRAF

Printer Driver Settings iPF840

Printer Driver Settings ....................................................................................................................................

158

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver .............................................................................................................

160

Confirming Print Settings ...............................................................................................................................

161

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ..........................................................................................

161

Using Favorites ..............................................................................................................................................

162

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .............................................................................

164

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu ....................................................

165

Main Sheet ....................................................................................................................................................

166

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box ...................................................................................................

170

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................

170

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application ................................................................................

172

Color Adjustment Sheet: Color .................................................................................................................

172

Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color .........................................................................................................

173

Matching Sheet ........................................................................................................................................

174

Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome .....................................................................................................

176

Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome ............................................................................................

177

Page Setup Sheet .........................................................................................................................................

177

Output Method Dialog box ........................................................................................................................

180

Paper Size Options Dialog Box .................................................................................................................

181

Layout Sheet .................................................................................................................................................

182

Page Options Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................

183

Special Settings Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................

184

Favorites Sheet .............................................................................................................................................

185

Utility Sheet ...................................................................................................................................................

186

Support Sheet ...............................................................................................................................................

187

Settings Summaries Dialog Box ...............................................................................................................

187

Device Settings Sheet ...................................................................................................................................

188

For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications

P.164

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu

➔ P.165

For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

158

Main Sheet

➔ P.166

User's Guide

iPF840 Printer Driver Settings

You can specify the type of paper, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose

Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box

➔ P.170

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application

➔ P.172

Color Adjustment Sheet: Color

➔ P.172

Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color

➔ P.173

Matching Sheet

➔ P.174

Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome

➔ P.176

Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome

➔ P.177

Page Setup Sheet

P.177

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the paper size and feed source, and automatic cutting.

Output Method Dialog box

➔ P.180

Paper Size Options Dialog Box

➔ P.181

Layout Sheet

➔ P.182

You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing options.

Page Options Dialog Box

➔ P.183

Special Settings Dialog Box

➔ P.184

Favorites Sheet

➔ P.185

Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved as a favorite. Favorites you have added can be edited or used at the time of printing as desired.

Utility Sheet

➔ P.186

You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .

Support Sheet

➔ P.187

You can view support information and the user manual.

Device Settings Sheet

➔ P.188

You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the version information for the printer driver.

imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a sin-

gle page as desired before printing. For details, see " Free Layout ."

➔ P.199

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER

. For details, see " Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ."

➔ P.221

• Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is not displayed in 64-bit editions of Windows.

Note

159

User's Guide

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver iPF840

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.

Important

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

Note

• Click the B Get Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box. On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and configure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper.

This function requires that the Status Monitor be installed.

5

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

160

6

In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specified in the application.

7

In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.

User's Guide

iPF840 Confirming Print Settings

8

If you have selected roll paper in L Paper Source , select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll Paper

Width .

Note

• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.

For details on available printing conditions,

see " Printer Driver Settings ."

➔ P.158

There are two ways to confirm the print settings, as follows.

• Checking a preview of the settings

A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main , Page Setup , and Layout sheets. By checking illustrations and numerical values in the preview, you can confirm current settings for the page size, orientation, paper source, layout, and so on.

Display Area

P Top illustrations

Q Middle, bordered area

R Bottom illustrations

Information Displayed

Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings information.

The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction are indicated.

Illustrations indicate the feed source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other settings information.

Note

• To confirm the Print Target specified in Easy Settings , click G View Settings on the Main sheet to display the View Settings dialog box.

• Checking a print preview

You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.

When you activate this feature, imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer is started before printing. Confirming how documents will be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews, see " Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ."

➔ P.145

This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

161

User's Guide

Using Favorites iPF840

3

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4

Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.

5

After you click OK , when you print a job, the image-

PROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.

Note

• If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and clear

Preview Switching .

6

On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.

7

To print, click Print in the File menu.

• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview

functions, see " Preview ."

➔ P.189

Note

162

This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite

This section describes the procedure for registering printing settings that have been changed in the driver as Favorites .

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

P.164

User's Guide

iPF840 Using Favorites

3

Perform normal printing settings.

The favorite is registered from here.

4

Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

5

Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.

6

Enter a desired name in Name , such as Photos for Presentations or Monthly Report.

7

Choose a fitting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.

8

In Comment , enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.

9

Click OK to close the Add dialog box.

The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites .

• To save a favorite as a file, click J Export and specify the file to save.

Note

Printing using the favorite

Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the

Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

P.164

163

User's Guide

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications iPF840

3

Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

4

In the A Favorites , choose the favorite you registered.

• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite file.

Note

5

Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.

6

Confirm the print settings and print as desired.

• For instructions on confirming print settings,

see " Confirming Print Settings ."

➔ P.161

Note

1

Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2

Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

Note

• The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for configuring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.

In the following case, click Preferences .

• Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software

164

User's Guide

iPF840 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main , Page Setup , Layout , Favorites ,

Utility , and Support .

Note

• The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these six sheets may be displayed.

Important

• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.

• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.

To use the settings continuously in all applications, open the printer driver from the system menu to make the settings.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu .")

➔ P.165

1

Open the folder of the OS you are using for configuring printers.

For example, on Windows 7, click the start button on the Desktop and open the Devices and Printers window.

2

Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Printer

Properties to open the printer properties window.

User's Guide

165

Main Sheet iPF840

3

Click Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the name of this printer.

Note

• The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver.

(See " Device Settings

Sheet .")

➔ P.188

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main , Page Setup , Layout , Favorites ,

Utility , and Support .

• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.

Important

• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .")

➔ P.164

166

The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help file.

Note

• On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

User's Guide

iPF840 Main Sheet

Common Items

• A Media Type

Select the type of paper.

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide

. (See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• B Get Information

Displays Paper Information on Printer . You can update the printer driver settings for the feed source, media type, and roll width by selecting the feed source.

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box

➔ P.170

• C Advanced Settings

Displays Paper Detailed Settings . You can configure the printing settings to match the type of media, such as the ink drying time.

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box

➔ P.170

• L Open Preview When Print Job Starts

When the check box is selected, imagePROGRAF Preview is launched before printing.

This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing

➔ P.145

• M Status Monitor

Starts imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .

You can check the printer status, job status, and other conditions.

You can also set up email notification if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.

For details, refer to the Status Monitor help file.

• N About

Displays version information for the printer driver.

• S Defaults

Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.

167

User's Guide

Main Sheet iPF840

Configuration using Easy Settings

• E Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Printing Photos and Images

P.43

Printing Line Drawings and Text

P.52

Printing Office Documents

P.47

Depending on the A Media Type setting, some E Print Target options may not be available.

• F Print Quality

Choose the level of print quality.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

P.66

• G View Settings

Displays the E Print Target setting values.

You can view and change the order of E Print Target setting values.

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application

➔ P.172

Configuration using Advanced Settings

168

• E Print Priority

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

➔ P.66

User's Guide

iPF840 Main Sheet

• F Print Quality

Choose the level of print quality.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

➔ P.66

• T Highest quality

When the check box is selected, printing is performing focusing on quality. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.

Note

• If you set F Print Quality to High , you can select T Highest quality . However, depending on A Media Type and E Print Priority , you may not be able to select T Highest quality .

• U Economy Printing

If you select this option, you can print with less ink consumed. However, print quality is lower than in regular printing.

Select this option to save ink, such as when printing to check drawings. Depending on the settings of

Type and F Print Quality , you may not be able to select this option.

A Media

Note

• If you set F Print Quality to Fast , you can select U Economy Printing . However, depending on A Media

Type and E Print Priority , you may not be able to select U Economy Printing .

• G Color Mode

Choose the color mode.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

➔ P.66

• Depending on the A Media Type setting, some G Color Mode options may not be available.

Note

• H Color Settings

Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver

➔ P.60

• I Thicken Fine Lines

Select this option to print fine lines more distinctly.

• J Unidirectional Printing

Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality. However, the printing speed becomes slower.

User's Guide

169

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box iPF840

On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and configure printer driver settings for the paper source and media type.

Note

• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Get Information by Media Type .

(See " Main Sheet .")

➔ P.166

• A Paper Source

Shows the paper source supported by the printer, as well as information about the loaded paper. To update the paper source and media type settings in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and click

OK .

In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, you can set Drying Time for the paper selected with Media Type of the

Main sheet, etc.

You can display this dialog box by clicking Advanced Settings of Media Type on the Main sheet.

(See " Main

Sheet .")

➔ P.166

As for the items for which you can select Printer Default in this dialog box, you also can set them from the control

panel of the printer. (See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

170

A Drying Time

Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Between Pages setting is only valid for rolls.

User's Guide

iPF840 Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box

• B Between Pages

You can set the time to wait after printing 1 document page until ejecting the paper. Since waiting time is required for ink to dry before a roll is cut, you can deliver paper in the Output Stacker with the ink dried even if

Cutting Mode is set to Automatic .

Setting Item

Printer Default

Details

The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.

Off

30 sec.

/ 1 min.

/ 3 min.

/ 5 min.

/

10 min.

/ 30 min.

/ 60 min.

Paper is ejected immediately after printing completes.

Paper is ejected when the set time elapses after printing completes.

• C Between Scans

You can set the time to wait after printing 1 line on a page until printing the next line. Set this to avoid bleeding or color unevenness such as when bleeding occurs on a page or when color unevenness occurs during borderless printing.

Setting Item

Printer Default

Details

The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.

Off

1 sec.

/ 3 sec.

/ 5 sec.

/ 7 sec.

/ 9 sec.

The next line is printed immediately after a line is printed.

The next line is printed when the set time elapses after a line is printed.

* Increase the time according to the occurrence condition of bleeding or unevenness.

D Roll Paper Margin for Safety

You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held firmly against the Platen.

• E Near End Margin

Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

Setting Item

Printer Default

Details

The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.

3 mm (0.12 in)

20 mm (0.8 in)

The document is printed in the standard size.

* Select this when you do not have any problems in printing.

Select this when rubbing against the printhead occurs such as when using paper that tends to curl.

F Cut Speed

Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

Setting Item

Printer Default

High Speed

Standard

Low Speed

Details

The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.

When the Standard setting does not result in cutting the surface cleanly, select this.

Select this when you do not have any problems in automatic cutting.

This helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you select it when using adhesive paper.

G Mirror

Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.

171

User's Guide

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application iPF840

In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

Note

• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click View Settings by Print Target

. (See " Main

Sheet .")

P.166

• A Print Target

Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

• B Name

Identifies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

• C Details

Here, you can confirm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print Target .

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.

172 Note

• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced

Settings

. (See " Main Sheet .")

P.166

• A Sample Type

Choose a sample image from Standard , Portrait , Landscape , or Graphics .

• B View Color Pattern

Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

User's Guide

iPF840 Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color

• C Apply to Sample

Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

• D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow

Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

• G Gray Tone

Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue) or Warm Black (tinged with red).

• H Brightness

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

• I Contrast

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

• J Saturation

Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.

• K Object Adjustment

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.

Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color

➔ P.173

• S Defaults

Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

For details on settings items, see " Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ."

➔ P.60

Note

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.

• A Image

Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

• B Graphics

Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

User's Guide

173

Matching Sheet iPF840

• C Text

Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

• If No color correction is selected under Color Mode , the Matching sheet is not displayed.

Important

Note

• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings in Color Mode in Advanced Settings , and then click the Matching

sheet. (See " Main Sheet .")

➔ P.166

Driver Matching Mode

The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the A Matching Mode list.

174

• A Matching Mode

Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

Normally, select Driver Matching Mode . For color matching based on ICC profiles, select ICC Matching

Mode or Host ICM Mode , depending on your color matching system.

• B Matching Method

Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in Matching Mode .

• E Gamma

You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones in an image.

2.2

is normally selected. If you want a softer impression than 2.2

, select 1.8

.

User's Guide

iPF840 Matching Sheet

ICC Matching Mode and Host ICM Mode

The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode or Host ICM Mode in the

Mode list.

A Matching

• A Matching Mode

Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

• B Input Profile Settings

You can select Image , Graphics , or Text . You can choose Matching Method and Input Profile .

Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode .

To apply the same input profile automatically for Graphics and Text , select Use the Same Profile for All Objects . To apply separate input profiles to Graphics and Text , clear Use the Same Profile for All Objects and specify the individual settings.

• C Printer Profile Settings

Specify the printer profile as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings .

We recommend that you select an ICC profile created using commercially available profile creation software in order to perform color management accurately on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper.

The created ICC profile needs to be saved in the following folder on the computer you are using.

C:\Windows\system32\spool\drivers\color folder

• C: may vary according to the user environment.

Note

• For details on settings items,

see " Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ."

➔ P.60

Note

175

User's Guide

Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome iPF840

On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced

Settings

. (See " Main Sheet .")

➔ P.166

176

• A Sample Type

Choose a sample image from Standard , Portrait , Landscape , or Graphics .

• B View Color Pattern

Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

• C Apply to Sample

Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

• D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow

Not available.

• G Gray Tone

Not available.

• H Brightness

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

• I Contrast

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

• J Saturation

Not available.

• K Object Adjustment

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.

Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome

P.177

• S Defaults

Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

For details on settings items, see " Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ."

➔ P.60

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.

• A Image

Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

• B Graphics

Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

• C Text

Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

The following settings are available on the Page Setup sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help file.

• A Page Size

Select the page size as specified in the source application.

For details on available page sizes,

see " Paper Sizes ."

➔ P.332

User's Guide

177

Page Setup Sheet iPF840

• B Borderless Printing

Borderless printing is available if roll paper is selected in the options when this setting is activated.

L Paper Source list. Choose from the following

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size

➔ P.92

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

➔ P.95

Borderless Printing at Actual Size

➔ P.87

• D Fit Paper Size

Scales the document image to match the paper size.

• E Scale to fit Roll Paper Width

Scales the document image to match the roll width.

• F Print Image with Actual Size

Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available when you have selected the size same as the width of Roll Paper for either the length or width of the document from the A Page Size list.

• G Paper Size

Available when D Fit Paper Size is selected.

Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

For details on available paper sizes,

see " Paper Sizes ."

➔ P.332

Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.

• C Enlarged/Reduced Printing

178

Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

➔ P.72

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

➔ P.74

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value

➔ P.78

• D Fit Paper Size

Scales the document image to match the paper size.

• E Fit Roll Paper Width

Scales the document image to match the roll width.

• F Scaling

Resizes the document image based on a specified scaling value. Enter a value in a range of 5–600.

• G Paper Size

Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

For details on available paper sizes,

see " Paper Sizes ."

➔ P.332

• H Orientation

Choose the printing orientation.

User's Guide

iPF840 Page Setup Sheet

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation

➔ P.148

• K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)

Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees

➔ P.137

• L Paper Source

Choose the feed source, as desired.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type on the Main sheet.

• M Roll Paper Width

Choose the roll width.

For details on available roll widths,

see " Paper Sizes ."

➔ P.332

• N Roll Paper Options

Complete optional roll paper settings. Click to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

Under A Automatic Cutting , you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline .

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing

➔ P.152

Select B Banner Printing when printing multiple pages continuously.

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously

➔ P.118

• P Output Method

Click to display the Output Method dialog box, which enables you to complete the Output Method and Name of data to be saved settings.

Output Method Dialog box

➔ P.180

• O Size Options

Click to display the Paper Size Options dialog box, which enables you to register additional paper sizes or select the size system for use.

Paper Size Options Dialog Box

➔ P.181

• S Defaults

Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.

179

User's Guide

Output Method Dialog box iPF840

The Output Method dialog box allows you to select the Output Method and set the save settings when saving to the box.

180

Note

• To display the Output Method dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Output Method

. (See " Page Setup

Sheet .")

P.177

• A Output Method

If Print is selected, the print job is saved to the printer hard disk after printing has finished.

If Save in mail box is selected, the print job is saved to the printer hard disk. If you choose Save in mail box , also specify the destination personal box in the Mail box list.

If Print after reception is complete is checked, you can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle.

These can be selected as Print options.

• B Name of data to be saved

To use the file name, choose Use file name .

Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name .

• C Mail box

Displays a list of mail boxes. If you choose Save in mail box , also specify the destination personal box from the list.

• D Acquire Mail Box Name

When this is clicked, the box name acquired from the printer main unit is displayed in Mail box .

User's Guide

iPF840 Paper Size Options Dialog Box

In the Paper Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Paper Size. The sizes you define are listed with standard paper sizes for selection later as needed.

• You cannot create any arbitrary roll paper width as a Custom Paper Size.

Important • If you select a Paper Size from Paper Size Options , load paper of a size equal to or larger than the Paper Size

Options into the printer. If the size of the loaded paper is smaller than the Paper Size Options , an incomplete output image may be printed.

Note

• To display the Paper Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Paper Size Options

.

(See " Page

Setup Sheet .")

➔ P.177

• A Paper Size List

Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer driver.

• B Delete

Custom paper sizes created by users can be deleted from the A Paper Size List , as needed.

However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.

• If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected.

• If an oversized paper size is selected.

• If a paper size marked with a red circle is selected.

• C Custom Paper Size Name

You can name Custom Paper Size as desired.

• D Units

Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height and width.

• E Paper Size

Specify the desired Width and Height . You can make your selection from sizes that are compatible with Borderless Printing by selecting Borderless Printing Size . To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width and Height as you resize the paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height .

• F Add

Enables you to register the custom paper size you have specified or overwrite an existing custom paper size.

• G Display Series

You can limit the number of options shown in Page Size , Paper Size , and Paper Size List .

181

User's Guide

Layout Sheet iPF840

The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

182

• A Page Layout

Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet

➔ P.121

Printing Posters in Sections

➔ P.126

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

➔ P.114

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

➔ P.50

• B Set

Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in A Page Layout log boxes, you can specify layout details and which pages to print, as well as other settings.

. In these dia-

• Page Layout Printing

• Pages to Print

• Free Layout Settings

• C Watermark

Activating this option makes two settings available, Watermarks and D Edit Watermark .

Printing With Watermarks

➔ P.146

• Watermarks

Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.

• D Edit Watermark

Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.

• E Print Centered

Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls

➔ P.128

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

➔ P.132

• F Rotate 180 degrees

Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.

• G No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)

Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

➔ P.140

User's Guide

iPF840 Page Options Dialog Box

• H Copies

Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of 1–999.

• Reverse Order

Activate this option to print pages in reverse order.

• I Page Options

Click to display the Page Options dialog box, which enables you to complete settings for printing the user name, date, or page number in the header or footer.

Page Options Dialog Box

➔ P.183

• J Special Settings

If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to display the Special Settings dialog box and change how printing is processed.

Special Settings Dialog Box

➔ P.184

• S Defaults

Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

The Page Options dialog box offers the following settings.

Note

• To display the Page Options dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Page Options .

(See " Layout Sheet .")

➔ P.182

• A Print Date

Select where the date is printed, as desired. To print the time as well, select B Print Time Also .

• C Print User Name

Select where the user name is printed, as desired.

• D Print Page Number

Select where the page number is printed, as desired.

183

User's Guide

Special Settings Dialog Box iPF840

• E Format Settings

Click to display the Format Settings dialog box, which enables you to complete format-related settings.

Note

• If you specify the same position for multiple items, the items are printed from left to right in this order: date, user name, and page number.

• When you print multiple pages per sheet using Page Layout Printing or similar functions, these items will be printed for each page.

If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special Settings dialog box.

184

Note

• To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Special Settings

.

(See " Layout

Sheet .")

➔ P.182

• Click the processing method for Parameter within the Settings Summaries frame to display a list of the setting details under the frame.

• A Spooling at Printer Driver

Sets whether or not print jobs are spooled in the printer driver and processed by PageComposer.

Printing results may be improved in some cases by setting this to No or No (EMF Spooling) .

Note

• When set to No or No (EMF Spooling) , functions such as Page Layout , Watermark , Reverse Order , Page

Options , FineZoom Settings , and Preview Switching can no longer be used.

• B FineZoom Settings

This function is used in large-format printing.

If it is set to Yes , problems in the printing may be improved.

If it is set to No , image distortions such as fine lines disappearing may be improved.

• C Preview Switching

When this setting is turned on, PageComposer starts when printing is performed with the Open Preview

When Print Job Starts check box selected in the Main sheet.

• D Application Color Matching Priority

When this is on, you can give applications priority in color management.

User's Guide

iPF840 Favorites Sheet

• E Fast Graphic Process

Turning this setting on may help produce the expected results if image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses.

• This function cannot be used on 64-bit version of Windows.

Note

• F Reduce Print Unevenness

If you want to reduce unevenness of the printed image, turn this on to improve the print result. However, printing may take longer for some images.

• G Adjust faint lines

Turn this off to obtain expected results when fine lines have been printed in a color different from other diagrams and illustrations. However, lines in some colors may appear broken.

The following settings are available on the Favorites sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

• A Favorites

Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings favorites.

Using Favorites

➔ P.152

• B Settings Details

Displays details of the favorite selected in the A Favorites .

• C Comment

Displays notes registered in the favorite.

• D Apply Favorite

Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite selected in the A Favorites .

• E Application Settings Priority

Activate this setting to use settings values specified in the source application in preference to favorite settings selected in the A Favorites , when clicking ence, refer to the printer driver help.

D Apply Favorite . For details on the settings items used in prefer-

• F Delete

Click to delete the selected favorite from the A Favorites list.

• G Edit

Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the name and icon for the favorite selected in the A Favorites list.

185

User's Guide

Utility Sheet iPF840

• H Add

Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the current print settings as a favorite.

• I Import

Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a file.

• J Export

Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the favorite settings as a file.

• K Up

Click to move the selected favorite up in the A Favorites list.

• L Down

Click to move the selected favorite down in the A Favorites list.

The following items can be executed on the Utility sheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant utility help.

186

• A Maintenance

Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , which offers the following maintenance for the printer.

• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check

• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning

• Head alignment adjustment

• Feed amount adjustment

• B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy), which enables you to create hot folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders.

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER

➔ P.229

For details,

see " Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ."

➔ P.221

User's Guide

iPF840 Support Sheet

• Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is not displayed in 64-bit editions of Windows.

Note

On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user's manual.

• A Support Information

Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can find the latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

• B User Manual

Click to connect to the Internet and display the printer user's manual.

• C Settings Summaries

Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to confirm the settings for the Main , Page

Setup , Layout , and Favorites sheets.

The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to confirm the settings for the Main , Page Setup , Layout , and

Favorites sheets.

• A Copy

Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. You can paste the settings information into a file created with a text editor or similar application.

187

User's Guide

Device Settings Sheet iPF840

Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the Device

Settings sheet is for configuring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.

The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.

188

• A Automatically switch paper sources (paper size priority)

When turned on, printing is performed by automatically switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 to minimize the roll paper margins depending on the paper size being printed.

Always check " Printing by Automatically Switching Between Upper and Lower Roll Paper "

➔ P.32

before us-

ing the function.

• B Color Compatibility

Click to display the Color Compatibility dialog box, which enables you to adjust colors if you have selected

Color Mode > Color (CAD) .

• For details on color settings,

see " Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings ."

P.57

• C Acquire Status

The paper size information is acquired from the printer, and the width of the roll paper that is actually loaded in the printer is displayed.

• D About

You can display version information for the printer driver.

User's Guide

iPF840 The Features of Preview

The Features of Preview .................................................................................................................................

189

Starting Preview .............................................................................................................................................

189

Preview Main Window ....................................................................................................................................

190

Dialog Area .....................................................................................................................................................

192

Enlarge/Reduce the screen display .................................................................................................................

193

Moving a Page ...............................................................................................................................................

193

Using the ruler ................................................................................................................................................

193

Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees ............................................................................................................

194

Printing with Selecting the Layout ...................................................................................................................

195

Print on the Center .........................................................................................................................................

197

Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ...............................................................................................................

198

The main features of Preview are as follows.

• While viewing this screen, you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software.

• You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen, and you can print the preview screen as it is seen.

Note

• The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Preview settings.

Follow the procedure below to start the Preview.

1

Start the apllication software which you use.

2

From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.

• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

Note

3

On the Main sheet, click on the Open Preview When

Print Job Starts check box.

Click the OK button to save the settings.

Note

• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

User's Guide

189

Preview Main Window iPF840

4

On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click the Print button.

5

Preview main window is displayed.

The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars, preview and dialog area and status bar.

190

Note

• You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar.

• Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

• Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

User's Guide

iPF840 Preview Main Window

• Preview Area

You can check the settings you made in this area.

• Dialog Area

This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.

For more information about Dialog Area, see " Dialog Area ."

➔ P.192

User's Guide

191

Dialog Area iPF840

• Status Bar

This shows the message, Pages and Output Size .

You can select the layout and print on the center.

192

• Media Type / Paper Source /Paper Size

You can confirm the information that is set.

• Layout Selection

You can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.

For more information about Layout Selection ,

see " Printing with Selecting the Layout ."

➔ P.195

• Center Originals Across Roll

You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.

For more information about Center Originals Across Roll ,

see " Print on the Center ."

➔ P.197

• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Enlarge/Reduce the screen display

• No Spaces at Top or Bottom

You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom.

For more information about No Spaces at Top or Bottom

, see " Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ."

➔ P.198

• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

Note

• Print Button

Click the button to start printing.

• Cancel Button

Click the button to stop printing.

• Printer Information

You can confirm the information acquired from the printer.

• Update Printer Information Button

Click the button to update the printer information with connecting to the printer.

• Status Monitor Button

Click the button to start Status Monitor .

You can enlarge or reduce the screen display when you select Zoom from the View menu.

Setting Details

Fit Screen Display all.

Fit to Width

Reduce

Standard

Enlarge

Enlarge More

Display to the width of the paper.

Display at half of the standard size.

Display at the standard size.

Display with the double of the standard size.

Display with the triple of the standard size.

Note

• This item can be selected even if you have clicked the ▼ button in the toolbar Zoom .

You can move a page to display when you select Go to Page from the View menu.

Setting Details

First Page Go to the first page.

Previous Page

Next Page

Last Page

Go To Page

Go to the previous page.

Go to the next page.

Go to the last page.

Go to the specified page.

Note • You can also move a page by clicking on the tool bar.

193

You can confirm the layout with using the ruler.

• Switching the ruler Show/Hide

In the View menu, select Ruler to switch the ruler Show/Hide.

User's Guide

Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees iPF840

• Changing the ruler unit

You can set the ruler unit when you select Units from the View menu.

Setting Details mm Use mm as the ruler unit.

inch Use inches as the ruler unit.

You can select Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Use Driver Settings from the Options menu.

Setting

Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible

Details

Rotates pages in portrait orientation 90 degrees before printing. Pages are only rotated if they can fit lengthwise across the roll.

Follows printer driver settings when determining whether to rotate pages.

Use Driver Settings

Selecting Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Placing a checkmark for Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) on the printer driver

Selecting Use Driver Settings

194

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing with Selecting the Layout

You can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.

1

In Layout Selection , click the layout button to use.

Upper Button

Button Details

Turn at the position of .

Right Button

Turn at the position of .

Left Button

Turn at the position of .

User's Guide

195

Printing with Selecting the Layout iPF840

Lower Button

Button Details

Turn at the position of .

Note

• Right Button or Left Button can be selected only when the rotated pages can fit lengthwise across the roll.

• By clicking Right Button or Left Button , you can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper.

• You can select only Upper Button or Lower Button if Cut Sheet is selected.

Button

The button is selected currently.

Details

The button can be selected.

The button can not be selected.

196

2

Click the Print button.

Printing on the selected layout begins.

User's Guide

iPF840 Print on the Center

You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.

1

Click the Center Originals Across Roll check box on.

2

Click the Print button.

Printing on the center begins.

• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

Note

User's Guide

197

Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom iPF840

You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom.

1

Click the No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box on.

198

2

Click the Print button.

Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins.

User's Guide

iPF840 The Features of Free Layout

The Features of Free Layout ...........................................................................................................................

199

Starting Free Layout .......................................................................................................................................

199

Free Layout Main Window ..............................................................................................................................

201

Detailed Settings ............................................................................................................................................

202

Preferences Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................

203

Page Options Dialog Box ...............................................................................................................................

204

Zoom Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................

205

Format Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................................

205

Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page ..........................................................................................

207

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page .........................................

209

Selecting an Object ........................................................................................................................................

211

Changing the Object Size ...............................................................................................................................

211

Moving an Object ...........................................................................................................................................

212

Rotating an Object .........................................................................................................................................

212

Laying out Objects Automatically ....................................................................................................................

213

Aligning Objects .............................................................................................................................................

213

Changing the Object Overlapping Order .........................................................................................................

215

Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ......................................................................................................................

216

Folded Duplex Window ..................................................................................................................................

217

Finished Size Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................

218

Binding Settings Dialog Box ...........................................................................................................................

219

Prints using Folded Duplex .............................................................................................................................

220

The main features of Free Layout are as follows.

• Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software.

• You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple-file document on one page, or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.

• Any two pages can be arranged and printed in a layout that becomes duplex on folding.

This can be used such as for advertising posters that are suspended from the ceiling.

Note

• The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Free Layout settings.

Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout.

1

Start the apllication software which you use.

199

User's Guide

Starting Free Layout iPF840

2

From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.

• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

Note

3

From the list, select the printer and select the Layout sheet.

• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

Note

4

In the Layout sheet, click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list.

Click the OK button to save the settings.

• When you select Free Layout, all other setting items will be disabled.

Note

5

On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click the Print button.

Free Layout main window is displayed.

200

User's Guide

iPF840 Free Layout Main Window

The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar.

Note

• You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool and status bar.

• Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

• Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

User's Guide

201

Detailed Settings iPF840

• Layout Area

This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation.

• Status Bar

This shows the paper size, unit of length, and number of objects.

The printer driver opens when you select Detailed Settings from the File menu. The printer driver is used to configure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer.

202

Refer to " Printer Driver "

➔ P.158

for details on the printer driver.

Note

• When you select the Detailed Settings , the only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet, the Page Setup sheet, and the Layout sheet. Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled.

User's Guide

iPF840 Preferences Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the File menu. This allows you to configure the preferences of Free Layout.

• Units

Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.

• Gridlines

You can input a grid line width value in numerical characters so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.

Note

• You can input between 10.0 and 200.0(mm) (between 0.39 and 7.88(inch)).

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• Divisions

You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.

Note

• You can input between 1 and 10.

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• Grid Color

Select the grid line color.

• Auto Arrange Spacing

Change the object-to-object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically.

Note

• You can input between 0.0 and 100.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 3.94(inch)).

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• Object Frame Style

You can select the object frame style for printing.

The following settings are available for the object frame style.

Setting

None You can print with no frame style.

Solid Line

Dotted Line

Dashed Line

Details

You can print the solid line as the frame style.

You can print the dotted line as the frame style.

You can print the dashed line as the frame style.

User's Guide

203

Page Options Dialog Box iPF840

Setting Details

Crop Marks You can print with the crop marks.

This dialog box appears when you select Page Options from the File menu. This allows you to configure the roll paper length, object layout order, and margins of Free Layout.

204

• Roll Paper Length

Set the length of one page to print on roll paper.

The following settings are available for roll paper length.

Auto Settings

Setting

Manual Settings

Details

The one-page length to be printed on roll paper is automatically set so that the laid-out objects are printed on one page.

You can input the length of one page to print on roll paper in numerical characters.

Note

• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

• You can input between 203.2 and 18000.0(mm) (between 8.00 and 708.66(inch)).

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• Order

Set the object layout order.

The following settings are available for order.

Setting

Upper Left to Right

Details

The objects are laid out from upper left to right.

Upper Left to Bottom

Upper Right to Left

Lower Left to Top

The objects are laid out from upper left to bottom.

The objects are laid out from upper right to left.

The objects are laid out from lower left to top.

Note

• When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Vertical , you can choose Upper Left to Right or Upper Right to Left .

• When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Horizontal , you can choose Upper Left to Bottom or Lower Left to Top .

User's Guide

iPF840 Zoom Dialog Box

• Margins

You can input the paper margins in numerical characters.

Note

• You can input between 0.0 and 50.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 1.97(inch)).

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

This dialog box appears when you select Zoom from the View menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.

• Scaling

Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.

Note

• You can input between 25 and 400.

• You can change the numbers by clicking ▼ button.

This dialog box appears when you select Format from the Object menu after you select an object.

Size Sheet

You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.

Note

• When the objects are not selected, you can not select Format .

User's Guide

205

Format Dialog Box iPF840

• Rotate

When you place a checkmark here, you can select Rotate Right or Rotate Left .

Setting Details

Rotate Right Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate Left Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise.

• When several objects are selected, you cannot select Rotate .

Note

• Enl./Red.

When you place a checkmark here, you can select Scaling , Fit Paper Size , or Fit Photo Size .

Scaling

Setting Details

Allows you to input the value of the enlargement or reduction ratio of an object.

Fit Paper Size

Fit Photo Size

Prints by enlarging or reducing each object to match the paper size. If you are using roll paper, objects are enlarged or reduced so that the width of each object matches the width of the roll paper.

Prints all of the objects at the specified photo size.

Note

• You can input between 25 and 600.

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

Position Sheet

You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.

Note

• When the objects are not selected, you can not select Format .

206

• Object Position

You can move the object position by changing the values.

Vertical Pos

Setting Details

You can input the number of the vertical position in numerical characters.

Horizontal Pos

Page Pos

You can input the number of the horizontal position in numerical characters.

You can input the number of the page position in numerical characters.

User's Guide

iPF840 Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page

• Object Size

You can confirm the object size.

• When several objects are selected, you cannot display Object Size .

Note

You can lay out and print a multiple-file document on one page.

1

From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.

• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

Note

2

Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box.

3

In the Page Setup sheet, select Paper Source .

Note

• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

User's Guide

207

Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page iPF840

4

In the Layout sheet, click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list.

Note

• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

• When you select Free Layout, all other setting items will be disabled.

5

Click the OK button to save the settings.

6

In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the OK button.

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

208

7

Leaving Free Layout running, open other files with the application software and repeat the above steps.

User's Guide

iPF840 Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page

You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.

1

From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.

• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

Note

2

Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box.

3

In the Page Setup sheet, select Paper Source .

Note

• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

User's Guide

209

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page iPF840

4

In the Layout sheet, click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list.

Note

• Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

• When you select Free Layout, all other setting items will be disabled.

5

Click the OK button to save the settings.

6

In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the OK button.

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

210

7

Leaving Free Layout running, open other files with other application software and repeat the above steps.

User's Guide

iPF840 Selecting an Object

When an object is selected, a select box (blue border) appears around the object.

Note

• To select an object, click that object.

• To select multiple successive objects, click them while holding down the Shift key.

• To select multiple arbitrary objects, click them while holding down the Ctrl key.

• To select all objects, select Select All from the Edit menu.

• When you specify the area with dragging the mouse, the object in the area is selected.

You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value.

• The vertical-to-horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced.

Note

Resizing by means of mouse operation

1

Select an object.

User's Guide

211

Moving an Object iPF840

2

Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box around the object to show the arrow handle, and drag this handle to change the object size.

Resizing by specifying a scaling value

1

Select an object.

Click on the Enl./Red.

checkbox in the

Format Dialog Box

➔ P.205

and select Scaling .

2

You either enter numbers directly.

Note

• You can input between 25 and 600.

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

3

Click the OK button.

You can move the object position.

1

Select an object.

2

Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object to show the crosshair handle, and drag it to move the object.

Alternatively, you can move the Object Position by changing the values in Vertical Pos , Horizontal Pos and Page Pos

in the Format Dialog Box

➔ P.205

.

212

You can rotate the object.

1

Select an object.

User's Guide

iPF840 Laying out Objects Automatically

2

Select Rotate Left 90 Degrees or Rotate Right 90

Degrees from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may click on the Rotate check box

in the Format Dialog Box

➔ P.205

then select

Rotate

Right or Rotate Left , and click the OK button.

Click Auto Arrange Object in the tool bar. This automatically lays out objects. Alternatively, you may select Auto

Arrange Object from the Object menu.

Note

• The object layout order varies depending on the Order

setting in the Page Options Dialog Box

➔ P.204

dialog box.

You can align objects systematically.

1

Select multiple objects.

2

Click the align button from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select the align menu from the Object menu.

• Align Top

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the top.

User's Guide

213

Aligning Objects iPF840

• Center Vertically

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the vertical center.

• Align Bottom

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the bottom.

• Align Left

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the left.

• Center Horizontally

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the horizontal center.

214

User's Guide

iPF840 Changing the Object Overlapping Order

• Align Right

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the right.

You can change the object overlapping order.

1

Select an object.

2

Select the Overlapping Order menu from the Object menu.

Note

• The order of overlapping affects the order of objects automatically laid out.

• You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.

• Bring to Front

Moves the object to the frontmost position.

• Send to Back

Moves the object to the backmost position.

User's Guide

215

Pasting a Copied or Cut Object iPF840

• Bring Forward

Moves the object one position to the front.

• Send Backward

Moves the object one position to the back.

1

Click Copy or Cut from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu.

2

Click Paste from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select Paste from the Edit menu.

Note

• The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page.

• You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.

• In order to paste an object on any position that you like, you can paste the object with Pointed Paste by clicking the right button of the mouse on any position that you want.

216

User's Guide

iPF840 Folded Duplex Window

This window is displayed if you select Folded Duplex from the Edit menu after selecting an object. Using the Folded Duplex function allows you to print with fold lines added.

The Folded Duplex window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar.

Note

• The toolbar and status bar can be toggled between hidden and displayed from the View menu.

• Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

• Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

User's Guide

217

Finished Size Settings Dialog Box iPF840

• Layout Area

This allows you to check the arrangement and orientation of objects.

• Status Bar

This shows the paper source, roll paper width, and output size.

This dialog box is displayed when you select Finished Size Settings from the Edit menu. This allows you to configure finished size settings.

218

• Finished Size

Selects the method for setting the finished size.

The following settings are available for the finished size.

Setting

Fit Roll Paper Width

Details

Prints by automatically enlarging or reducing the entire document so that the width of the document matches the roll paper width.

User's Guide

iPF840 Binding Settings Dialog Box

Setting

Specify Folded Size

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)

Details

Prints by automatically enlarging or reducing the entire document to match the size of the paper. Select the actual size of the paper you want to print on in Fit Paper Size .

Prints by rotating pages by 90 degrees. Pages are automatically rotated if they will fit within the roll paper width when rotated, and are not rotated if they will not fit within the roll paper width.

This is displayed when you select Binding Settings from the Edit menu. This allows you to configure the binding edge settings.

• Binding Edge

Configures the binding edge when folding paper.

The following settings are available for the binding edge.

Bottom

Setting Details

Prints by placing the binding margin (gutter) at the bottom of the document.

Top Prints by placing the binding margin (gutter) at the top of the document.

• Binding

Configures the binding margin (gutter).

Prints by creating a binding margin (gutter) of the specified size. Enter the margin size as a number.

• The values that can be entered are 0 to 50 (mm).

Note

• Print Fold Lines

Configures the color and type of fold lines.

• To not print fold lines, clear the Print Fold Lines checkbox.

Note

• Fold Line Color

You can select the fold lines.

• Fold Line Type

You can select the fold lines.

The following settings are available for the fold line type.

Solid Line

Setting Details

You can print the solid line as the frame style.

Dotted Line

Dashed Line

You can print the dotted line as the frame style.

You can print the dashed line as the frame style.

User's Guide

219

Prints using Folded Duplex iPF840

• Only Print Center and Edges

To print fold lines at the center and both edges, select the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox.

This prints 2 pages consecutively. Folding back the paper at the fold lines of the center substitutes for duplex printing.

1

Select two objects from the layout area of Free Layout.

2

Select Folded Duplex from the Edit menu of Free Layout.

Open the Folded Duplex window and arrange the selected objects in the layout area.

3

Open the Finished Size Settings dialog box from the Edit menu.

4

Select Fit Roll Paper Width or Specify Folded Size in Finished Size .

• Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) is also available when Specify Folded Size is selected.

Note

5

Click OK to save the settings.

6

Open the Binding Settings dialog box from the Edit menu.

7

Select Bottom or Top in Binding Edge .

8

Specify the Binding width in Binding .

9

Configure the Fold Line Color and Fold Line Type from Print Fold Lines .

• When the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox is selected, fold lines are only printed at the three locations of the center and both edges.

Note

10

Click OK to save the settings.

11

Confirm the print setting and begin printing.

220

User's Guide

iPF840 The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ..............................................................................

221

Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ..........................................................................................

221

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box ......................................................................................

222

Hot Folder ......................................................................................................................................................

223

Creating a New Hot Folder .............................................................................................................................

223

Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder .....................................................................................

226

Setting the Print Parameters ...........................................................................................................................

228

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER ......................................................

229

The main features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows.

• Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed.

• You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection, media type and output profile selection, and matching methods, in addition to borderless printing and enlargement/reduction process without growing through the printer driver.

Note

• The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings.

Follow the procedure below to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

To start by selecting Devices and Printers from the start button

1

Open the folder of the OS you are using for configuring printers.

For example, on Windows 7, click the start button on the Desktop and open the Devices and Printers window.

2

Right-click the Printers icon and select Printing Preferences to open the Printing Preferences dialog box.

In the Utility sheet, click the Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy button.

User's Guide

221

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box iPF840

3

The Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box displays.

Note

• If you click on the Add to Startup folder check box in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the task bar when starting Windows thereafter.

• This function cannot be used on 64-bit version of Windows.

To start by selecting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy from the start button

1

From the Windows start button, select Color imageRUN-

NER Enlargement Copy .

2

The Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box displays.

The explanation below is on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box.

222

Note

• For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

dialog box, see " Starting Color imageRUN-

NER Enlargement Copy ."

P.221

User's Guide

iPF840 Hot Folder

• Hot Folder

The hot folder list appears.

• Add Button

Click the button to open the Easy Setup Wizard dialog box so that you can add a hot folder.

• Edit Button

From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the button to open the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box that allows you to edit the hot folder.

• Delete Button

From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the button to delete the hot folder.

• Start Button

Clicking the button changes the status of the selected inactive Hot Folder to active .

• Stop Button

Clicking the button changes the status of the selected active Hot Folder to inactive .

• Add to Startup folder

Register the application in the Windows startup menu.

• Save Printed Data

Automatically saves printed data.

• About Button

Click the button to display the name and the version number of the utility.

• Operation Guide Button

Click the button to display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual .

Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

• When transferred to the PC's hot folder, the document data scanned with the Color imageRUNNER is printed in enlarged size from the printer according to the print conditions set in the hot folder.

• You can create a new hot folder, edit or delete an existing one, and set print conditions at will.

• You can create up to 20 hot folders.

Note

1

Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, and then click the Add button.

Note

• For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box,

see " Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ."

P.221

223

User's Guide

Creating a New Hot Folder iPF840

2

The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays.

Click the Next button.

3

Select the type of printer to use.

Click the Next button.

4

Select the media type to print.

• If the Borderless Printing checkbox is checked, only media types that can be used for borderless printing are displayed in the list.

Note

Click the Next button.

224

User's Guide

iPF840 Creating a New Hot Folder

5

Select roll paper or cut sheet to print. Also, select the media size to print.

Click the Next button.

6

To receive a document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER, you need to share a folder. Enter the folder shared name in Shared Name .

Click the Next button.

Note

• This shared name is used as the name of the hot folder.

• You cannot use the Back button, after clicking the Next button here.

7

Click Finish button to close the Easy Setup Wizard dialog box.

User's Guide

225

Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder iPF840

The hot folder you have created appears in the Hot

Folder list in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box.

1

Share the folder you want to specify as a hot folder.

2

Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, and then click the Add button.

3

Note

• For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box,

see " Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ."

➔ P.221

The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays.

Click the Manual Settings button.

226

User's Guide

iPF840 Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder

4

The Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box displays.

Enter the hot folder name in Name .

Click the Browse botton, with selecting Specify a folder , to set the existing shared folder.

5

The location of the folders will appear.

Select the folder to specify a hot folder, and click the

OK button.

User's Guide

227

Setting the Print Parameters iPF840

6

As necessary, set the print conditions in the hot fold-

er. (See " Setting the Print Parameters .")

➔ P.228

Click the OK button to close the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box.

The hot folder you have created appears in the Hot

Folder list in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box.

The printer driver opens when you click the Properties button in the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box. The printer driver is used to configure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer.

228

Refer to " Printer Driver "

➔ P.158

for details on the printer driver.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER

Note

• The only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet, the Page Setup sheet, and the Layout sheet. Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled.

• Apply Sharpness

Place a checkmark here to set the sharpness.

Drag the slider bar to the left or right to adjust. You can also adjust by directly entering a number in the numeric input field.

Note

• You can input between 0 and 500.

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• You cannot be applied to PDF files.

Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.

Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.

This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.

To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy , first complete these settings in the following order.

1.

Register a hot folder on your computer.

Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and com-

plete the settings for enlargement copy. For details, see " Creating a New Hot Folder ."

➔ P.223

2.

Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.

After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUN-

NER.

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the Color imageRUN-

NER.

For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

Scanning the original and print an enlargement

Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer. For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

1

Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.

2

Press Send to display the screen for transmission.

3

Press Favorites , and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.

4

Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all originals, press

Done on the touch-panel display.

Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you specified for the folder.

229

User's Guide

Print Plug-In for Officefeatures iPF840

Print Plug-In for Officefeatures ........................................................................................................................

230

Steps to install ................................................................................................................................................

230

Steps to uninstall ............................................................................................................................................

233

When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed .................................................................................................

233

To start from Microsoft Word ..........................................................................................................................

236

Print Matching Roll Width(Word) .....................................................................................................................

238

Borderless Printing(Word) ...............................................................................................................................

240

Multi-Page Printing(Word) ...............................................................................................................................

242

Register the settings (Word) ............................................................................................................................

243

Print Using Registered Settings(Word) ............................................................................................................

244

Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(Word) ...........................................................................................

246

To start from Microsoft PowerPoint .................................................................................................................

247

Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint) ............................................................................................................

249

Borderless Printing(PowerPoint) ......................................................................................................................

250

Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint) ......................................................................................................................

252

Register the settings (PowerPoint) ..................................................................................................................

254

Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint) ...................................................................................................

255

Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint) .................................................................................

256

To start from Microsoft Excel ..........................................................................................................................

258

Print Entire Sheet(Excel) ..................................................................................................................................

259

Print Selected Area(Excel) ...............................................................................................................................

262

Configuring Binding (Excel) .............................................................................................................................

264

Configuring Special Settings ...........................................................................................................................

265

230

Print Plug-In for Office is a Plug-In that enables easy printing from Microsoft Office .

• It is displayed on the toolbar/ribbon, so it is easily accessible.

• It can be set by just selecting from the Wizard.

• Large-Format Printing custom size can also be set in the Wizard from Microsoft Word or Microsoft Power-

Point .

• Custom size can be set automatically from Microsoft Excel .

• The layout can be checked before printing by starting the preview screen.

• 64 bit edition Windows OS operates only on WOW64 (32 bit emulator).

Note

Important

• The Print Plug-In for Office toolbar/ribbon might not be displayed in Microsoft Office after installing image-

PROGRAF Print Plug-In for Office . For details, refer to

" When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed "

P.233

.

• If you opened the Office document from Internet Explorer , the software will not run correctly.

• If you are editing an embedded object or link object, the software will not run correctly.

• If you added the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In ribbon to the Microsoft Office Quick Access toolbar, the software will not run correctly.

Below are the steps to install Print Plug-In for Office .

• You must log into Windows as an Administrator before the installation.

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Steps to install

1

Insert "User Software CD-ROM" into the CD-ROM drive and start the installer.

• If the installer screen does not appear automatically, open the CD-ROM drive icon of your computer and double-click the iPFInst.exe

icon.

Note

2

Click the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In button.

3

Click the Next button.

4

Read the License Agreement , and click the Yes button.

User's Guide

231

Steps to install iPF840

5

Click the Start button.

6

Click the Yes button.

Note

• The following message may be displayed in Windows 8 or a later OS. If this happens, install the .NET Framework by following the procedure.

7

Click the Exit button.

The installation for Print Plug-In for Office is complete.

232

User's Guide

iPF840 Steps to uninstall

Important

• When you install this software, the virtual printer Canon imagePROGRAF PrintPlugIn may be installed. If you want to use this software, do not uninstall the virtual printer Canon imagePROGRAF PrintPlugIn .

• The Print Plug-In for Office toolbar/ribbon might not be displayed in Microsoft Office after installing image-

PROGRAF Print Plug-In for Office .

Refer to the following topic for details on how to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Office toolbar/ ribbon.

When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed

➔ P.233

Below are the steps to uninstall Print Plug-In for Office .

1

If Microsoft Office is open, close it.

2

Select Control Panel from the start menu.

3

Select Uninstall a program .

4

Select imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Office , and then click the Uninstall button.

Note

• You cannot uninstall Print Plug-In for Office if an Office application is running. When a message appears, select

Cancel and close all Office applications that are running.

Buttons such as Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In sometimes do not appear in the Word , PowerPoint and

Excel Office applications, and the Print Plug-In for Office functions are not available.

In this event, re-install Print Plug-In for Office .

If you are using Microsoft Office 2003 or later, you can also enable add-ins to display Print Plug-In for Office .

See below for the procedure for re-installing the plug-in or enabling add-ins.

Re-installing Print Plug-In for Office

If a problem occurs, such as the system or an application terminating abnormally, the Microsoft Office application disables add-ins as a safety precaution.

In this event, you will need to re-install Print Plug-In for Office to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

Note

• You cannot re-install Print Plug-In for Office once an Office application is running. When the message appears, select Cancel and close the active Office application.

Re-install Print Plug-In for Office as follows:

1

Close Microsoft Office if it is open.

233

User's Guide

When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed iPF840

2

Install Print Plug-In for Office .

For information about instsalling, see " Steps to install ."

P.230

Enabling Print Plug-In for Office for items disabled in Office applications

If a problem occurs, such as the system or an application terminating abnormally, the Microsoft Office application disables add-ins as a safety precaution.

In this event, you will need to restore the disabled add-ins in order to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

Use the procedure below to restore the add-ins disabled by Microsoft Office .

• For Microsoft Office 2010 or later

1

Select Options from the File menu.

2

From the list on the left side of the <application name> options dialog box, select Add-ins .

3

Select Disabled Items in the Manage combo box and click the Go button.

234

4

If Addin imageprograf print plug-in (ipfaddinif.dll) is displayed in the Disabled Items dialog box, select it and click the Enable button.

5

Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application.

User's Guide

iPF840 When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed

• For Microsoft Office 2007

1

Click the Office button and then click the <application name> options button.

2

From the list on the left side of the <application name> options dialog box, select Add-ins .

3

Select Disabled Items in the Manage combo box and click the Go button.

4

If Addin imageprograf print plug-in (ipfaddinif.dll) is displayed in the Disabled Items dialog box, select it and click the Enable button.

235

5

Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application.

• For Microsoft Office 2003

User's Guide

To start from Microsoft Word iPF840

1

Click About <application name> in the Help menu of application.

2

Click the Disabled Items button in the About <application name> dialog box.

3

If Addin imageprograf print plug-in (ipfaddinif.dll) is displayed in the Disabled Items dialog box, select it and click the Enable button.

4

Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application.

236

Below are the steps to start Print Plug-In for Office from Microsoft Word .

1

Start Microsoft Word .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed on the toolbar/ ribbon, click it.

Important

• If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is not displayed, refer to the following.

" When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed "

➔ P.233

User's Guide

iPF840 To start from Microsoft Word

3

Check that the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ ribbon is displayed.

4

Click the buttons on the toolbar/ribbon according to the items you want to set.

Icon Contents

Menu

Displays the About , Help , and Special Settings dialog boxes.

You can change the settings using the Special Settings dialog box.

Refer to " Configuring Special Settings "

➔ P.265

for details.

Printer list

Select Printer.

If you select Show All Printers , the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again.

Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update the display.

The print Wizard is displayed.

The settings Print Matching Roll Width , Borderless Printing , Multi-Page Printing , and Print Using Registered Settings can be set.

Print Button

Large-Format Wizard is displayed.

Settings for Portrait or Landscape Orientation can be set.

Paper Settings Button

Printing Wizard dialog box

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

237

User's Guide

Print Matching Roll Width(Word) iPF840

Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wizard is open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

• The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data again.

Prints to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, and also print Portrait and Landscape orientations made in Large-Format Printing Wizard .

1

Start Microsoft Word .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

238

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

User's Guide

iPF840 Print Matching Roll Width(Word)

4

Click Print Matching Roll Width .

5

Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

6

Select image size.

7

Select layout.

8

Select Next .

9

Select Media Type .

10

Select Print Range from All Pages , Current Page , and Pages .

If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.

11

Enter Copies .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if you to need print multiple times using the same setting.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum length will be the lesser of 5.587 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

12

Press Print to start printing.

User's Guide

239

Borderless Printing(Word) iPF840

Prints up to the border of the media. Photos and posters can be printed without worrying about margins.

1

Start Microsoft Word .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

4

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

Click Borderless Printing .

240

5

A confirmation dialog box is displayed. If the data fills up the page, confirm that Continue using the plugin is selected in Choose how to proceed and press OK .

Note

• To adjust the data, select Return to application and press OK . Exit Print Plug-In for Office and return to the application.

User's Guide

iPF840 Borderless Printing(Word)

6

Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

7

Select layout.

8

Select Next .

9

Select Media Type .

10

Select Print Range from All Pages , Current Page , and Pages .

If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.

11

Enter Copies .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• Press the One-Touch Registration button to register the settings. This is useful for multiple printing using the same settings.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can confirm and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 5.587 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

12

Press Print to start printing.

241

User's Guide

Multi-Page Printing(Word) iPF840

Prints multiple pages as one page. You can print handouts into a single page, or print matter with many pages.

1

Start Microsoft Word .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

4

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

Click Multi-Page Printing .

242

5

Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

6

Select layout from Layout Selection .

User's Guide

iPF840 Register the settings (Word)

7

Select Next .

8

Select Media Type .

9

Select Print Range from All Pages , Current Page , and Pages .

If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.

10

Enter Copies .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if you to need print multiple times using the same setting.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• The maximum length for Multi-Page Printing is the lesser of 5.587 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

11

Press Print to start printing.

If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting, you can select One-Touch Registration . Registered settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings .

1

Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width , Borderless Printing or Multi-Page Printing of

Printing Menu .

Note

• Up to 20 items can be registered.

• The available settings are as follows.

Print Matching Roll Width(Word)

➔ P.238

Borderless Printing(Word)

P.240

Multi-Page Printing(Word)

➔ P.242

243

User's Guide

Print Using Registered Settings(Word) iPF840

2

Click the One-Touch Registration button.

3

Enter name in Name .

Up to 31 characters can be entered.

4

Click . The name you entered is displayed in Registered Settings .

5

Click OK , and return to the Print screen.

6

Click Print to print, and click Cancel to cancel the print.

• Clicking Cancel in the Print screen will not delete the registered settings.

Note

Prints using the registered settings.

1

Start Microsoft Word .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

244

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

User's Guide

iPF840 Print Using Registered Settings(Word)

4

Click Print Using Registered Settings .

5

Click the Next button.

6

Select Media Type .

7

Select Print Range from All Pages , Current Page , or Pages .

If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.

8

Enter Copies .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• The maximum print length when printing with the registered settings is the lesser of 5.587 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

9

Press Print to start printing.

245

User's Guide

Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(Word) iPF840

Print to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, or print the Landscape or Portrait Orientation Page Sizes made in the Large-Format Printing Wizard .

Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation.

Use the Large-Format Printing Wizard to create portrait page sizes for Potrait Orientation, and landscape page sizes for Landscape Orientation.

1

Start Microsoft Word .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3

Click Paper Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Note

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wizard is open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

4

Click Portrait Orientation or Landscape Orientation .

• The steps taken to create a Portrait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure.

Note

246

User's Guide

iPF840 To start from Microsoft PowerPoint

5

Adjust Length from the list-box or slide-bar.

6

Click the Create Page button.

7

Click OK if the message is displayed.

8

Edit and create the document.

• Printing is done in Print Matching Roll Width of the Printing Wizard . For details on Print Matching Roll

Width

, see " Print Matching Roll Width(Word) ."

➔ P.238

Note

Important

• The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data again.

Below are the steps to start Print Plug-In for Office from Microsoft PowerPoint .

1

Start Microsoft PowerPoint .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed on the toolbar/ ribbon, click it.

3

Important

• If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is not displayed, refer to the following.

When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed

P.233

Check that the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ ribbon is displayed.

4

Click the buttons on the toolbar/ribbon according to the items you want to set.

Icon Contents

Displays the About , Help , and Special Settings dialog boxes.

(See " Configuring Special Settings .")

➔ P.265

Menu

Printer list

Select Printer.

If you select Show All Printers , the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again.

Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update the display.

The print Wizard is displayed.

The settings Print Matching Roll Width , Borderless Printing , Multi-Page Printing , and Print Using Registered Settings can be set.

Print Button

User's Guide

247

To start from Microsoft PowerPoint iPF840

Icon Contents

Large-Format Wizard is displayed.

Settings for Portrait or Landscape Orientation can be set.

Paper Settings Button

Printing Wizard dialog box

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

• If you open a password protected document as read-only, the Printing Wizard cannot be run.

Note

Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box

248

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wizard is open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

• The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data again.

Note

• If you open a password protected document as read-only, the Large-Format Printing Wizard cannot be run. Remove the password protection.

User's Guide

iPF840 Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint)

Prints to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, and also print Portrait and Landscape orientations made in Large-Format Printing Wizard .

1

Start Microsoft PowerPoint .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

4

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

Click Print Matching Roll Width .

5

Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

6

Select image size.

7

Select layout.

User's Guide

249

Borderless Printing(PowerPoint) iPF840

8

Select Next .

9

Select Media Type .

10

Select Print Range from All Slides , Current Slide , and Slides .

If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.

11

Enter Copies .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if you to need print multiple times using the same setting.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum length will be the lesser of 14.22 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

12

Press Print to start printing.

Prints up to the border of the media. Photos and posters can be printed without worrying about margins.

1

Start Microsoft PowerPoint .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

250

User's Guide

iPF840 Borderless Printing(PowerPoint)

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

4

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

Click Borderless Printing .

5

A confirmation dialog box is displayed. If the data fills up the page, confirm that Continue using the plugin is selected in Choose how to proceed and press OK .

Note

• To adjust the data, select Return to application and press OK . Exit Print Plug-In for Office and return to the application.

251

User's Guide

Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint) iPF840

6

Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

7

Select layout.

8

Select Next .

9

Select Media Type .

10

Select Print Range from All Slides , Current Slide , and Slides .

If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.

11

Enter Copies .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• Press the One-Touch Registration button to register the settings. This is useful for multiple printing using the same settings.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can confirm and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 14.22 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

12

Press Print to start printing.

252

Prints multiple pages as one page. You can print handouts into a single page, or print matter with many pages.

1

Start Microsoft PowerPoint .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

User's Guide

iPF840 Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint)

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

4

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

Click Multi-Page Printing .

5

Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

6

Select layout from Layout Selection .

7

Select Next .

User's Guide

253

Register the settings (PowerPoint) iPF840

8

Select Media Type .

9

Select Print Range from All Slides , Current Slide , and Slides .

If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.

10

Enter Copies .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if you to need print multiple times using the same setting.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• The maximum length for Multi-Page Printing is the lesser of 14.22 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

11

Press Print to start printing.

If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting, you can select One-Touch Registration . Registered settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings .

1

Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width , Borderless Printing or Multi-Page Printing of

Printing Menu .

Note

• Up to 20 items can be registered.

• The available settings are as follows.

Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint)

➔ P.249

Borderless Printing(PowerPoint)

➔ P.250

Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint)

➔ P.252

2

Click the One-Touch Registration button.

254

3

Enter name in Name .

Up to 31 characters can be entered.

4

Click . The name you entered is displayed in Registered Settings .

5

Click OK , and return to the Print screen.

6

Click Print to print, and click Cancel to cancel the print.

• Clicking Cancel in the Print screen will not delete the registered settings.

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint)

Prints using the registered settings.

1

Start Microsoft PowerPoint .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

4

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

Click Print Using Registered Settings .

User's Guide

255

Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint) iPF840

5

Click the Next button.

6

Select Media Type .

7

Select Print Range from All Slides , Current Slide , and Slides .

If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.

8

Enter Copies .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• The maximum print length when printing with the registered settings is the lesser of 14.22 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.

9

Press Print to start printing.

256

Print to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, or print the Landscape or Portrait Orientation Page Sizes made in the Large-Format Printing Wizard .

Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation.

Use the Large-Format Printing Wizard to create portrait page sizes for Potrait Orientation, and landscape page sizes for Landscape Orientation.

1

Start Microsoft PowerPoint .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

User's Guide

iPF840 Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint)

3

Click Paper Settings from the imagePROGRAF

Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

The Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wizard is open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

4

Click Portrait Orientation or Landscape Orientation .

• The steps taken to create a Portrait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure.

Note

5

Adjust Length from the list-box or slide-bar.

6

Click the Create Page button.

7

Click OK if the message is displayed.

User's Guide

257

To start from Microsoft Excel iPF840

8

Edit and create the document.

Important

• The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data again.

Note

• Printing is done in Print Matching Roll Width of the Printing Wizard . For details on Print Matching Roll

Width

, see " Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint) ."

➔ P.249

Below are the steps to start Print Plug-In for Office from Microsoft Excel .

1

Start Microsoft Excel .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed on the toolbar/ ribbon, click it.

3

Important

• If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is not displayed, refer to the following.

When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed

➔ P.233

Check that the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is displayed.

4

Click the buttons on the toolbar/ribbon according to the items you want to set.

Icon Contents

Displays the About , Help , and Special Settings dialog boxes.

(See " Configuring Special Settings .")

➔ P.265

Menu

Printer list

Select Printer.

If you select Show All Printers , the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again.

Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update the display.

The print Wizard is displayed.

The settings Print Entire Sheet and Print Selected Area can be set.

Print Button

258

User's Guide

iPF840 Print Entire Sheet(Excel)

Printing Wizard dialog box

Important

• If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.

• The Printing Wizard will not start if you click the Print button on the toolbar/ribbon while editing a cell.

• When more than one worksheet is selected, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. Select only one worksheet and click Print again.

• When an object is selected, the Printing Wizard is not started if you click the Print button on the toolbar/ribbon.

• If the paper size in Excel is blank, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. From the File menu in Excel, select Page Setup and check Paper size .

Note

• If you click the Print button with a graph selected, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to continue printing. If you click No , you will return to the application.

• If you click the Print button with a page break set, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to continue printing. If you click No , you will return to the application. If you do not use the set page break, check the page break preview and change the setting.

• If you click the Print button with a page range set, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to continue printing. If you click No , you will return to the application. If you do not use the set page range, check the page break preview and change the setting.

• If you click the Print button with a worksheet or cell protected, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to continue printing. If you click No , you will return to the application. If you want to change the setting, remove the protection from the worksheet or cell.

For resizing the entire sheet to fit the roll width. Choose this option to enlarge the currently displayed sheet before printing.

1

Start Microsoft Excel .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

259

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

Important

• When more than one worksheet is selected, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. Select only one worksheet and click Print again.

User's Guide

Print Entire Sheet(Excel) iPF840

If a print area is set, a confirmation message dialog box will appear.

To print the entire sheet, cancel the setting of the print area.

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

4

Click Print Entire Sheet .

A message will appear informing you that analysis is in progress.

260

User's Guide

iPF840 Print Entire Sheet(Excel)

The Layout menu will appear automatically.

Note

• If data analysis requires time, a message dialog will appear. If you select No , you will return to the application.

5

Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

6

Select image size.

7

Select layout.

8

To configure Binding , click the Binding Settings button.

Refer to

" Configuring Binding (Excel) "

➔ P.264

for details on the procedure for configuring

Binding .

9

Select Next .

10

11

Select

Enter

Media Type

Copies .

.

User's Guide

261

Print Selected Area(Excel) iPF840

12

If the upper and lower margins are too wide, check No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) .

The upper and lower margins can be checked in Print Preview .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum print length is 18.0m.

13

Press Print to start printing.

Important

• If divided into plural pages, try reducing the data size or the range you select.

• You cannot run Print or Print Preview if you select it for a worksheet with no data displayed.

For resizing the selected range of cells to fit the roll width. Choose this option to enlarge a particular part of the sheet before printing.

1

Start Microsoft Excel .

2

If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.

3

Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.

Important

• When more than one worksheet is selected, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. Select only one worksheet and click Print again.

If a print area is set, a confirmation message dialog box will appear.

To print the selected area, cancel the setting of the print area.

262

User's Guide

iPF840 Print Selected Area(Excel)

The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.

4

Click Print Selected Area .

• If only one cell is selected, Print Selected Area cannot be selected.

Important

A message will appear informing you that analysis is in progress.

The Layout menu will appear automatically.

Important

• If the range selected in Excel 2007 or later is too large, it will not be possible to analyze the data. Select a smaller range and then run the analysis.

263

User's Guide

Configuring Binding (Excel) iPF840

Note

• If data analysis requires time, a message dialog will appear. If you select No , you will return to the application.

5

Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.

6

Select image size.

7

Select layout.

8

To configure Binding , click the Binding Settings button.

Refer to

" Configuring Binding (Excel) "

➔ P.264

for details on the procedure for configuring

Binding .

9

Select Next .

10

Select Media Type .

11

Enter Copies .

12

If the upper and lower margins are too wide, check No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) .

The upper and lower margins can be checked in Print Preview .

Note

• When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.

• When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.

• Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen.

• When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum print length is 18.0m.

13

Press Print to start printing.

Important

• If divided into plural pages, try reducing the data size or the range you select.

• You cannot run Print or Print Preview if you select it for a worksheet with no data displayed.

264

You can configure Binding margins for binding printouts.

1

Configure the settings up to Layout Selection in the Layout screen in Print Entire Sheet or Print Selected Area .

Refer to

" Print Entire Sheet(Excel) "

➔ P.259

and

" Print Selected Area(Excel) "

➔ P.262

for the configuration methods.

User's Guide

iPF840 Configuring Special Settings

2

Click the Binding Settings button.

Important

• You cannot click the Binding Settings button in the following situations.

• When the Image Size is set to a value smaller than 100%

• When a graph is selected

• When page breaks have been set

• When a sheet or cell is protected

Open the Binding Settings dialog box.

3

If the Binding checkbox is not checked, select it to turn binding on.

4

Select Binding Edge .

5

Select Binding Margin .

6

Click the OK button.

Return to the Layout screen.

Check that the Binding settings are applied in the preview screen.

7

Configure the settings in the Printing Wizard dialog box.

You can configure Special Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar.

1

Click imagePROGRAF in the toolbar, and select

Special Settings .

2

Turn the checkbox for the item you want to change on or off.

Item

Show progress indicator during plug-in startup

Details

When this setting is off, hides the progress indicator that appears while the plug-in is starting up.

User's Guide

265

Configuring Special Settings iPF840

Item

Center sheets and print areas

Ensure image quality when creating page sizes

Correct the print area when analyzing

Details

When this setting is off, printing is performed without changing the position.

When this setting is on, printing is performed with the top, bottom, left, and right margins layed out equally. When this setting is off, printing is performed without changing the position.

This function is only valid in Microsoft Excel .

When this setting is on, documents are created at the maximum size. This reduces the enlargement ratio during actual printing, which minimizes degradation of the quality of photos, etc.

This function is only valid in Microsoft PowerPoint .

For data that cannot be processed with usual data analysis, the print area is corrected and then the data is processed. When data analysis fails, you may be able to print by turning on this checkbox.

This function is only valid in Microsoft Excel .

3

Click OK to close the Special Settings dialog box.

266

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

15

29

157

Mac OS Software

Printer Driver .....................................................................................

268

Preview ..............................................................................................

286

Free Layout .......................................................................................

307

Printmonitor .................................................................................

499

Media Configuration Tool ............................................................

400

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

549

565

603

635

657

331

425

463

475

495

661

imagePROGRAF

267

Printer Driver Settings iPF840

Printer Driver Settings ....................................................................................................................................

268

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver .............................................................................................................

269

Confirming Print Settings ...............................................................................................................................

270

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ..........................................................................................

271

Using Favorites ..............................................................................................................................................

271

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .............................................................................

272

Main Pane .....................................................................................................................................................

272

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................

276

View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application .......................................................................................

278

Matching pane ..........................................................................................................................................

278

Color Settings Pane: Color .......................................................................................................................

280

Object Adjustment dialog box: Color .........................................................................................................

281

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome ...........................................................................................................

282

Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome .............................................................................................

283

Page Setup Pane ..........................................................................................................................................

283

Additional Settings Pane ................................................................................................................................

284

For instructions on accessing the Mac OS printer driver, refer to the following topics.

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications

P.272

268

For information on the Mac OS printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

Main Pane

➔ P.272

You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose Easy

Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box

➔ P.276

View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application

➔ P.278

Color Settings Pane: Color

➔ P.280

Object Adjustment dialog box: Color

➔ P.281

Matching pane

➔ P.278

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome

P.282

User's Guide

iPF840 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver

Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome

➔ P.283

Page Setup Pane

P.283

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the paper size and source, and automatic cutting.

Additional Settings Pane

➔ P.284

You can configure the method of outputting print jobs to the printer.

With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications on a

single page before printing. For details, see " Free Layout ."

➔ P.307

With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or size set-

tings while viewing a preview screen. For details, see " Preview ."

➔ P.286

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

1

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

Note

• Page Setup might not be displayed in the menu depending on the OS you are using and the application software.

In this case, select Print from the menu in the application software, and configure the settings in the upper part of the printer driver screen that is displayed.

2

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3

Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5

In the application menu, choose Print .

User's Guide

269

Confirming Print Settings iPF840

6

Access the Main pane.

7

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

8

Access the Page Setup pane.

9

In the A Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.

10

If Roll Paper is selected in A Paper Source , select the width of the roll paper that is loaded in B Roll

Width .

Note

• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.

For details on available printing conditions,

see " Printer Driver Settings ."

➔ P.268

270

The ways to confirm what printing conditions have been specified are as follows.

Checking a print preview

You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.

Confirming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews,

see " Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ."

➔ P.145

User's Guide

iPF840 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing

This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview function.

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Access the Main pane.

3

Select the O Print Preview check box.

4

Click M Print .

5

The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.

6

Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.

7

Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.

• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview

functions, see " Preview ."

➔ P.286

Note

You can use the Presets function in Mac OS for favorite-based printing.

User's Guide

271

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications iPF840

Note

• You can save the current print settings by clicking Save Current Settings as Preset (or Save As depending on your version of operating system) from the Presets list in the printing dialog box. This function is supported by the operating system. Refer to the Mac OS manual for details.

1

In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

Note

• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

2

Select the printer in the Printer list.

3

Click Print to start printing.

As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.

272

The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

• On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or switch to

Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

User's Guide

iPF840 Main Pane

Common Items

• A Media Type

Select the paper type.

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide

. (See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• C Set

Displays Paper Detailed Settings . You can configure the printing settings to match the type of media, such as the ink drying time.

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box

➔ P.276

• O Print Preview

When the check box is selected, imagePROGRAF Preview is launched before printing.

This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.

• When Free Layout is selected on the Page Setup panel, Free Layout is disabled.

Important

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing

P.145

273

User's Guide

Main Pane iPF840

Configuration using Easy Settings

• E Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Printing Photos and Images

➔ P.43

Printing Office Documents

➔ P.47

• F Print Quality

Choose the level of print quality.

• G View set.

Click to display the View set.

dialog box, which enables you to confirm the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the order of items listed in E Print Target .

View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application

➔ P.278

Configuration using Advanced Settings

274

User's Guide

iPF840 Main Pane

• E Print Priority

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

➔ P.66

• F Print Quality

Choose the level of print quality.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

➔ P.66

• N Highest quality

When the check box is selected, printing is performing focusing on quality. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.

Note

• If you set F Print Quality to High , you can select N Highest quality . However, depending on A Media

Type , you may not be able to select N Highest quality .

• K Economy Printing

When this mode is selected, you can print with less ink consumed. However, print quality is lower than in regular printing. Select this option to save ink, such as when printing to check drawings. Depending on the A Media Type and F Print Quality settings, this mode may not be available.

Note

• If you set F Print Quality to Fast , you can select K Economy Printing . However, depending on A Media

Type , you may not be able to select K Economy Printing .

• R Fast Graphic Process

Select this option to print faster than usual, when possible.

• H Color Mode

Choose the color mode.

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

➔ P.66

• I Set

Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver

➔ P.60

• J Unidirectional Printing

Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality. However, the printing speed becomes slower.

• Q Thicken Fine Lines

Select this check box to print fine lines more distinctly.

• P Sharpen Text

Select this check box to print text more sharply.

• S Reduce Print Unevenness

Select this checkbox for two-pass printing to reduce color shading.

This option is displayed if you have selected Plain Paper in Media Type and Office Document in Print Priority .

275

User's Guide

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box iPF840

The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

276

Note

• To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click Set by Media Type

. (See " Main

Pane .")

➔ P.272

A Media Type

The paper selected with Media Type of the Main panel is displayed.

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

B Drying Time

Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Between Pages setting is only valid for rolls.

• C Between Pages

You can set the time to wait after printing 1 document page until ejecting the paper. Since waiting time is required for ink to dry before a roll is cut, you can deliver paper in the Output Stacker with the ink dried even if

Cutting Mode is set to Automatic .

Setting Item

Printer Default

Details

The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.

None

30 sec.

/ 1 min.

/ 3 min.

/ 5 min.

/

10 min.

/ 30 min.

/ 60 min.

Paper is ejected immediately after printing completes.

Paper is ejected when the set time elapses after printing completes.

• D Between Scans

You can set the time to wait after printing 1 line on a page until printing the next line. Set this to avoid bleeding or color unevenness such as when bleeding occurs on a page or when color unevenness occurs during borderless printing.

Setting Item

Printer Default

Details

The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.

None

1 sec.

/ 3 sec.

/ 5 sec.

/ 7 sec.

/ 9 sec.

The next line is printed immediately after a line is printed.

The next line is printed when the set time elapses after a line is printed.

* Increase the time according to the occurrence condition of bleeding or unevenness.

User's Guide

iPF840 Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box

E Roll Paper Margin for Safety

You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held firmly against the Platen.

• F Near End Margin

Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

Setting Item

Printer Default

Details

The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.

3 mm (0.12 in)

20 mm (0.8 in)

The document is printed in the standard size.

* Select this when you do not have any problems in printing.

Select this when rubbing against the printhead occurs such as when using paper that tends to curl.

G Cut Speed

Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

Setting Item

Printer Default

Details

The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.

High Speed

Standard

Low Speed

When the Standard setting does not result in a clean cut surface, select this.

Select this when you do not have any problems in automatic cutting.

This helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you select it when using adhesive paper.

H Automatic Cutting

Set whether to perform roll cutting automatically or print a cut line.

The following settings are available for automatic cutting.

Setting Item

Printer Default

Details

The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.

None

Print Cut Guideline

After printing completes, the roll is not cut per page, and the next page of data is printed successively.

After printing completes, a line is printed per page, and the next page of data is printed successively.

J Mirror

Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.

277

User's Guide

View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application iPF840

In the View set.

dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

Note

• To display the View set.

dialog box, on the Main pane, click View set.

by Print Target

. (See " Main

Pane .")

P.272

• A Print Target

Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

• B Name

Identifies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

• C Details

Here, you can confirm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list.

On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

• The Matching pane is not displayed when No color correction or Monochrome is selected in Color Mode .

Important

Note

• To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings , and then click the Matching

tab. (See " Main Pane .")

➔ P.272

278

User's Guide

iPF840 Matching pane

Driver Matching Mode

The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the A Matching Mode list.

• A Matching Mode

Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

Normally, select Driver Matching Mode . For color matching based on ICC profiles, select ICC Matching

Mode depending on your color matching system.

• B Matching Method

Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various are available depending on your selection in A Matching Mode .

B Matching Method options

• E Gamma

You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones in an image.

2.2

is normally selected. If you want a softer impression than 2.2

, select 1.8

.

ICC Matching Mode

The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode , in the A Matching Mode list.

Note

• To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings , and then click the Matching tab.

(See " Main Pane .")

➔ P.272

User's Guide

279

Color Settings Pane: Color iPF840

• A Matching Mode

Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

• B Input Profile Settings

You can choose Input Profile .

Various options are available depending on your selected A Matching Mode .

• C Matching Method

You can choose C Matching Method .

Various options are available depending on your selected A Matching Mode .

• D Printer Profile Settings

Specify the printer profile as desired.

We recommend that you select an ICC profile created using commercially available profile creation software in order to perform color management accurately on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper.

The created ICC profile needs to be saved in the following folder on the computer you are using.

/user/(user name)/library/ColorSync/Profiles folder

• For details on settings items,

see " Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ."

➔ P.60

Note

In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them. However, if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings .

(See " Main Pane .")

➔ P.272

• For details on settings items,

see " Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ."

➔ P.60

280

• A Sample Type

Choose a sample image from Standard , Portrait , Landscape , or Graphics .

• B View Color Pattern

Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

• C Apply to Sample

Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

• D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow

Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

User's Guide

iPF840 Object Adjustment dialog box: Color

• G Gray Tone

Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool (tinged with blue) or Warm (tinged with red).

• H Brightness

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

• I Contrast

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

• J Saturation

Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.

• K Object Adjustment

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.

Object Adjustment dialog box: Color

➔ P.281

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment panel.

• A Images

Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

• B Graphics

Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

• C Text

Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

281

User's Guide

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome iPF840

On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

282

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings in Advanced Settings

. (See

" Main Pane .")

➔ P.272

• For details on settings items,

see " Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ."

P.60

• A Sample Type

Choose a sample image from Standard , Portrait , Landscape , or Graphics .

• B View Color Pattern

Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

• C Apply to Sample

Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

• D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow

Not available.

• G Gray Tone

Not available.

• H Brightness

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

• I Contrast

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the trast makes images sharper, and reducing the I Contrast softens images.

I Con-

• J Saturation

Not available.

• K Object Adjustment

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.

Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome

➔ P.283

User's Guide

iPF840 Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment panel.

• A Images

Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

• B Graphics

Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

• C Text

Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

• A Paper Source

Choose how paper is supplied.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in A Media Type in the Main pane.

• B Roll Width

Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer.

User's Guide

283

Additional Settings Pane iPF840

• D Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Select this checkbox to choose the following options.

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

➔ P.74

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value

➔ P.78

• F Fit Roll Paper Width

Resizes the document image to match the roll width.

• G Scaling

Resizes the document image based on a specified scaling value. Enter a value in a range of 5–600.

• H Borderless Printing

Borderless printing is available if roll paper is selected in the A Paper Source list.

Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width of the paper.

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

➔ P.95

Borderless Printing at Actual Size

➔ P.87

• J Print Centered

Select this checkbox to print document images in the center of the paper.

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls

P.128

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

➔ P.132

• K No Spaces at Top or Bottom

Select this checkbox to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

P.140

• L Rotate Page 90 degrees

Select this checkbox to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees

P.137

• N Free Layout

Select this checkbox to start imagePROGRAF Free Layout before printing.

This allows you to print multiple documents next to each other.

• When Print Preview is selected on the Main panel, Print Preview is disabled.

Important

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

➔ P.114

The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane.

284

• A Send job to

You can configure the method for saving print jobs to the printer hard disk.

User's Guide

iPF840 Additional Settings Pane

• B Print after reception is complete

You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle.

User's Guide

285

The Features of Preview iPF840

The Features of Preview .................................................................................................................................

286

Starting Preview .............................................................................................................................................

286

Preview Main Window ....................................................................................................................................

287

Paper Settings Panel ......................................................................................................................................

290

Easy Settings ............................................................................................................................................

291

Advanced Settings ....................................................................................................................................

292

Output Settings Panel ....................................................................................................................................

293

Color Settings Panel .......................................................................................................................................

295

Color Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................

296

Matching ...................................................................................................................................................

298

Driver Matching Mode ..........................................................................................................................

299

ICC Matching Mode .............................................................................................................................

300

ColorSync ............................................................................................................................................

301

Preferences Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................

301

Zoom Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................

301

Go to Page Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................

302

Print with No Borders .....................................................................................................................................

302

Print on the Center .........................................................................................................................................

303

Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ...............................................................................................................

303

Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees ......................................................................................................................

304

Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper ..................................................................................................

304

Display with All ...............................................................................................................................................

304

Display with Actual Size ..................................................................................................................................

305

Moving a Page ...............................................................................................................................................

305

The main features of Preview are as follows.

• While viewing this screen, you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software.

• You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen, and you can print the preview screen as it is seen.

Note

• The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Preview settings.

286

Follow the procedure below to start the Preview.

1

Start the apllication software which you use.

2

From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.

• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

Note

3

Click Print Preview in the Main panel to attach a checkmark.

User's Guide

iPF840 Preview Main Window

4

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.

5

Preview main window is displayed.

The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars, and preview, dialog , drawer and status area.

User's Guide

287

Preview Main Window iPF840

Note

• You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar.

• Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

• Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

• Preview Area

You can check the settings you made in this area.

288

User's Guide

iPF840 Preview Main Window

• Dialog Area

This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.

• Drawer Area

This allows you to display the thumbnails of a document.

This area appears when you click Drawer from the tool bar.

Alternatively, you may select Drawer from the View menu.

• Status Area

This shows Input Size and Output Size .

User's Guide

289

Paper Settings Panel iPF840

This panel appears when you select Paper Settings in the dialog area.

290

• Media Type

This allows you to select the media type.

Note

• Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.

• Easy Settings / Advanced Settings

Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.

The settings available on each mode are as follows.

Easy Settings

➔ P.291

Advanced Settings

➔ P.292

• Paper Source

You can select the paper source.

The following settings are available for paper source.

Setting

Cut Sheet

Roll Paper 1

Roll Paper 2

Details

Select to print on the cut sheet.

Select to print on the roll paper of Roll Paper 1 (Upper).

Select to print on the roll paper of Roll Paper 2 (Lower).

• Roll Paper Width

This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer.

• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

Note

• Copies

You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.

User's Guide

iPF840 Easy Settings

Note

• The maximum value is 999.

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• Restore Defaults Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview.

• Print Button

Click the button to begin printing.

• Update Printer Info.

Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

You can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that matches the content of the document.

• Print Target

You can easily select the best settings for the print job simply.

If you select each Print Target item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.

Setting

Default Settings

Details

Suitable for printing normal documents that contain a mixture of text, photographs, and graphics.

Poster

CAD (Color Line Drawing)

CAD (B/W Line Drawing)

Perspective, GIS

Photo (Color)

Office Document

Faithful Color Reproduction

The best setting for posters.Prints using vivid and high impact colors.

Prints the fine lines of CAD drawings and other such documents sharp and clear.

Suitable for printing CAD drawings with sharp, dark lines.

Suitable for attractive printing of 3D-CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and GIS drawings including maps.

Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera.

Suitable for printing handouts as well as general office documents for which print clarity is key.

Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image.

291

User's Guide

Advanced Settings iPF840

Setting

Custom Settings

Details

Suitable for printing documents for which Advanced Settings have been specified.

• The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

Note

• Print Quality

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.

The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Print Quality

Setting Details

Highest quality / Highest / High / Standard / Fast

Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi

Note

• The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

• Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast , however, print quality is higher.

• Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High , however, print quality is lower.

• For Highest quality , the resolution is not displayed.

Presents detailed settings for the print quality, the color mode, and other items so you can select the values for these settings yourself.

292 • Print Priority

Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.

Image

Setting Details

This mode achieves the best results for printing photographic images and illustrations.

User's Guide

iPF840 Output Settings Panel

Line Drawing

Setting

Office Document

Details

This mode is best for printing CAD drawings with fine lines or wall newssheet or other documents that contain large amounts of text. However, you may not achieve the quality you expect with printing photographs or other images with many filled areas. For these types of jobs, select Image .

Prints common office documents, such as proposals, memos for distribution, etc., so they are easy to read.

• The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

Note

• Print Quality

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.

The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Print Quality

Setting Details

Highest quality / Highest / High / Standard / Fast

Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi

Note

• The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

• Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast , however, print quality is higher.

• Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High , however, print quality is lower.

• For Highest quality , the resolution is not displayed.

This panel appears when you select Output Settings in the dialog area.

• Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Select the method for enlarged/reduced printing.

User's Guide

293

294

Output Settings Panel iPF840

The following settings are available for enlarged/reduced printing.

Fit Paper Size

Setting Details

Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to fit the media size selected for output.

Select the media size to print from Paper Size .

Fit Roll Paper Width

Scaling

Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to fit the width of the roll paper with the page width.

*Make sure that the width of the roll paper in the printer is set correctly for Roll Paper

Width in the Paper Settings panel.

*Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

Enlarges/reduces the whole page by the scaling rate as specified. Input the scaling value in numerical characters. You can specify a range between 5 and 600%.

*You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

*Although Scaling can be set to make the image larger than the media size, the part that does not fit in the media cannot be printed.

*This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing .

• Borderless Printing

You can print the media without margins on all sides when the roll paper with the specific width and the specific media type is used.

For more information about Borderless Printing ,

see " Print with No Borders ."

➔ P.302

Note

• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Print Centered .

• Paper Size

You can select the size of the print media.

• This is not displayed when Fit Roll Paper Width is set in Enlarged/Reduced Printing .

Note

• Print Centered

You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.

For more information about Print Centered

, see " Print on the Center ."

➔ P.303

• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing .

Note

• No Spaces at Top or Bottom

You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom.

For more information about No Spaces at Top or Bottom

, see " Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ."

➔ P.303

• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

Note

• Rotate Page

Select the method for rotating page.

The following settings are available for rotating page.

Setting

Rotate Right 90 Degrees

Rotate Left 90 Degrees

Rotate 180 degrees

Details

Rotates the portrait page right 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation. When the rotated page can fit in the width of roll paper, the page is rotated automatically, and when it can not fit in the width of roll paper, the page is not rotated.

Rotates the portrait page left 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation. When the rotated page can fit in the width of roll paper, the page is rotated automatically, and when it can not fit in the width of roll paper, the page is not rotated.

Allows you to rotate the image 180 degrees from the vertical to the right.

User's Guide

iPF840 Color Settings Panel

• Restore Defaults Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview.

• Print Button

Click the button to begin printing.

• Update Printer Info.

Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

This panel appears when you select Color Settings in the dialog area.

• Color Mode

You can select a color mode to suit the print job.

Setting

Color

Monochrome

Color (CAD)

Monochrome Bitmap

Monochrome (BK ink)

No color correction

Details

Enables color printing.

Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled monochrome.

Prints lines in the best color possible so they are easy to see.

Prints all colors other than white in black.

Select to print all lines with black ink.

Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver. Select this when color matching is performed by the application such as Adobe Photoshop or when you want to print color charts using the profile creation tool.

• The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.

Note

• Color Adjustment / Matching

You can set the color adjustment and matching.

Color Adjustment

➔ P.296

Matching

➔ P.298

User's Guide

295

Color Adjustment iPF840

• Matching is not displayed if No color correction has been selected in Color Mode .

Note

• Restore Defaults Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview.

• Print Button

Click the button to begin printing.

• Update Printer Info.

Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

You can set the color adjustment.

Adjusting Color

Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application, but if you see colors in the printout that do not match colors on the screen, you can perform color adjustments.

1

Select Color on Color Mode in the Color Settings panel.

2

Select Color Adjustment .

296

3

Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.

Cyan

Setting Details

Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.

Magenta

Yellow

Brightness

Contrast

Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.

Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.

Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display, or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness, use this feature.

Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image.

User's Guide

iPF840 Color Adjustment

Contrast

Saturation

Gray Tone

Setting Details

*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color.

Adjusts gray from cool black (bluish tones) to warm black (reddish tones).

Note

• You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.

Adjusting Monochrome

Use the monochrome setting to print monochrome images of color photographs captured with a scanner or digital camera or other color images.

1

Select Monochrome on Color Mode in the Color Settings panel.

2

Select Color Adjustment .

3

Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.

Brightness

Setting Details

Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display, or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness, use this feature.

Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image.

*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Note

• You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.

297

User's Guide

Matching iPF840

You can set the matching.

• If No color correction is selected under Color Mode , the Matching is not displayed.

Important

298

• Matching Mode

You can select a matching mode to suit the print job.

Setting

Driver Matching Mode

P.299

Details

Enables printing of optimal color tones using a driver specific color profile. You should normally select this mode.

ICC Matching Mode

P.300

ColorSync

➔ P.301

Enables color matching using ICC profiles. Select this if you want to print by specifying the input profile, printer profile, and matching method in detail. This allows you to use ICC profiles for digital cameras and scanners, ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool, etc.

Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of OS X. Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing.

Note

• You need to set each correction on the printer driver.

• ColorSync needs to be selected in the Color Matching panel of the driver in order to select ColorSync .

• Matching Method

You can select a matching method to suit the print job.

• Gamma

You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones in an image. 2.2

is normally selected. If you want a softer impression than 2.2

, select 1.8

.

• You can select only after Driver Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode .

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Driver Matching Mode

• Input Profile

Select the input profile.

• You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode .

Note

• Printer Profile

Select the printer profile.

• You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode .

Note

• Soft Proof

When you place a checkmark here, ColorSync applies to the preview area.

• You can select only after ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode .

Note

1

Under Matching Mode , select Driver Matching Mode .

2

Click the Matching Method list, and then select a setting.

Auto

Setting Details

Automatically selects the best color matching method for each Image, Graphics, Text.

Perceptual

Saturation

Colorimetric

Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a feature. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application software.

Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.

Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space. This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print.

However, gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer. Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.

User's Guide

299

ICC Matching Mode iPF840

1

Under Matching Mode , select ICC Matching Mode .

300

2

Click the Matching Method list, and then select a setting.

Perceptual

Setting Details

Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a feature. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application software.

Saturation

Colorimetric

Colorimetric (No White-Point Correction)

Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.

Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space. This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print.

However, gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer. Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.

The processing method of color-matching is identical to Colorimetric . Use this when you want to further reproduce the target paper material color of the image data. Generally, this also is called absolute colorimetric.

3

Click the Input Profile list and select an input profile.

4

Click the Printer Profile list and select a printer profile.

User's Guide

iPF840 ColorSync

1

Check that ColorSync is selected in Matching Mode .

2

To apply ColorSync to previews, check the Soft Proof check box.

This dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview menu. You can set the preferences for Preview.

• Units

Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.

This dialog box appears when you select Zoom from the View menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.

• Scaling

Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.

User's Guide

301

Go to Page Dialog Box iPF840

Note

• You can input between 10 and 400.

• You can change the numbers by clicking ▼ button.

This dialog box appears when you select Go to Page from the View menu.

Note

• You can not select Go to Page if the document is only one page.

• Page

Input the page number in numerical characters to display in the preview area.

• You can change the numbers in the range of the page of the documents.

Note

You can use the borderless printing function to print without margins surrounding the image.

Note

• With some media borderless printing can be performed only between two edges.

• To use the borderless printing function, the specified media must be set to the printer.

1

On the Paper Settings Panel

➔ P.290

, select Roll Paper in

Paper Source .

2

On the Output Settings Panel

P.293

, click the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box on.

3

Select Fit Roll Paper Width .

4

Click the Borderless Printing check box on.

302

5

Click the Print button.

Borderless printing begins.

User's Guide

iPF840 Print on the Center

You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.

• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing .

Note

1

On the Output Settings Panel

➔ P.293

, click the Print

Centered check box on.

2

Click the Print button.

Printing on the center begins.

You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom.

• This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing .

Note

1

On the Paper Settings Panel

P.290

, select Roll Paper in

Paper Source .

2

On the Output Settings Panel

➔ P.293

, click the No

Spaces at Top or Bottom check box on.

3

Click the Print button.

Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins.

User's Guide

303

Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees iPF840

You can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper.

1

On the Paper Settings Panel

➔ P.290

, select Roll Paper in

Paper Source .

2

On the Output Settings Panel

➔ P.293

, click the Rotate Page check box on.

3

Select Rotate Right 90 Degrees or Rotate Left 90

Degrees .

4

Click the Print button.

Printing on rotating 90 degrees begins.

In the preview area, you can display to the width of the paper.

1

Select Fit to Width from the tool bar.

2

Fitting to the width of the paper, it is displayed.

304

In the preview area, you can display all.

1

Select Fit Screen from the tool bar.

User's Guide

iPF840 Display with Actual Size

2

All is displayed.

In the preview area, you can display the actual size.

1

Select Actual Size from the tool bar.

2

Actual size is displayed.

You can move a page to display in the preview area.

1

Select each button in Go to Page on the tool bar.

Setting

Go to the first page.

Go to the previous page.

Go to the next page.

Go to the last page.

Details

User's Guide

305

Moving a Page iPF840

2

The target page appears.

Note

• You can also move a page by clicking the page on the thumbnails.

306

User's Guide

iPF840 The Features of Free Layout

The Features of Free Layout ...........................................................................................................................

307

Starting Free Layout .......................................................................................................................................

307

Free Layout Main Window ..............................................................................................................................

308

Paper Settings Panel ......................................................................................................................................

310

Easy Settings ............................................................................................................................................

311

Advanced Settings ....................................................................................................................................

312

Color Settings Panel .......................................................................................................................................

313

Color Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................

314

Matching ...................................................................................................................................................

316

Driver Matching Mode ..........................................................................................................................

318

ICC Matching Mode .............................................................................................................................

319

ColorSync ............................................................................................................................................

320

Preferences Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................

320

Page Setup Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................

321

Zoom Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................

322

Format Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................................

323

Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page ..........................................................................................

323

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page .........................................

324

Selecting an Object ........................................................................................................................................

324

Changing the Object Size ...............................................................................................................................

324

Moving an Object ...........................................................................................................................................

325

Rotating an Object .........................................................................................................................................

325

Laying out Objects Automatically ....................................................................................................................

326

Aligning Objects .............................................................................................................................................

326

Changing the Object Overlapping Order .........................................................................................................

328

Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ......................................................................................................................

329

The main features of Free Layout are as follows.

• Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software.

• You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple-file document on one page, or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.

Note

• The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Free Layout settings.

Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout.

1

Start the apllication software which you use.

2

From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.

• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

Note

3

Click on Free Layout in the Page Setup panel to attach a checkmark.

307

User's Guide

Free Layout Main Window iPF840

4

Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.

5

Free Layout main window is displayed.

The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and dialog areas.

308

Note

• You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool.

User's Guide

iPF840 Free Layout Main Window

• Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

• Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

• Layout Area

This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation.

• Dialog Area

This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.

User's Guide

309

Paper Settings Panel iPF840

This panel appears when you select Paper Settings in the dialog area.

310

• Media Type

This allows you to select the media type.

Note

• Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.

• Easy Settings / Advanced Settings

Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.

The settings available on each mode are as follows.

Easy Settings

➔ P.311

Advanced Settings

➔ P.312

• Paper Source

You can select the paper source.

The following settings are available for paper source.

Setting

Cut Sheet

Roll Paper 1

Roll Paper 2

Details

Select to print on the cut sheet.

Select to print on the roll paper of Roll Paper 1 (Upper).

Select to print on the roll paper of Roll Paper 2 (Lower).

• Roll Paper Width

This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer.

• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

Note

• Copies

You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.

User's Guide

iPF840 Easy Settings

Note

• The maximum value is 999.

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• Restore Defaults Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout.

• Print Button

Click the button to begin printing.

• Update Printer Info.

Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

You can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that matches the content of the document.

• Print Target

You can easily select the best settings for the print job simply.

If you select each Print Target item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.

Setting

Default Settings

Details

Suitable for printing normal documents that contain a mixture of text, photographs, and graphics.

Poster

CAD (Color Line Drawing)

CAD (B/W Line Drawing)

Perspective, GIS

Photo (Color)

Office Document

Faithful Color Reproduction

The best setting for posters.Prints using vivid and high impact colors.

Suitable for printing fine lines such as drawings clearly.

Suitable for printing CAD drawings with sharp, dark lines.

Suitable for attractive printing of 3D-CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and GIS drawings including maps.

Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera.

Suitable for printing handouts as well as general office documents for which print clarity is key.

Prints by minimizing color differences. Suitable for when the printing results are too vivid or when printing scanned images.

User's Guide

311

Advanced Settings iPF840

Setting

Custom Settings

Details

Suitable for printing documents for which Advanced Settings have been specified.

• The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

Note

• Print Quality

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.

The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Print Quality

Setting Details

Highest quality / Highest / High / Standard / Fast

Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi

Note

• The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

• Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast , however, print quality is higher.

• Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High , however, print quality is lower.

• For Highest quality , the resolution is not displayed.

Presents detailed settings for the print priority, the print quality, and other items so you can select the values for these settings yourself.

312 • Print Priority

Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.

Image

Setting Details

This mode achieves the best results for printing photographic images and illustrations.

User's Guide

iPF840 Color Settings Panel

Line Drawing

Setting

Office Document

Details

This mode is best for printing CAD drawings with fine lines or wall newssheet or other documents that contain large amounts of text. However, you may not achieve the quality you expect with printing photographs or other images with many filled areas. For these types of jobs, select Image .

Prints common office documents, such as proposals, memos for distribution, etc., so they are easy to read.

• The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

Note

• Print Quality

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.

The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Print Quality

Setting Details

Highest quality / Highest / High / Standard / Fast

Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi

Note

• The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

• Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast , however, print quality is higher.

• Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High , however, print quality is lower.

• For Highest quality , the resolution is not displayed.

This panel appears when you select Color Settings in the dialog area.

User's Guide

313

Color Adjustment iPF840

• Color Mode

You can select a color mode to suit the print job.

Setting

Color Enables color printing.

Monochrome

Color (CAD)

Monochrome Bitmap

Monochrome (BK ink)

No color correction

Details

Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled monochrome.

Prints lines in the best color possible so they are easy to see.

Prints all colors other than white in black.

Select to print all lines with black ink.

Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver. Select this when color matching is performed by the application such as Adobe Photoshop or when you want to print color charts using the profile creation tool.

• The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.

Note

• Color Adjustment / Matching

You can set the color adjustment and matching.

Color Adjustment

➔ P.314

Matching

➔ P.316

• Matching is not displayed if No color correction has been selected in Color Mode .

Note

• Restore Defaults Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout.

• Print Button

Click the button to begin printing.

• Update Printer Info.

Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

You can set the color adjustment.

Adjusting Color

Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application, but if you see colors in the printout that do not match colors on the screen, you can perform color adjustments.

1

Select Color on Color Mode in the Color Settings panel.

314

User's Guide

iPF840 Color Adjustment

2

Select Color Adjustment .

3

Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.

Cyan

Setting Details

Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.

Magenta

Yellow

Brightness

Contrast

Saturation

Gray Tone

Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.

Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.

Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display, or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness, use this feature.

Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image.

*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color.

Adjusts gray from cool black (bluish tones) to warm black (reddish tones).

Note

• You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.

Adjusting Monochrome

Use the monochrome setting to print monochrome images of color photographs captured with a scanner or digital camera or other color images.

1

Select Monochrome on Color Mode in the Color Settings panel.

315

User's Guide

Matching iPF840

2

Select Color Adjustment .

316

3

Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.

Brightness

Setting Details

Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display, or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness, use this feature.

Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image.

*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Note

• You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.

You can set the matching.

• If No color correction is selected under Color Mode , the Matching is not displayed.

Important

User's Guide

iPF840 Matching

• Matching Mode

You can select a matching mode to suit the print job.

Setting

Driver Matching Mode

➔ P.318

ICC Matching Mode

➔ P.319

ColorSync

➔ P.320

Details

Enables printing of optimal color tones using a driver specific color profile. You should normally select this mode.

Enables color matching using ICC profiles. Select this if you want to print by specifying the input profile, printer profile, and matching method in detail. This allows you to use ICC profiles for digital cameras and scanners, ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool, etc.

Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of OS X. Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing.

Note

• You need to set each correction on the printer driver.

• ColorSync needs to be selected in the Color Matching panel of the driver in order to select ColorSync .

• Matching Method

You can select a matching method to suit the print job.

• Gamma

You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones in an image. 2.2

is normally selected. If you want a softer impression than 2.2

, select 1.8

.

• You can select only after Driver Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode .

Note

• Input Profile

Select the input profile.

• You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode .

Note

• Printer Profile

Select the printer profile.

User's Guide

317

Driver Matching Mode iPF840

• You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode .

Note

• Soft Proof

When you place a checkmark here, ColorSync applies to the layout area.

• You can select only after ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode .

Note

1

Under Matching Mode , select Driver Matching Mode .

318

2

Click the Matching Method list, and then select a setting.

Auto

Setting Details

Automatically selects the best color matching method for each Image, Graphics, Text.

Perceptual

Saturation

Colorimetric

Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a feature. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application software.

Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.

Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space. This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print.

However, gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer. Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.

User's Guide

iPF840 ICC Matching Mode

1

Under Matching Mode , select ICC Matching Mode .

2

Click the Matching Method list, and then select a setting.

Perceptual

Setting Details

Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a feature. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application software.

Saturation

Colorimetric

Colorimetric (No White-Point Correction)

Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.

Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space. This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print.

However, gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer. Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.

The processing method of color-matching is identical to Colorimetric . Use this when you want to further reproduce the target paper material color of the image data. Generally, this also is called absolute colorimetric.

3

Click the Input Profile list and select an input profile.

4

Click the Printer Profile list and select a printer profile.

319

User's Guide

ColorSync iPF840

1

Check that ColorSync is selected in Matching Mode .

2

Place a checkmark on Soft Proof to simulate the output product in Layout Area.

This dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview menu. You can set the preferences for Free Layout.

320

• Units

Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.

• Gridlines

You can input a grid line width value in numerical characters so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.

Note

• You can input between 10.0 and 200.0(mm) (between 0.39 and 7.87(inch)).

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Page Setup Dialog Box

• Divisions

You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.

Note

• You can input between 1 and 10.

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• Grid Color

Select the grid line color.

• Print Object Frames

You can print the object border.

• If you do not want to print the object border, deselect the Print Object Frames check box.

Note

• Object Frame Style

You can select the object frame style for printing.

The following settings are available for the object frame style.

Setting

Solid Line

Dotted Line

Dashed Line

Details

You can print the solid line as the frame style.

You can print the dotted line as the frame style.

You can print the dashed line as the frame style.

• Auto Arrange Spacing

Change the object-to-object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically.

Note

• You can input between 0.0 and 100.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 3.94(inch)).

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

This dialog box appears when you select Page Setup from the File menu.This dialog box provides selections for setting the media size, orientation and other important features.

• Paper Orientation

This selects the paper orientation.

The following settings are available for orientation.

Vertical

Setting Details

Prints the image and text created with the application software in the orientation as it is.

Horizontal Prints the image and text by rotating sideways 90 degrees from the orientation as specified in the application.

• Roll Paper Length

Set the length of one page to print on roll paper.

User's Guide

321

Zoom Dialog Box iPF840

When you place a checkmark on Auto Settings , the one-page length to be printed on roll paper is automatically set so that the laid-out objects are printed on one page.

Note

• Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source .

• You can input between 203.2 and 18000.0(mm) (between 8.00 and 708.66(inch)).

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• Order

Set the object layout order.

The following settings are available for order.

Setting

Upper Left to Right

Details

The objects are laid out from upper left to right.

Upper Left to Bottom The objects are laid out from upper left to bottom.

Note

• When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Vertical , you can choose only Upper Left to Right .

• When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Horizontal , you can choose only Upper Left to Bottom .

• Paper Size

You can select the size of the print media.

• You cannot display this if Roll Paper is selected in Paper Source .

Note

This dialog box appears when you select Zoom from the View menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.

• Scaling

Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.

Note

• You can input between 10 and 400.

• You can change the numbers by clicking ▼ button.

322

User's Guide

iPF840 Format Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select Format from the Object menu after you select an object. You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.

Note

• When the objects are not selected, you can not select Format .

• Rotate

When you place a checkmark here, you can select Rotate Right or Rotate Left .

Setting Details

Rotate Right Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate Left Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise.

• When several objects are selected, you cannot select Rotate .

Note

• Scaling

You can input the value for enlargement or reduction of the obeject in numerical characters.

Note

• You can input between 25 and 400.

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

• Object Size

You can confirm the object size.

• When several objects are selected, you cannot display Object Size .

Note

You can lay out and print a multiple-file document on one page.

1

From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.

• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

Note

2

Click on Free Layout in the Page Setup panel to attach a checkmark.

3

In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the Print button.

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

User's Guide

323

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page iPF840

4

Leaving Free Layout running, open other files with the application software and repeat the above steps.

You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.

1

From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.

• Normally, select Print from the File menu.

Note

2

Click on Free Layout in the Page Setup panel to attach a checkmark.

3

In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the Print button.

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

4

Leaving Free Layout running, open the files with other application software and repeat the above steps.

When an object is selected, a select box (blue border) appears around the object.

Note

• To select an object, click that object.

• To select multiple successive objects, click them while holding down the shift key.

• To select multiple arbitrary objects, click them while holding down the command key.

• To select all objects, select Select All from the Edit menu.

324

You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value.

• The vertical-to-horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced.

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Moving an Object

Resizing by means of mouse operation

1

Select an object.

2

Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box around the object to show the arrow handle, and drag this handle to change the object size.

Resizing by specifying a scaling value

1

Select an object.

2

Open the Format Dialog Box

➔ P.323

.

3

Use Scaling to set the magnification for enlargement or reduction. You either enter numbers directly.

Note

• You can input between 25 and 400.

• You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.

4

Click the OK button.

You can move the object position.

1

Select an object.

2

Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object to show the crosshair handle, and drag it to move the object.

You can rotate the object.

1

Select an object.

User's Guide

325

Laying out Objects Automatically iPF840

2

Select Rotate Left or Rotate Right from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may click on the Rotate check box

in the Format Dialog Box

➔ P.323

then select

Rotate

Right or Rotate Left , and click the OK button.

Note

• When several objects are selected, you cannot select Rotate .

Click Auto Arrange in the tool bar. This automatically lays out objects. Alternatively, you may select Auto Arrange

Object from the Object menu.

Note

• The object layout order varies depending on the Order

setting on the Page Setup Dialog Box

➔ P.321

.

You can align objects systematically.

1

Select multiple objects.

2

Select the align menu from the Object menu.

• Align Top

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the top.

326

User's Guide

iPF840 Aligning Objects

• Center Vertically

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the vertical center.

• Align Bottom

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the bottom.

• Align Left

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the left.

• Center Horizontally

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the horizontal center.

User's Guide

327

Changing the Object Overlapping Order iPF840

• Align Right

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the right.

You can change the object overlapping order.

1

Select an object.

2

Select the overlapping order menu from the Object menu.

• Bring to Front

Moves the object to the frontmost position.

• Send to Back

Moves the object to the backmost position.

• Bring Forward

Moves the object one position to the front.

328

User's Guide

iPF840 Pasting a Copied or Cut Object

• Send Backward

Moves the object one position to the back.

1

Click Copy or Cut from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu.

2

Click Paste from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select Paste from the Edit menu.

Note

• The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page.

User's Guide

329

iPF840

330

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

15

29

157

267

Handling and Use of Paper

Paper .................................................................................................

332

Handling rolls .....................................................................................

342

Handling sheets .................................................................................

369

Output Stacker ..................................................................................

375

Media Configuration Tool (Windows) .................................................

378

Media Configuration Tool (Mac OS) ..................................................

400

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

495

549

565

603

635

425

463

475

657

661

331 imagePROGRAF

Types of Paper iPF840

Types of Paper ...............................................................................................................................................

332

Paper Sizes ....................................................................................................................................................

332

Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper ................................................................

334

Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper Using Existing Settings .................................

335

Displaying the Paper Reference Guide ............................................................................................................

335

Updating paper information ............................................................................................................................

338

The following types of paper are supported by the printer. For details on the paper supported by the printer, refer to the Paper Reference Guide

. (See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• Plain Paper

• Coated Paper

• Photo Paper

• Glossy Paper

• Proofing Paper

• CAD-dedicated Paper Etc.

The following content is described in the Paper Reference Guide .

• Types of paper

• Paper handling

• Paper product specifications

• Use precautions

• Setting of printer driver, control panel etc.

• Paper Reference Guide display method

For the procedure for displaying the Paper Reference Guide ,

see " Displaying the Paper Reference

Guide ."

➔ P.335

• Method of Updating Supported Paper

Paper that is supported by the printer may be newly released on the Canon website.

To use newly released paper, register the latest paper information on the printer with the Media Configuration

Tool. (See " Updating paper information .")

➔ P.338

Important

• Even if you are not using the printer driver, you should install the Media Configuration Tool in order to register the media types for your region in the printer.

(See " Media Configuration Tool (Windows) .")

➔ P.378

(See " Media Configuration Tool (Mac OS) .")

➔ P.400

332

Rolls

Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.

• Outer diameter: Up to 150 mm (6 in)

• Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches

• Printing side out

Roll Width Roll Paper Width

Setting in Printer Driver Borderless Printing ( *1 )

1117.6 mm (44.00 in) 44-in. Roll (1117.6mm) Yes

1066.8 mm (42.00 in) 42-in. Roll (1066.8mm)

1030.0 mm (40.55 in) JIS B0/B1 Roll (1030.0mm)

914.4 mm (36.00 in) 36-in. Roll (914.4mm)

Yes

Yes

Yes

User's Guide

iPF840 Paper Sizes

Roll Width Roll Paper Width

Setting in Printer Driver Borderless Printing ( *1 )

841.0 mm (33.11 in) ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm) Yes

762.0 mm (30.00 in) 30-in. Roll (762.0mm)

728.0 mm (28.66 in) JIS B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm)

No

No

609.6 mm (24.00 in) 24-in. Roll (609.6mm)

594.0 mm (23.39 in) ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm)

515.0 mm (20.28 in) JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm)

431.8 mm (17.00 in) 17-in. Roll (431.8mm)

420.0 mm (16.54 in) ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm)

406.4 mm (16.00 in) 16-in. Roll (406.4mm)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

355.6 mm (14.00 in) 14-in. Roll (355.6mm)

297.0 mm (11.69 in) ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm)

254.0 mm (10.00 in) 10-in. Roll (254.0mm)

Yes

No

Yes

*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Types of

Paper .")

➔ P.332

Sheets

Sheets of the following sizes are supported.

Paper Sizes

ISO A0

Dimensions

841.0 × 1189.0 mm (33.11 × 46.81 in)

ISO B2

ISO B3

ISO B4

JIS B0

JIS B1

JIS B2

JIS B3

JIS B4

ISO A1

ISO A2

ISO A2+

ISO A3

ISO A3+

ISO A4

ISO B0

ISO B1

594.0 × 841.0 mm (23.39 × 33.11 in)

420.0 × 594.0 mm (16.54 × 23.39 in)

431.8 × 609.6 mm (17.00 × 24.00 in)

297.0 × 420.0 mm (11.69 × 16.54 in)

329.0 × 483.0 mm (12.95 × 19.02 in)

210.0 × 297.0 mm (8.27 × 11.69 in)

1000.0 × 1414.0 mm (39.37 × 55.67 in)

707.0 × 1000.0 mm (27.83 × 39.37 in)

500.0 × 707.0 mm (19.69 × 27.83 in)

353.0 × 500.0 mm (13.90 × 19.69 in)

250.0 × 353.0 mm (9.84 × 13.90 in)

1030.0 × 1456.0 mm (40.55 × 57.32 in)

728.0 × 1030.0 mm (28.66 × 40.55 in)

515.0 × 728.0 mm (20.28 × 28.66 in)

364.0 × 515.0 mm (14.33 × 20.28 in)

257.0 × 364.0 mm (10.12 × 14.33 in)

34"x44"(ANSI E)

28"x40"(ANSI F)

22"x34"(ANSI D)

17"x22"(ANSI C)

863.6 × 1117.6 mm (34.00 × 44.00 in)

711.2 × 1016.0 mm (28.00 × 40.00 in)

558.8 × 863.6 mm (22.00 × 34.00 in)

431.8 × 558.8 mm (17.00 × 22.00 in)

11"x17"(Ledger) 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11.00 × 17.00 in)

13"x19"(Super B) 330.2 × 482.6 mm (13.00 × 19.00 in)

Letter(8.5"x11")

Legal(8.5"x14")

215.9 × 279.4 mm (8.50 × 11.00 in)

215.9 × 355.6 mm (8.50 × 14.00 in)

36"x48"(ARCH E) 914.4 × 1219.2 mm (36.00 × 48.00 in)

30"x42"(ARCH E1) 762.0 × 1066.8 mm (30.00 × 42.00 in)

26"x38"(ARCH E2) 660.4 × 965.2 mm (26.00 × 38.00 in)

333

User's Guide

Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper iPF840

DIN C4

20"x24"

18"x22"

14"x17"

12"x16"

10"x12"

10"x15"

8"x10"

Paper Sizes Dimensions

27"x39"(ARCH E3) 685.8 × 990.6 mm (27.00 × 39.00 in)

24"x36"(ARCH D) 609.6 × 914.4 mm (24.00 × 36.00 in)

18"x24"(ARCH C) 457.2 × 609.6 mm (18.00 × 24.00 in)

12"x18"(ARCH B) 304.8 × 457.2 mm (12.00 × 18.00 in)

9"x12"(ARCH A) 228.6 × 304.8 mm (9.00 × 12.00 in)

DIN C0

DIN C1

DIN C2

DIN C3

917.0 × 1296.0 mm (36.10 × 51.02 in)

648.0 × 917.0 mm (25.51 × 36.10 in)

458.0 × 648.0 mm (18.03 × 25.51 in)

324.0 × 458.0 mm (12.76 × 18.03 in)

229.0 × 324.0 mm (9.02 × 12.76 in)

508.0 × 609.6 mm (20.00 × 24.00 in)

457.2 × 558.8 mm (18.00 × 22.00 in)

355.6 × 431.8 mm (14.00 × 17.00 in)

304.8 × 406.4 mm (12.00 × 16.00 in)

254.0 × 304.8 mm (10.00 × 12.00 in)

254.0 × 381.0 mm (10.00 × 15.00 in)

203.2 × 254.0 mm (8.00 × 10.00 in)

US Photo 16"x20" 406.4 × 508.0 mm (16.00 × 20.00 in)

Poster 20"x30" 508.0 × 762.0 mm (20.00 × 30.00 in)

Poster 30"x40"

Poster 42"x60"

762.0 × 1016.0 mm (30.00 × 40.00 in)

1066.8 × 1524.0 mm (42.00 × 60.00 in)

Poster 44"x62"

13"x22"

1117.6 × 1574.8 mm (44.00 × 62.00 in)

329.0 × 558.0 mm (12.95 × 21.97 in)

Poster 300x900mm 300.0 × 900.0 mm (11.81 × 35.43 in)

Custom Paper Size 203.2 × 203.2 mm (8.00 × 8.00 in) to 1118.0 × 1600.0 mm (44.02 × 62.99 in)

Note

• For details on non-standard paper sizes,

see " Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ."

➔ P.108

• Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.

When using this printer to print on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper, use paper that meets the following conditions.

Note

• Refer to Paper Reference Guide

for details on genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper. (See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

334

Paper where the size is described in "Paper Sizes" (See " Paper Sizes .")

➔ P.332

• Paper where the thickness is described in "Paper Thickness" in "Specifications"

(See " Specifications .")

➔ P.658

• Paper where bleeding and ink overflow does not occur when printing

• Paper that does not warp severely when loading the paper or printing

Important

• If you use paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper, Canon provides absolutely no guarantees regarding print quality or paper feed properties. Refer to Paper Reference Guide for details on genuine

Canon paper and feed confirmed paper.

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

P.335

Load paper in the printer and then select the paper type in the control panel and printer driver and print.

You can print easily by selecting from existing settings provided in the printer control panel and printer driver. (See

" Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper Using Existing Settings .")

➔ P.335

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper Using Existing Settings

You can easily print on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper without making complicated settings by selecting existing settings provided in the printer control panel and printer driver depending on the media type you are using. The existing settings consist of general-purpose paper settings provided for each media type and special settings that allow you to select the amount of ink to use.

Important

• The genuine Canon paper settings provided in the printer control panel and printer driver are optimized for genuine Canon paper. If these settings are selected for printing on paper other than genuine Canon paper, the ink may bleed or the printhead may rub against the paper. In order to easily print on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper, we recommend that you select one of the following general-purpose paper settings or special settings.

Note

• For an overview of the media types,

see " Types of Paper ."

➔ P.332

For details on how to select the media type in the control panel and printer driver, see " Types of Paper ."

➔ P.332

Choosing General-Purpose Paper Settings

Since these settings anticipate a wide variety of paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper, these settings will make it difficult for bleeding ink and the printhead rubbing to occur. Refer to the following table for the relationships between the conditions of the paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper and the media type to select.

Type

Plain Paper

Approximate weight Approximate thickness

70 g/m² 0.09 mm (0.0035 in.)

Printer control panel

Plain Paper Plain Paper

Printer driver

Coated Paper

Photo Paper

90 g/m²

170 g/m²

180 g/m²

260 g/m²

Proof 80 g/m²

Sign/CAD Paper 150 g/m²

90 g/m²

100 g/m²

0.13 mm (0.0051 in.) LW. Coated Paper

0.22 mm (0.0087 in.) HW. Coated Paper

Lightweight Coated Paper

Heavyweight Coated Paper

0.18 mm (0.0071 in.) LW. Photo Paper Lightweight Photo Paper

LWPhotoPaper(LI) (

*1 )

Lightweight Photo Paper (LowInk) (

*1 )

0.26 mm (0.010 in.) HW. Photo Paper Heavyweight Photo Paper

HWPhotoPaper(LI) (

*1

) Heavyweight Photo Paper (LowInk)

( *1

)

0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) News Proof

( *2

)

0.11 mm (0.0043 in.) CAD Clear Film

0.08mm (0.0031 in.) CAD Trce(LowInk)

0.13 mm (0.0051 in.) Syn.Papr(LowInk)

CAD Clear Film

CAD Tracing Paper (Low Ink)

Synthetic Paper (LowInk)

*1: Print using slightly less ink. Try this if you are concerned about rubbing of ink after printing.

*2: Software RIP is required separately.

Selecting Special Settings

Special settings are provided that allow you to select the amount of ink used in steps. You can fix lackluster colors or bleeding ink by selecting special settings where the amount of ink used is suitable for the paper you are using.

"Special 1" uses the least amount of ink, with the amount of ink used increasing through 5 steps as the number increases up to "Special 5" which uses the greatest amount of ink. Although colors become more vivid as the amount of ink used increases, bleeding also occurs more easily. We recommend that you try in order starting from

"Special 1" while checking the state of the printing.

The Paper Reference Guide are not included. To view, display the Paper Reference Guide on the website from the links in the installed software. An Internet connection is required in order to view them.

• Windows

The basic instructions for displaying the Paper Reference Guide from the printer driver are as follows.

1.

Open the printer driver.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) .")

➔ P.164

User's Guide

335

Displaying the Paper Reference Guide iPF840

2.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) .")

➔ P.165

Select the Support sheet and click the User Manual button.

3.

Click Paper Reference Guide .

336

• Mac OS

The basic instructions for displaying the Paper Reference Guide from the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor are as follows.

1.

Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock .

2.

Click Print & Scan . (This is identified as Printers &

Scanners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS

X.)

User's Guide

iPF840 Displaying the Paper Reference Guide

3.

Select the printer from the list of printers and click Options & Supplies .

4.

Click Utility .

5.

Click Open Printer Utility .

6.

Click Support .

User's Guide

337

Updating paper information iPF840

7.

Click the User Manual button.

8.

Click Paper Reference Guide .

338

You can update the media information in the printer Control Panel and printer driver with the latest information by applying the latest version of the Media Information File .

For details on the procedure for applying the Media Information File , refer to the following.

Media Configuration Tool (Windows)

➔ P.378

Media Configuration Tool (Mac OS)

P.400

Important

• New Media Information Files are released on the Canon website. A computer that is able to connect to the

Internet is required in order to download the Media Information File .

If you are using the Media Configuration Tool, the Media Information File is downloaded automatically.

To download it manually, access the Canon website. The Canon website can be accessed from the link in the installed software.

• Windows

The basic instructions for accessing the Canon website from the printer driver are as follows.

1.

Open the printer driver.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) .")

➔ P.164

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) .")

➔ P.165

User's Guide

iPF840 Updating paper information

2.

Select the Support sheet and click the Support Information button.

The default browser on your computer is started and the Canon website is displayed.

• Mac OS

The basic instructions for accessing the Canon website from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor are as follows.

1.

Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock .

2.

Click Print & Scan . (This is identified as Printers &

Scanners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS

X.)

3.

Select the printer from the list of printers and click Options & Supplies .

339

User's Guide

Updating paper information iPF840

4.

Click Utility .

5.

Click Open Printer Utility .

6.

Click Support .

340

User's Guide

iPF840 Updating paper information

7.

Click the Support Information button.

The default browser on your computer is started and the Canon website is displayed.

User's Guide

341

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls iPF840

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ...................................................................................................................

342

Loading Rolls in the Printer .............................................................................................................................

345

Changing the Type of Paper ...........................................................................................................................

350

Specifying the Paper Length ...........................................................................................................................

352

Removing the Roll from the Printer .................................................................................................................

352

Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls ...............................................................................................................

356

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper ....................................................................................................................

605

Feeding Roll Paper Manually ...........................................................................................................................

357

Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left ..............................................................................................

358

Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls ..........................................................................................................

358

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls ..........................................................................................................

360

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically ....................................................................................

366

Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls ...................................................................................................................

367

Roll Holder Set ...............................................................................................................................................

368

Automatic Roll Switching ................................................................................................................................

368

When printing on rolls, attach the Roll Holder to the roll.

Rolls have a two- or three-inch paper core. Use the correct attachment for the paper core. The printer comes equipped with the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment installed.

Using the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment

Roll Holder Side Holder Stopper Side Roll Holder Side

Using the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment

Holder Stopper Side

No Attachment Needed 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #1 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #2

342

Caution

• Set the roll on a table or other flat surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy, and dropping a roll may cause injury.

User's Guide

iPF840 Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

Important

• When handling the roll, be careful not to soil the printing surface. This may affect the printing quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.

• Cut the edge of the roll paper if it is uneven, dirty, or has tape residue. Otherwise, it may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality. Be careful not to cut through any barcodes printed on the roll.

㧪OO

• Align the edges of the paper on both ends of the roll. This may cause feeding problems.

1

Note

• For details on supported sizes and types of roll paper, see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide

. (See

" Paper Sizes .")

➔ P.332

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• To view instructions as you attach the Roll Holder, press the Navigate

button. (See " How to View Instructions With

Navigate .")

➔ P.432

Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position indicated

(b), remove it from the Roll Holder.

a b

2

When using a 3-inch paper core, align the tips (a) of 3-Inch

Paper Core Attachment #1 with the holes (b) of the Roll

Holder and insert it firmly.

b a

343

User's Guide

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls iPF840

3

With the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert the Roll Holder from the right of the roll. Insert it firmly until the roll touches the flange (a) of the Roll Holder.

a

Important

• When loading a roll, be careful to avoid hitting the printer hard with the roll. This may damage the Roll

Holder.

4

Insert the attachments for the roll paper core on the Holder Stopper.

Align the tips (a) of the attachment with the holes (b) of the Holder Stopper and insert it firmly.

• 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #2 b a

• 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment b

344 a

User's Guide

iPF840 Loading Rolls in the Printer

5

Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown. Holding it at the position shown (b), push it firmly in until the flange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches the roll.

Lock the Holder Stopper lever (c) by pushing it down toward the shaft side.

c b a

Follow these steps to load rolls in the printer.

You can load rolls in two positions, in the Roll 1 (Upper) and Roll 2 (Lower) holders.

Important

• Always load rolls when the printer is on. If the printer is off when you load a roll, the paper may not be advanced correctly when you turn the printer on.

• Before loading a roll, confirm whether the inside of the Top Cover or the Ejection Guide is soiled. If soiled, we

recommend cleaning in advance. (See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

Loading rolls in the Roll 1 (Upper) holder

1

Press the Load button.

2

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll 1 (Upper) , and then press the OK button.

Note

• If any cut sheet has been fed, or roll paper that will not be used has been fed from Roll 1 (Upper), a message is shown requesting you to remove it.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and go to the next step.

• If roll paper is loaded in Roll 1 (Upper) but Roll 1 (Upper) is not selected as the paper source, a message asking you whether or not to change paper is displayed.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Load , and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and proceed to the next step.

345

User's Guide

Loading Rolls in the Printer iPF840

3

Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.

4

Holding the Roll Holder so that the side with the white gear faces the side of the Roll Holder Slot with a white gear, load the Roll Holder shaft (a) into the grooves (b) on both ends of the Roll Holder Slot.

b a a b

346

5

• Be careful not to drop the roll and hurt yourself when loading it.

Caution • Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Roll Holder shaft (a) and the guide grooves (b) when loading rolls.

For instructions on attaching the Roll Holder to rolls, see " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ."

➔ P.342

Note

Using both hands, pull out the roll evenly on both ends and insert it in the Paper Feed Slot (a). Advance the roll until the buzzer sounds.

a a

User's Guide

iPF840 Loading Rolls in the Printer

Important

• Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may affect the printing quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.

• If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.

• Load the roll so that there is no gap between the right edge of the paper and the Roll Holder.

6

Lower the Ejection Guide.

7

Close the Top Cover.

8

Press the OK button.

The paper is now advanced.

9

Once paper feeding starts, you will need to do the following, based on the ManageRemainRoll setting and

the barcode printed on rolls. (See " Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left .")

➔ P.358

ManageRemainRoll

Off

Barcodes

Printed

Printer Operation After the Paper is Fed

A menu for selection of the type of paper is shown on the Display Screen.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

Not printed

On Printed

Not printed

The type and amount of paper left is automatically detected based on the barcode printed on the roll.

There is no need to specify the type and length of the paper.

A menu for selection of the type and length of paper is shown on the Display Screen.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type and length of paper loaded, and then press the OK button.

Important

• Cut the edge of the roll using the Paper Cutting function if the edge is creased or soiled.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

347

User's Guide

Loading Rolls in the Printer iPF840

Note

• For details on types of paper to select, see the Paper Reference Guide

. (See " Displaying the Paper

Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• Adjusting the printhead alignment with the type of paper to be used in printing may enhance printing quali-

ty. (See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

Loading rolls in the Roll 2 (Lower) holder

1

Caution

• Do not detach the Roll Unit in the following cases.

• During printing

Vibration from removing the Roll Unit may affect the printing quality.

• If a sheet is loaded in the printer

The sheet may be ejected, and (rarely) it may be bent.

Press the Load button.

2

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll 2 (Lower) , and then press the OK button.

Note

• If any cut sheet has been fed, or roll paper that will not be used has been fed from Roll 2 (Lower), a message is shown requesting you to remove it.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and go to the next step.

• If roll paper is loaded in Roll 2 (Lower) but Roll 2 (Lower) is not selected as the paper source, a message asking you whether or not to change paper is displayed.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Load , and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and proceed to the next step.

3

Holding the Roll Unit Lever (a), pull out the Roll Unit.

a

348

User's Guide

iPF840 Loading Rolls in the Printer

4

Holding the Roll Holder so that the side with the white gear faces the side of the Roll Holder Slot with a white gear, load the Roll Holder shaft (a) into the grooves (b) on both ends of the Roll Holder Slot.

b a a b

5

• Be careful not to drop the roll and hurt yourself when loading it.

Caution • Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Roll Holder shaft (a) and the guide grooves (b) when loading rolls.

For instructions on attaching the Roll Holder to rolls, see " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ."

➔ P.342

Note

Pull out the roll evenly on both ends and insert it in the Paper Feed Slot (a). Advance the roll until the buzzer sounds.

a

Important

• Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may affect the printing quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.

• If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.

• Load the roll so that there is no gap between the right edge of the paper and the Roll Holder.

349

User's Guide

Changing the Type of Paper iPF840

6

In a crouching position, push the Roll Unit into the printer.

7

Press the OK button.

The paper is now advanced.

8

Once paper feeding starts, you will need to do the following, based on the ManageRemainRoll setting and

the barcode printed on rolls. (See " Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left .")

➔ P.358

ManageRemainRoll

Off

Barcodes

Printed

Printer Operation After the Paper is Fed

A menu for selection of the type of paper is shown on the Display Screen.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

Not printed

On Printed

Not printed

The type and amount of paper left is automatically detected based on the barcode printed on the roll.

There is no need to specify the type and length of the paper.

A menu for selection of the type and length of paper is shown on the Display Screen.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type and length of paper loaded, and then press the OK button.

Important

• Cut the edge of the roll using the Paper Cutting function if the edge is creased or soiled.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

Note

• For details on types of paper to select, see the Paper Reference Guide

. (See " Displaying the Paper

Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• Adjusting the printhead alignment with the type of paper to be used in printing may enhance printing quali-

ty. (See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

350

Follow these steps to change the type of paper specified on the printer after you have loaded paper.

If you will continue using this type of paper later, selecting Keep Paper Type > On will save the time and effort of configuring the media type setting when you load the paper again. The current media type settings before you select On

will be automatically selected at that time. (See "Using the Same Type of Paper Regularly.")

➔ P.351

Important

• For best printing results, the printer fine-tunes the print head height and the feed amount for each type of paper.

Be sure to select the type of paper to use correctly before printing.

• Because the printer fine-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount.

(See " Adjusting the Feed Amount .")

➔ P.558

• Rolls and sheets have different printing areas, and sheets having a larger bottom margin than rolls.

(See " Print Area .")

➔ P.659

User's Guide

iPF840 Changing the Type of Paper

Changing the Type of Paper

1

Note

• When you load a roll, a menu for selection of the type of paper is shown on the Display Screen. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On , specify the roll length after

the type of paper. (See " Specifying the Paper Length .")

➔ P.352

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Chg. Paper Type , and then press the OK button.

4

Press the ▲ button or the ▼ button to select the media type ( Roll 1 (Upper) , Roll 2 (Lower) , or Cut

Sheet ), and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Important

• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed errors and affect printing quality.

Note

• For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Types of Paper .")

➔ P.332

By de-

fault, Plain Paper is selected.

• If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.

Using the Same Type of Paper Regularly

Configure this setting so that current media type settings will be automatically selected when you load the same type of paper later.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Keep Paper Type , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

351

Specifying the Paper Length iPF840

Note

• The specified media type setting is updated in the following situations.

• When using sheets, if you send a print job before loading a sheet, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specified by the print job.

• When you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed on the roll, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specified by the barcode.

• To change the media type setting,

see "Changing the Type of Paper."

➔ P.351

When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.

Note

• Specify the paper length when you have set ManageRemainRoll to On

. (See " Keeping Track of the Amount of

Roll Paper Left .")

➔ P.358

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Chg. Paper Size , and then press the OK button.

4

Press the ▲ button or the ▼ button to select Roll1(Uppr)Lngth or Roll2(Lwr) Lngth , and then press the

OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the length of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Specify the roll length as follows.

1.

Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the next field for input.

2.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.

3.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to finish entering the value, and then press the OK button.

352

Remove rolls from the printer as follows.

Note

• If you need to cut a printed roll, select Paper Cutting in the printer menu and cut the roll at the desired position.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

User's Guide

iPF840 Removing the Roll from the Printer

Removing rolls from the Roll 1 (Upper) position

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Remove Roll , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll 1 (Upper) , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

The roll is rewound.

Important

• If you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On in the Control Panel menu, a barcode is printed on the leading edge of the roll.

Do not remove the roll before the barcode is printed. You will be unable to keep track of the amount

of roll paper left. (See " Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left .")

➔ P.358

6

Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.

7

Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder in the direction of the arrow to rewind the roll.

353

User's Guide

Removing the Roll from the Printer iPF840

8

Holding the Roll Holder flange (a), remove the holder from the Roll Holder Slot.

a

9

Note

For instructions on removing the Roll Holder from rolls, see " Removing the Roll Holder from

Rolls ."

➔ P.356

Lower the Ejection Guide and close the Top Cover.

354

Note

• To load new paper in the printer at this point,

see " Loading Rolls in the Printer ."

➔ P.345

• Clean inside the top cover before loading paper.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

Removing rolls from the Roll 2 (Lower) position

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Remove Roll , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll 2 (Lower) , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Removing the Roll from the Printer

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

The roll is rewound.

Important

• If you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On in the Control Panel menu, a barcode is printed on the leading edge of the roll.

Do not remove the roll before the barcode is printed. You will be unable to keep track of the amount

of roll paper left. (See " Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left .")

➔ P.358

6

Check that " No Paper Loaded " is displayed on the Display

Screen, and then grasp the Roll Unit Lever (a) and pull out the Roll Unit.

a

7

Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder in the direction of the arrow to rewind the roll.

8

Holding the Roll Holder flange (a), remove the holder from the Roll Holder Slot.

a

Note

For instructions on removing the Roll Holder from rolls, see " Removing the Roll Holder from

Rolls ."

➔ P.356

To load new paper in the printer at this point, see " Loading Rolls in the Printer ."

➔ P.345

355

User's Guide

Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls iPF840

9

In a crouching position, push the Roll Unit in with both hands.

1

Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position indicated

(b), remove it from the Roll Holder.

a

2

Remove the Roll Holder from the roll.

b

3

When removing attachments, push the tips (a) in as you remove the attachment.

• 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #1 ( Roll Holder side)

356

User's Guide

iPF840 Feeding Roll Paper Manually

• 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #2 ( Holder Stopper side) a

• 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment a

Important

• Store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight. If paper is not stored properly, the printing surface may become scratched, which may affect the printing quality when you use it again.

After a roll has been advanced, you can press the Feed button to feed or retract the roll with the ▲ and ▼ buttons.

1

Press the Feed button.

2

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to advance or retract the roll.

Press ▲ to retract the roll manually.

Press ▼ to advance the roll manually.

Note

• If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for less than a second, the roll will move about 1 mm (0.04 in).

If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for more than a second, the roll will move until you release the button. Release the button when the Display Screen indicates " End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more.

".

357

User's Guide

Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left iPF840

Setting ManageRemainRoll to On in the Paper Menu of the Control Panel will print a barcode with text on the roll when the roll is removed that identifies the type of paper and amount left. When ManageRemainRoll is On and you load rolls with printed barcodes, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected after rolls are loaded. The barcode will be cut off after it has been read.

Important

• If the barcode on the roll is not detected, enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel.

Follow these steps to set ManageRemainRoll to On as follows.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select ManageRemainRoll , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On , and then press the OK button.

358

When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during ejection, soiling it. In that case, you may be able to improve the condition by setting the time to wait for the ink to dry after printing.

Note

• If the Cutter touches the print surface on which the ink is not dry, the paper surface may become scratched or soiled, or the paper surface may rub when the paper falls and the surface may become soiled.

To wait for the ink to dry without allowing printed documents to fall after printing, set Cutting Mode on the menu of the printer to Eject

. (See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

• The settings can also be made from the Control Panel on the printer. Select the type of paper from Paper Details in Paper Menu .

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Windows

1

Display the printer driver dialog box.

(See " Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) .")

➔ P.165

User's Guide

iPF840 Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls

2

Select the Main sheet and click tings in A Media Type .

C Advanced Set-

3

In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in B Between Pages and C Between Scans

Time , and then click OK .

in A Drying

(See " Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) .")

➔ P.170

Mac OS

1

Choose Print in the application menu.

2

Select the Main pane and click dia Type .

C Settings in A Me-

User's Guide

359

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls iPF840

3

In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in C Between Pages and D Between Scans

Time , and then click OK .

in B Drying

(See " Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac

OS) .")

➔ P.276

360

How rolls are cut after ejection varies depending on printer settings.

Cutting Method

Automatic The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter Unit following printer driver settings.

Eject (when the paper surface is being scratched / to wait for ink to dry)

Manual

(when using media that cannot be cut with the Cutter

Unit )

Paper cutting (to have the roll cut at your specified position)

Select this to move the cutter by key operation and cut paper. Although there are cases with Automatic in which the paper falls and the paper surface is scratched when the paper rubs the Output Stacker, you can avoid damaging the paper with this method since you can cut by holding the paper with your hand so that the paper does not fall when cutting,

Also, since you can cut while visually confirming the drying of the ink, you can avoid ejecting paper before the ink has dried.

To cut the roll with the Cutter Unit, press the Cut button.

Select this for paper that cannot be cut with the

Cutter Unit and for paper of which the leading edge curls strongly and rubs the printhead.

Cut each page from the roll using scissors. For continuous printing (if you will cut each page later), select Automatic Cutting > Yes or select Print Cut

Guideline .

Choose this option if you want to cut pages by pressing Cutter Unit buttons for manual cutting after printing when Automatic Cutting > No is selected or Print Cut Guideline is selected in the printer driver.

Otherwise choose this option if you want to cut the roll edge after loading a roll.

Media

Menu >

Paper Details >

(Various

Types of

Paper) >

Cutting

Mode

Printer Setting Driver Setting

Automatic Automatic

Cutting

Eject

(See " Cutting Roll

Paper After

Printing .")

P.152

Yes

Yes

Cut button pressed

Manual

Yes

No , Yes , Print

Cut Guideline

No , Print Cut

Guideline

User's Guide

iPF840 Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls

Note

• Automatic and Eject are valid only when you have selected Automatic Cutting > Yes in the printer driver.

• With Eject, printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the roll is cut.

• Eject is the preset selection in Cutting Mode for some types of paper. For this paper, we recommend keeping the preset cutting mode.

• If documents printed using Automatic, Eject, or manual cutting are short, rolls are advanced a specific amount before cutting to prevent problems with cutting and paper ejection. This may create a wider bottom margin, in some cases.

Cut rolls manually in the following cases:

Eject (when the paper surface is being scratched / to wait for ink to dry)

Eject

Rose Wine

Select Eject Print Stopped automatically at the cut position

As you support the document to prevent it from dropping, cut by pressing the Cut button

• When cutting wide printed documents after ejection, have two people support the documents. If the paper drops, printed documents may be damaged.

Important

• Do not lift the paper when holding printed documents before cutting. If the paper rises, it may affect the printing quality or cause rough cut edges.

1

Note

• Once the following step has been performed, the procedure can be started from step 7 the next time.

• Printing the second and subsequent times

• Printing after replacing with the same type of paper

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button. The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

361

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls iPF840

7

Print the job.

When printing is finished, the printer will stop without cutting.

8

Holding the printed document to prevent it from dropping, press the Cut button to cut the roll.

Manual (when using media that cannot be cut with the Cutter Unit )

Manual

Rose Wine

Rose Wine

Select Manual Print Feed paper to the cut position by pressing the

Feed button and cut manually

㩷 the OK button

1

Note

• Once the following step has been performed, the procedure can be started from step 8 the next time.

• Printing the second and subsequent times

• Printing after replacing with the same type of paper

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

362

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button. The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual , and then press the OK button.

7

When " Perform the detection of paper leading edge?

" is displayed, select Perform(recommend) .

8

Print the job.

The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.

User's Guide

iPF840 Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls

9

Press the Feed button.

Roll paper is fed to the specified cut position and then automatically stopped.

10

Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like.

11

Press the OK button.

After the roll is rewound, it stops automatically.

Manual (for paper of which the leading edge rubs the printhead)

Manual

Rose Wine

Rose Wine

Select Manual Print Feed paper to the cut position by pressing the

Feed button and cut manually

㩷 the OK button

1

Note

• Once the following step has been performed, the procedure can be started from step 10 the next time.

• Printing the second and subsequent times

• Printing after replacing with the same type of paper

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

Note

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

User's Guide

363

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls iPF840

2

Press the OK button. The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual , and then press the OK button.

7

When " Perform the detection of paper leading edge?

" is displayed, select Do not perform .

Note

• If you set the detection of paper leading edge to Do not perform , a margin of about 10 cm is created at the paper leading edge when printing starts.

• When the detection of paper leading edge is set to Do not perform , printing will start at the position at which the roll was set for the first printing after replacing a roll. Thus, the margin of the paper leading edge will enlarge.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

8

Press the Feed button.

9

Press ▲ or ▼ to align the paper leading edge with the (a) position.

364

10

Print the job.

The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.

• The printer can continue to receive print jobs from computers. If a print job is received and printed here, it can be printed without the margin of about 10 cm being created at the paper leading edge.

Note

11

Press the Feed button.

Roll paper is fed to the specified cut position and then automatically stopped.

User's Guide

iPF840 Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls

12

Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like.

Important

• Cut at the dotted line printed on the paper. If you cut on the printer side of the dotted line, the paper leading edge may rub against the printhead and may deviate from the paper retainer.

13

Press the OK button.

After the roll is rewound, it stops automatically.

Paper cutting (to have the roll cut at your specified position)

Cut the paper?

Yes

Feed paper the cutting position by pressing 䂥 or 䂯

1

Press the Feed button.

2

Press the ▼ button to advance the roll to the position for cutting.

Paper Cutting

3

Press the Cut button.

365

User's Guide

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically iPF840

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically.

If the leading edge of the paper is cut crooked or is not cut straight when roll paper is loaded, it will not print correctly. If this happens, you can cut the leading edge of the paper straight when loading a paper roll by using Trim Edge

First in the Control Panel menu.

Trim Edge First offers the following options.

• Automatic

If the leading edge of the paper is cut crooked and is not cut straight when loading roll paper, cut the leading edge straight and eject the fragment of paper to prevent printing on the platen and soiling the printer.

366

• On (Preset Len)

The amount to cut from the leading edge of the paper varies depending on the media type, and is cut to a prescribed length. For more information on the prescribed length, see the leading edge precut length in the

Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

• On(Input Length)

The amount to cut from the leading edge of paper is specified in the control panel. The amount to cut from the leading edge can be specified in the range of lengths displayed in the control panel. The range of lengths differs between each media type.

Note

• The amount to cut from the leading edge of paper cannot be set shorter than the length displayed in the control panel.

• Manual

The amount to cut from the leading edge of the paper can be adjusted by pressing the ▲ and ▼ buttons.

After making the adjustment, you can cut the paper by pressing the Paper Cutting button and selecting " Cut paper ".

After the paper has been cut, press " Finish paper set ".

• If you do not press " Finish paper set " after cutting the paper, you will not be able to print again.

Note

• Off

The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.

Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

Note

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Trim Edge First , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.

This setting takes effect the next time you load a roll.

For media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to generate debris when cut, select CutDustReduct.

> On in the Paper Menu of the Control Panel. This option reduces debris from cutting by printing black lines at the leading and trailing edges of documents. It may help prevent Printhead damage. You can specify for CutDustReduct.

to be activated for particular types of paper.

Important

• Do not set CutDustReduct.

to On for paper that wrinkles easily, such as Plain Paper or lightweight paper. This may impair cutting and cause paper jams.

• Borderless printing is not available when CutDustReduct.

is set to On . To use borderless printing, select Cut-

DustReduct.

> Off .

Set CutDustReduct.

to On as follows.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select CutDustReduct.

, and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

367

Roll Holder Set iPF840

Load a roll on the roll holder and then load the holder in the printer. The Roll Holder in the Roll Holder Set RH2-44 is for use with both 2-inch and 3-inch paper cores. Use the correct attachment for the particular paper core.

(See

" Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls .")

➔ P.342

• Roll Holder Set RH2-44

• Roll Holder (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)

• Attachments

Using the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment

2-Inch Paper Core Attachment

Using the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment

3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #1 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #2

With this printer, you can load roll paper in both the upper (roll paper 1) and lower (roll paper 2) rolls, and print by automatically switching between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2 depending on the print job.

Details on how to switch between roll paper 1 and roll paper 2,

see " Roll Paper Switching Method ."

➔ P.39

368

User's Guide

iPF840 Loading Sheets in the Printer

Loading Sheets in the Printer ..........................................................................................................................

369

Changing the Type of Paper ...........................................................................................................................

350

Printing From a Desired Starting Point ............................................................................................................

371

Removing Sheets ...........................................................................................................................................

373

Clearing a Jammed Sheet ........................................................................................................................

608

Follow these steps to load sheets in the printer.

Important

• Paper that is wrinkled or warped may jam. If necessary, straighten the paper and reload it.

Load the paper straight. Loading paper askew will cause an error.

(See " Paper loaded askew.

.")

➔ P.644

• If you are using cut sheets of length 860 mm (33.9 in) or more, the loaded cut sheets may touch the floor, causing soiling and scratching of the paper. If this happens, place a clean cloth or paper on the floor so that the cut sheets do not touch the floor directly.

Note

• Before loading sheets, make sure the printer is clean inside the Top Cover and around the Ejection Guide. If these areas are dirty, we recommend cleaning them in advance.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

• Store unused paper in the original package, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight.

1

Select sheets as the paper source.

• If a print job was received

Sheets are automatically selected, and the media type and size specified by the print job are shown on the Display Screen.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Load Paper , and then press the OK button.

• If no print job was received

1.

Press the Load button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cut Sheet , and then press the OK button.

Note

• If any paper has been advanced that will not be used, a message is shown requesting you to remove it.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and go to the next step.

369

User's Guide

Loading Sheets in the Printer iPF840

2

Lift the Release Lever and open the Top Cover.

Important

• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these parts may damage them.

b a c

370

3

With a sheet lengthwise and printing-side up, insert it between the Platen (a) and the Paper Retainer (b).

Align the edges of the sheet as follows.

1.

Align the sheet with the Paper Alignment Line (c) at right.

2.

Align the inserted edge of the sheet with the leading edge of the Paper Alignment Line (d), as shown.

c d c b a

When inserted, sheets are automatically held by suction against the Platen.

• Load a sheet so that it is parallel to the Paper Alignment Line at right (c). Loading paper askew will cause an error.

Important

• Warped paper may rub against the Printhead. Straighten paper if it is warped before loading it.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing From a Desired Starting Point

Note

• You can adjust the strength of suction holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever is up. If it is difficult to load paper, press the ▲ or ▼ button on the Control Panel to adjust the strength. Set suction stronger by pressing the ▲ button or weaker with the ▼ button. Three settings are available.

However, even if you increase the suction, it may not be sufficient to hold some types of paper against the

Platen well. In this case, use your hand to load the paper.

• Sheets are held in place by suction through holes on the Platen. Although the suction may produce a noise when paper is loaded in some positions, it does not indicate a problem. If the noise is distracting, try moving the paper over slightly to the left or right (up to 1 mm [0.039 in]) while keeping it parallel to the

Paper Alignment Line.

• The suction remains on for about 30 seconds during loading. If you cannot finish loading a sheet during this time, pull the sheet away and reinsert it to start the suction again.

4

Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.

• If a print job was received

Pressing the OK button will advance the paper, and then printing will begin.

• If no print job was received

A menu for selection of the type of paper is shown on the Display Screen.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

The printer now starts feeding the paper.

Note

• Refer to Paper Reference Guide

for details on type of paper to select. (See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

Print on sheets from a desired starting point as follows.

Set Width Detection to Off

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

User's Guide

371

Printing From a Desired Starting Point iPF840

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Width Detection , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off , and then press the OK button.

Load paper in the desired position to start printing from

Follow these instructions to load paper at the desired starting position for printing when Width Detection is Off .

1

If you did not send a print job in advance, a menu for selection of the type of paper is displayed.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

Note

• If a print job was received before paper was advanced, the media type and size specified by the job are shown on the Display Screen.

Go to step 2.

2

" Width Detection OFF. OK to continue?

" is now shown on the Display Screen. Press ▲ or ▼ to select

" Leave OFF ", and then press the OK button.

3

After a menu for selection of the paper size is displayed, press ▲ or ▼ to select the paper size, and then press the OK button.

4

Open the Top Cover and check the position where paper is loaded.

To start printing from the current position, close the

Top Cover.

To reposition the paper, lift the Release Lever.

372

User's Guide

iPF840 Removing Sheets

5

Keeping the right edge of the paper aligned with the extended line of the paper alignment line (a) on the right side of the printer and the position from which to start printing aligned with the groove (b) at the far end of the platen, load the paper.

a b

6

Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.

Remove sheets from the printer as follows.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject Paper , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cut Sheet , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

373

Removing Sheets iPF840

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

The paper is ejected from the front of the printer.

6

As you hold the sheet, lift the Release Lever and remove the sheet.

7

Lower the Release Lever.

374

User's Guide

iPF840 Wheeled Output Stacker

Wheeled Output Stacker ................................................................................................................................

375

Using the Wheeled Output Stacker ............................................................................................................

375

An output stacker with casters, positioned in front of the printer.

a Output Stacker

A cloth tray that catches ejected documents.

The Output Stacker can be opened and closed using the rod in front.

b Output Stacker Ejection Guides

Prevent printed documents from winding around the Roll Holder or being drawn into the Paper Feed Slot.

Hold the Wheeled Output Stacker by these guides when moving it.

c Output Stacker Foot Stand

Equipped with casters to facilitate moving it.

d Stopper

Locks the Stand casters.

Always release the Stopper before moving the printer. Moving the printer while the Stopper is locked may scratch the casters or the floor.

Note

• For instructions on assembling the Wheeled Output Stacker, see the setup guide provided with the Wheeled Output Stacker.

Positioning the Wheeled Output Stacker by the printer will prevent rolls from dropping on the floor after printing.

The stacker is equipped with casters to facilitate moving it.

Important

• The Output Stacker can accommodate one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it is printed.

375

User's Guide

Using the Wheeled Output Stacker iPF840

Positioning the Wheeled Output Stacker by the printer

1.

Holding the Output Stacker Ejection Guides (a), move the stacker between the printer Stand.

a

2.

Lock the casters.

Removing the Wheeled Output Stacker from the printer

Note

• If there is not enough space to move the Wheeled Output Stacker, remove any printed documents inside the Output Stacker and fold the Output Stacker up.

1.

Release the caster lock.

376

User's Guide

iPF840 Using the Wheeled Output Stacker

2.

Holding the Output Stacker Ejection Guides (a), move the stacker away from the printer.

a

User's Guide

377

The Features of Media Configuration Tool iPF840

The Features of Media Configuration Tool .......................................................................................................

378

Installation Procedures ...................................................................................................................................

378

Updating Media Information After Installation ..................................................................................................

380

Media Configuration Tool Main Window ..........................................................................................................

384

Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper ...............................................

385

Adding Media Types ..................................................................................................................................

386

Changing Media Names ............................................................................................................................

390

Deleting Media Types You Have Added .....................................................................................................

392

Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide ................................................................................................

394

Changing the Display Order of Media Types ..............................................................................................

396

Applying a Saved Media Information File on Another Computer .................................................................

398

Checking the update ......................................................................................................................................

399

In imagePROGRAF, the best printer settings for each paper are collected together in media information files in order to give the highest quality printing results. Settings for Canon genuine paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are provided by Canon in these media information files.

• Canon genuine paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are detailed in the Paper Reference Guide.

Note

Using the Media Configuration Tool allows you to do the following.

• When new paper supported by the printer is added, the media information file can be automatically downloaded from the Canon website and the new media information can be added to the printer control panel and printer driver.

• You can rearrange lists of the types of paper on the printer control panel and in printer driver dialog boxes and rename them, in addition to other functions.

Important

• Normally, when the printer driver is installed from the User Software CD-ROM, the Media Configuration Tool is also installed and the media information is also configured. Use this software if you are not using the User Software CD-ROM, or to add new media information or edit existing media information.

• Administration of paper information using the Media Configuration Tool should be performed by the printer administrator.

• A computer that is connected to the Internet is required in order to download the media information file from the website.

Drivers Applicable with Media Configuration Tool

• imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

378

The procedure for installing the Media Configuration Tool is as follows.

Important

• When you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM, the Media Configuration Tool is also installed and the media information is also configured. The following procedure is therefore not normally needed. Perform the following procedure if you are installing the Media Configuration Tool without using the User Software

CD-ROM, such as by downloading the latest version of the Media Configuration Tool from the Canon website.

• You must be logged in as Administrator when installing software in Windows.

User's Guide

iPF840 Installation Procedures

1

Start the Media Configuration Tool installer.

Click the Next button.

2

The next screen presents selections for the country or area where the printer is used.

Select a country or territory then click the Next button.

3

The License Agreement is displayed.

If you accept the agreement, click Yes .

4

The Change Installation Location screen appears.

Select the destination folder then click the Next button.

User's Guide

379

Updating Media Information After Installation iPF840

5

The Installation Complete screen appears.

Click the Finish button.

This completes the installation of Media Configuration

Tool.

Important

• After the installation is finished, update the media information by referring to

Updating Media Information After Installation

P.380

.

If you are running the Media Configuration Tool for the first time after installing it, you need to configure the media information in the printer control panel and printer driver.

• You do not need to perform this procedure if you installed the printer driver using the User Software CD-ROM.

Important • Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

1

From the start menu, select All Programs > imagePROGRAF Media Configuration Tool > imagePROG-

RAF Media Configuration Tool .

2

The Select Printer dialog box is displayed. Select the printer for which to configure the media information, and then click the Next button.

380

3

Note

• If you are using the printer without installing the printer driver, click the Specify a printer that is not installed button and specify the printer by following the on-screen instructions.

• In the following screens, you cannot change the printer where media type information is to be updated.

The Add Media Type dialog box is displayed. Make sure that Connect to the Internet to get the latest information is selected, and then click the OK button.

The latest media information file is downloaded from the Internet.

User's Guide

iPF840 Updating Media Information After Installation

Note

• If the main window is displayed at this time, it means that the media information has already been updated and the rest of the operation is not needed.

Important

• If the message on the right is displayed, the media information file cannot be downloaded automatically from the Internet. Configure the settings by referring

to If the Media Information File Does Not Download

Automatically From the Internet

➔ P.382

.

4

The Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed. Click the Add Genuine Paper button.

5

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

6

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

Note

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

User's Guide

381

Updating Media Information After Installation iPF840

7

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.398

If the Media Information File Does Not Download Automatically From the Internet

If the following message is displayed, configure the settings by using the following procedure.

1

Open a web browser on a computer that can access the Internet, and access the Canon website.

2

Download the media information file (.amx file) corresponding to the printer to update from the Canon website.

3

Copy the downloaded media information file (.amx file) to the computer where the Media Configuration Tool is installed.

4

Run the Media Configuration Tool, then select Specify the Media Information File and click the Browse button in the Add Media Type dialog box.

382

User's Guide

iPF840 Updating Media Information After Installation

5

Select the folder that contains the media information file

(.amx file) you downloaded and click the OK button.

6

The names of the media information files contained in the selected folder are displayed in the Media Information File field in the Add Media Type dialog box.

Select the check box for the media information file name and click the OK button.

7

The Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed. Click the Add Genuine Paper button.

8

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

User's Guide

383

Media Configuration Tool Main Window iPF840

9

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

10

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.398

The explanation below is on the Media Configuration Tool main window.

Use the following procedure to open Media Configuration Tool main window.

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

Important

1

From the start menu, select All Programs > imagePROGRAF Media Configuration Tool > imagePROG-

RAF Media Configuration Tool .

2

The Select Printer dialog box is displayed. Select the printer for which to configure the media information, and then click the Next button.

384

Note

• If you are using the printer without installing the printer driver, click the Specify a printer that is not installed button and specify the printer by following the on-screen instructions.

• In the following screens, you cannot change the printer where media type information is to be updated.

User's Guide

iPF840 Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper

The Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed.

Note

• If the Add Media Type dialog box is displayed at this point without the main window appearing, configure

the setting by referring to Updating Media Information After Installation

➔ P.380

.

• Add Genuine Paper button

When this button is clicked, the Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed, which allows you to add media information files released by Canon to the printer control panel and printer driver. You can also change names, toggle between displaying and hiding, and delete added media types.

You can also change the display order of the paper types.

Refer to " Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper "

➔ P.385

for details on Add Genuine Paper .

• Link to Support Information button

You can check information such as the latest information for the product and software version upgrade information.

• Link to User Manual Button

Displays the printer user's manual

When adding genuine paper and feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver and when editing media type information, click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media Configuration Tool main window to open the Edit Media Types dialog box.

Note

• For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window,

see " Media Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.384

• Paper that is displayed grayed out does not appear in the printer driver or printer control panel.

• Add Button

To add genuine paper or feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver, click this button.

For details on the procedure for adding media types, see " Adding Media Types ."

P.386

385

User's Guide

Adding Media Types iPF840

• Rename Button

To change the name on the printer control panel and the name in the printer driver for genuine paper and feed confirmed paper, select the paper to change and click this button.

For details on the procedure for changing paper display names,

see " Changing Media Names ."

➔ P.390

• Delete Button

To delete added genuine paper and feed confirmed paper from the printer control panel and printer driver, select the paper to delete and click this button.

For details on the procedure for deleting added media types,

see " Deleting Media Types You Have Added ."

➔ P.392

• Show/Hide Button

To change whether or not genuine paper or feed confirmed paper is displayed in the printer control panel and printer driver, select the paper to change and click this button.

For details on the procedure for changing whether or not to display media types,

see " Switching Media Types

Display Show/Hide ."

➔ P.394

Change Display Order button ( or )

To change the display order of a media type in the printer control panel and printer driver, select the paper to change and click this button.

For details on the procedure for changing the display order of media types,

see " Changing the Display Order of Media Types ."

➔ P.396

Important

• When you update the media type information, perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer.

• It may not be possible to deleting, showing/hiding, and changing the display order under some conditions.

Note

You can register media information files (.amx file) released by Canon in the printer control panel and printer driver.

Important

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

• When you apply a media information file, the media type display order and other settings return to their default values. Reconfigure these settings again after applying the media information file.

1

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

386

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.384

• If the Add Media Type dialog box is displayed after you select the printer without the main window ap-

pearing, configure the setting by referring to Updating Media Information After Installation

➔ P.380

.

User's Guide

iPF840 Adding Media Types

2

When a newer version of media information file than the media information file that is applied to your printer driver is released on the Canon website, the message on the right is displayed.

To update the media information, click the OK button.

Important

• When you update the media information, the paper display order and Show/Hide settings return to their default values.

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

Click the Add button.

3

Make sure that Connect to the Internet to get the latest information is selected, and then click the OK button.

Important

• When you update the media information, the paper display order and Show/Hide settings return to their default values.

• If the message on the right is displayed at this time, the latest media information is already applied to your printer driver. There is normally no need to update.

To exit without updating, click the No button. To continue with the update, click the Yes button.

• If the message on the right is displayed, the media information file cannot be downloaded automatically from the Internet. Configure the settings by referring

to If the Media Information File Does Not Download

Automatically From the Internet

➔ P.388

.

4

Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed.

387

User's Guide

Adding Media Types iPF840

5

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

6

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

7

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

P.398

If the Media Information File Does Not Download Automatically From the Internet

If the following message is displayed, configure the settings by using the following procedure.

388

1

Open a web browser on a computer that can access the Internet, and access the Canon website.

2

Download the media information file (.amx file) corresponding to the printer to update from the Canon website.

User's Guide

iPF840 Adding Media Types

3

Copy the downloaded media information file (.amx file) to the computer where the Media Configuration Tool is installed.

4

Run the Media Configuration Tool. Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the main window, and then click the Add button in the Edit Media Types dialog box.

5

Select Specify the Media Information File in the

Add Media Type dialog box, and then click the

Browse button.

6

Select the folder that contains the media information file

(.amx file) you downloaded and click the OK button.

7

The names of the media information files contained in the selected folder are displayed in the Media Information File field in the Add Media Type dialog box.

Select the check box for the media information file name and click the OK button.

8

Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed.

User's Guide

389

Changing Media Names iPF840

9

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

10

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

390

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

11

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

P.398

Important

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

User's Guide

iPF840 Changing Media Names

1

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

2

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.384

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

3

In the Media Type list, select the name to change.

Click the Rename button.

4

The Rename Media dialog box is displayed.

Edit the names in Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel and click the OK button.

Note

• To restore the original names, click the Restore button.

• The characters that can be entered for Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel are stated below.

alphanumeric, space, "-", ".", "_", "(", ")", "+", "%", ",", "/"

• For Name in Printer Driver up to 32 one Byte characters can be entered, and for Name on Control

Panel up to 16 one Byte characters can be entered.

391

User's Guide

Deleting Media Types You Have Added iPF840

5

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

6

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

7

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

Important

• When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

P.398

392

Important

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

User's Guide

iPF840 Deleting Media Types You Have Added

1

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

2

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.384

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

3

In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to delete.

Click the Delete button.

4

• Only paper for which Status in the Media Type is Add can be deleted.

Note

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

User's Guide

393

Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide iPF840

5

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

6

Important

• When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.398

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

1

Important

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

394

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.384

User's Guide

iPF840 Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide

2

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

3

In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to switch off or on for display.

Click the Show/Hide button.

The selected paper is alternately shown or hidden.

4

Note

• You can select multiple paper.

• The names of media switched for non-display appear grayed out in the Media Type list.

• Each time you click the Show/Hide button, the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and printer panel, to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel, and then to showing only the printer panel.

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

5

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

User's Guide

395

Changing the Display Order of Media Types iPF840

6

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

Important

• When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.398

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

1

Important

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

2

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.384

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

396

User's Guide

iPF840 Changing the Display Order of Media Types

3

Select the paper in the Media Type list for which to change the display order, and then click the buttons to move the item ( or ).

The selected item moves one line up or down for every button click.

4

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

5

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

6

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

Important

• When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

397

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.398

User's Guide

Applying a Saved Media Information File on Another Computer iPF840

You can import and use the media information file you saved from your computer on other printers and computer by using the following procedure.

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

Important

1

Copy the saved media information file (.amx) onto the other computer. 

2

Install and run the Media Configuration Tool on the other computer.

3

Select the printer in the Select Printer dialog box, and then click the Next button.

• Select the printer model that matches the media information file you are attempting to import.

Note

4

Select Specify the Media Information File in the

Add Media Type dialog box, click the Browse button, and then specify the folder that contains the .amx

file you copied.

Select the check box for the media information file name and click the OK button.

5

Note

• If the Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed at this time, click the Add Genuine Paper button, and then click the Add button on the screen that opens.

The Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed. Click the Add Genuine Paper button.

398

Note

• If the Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed without the main window appearing, proceed to the following step.

User's Guide

iPF840 Checking the update

6

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

7

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

After updating the media information using the Media Configuration Tool, you can check whether the update has been applied to the printer in the control panel of the printer.

1

Click the About button in the Media Configuration Tool main window to open the About dialog box.

2

Check the value xx.xx (xxxx) of MIT DB Version .

3

Check the value xx.xx (xxxx) of MIT in Set./Adj. Menu > Printer Info > System Info in the printer control panel.

If the values in Steps 2 and 3 are the same, the update has been applied to the printer.

User's Guide

399

The Features of Media Configuration Tool iPF840

The Features of Media Configuration Tool .......................................................................................................

400

Procedures for Installing .................................................................................................................................

400

Updating Media Information After Installation ..................................................................................................

402

Media Configuration Tool Main Window ..........................................................................................................

406

Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper ...............................................

408

Adding Media Types ..................................................................................................................................

409

Changing Media Names ............................................................................................................................

413

Deleting Media Types You Have Added .....................................................................................................

416

Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide ................................................................................................

417

Changing the Display Order of Media Types ..............................................................................................

419

Applying a Saved Media Information File on Another Computer .................................................................

421

Checking the update ......................................................................................................................................

423

In imagePROGRAF, the best printer settings for each paper are collected together in media information files in order to give the highest quality printing results. Settings for Canon genuine paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are provided by Canon in these media information files.

• Canon genuine paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are detailed in the Paper Reference Guide.

Note

Using the Media Configuration Tool allows you to do the following.

• When new paper supported by the printer is added, the media information file can be automatically downloaded from the Canon website and the new media information can be added to the printer control panel and printer driver.

• You can rearrange lists of the types of paper on the printer control panel and in printer driver dialog boxes and rename them, in addition to other functions.

Important

• Normally, when the printer driver is installed from the User Software CD-ROM, the Media Configuration Tool is also installed and the media information is also configured. Use this software if you are not using the User Software CD-ROM, or to add new media information or edit existing media information.

• Administration of paper information using the Media Configuration Tool should be performed by the printer administrator.

• A computer that is connected to the Internet is required in order to download the media information file from the website.

Drivers Applicable with Media Configuration Tool

• imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

400

Start the installer in the new version of Media Configuration Tool, and follow procedures below to install the Media

Configuration Tool.

Important

• When you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM, the Media Configuration Tool is also installed and the media information is also configured. The following procedure is therefore not normally needed. Perform the following procedure if you are installing the Media Configuration Tool without using the User Software

CD-ROM, such as by downloading the latest version of the Media Configuration Tool from the Canon website.

User's Guide

iPF840 Procedures for Installing

1

Double-click Canon imagePROGRAF Media Configuration Tool.pkg

to start the Media Configuration

Tool installer.

2

The Software License Agreement is displayed.

After you have read Canon Software License Agreement, click the Continue button.

3

The next screen presents selections for the country or area where the printer is used.

Select a country or territory then click the Continue button.

4

Click the Install button.

User's Guide

401

Updating Media Information After Installation iPF840

5

Enter an administrator name/password and click the Install

Software button.

6

Click the Close button.

The installation of Media Configuration Tool is complete.

Note

• When the installation is completed properly, the Media Configuration Tool folder is saved in the following folder.

Applications > Canon Utilities > Media Configuration Tool

Important

• After the installation is finished, update the media information by referring to

Updating Media Information After Installation

➔ P.402

.

If you are running the Media Configuration Tool for the first time after installing it, you need to configure the media information in the printer control panel and printer driver.

Important

• You do not need to perform this procedure if you installed the printer driver using the User Software CD-ROM.

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

1

From the Applications menu, select Canon Utilities > imagePROGRAF Media Configuration Tool >

CNWIMCT .

2

The Select Printer dialog box is displayed. Select the printer for which to configure the media information, and then click the Next button.

402

Note

• The printers for which the printer driver is installed are displayed. If the printer you want to configure is not displayed, check whether the printer driver for the target model is correctly installed.

• In the following screens, you cannot change the printer where media type information is to be updated.

User's Guide

iPF840 Updating Media Information After Installation

3

The Add Media Type dialog box is displayed. Make sure that Connect to the Internet to get the latest information is selected, and then click the OK button.

The latest media information file is downloaded from the Internet.

Note

• If the main window is displayed at this time, it means that the media information has already been updated and the rest of the operation is not needed.

Important

• If the message on the right is displayed, the media information file cannot be downloaded automatically from

the Internet. Configure the settings by referring to If the

Media Information File Does Not Download Automatically

From the Internet

P.404

.

4

The Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed. Click the Add Genuine Paper button.

5

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

User's Guide

403

Updating Media Information After Installation iPF840

6

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

7

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.421

If the Media Information File Does Not Download Automatically From the Internet

If the following message is displayed, configure the settings by using the following procedure.

404

1

Open a web browser on a computer that can access the Internet, and access the Canon website.

2

Download the media information file (.amx file) corresponding to the printer to update from the Canon website.

3

Copy the downloaded media information file (.amx file) to the computer where the Media Configuration Tool is installed.

User's Guide

iPF840 Updating Media Information After Installation

4

Run the Media Configuration Tool, then select Specify the Media Information File and click the Browse button in the Add Media Type dialog box.

5

Select the folder that contains the media information file (.amx file) you downloaded and click the Open button.

6

The names of the media information files contained in the selected folder are displayed in the Media Information File field in the Add Media Type dialog box.

Select the check box for the media information file name and click the OK button.

7

The Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed. Click the Add Genuine Paper button.

User's Guide

405

Media Configuration Tool Main Window iPF840

8

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

9

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

10

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.421

406

The explanation below is on the Media Configuration Tool main window.

Use the following procedure to open Media Configuration Tool main window.

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

Important

1

From the Applications menu, select Canon Utilities > imagePROGRAF Media Configuration Tool >

CNWIMCT .

User's Guide

iPF840 Media Configuration Tool Main Window

2

The Select Printer dialog box is displayed. Select the printer for which to configure the media information, and then click the Next button.

Note

• The printers for which the printer driver is installed are displayed. If the printer you want to configure is not displayed, check whether the printer driver for the target model is correctly installed.

• In the following screens, you cannot change the printer where media type information is to be updated.

The Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed.

Note

• If the Add Media Type dialog box is displayed at this point without the main window appearing, configure

the setting by referring to Updating Media Information After Installation

➔ P.402

.

• Add Genuine Paper button

When this button is clicked, the Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed, which allows you to add media information files released by Canon to the printer control panel and printer driver. You can also change names, toggle between displaying and hiding, and delete added media types.

You can also change the display order of the paper types.

Refer to " Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper "

➔ P.408

for details on Add Genuine Paper .

• Link to Support Information button

You can check information such as the latest information for the product and software version upgrade information.

• Link to User Manual Button

Displays the printer user's manual

407

User's Guide

Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper iPF840

When adding genuine paper and feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver and when editing media type information, click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media Configuration Tool main window to open the Edit Media Types dialog box.

408

Note

• For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window,

see " Media Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.406

• Paper that is displayed grayed out does not appear in the printer driver or printer control panel.

• Add Button

To add genuine paper or feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver, click this button.

For details on the procedure for adding media types, see " Adding Media Types ."

➔ P.409

• Rename Button

To change the name on the printer control panel and the name in the printer driver for genuine paper and feed confirmed paper, select the paper to change and click this button.

For details on the procedure for changing paper display names,

see " Changing Media Names ."

P.413

• Delete Button

To delete added genuine paper and feed confirmed paper from the printer control panel and printer driver, select the paper to delete and click this button.

For details on the procedure for deleting added media types,

see " Deleting Media Types You Have Added ."

➔ P.416

• Show/Hide Button

To change whether or not genuine paper or feed confirmed paper is displayed in the printer control panel and printer driver, select the paper to change and click this button.

For details on the procedure for changing whether or not to display media types,

see " Switching Media Types

Display Show/Hide ."

➔ P.417

Change Display Order button ( or )

To change the display order of a media type in the printer control panel and printer driver, select the paper to change and click this button.

For details on the procedure for changing the display order of media types,

see " Changing the Display Order of Media Types ."

➔ P.419

Important

• When you update the media type information, perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer.

• It may not be possible to deleting, showing/hiding, and changing the display order under some conditions.

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Adding Media Types

You can register media information files (.amx file) released by Canon in the printer control panel and printer driver.

Important

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

• When you apply a media information file, the media type display order and other settings return to their default values. Reconfigure these settings again after applying the media information file.

1

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

P.406

• If the Add Media Type dialog box is displayed after you select the printer without the main window ap-

pearing, configure the setting by referring to Updating Media Information After Installation

➔ P.402

.

When a newer version of media information file than the media information file that is applied to your printer driver is released on the Canon website, the message on the right is displayed.

To update the media information, click the OK button.

2

Important

• When you update the media information, the paper display order and Show/Hide settings return to their default values.

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

Click the Add button.

User's Guide

409

Adding Media Types iPF840

3

Make sure that Connect to the Internet to get the latest information is selected, and then click the OK button.

Important

• When you update the media information, the paper display order and Show/Hide settings return to their default values.

• If the message on the right is displayed at this time, the latest media information is already applied to your printer driver. There is normally no need to update.

To exit without updating, click the No button. To continue with the update, click the Yes button.

• If the message on the right is displayed, the media information file cannot be downloaded automatically from

the Internet. Configure the settings by referring to If the

Media Information File Does Not Download Automatically

From the Internet

P.411

.

4

Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed.

5

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

410

User's Guide

iPF840 Adding Media Types

6

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

7

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.421

If the Media Information File Does Not Download Automatically From the Internet

If the following message is displayed, configure the settings by using the following procedure.

1

Open a web browser on a computer that can access the Internet, and access the Canon website.

2

Download the media information file (.amx file) corresponding to the printer to update from the Canon website.

3

Copy the downloaded media information file (.amx file) to the computer where the Media Configuration Tool is installed.

4

Run the Media Configuration Tool. Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the main window, and then click the Add button in the Edit Media Types dialog box.

411

User's Guide

Adding Media Types iPF840

5

Select Specify the Media Information File in the

Add Media Type dialog box, and then click the

Browse button.

6

Select the folder that contains the media information file (.amx file) you downloaded and click the Open button.

7

The names of the media information files contained in the selected folder are displayed in the Media Information File field in the Add Media Type dialog box.

Select the check box for the media information file name and click the OK button.

412

8

Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed.

User's Guide

iPF840 Changing Media Names

9

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

10

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

11

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.421

Important

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

413

User's Guide

Changing Media Names iPF840

1

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

2

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.406

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

3

In the Media Type list, select the name to change.

Click the Rename button.

414

4

The Rename Media dialog box is displayed.

Edit the names in Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel and click the OK button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Changing Media Names

Note

• To restore the original names, click the Restore button.

• The characters that can be entered for Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel are stated below.

alphanumeric, space, "-", ".", "_", "(", ")", "+", "%", ",", "/"

• For Name in Printer Driver up to 32 one Byte characters can be entered, and for Name on Control

Panel up to 16 one Byte characters can be entered.

5

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

6

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

7

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

Important

• When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.421

415

User's Guide

Deleting Media Types You Have Added iPF840

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

1

Important

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

2

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.406

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

3

In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to delete.

Click the Delete button.

416

Note

• Only paper for which Status in the Media Type is Add can be deleted.

User's Guide

iPF840 Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide

4

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

5

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

6

Important

• When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.421

Important

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

417

User's Guide

Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide iPF840

1

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

2

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.406

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

3

In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to switch off or on for display.

Click the Show/Hide button.

The selected paper is alternately shown or hidden.

418

Note

• You can select multiple paper.

• The names of media switched for non-display appear grayed out in the Media Type list.

• Each time you click the Show/Hide button, the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and printer panel, to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel, and then to showing only the printer panel.

User's Guide

iPF840 Changing the Display Order of Media Types

4

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

5

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

6

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

Important

• When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.421

Important

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

419

User's Guide

Changing the Display Order of Media Types iPF840

1

Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media

Configuration Tool main window.

2

Note

For more information on the procedure for opening the Media Configuration Tool main window, see " Media

Configuration Tool Main Window ."

➔ P.406

The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.

3

Select the paper in the Media Type list for which to change the display order, and then click the buttons to move the item ( or ).

The selected item moves one line up or down for every button click.

420

User's Guide

iPF840 Applying a Saved Media Information File on Another Computer

4

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

5

The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

The printer control panel and printer driver media information is updated.

6

• You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver .

Note

Important

• When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.

The message on the right is displayed.

If you want to save the current media information in a file, click the Yes button. If you do not want to save it, click the

No button.

Note

• The media information is saved as a media information file (.amx file).

For the method for loading a saved media information file in another computer, see " Applying a Saved

Media Information File on Another Computer ."

➔ P.421

You can import and use the media information file you saved from your computer on other printers and computer by using the following procedure.

• Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.

Important

1

Copy the saved media information file (.amx) onto the other computer. 

421

User's Guide

Applying a Saved Media Information File on Another Computer iPF840

2

Install and run the Media Configuration Tool on the other computer.

3

Select the printer in the Select Printer dialog box, and then click the Next button.

• Select the printer model that matches the media information file you are attempting to import.

Note

4

Select Specify the Media Information File in the

Add Media Type dialog box, click the Browse button, and then specify the folder that contains the .amx

file you copied.

Select the check box for the media information file name and click the OK button.

5

Note

• If the Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed at this time, click the Add Genuine Paper button, and then click the Add button on the screen that opens.

The Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed. Click the Add Genuine Paper button.

6

Note

• If the Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed without the main window appearing, proceed to the following step.

In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update button.

422

User's Guide

iPF840 Checking the update

7

Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.

After updating the media information using the Media Configuration Tool, you can check whether the update has been applied to the printer in the control panel of the printer.

1

Click the About button in the Media Configuration Tool main window to open the About dialog box.

2

Check the value xx.xx (xxxx) of MIT DB Version .

3

Check the value xx.xx (xxxx) of MIT in Set./Adj. Menu > Printer Info > System Info in the printer control panel.

If the values in Steps 2 and 3 are the same, the update has been applied to the printer.

User's Guide

423

iPF840

424

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

15

29

157

267

331

Control Panel

Operations and Display Screen .........................................................

426

Printer Menu ......................................................................................

435

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

463

475

495

549

565

603

635

657

661

imagePROGRAF

425

Control Panel iPF840

Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................................

426

Control Panel Display .....................................................................................................................................

428

How to View Instructions With Navigate .........................................................................................................

432

Checking Instructions During Printer Operations .............................................................................................

434

426 a Display Screen

Shows printer menus, as well as the printer status and messages.

b Data Lamp (green)

• Flashing

During printing, the Data lamp flashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs. Otherwise, this lamp flashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the firmware.

• Off

There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.

c Message Lamp (orange)

• On

A warning message is displayed.

• Flashing

An error message is displayed.

• Off

The printer is off or is operating normally.

d Menu button

Displays the Tab Selection screen

. (See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

e Arrow buttons

• ◀ button

Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to move to another tab.

In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.

• ▲ button

Press this button in the menu to move to another item.

In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to increment the number.

• ▶ button

Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to move to another tab.

In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.

User's Guide

iPF840 Control Panel

• ▼ button

Press this button in the menu to move to another item.

In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to decrement the number.

f OK button

Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to display the menu of the tab shown.

Pressing this button in menu items of each tab for which is displayed at left will move to the lower level of the menu item, enabling you to execute menu commands or set menu values.

Also press this button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.

g Stop button

Cancels print jobs in progress and ends the ink drying period.

h Power button (green)

Turns the printer on and off.

(See " Turning the Printer On and Off .")

P.17

The Power button is lit when the printer is on or in Sleep mode.

i Navigate button

Enables you to check instructions for loading and removing paper or replacing ink tanks or printheads, as well

as other operations. (See " How to View Instructions With Navigate .")

➔ P.432

j Back button

Displays the screen before the current screen.

k Cut button

Pressing this button when rolls are loaded cuts the paper, if you have specified Automatic or Eject in Cutting

Mode

in the Control Panel menu. (See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

P.360

l Feed button

Pressing this button when rolls are loaded enables you to reposition the paper.

(See " Feeding Roll Paper

Manually .")

➔ P.357

m Load button

Press this button when loading or replacing paper.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

n Roll Media lamp (green)

Lit when rolls are selected as the paper source.

o Cut Sheet lamp (green)

Lit when sheets are selected as the paper source.

• In Sleep mode, any button can be pressed except the Power button to recover from Sleep mode.

Note

427

User's Guide

Control Panel Display iPF840

After the printer starts up, the Tab Selection screen is displayed.

Each of the four tabs presents status, menus, and error information related to the particular tab.

Types of tabs

The Tab Selection screen presents four tabs. Each tab is represented by an icon in the top row. Press the ◀ or ▶ button to access other tabs.

Paper tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to paper. Pressing the OK button when this tab is highlighted will display the Paper Menu .

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

• Top line displayed

The paper icon is highlighted.

• Middle line displayed

Indicates the printer status and shows menu names.

• Bottom line displayed

Displays information about the paper.

Ink tab

Ready

OK: Ink Menu

C M Y

B

K

B

K

Job tab

A tab indicating status and showing menus related to ink. Pressing the OK button when this tab is highlighted will display the Ink Menu .

• Top line displayed

The ink icon is highlighted.

• Middle line displayed

Indicates the printer status and shows menu names.

• Bottom line displayed

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated.

(See " Checking Ink Tank Levels .")

P.575

A tab indicating status and showing menus related to print jobs. Pressing the OK button when this tab is highlighted will display the Job Menu menu.

• Top line displayed

The job icon is highlighted.

• Middle line displayed

Indicates the printer status and shows menu names.

Settings/Adj. tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to settings and adjustment. Pressing the OK button when this tab is highlighted will display the Set./Adj. Menu .

• Top line displayed

The settings/adjustment icon is highlighted.

• Middle line displayed

Indicates the printer status and shows menu names.

• Bottom line displayed

The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is shown on the first line and Tot.Print Area on the second. The display unit for Tot.Print Area can be specified in the Length Unit menu.

(See

" Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

428

User's Guide

iPF840 Control Panel Display

Printer status and modes

The printer has the following status.

Standby The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the computer. Jobs sent from the computer are printed immediately.

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

Printing Paused Printing is paused on the printer. Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being printed.

Printing

Sleep

Off

The printer is printing a print job. When a print job is received from the computer, printing starts after the currently printing print job has printed.

The time left until printing is finished is indicated in the upper-right corner in the middle line of the display (values exceeding 10 hours are not shown).

The job name and the information about the paper of the currently printing job appear at the bottom line of the display.

The printer is in power-saving mode. The printer automatically enters Sleep mode to conserve power when idle for a specific period (by default, five minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.

You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu.

(See

" Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

After entering Sleep mode from Standby mode, the printer automatically recovers if print jobs are received, and the jobs are printed.

The printer is not on.

If no operations are performed on the printer for the duration of the time set in Shut Down Timer after entering Sleep mode, the printer automatically turns off.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Error

No ink left.

Replace ink tank.

OK

C M Y B

K

The printer requires your attention. Any jobs sent from the computer cannot be processed. The tab related to the error is displayed.

For information about the display in the case of multiple errors,

see "Display Transitions in Error Status."

User's Guide

429

Control Panel Display iPF840

Display Transitions in Normal Status

The display transitions while the printer is in the normal status (the status where no errors have occurred) are shown below.

430

*1: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode when idle for a specific period (by default, five minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed. However, it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed or when a roll can be manually advanced by pressing the Feed button.

*2: When the printer is in Sleep mode, you can press any button except the Power button to recover from Sleep mode. Sleep mode is also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI.

User's Guide

iPF840 Control Panel Display

Display Transitions in Error Status

The display transitions while an error has occurred on the printer are shown below.

If multiple errors have occurred, the tabs for errors that have occurred other than the currently displayed error are displayed flashing. You can move between the tabs to check the errors by pressing the ◀ and ▶ keys. If multiple errors have occurred in the Job tab and Settings/Adj. tab, the error message switches every four seconds within each tab.

Printing 㻥㻦㻡㻥㻦㻡㻥

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

ISO A2 button

Printing

OK: Ink Menu

㻥㻦㻡㻥㻦㻡㻥

C M Y B

K button

Printing

OK: Job Menu

㻥㻦㻡㻥㻦㻡㻥

x x x x x x x x x x

Plain Paper

ISO A2

4 sec.

Printing

OK: Job Menu

㻥㻦㻡㻥㻦㻡㻥

MediaType Mismatch

4 sec.

button

Printing 㻥㻦㻡㻥㻦㻡㻥

OK:Setting/Adj. Menu

Maint.C Remain.:

Tot.Print Area(m2):

123.4

4 sec.

Printing 㻥㻦㻡㻥㻦㻡㻥

OK:Setting/Adj. Menu

Maint. cart.

The level is low

4 sec.

User's Guide

431

How to View Instructions With Navigate iPF840

You can refer to instructions for loading paper, replacing ink tanks, and performing other operations on the printer control panel.

Note

• If the Control panel access lock is set, the navigation menu does not appear if you press the Navigate button.Contact the printer administrator.

(See " Setting Control panel access lock .")

P.461

1

Press the Navigate button.

2

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired navigation menu.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select View Op. Guide , and then press the OK button.

Instructions are now displayed.

432

User's Guide

iPF840 How to View Instructions With Navigate

Example: Loading sheets

No Paper Loaded

OK: Paper Menu

Load the paper.

Navigate button

Navigate 㻝㻛㻞

Load Roll Paper

Load Cut Sheet

Eject Paper

Roll Pap.Feeding

Roll Pap.Cutting

OK button

Load Cut Sheet

View Op. Guide

Execute

Back

OK button

Press Menu and display Menu screen.

[ Pause]

㻝㻛㻝㻟

Lift release lever.

[ Pause]

㻢㻛㻝㻟

Lift release lever.

[ Pause]

㻣㻛㻝㻟

Close top cover.

[ Pause]

㻝㻞㻛㻝㻟

Input media type.

Can print when done loading paper.

㻝㻟㻛㻝㻟

Press to show the paper menu, then press OK.

[ Pause]

㻞㻛㻝㻟

Open top cover.

[ Pause]

㻡㻛㻝㻟

Insert cut sheet under roller.

[ Pause]

㻤㻛㻝㻟

Press paper while lowering the release lever.

[ Pause]

㻝㻝㻛㻝㻟

Select Load Paper, then press OK.

[ Pause]

㻟㻛㻝㻟

Press , then select Cut Sheet and press OK.

[ Pause]

㻠㻛㻝㻟

Align right edge with orange line.

[ Pause]

㻥㻛㻝㻟

Align lead edge with orange line.

[ Pause]

㻝㻜㻛㻝㻟

433

User's Guide

Checking Instructions During Printer Operations iPF840

You can refer to instructions on the printer control panel when loading paper, replacing ink tanks, or performing other operations.

How to view instructions

Once you complete an action described in the instructions, the printer detects the action and switches to the next instruction screen.

In the case of actions the printer cannot detect, instruction screens are switched every four seconds, and the sequence of operations is shown repeatedly.

When all actions in the sequence are finished, the instruction screen for the next step is displayed.

Example: Ink tank replacement

Open ink tank cover.

434

Lift stopper of ink tank lock lever of color to replace.

>ࠉ Pause @

1/4

Automatically detected by the printer

Lift ink tank lock lever until it stops and push it down.

>ࠉ Pause @

2/4

Lift ink tank lock lever until it stops and push it down.

>ࠉ Pause @

3/4

Remove the ink tank holding grip, & press OK .

>ࠉ Pause @

4/4

To install a new ink tank,

>ࠉ Pause @

1/2

OK button

Shake tank in bag slowly 7-8 times & press OK.

>ࠉ Pause @

2/2

OK button

Take out tank & set on holder (color label on back side)

>ࠉ Pause @

1/3

Push down holder until you hear a click.

>ࠉ Pause @

2/3

Close ink tank cover after replacing ink tanks.

>ࠉ Pause @

3/3

Automatically detected by the printer

Ready

OK: Ink Menu

C M Y B

K

Note

• During a continuous display of instructions, you can press the ◀ button to pause the instructions on the current screen.

Press the ◀ or ▶ button to display the previous or next screens. If you do not press the ◀ or ▶ button within 30 seconds, continuous display is resumed.

Press the OK button to display the instruction screen for the next step.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printer Menu Operations

Printer Menu Operations .................................................................................................................................

435

Menu Operations ............................................................................................................................................

436

Menu Structure ..............................................................................................................................................

439

Menu Settings ................................................................................................................................................

445

Status Print ....................................................................................................................................................

456

Printing Interface Setting Reports ...................................................................................................................

459

Setting Control panel access lock ...................................................................................................................

461

The printer menu is classified into regular menu items available when no print job is in progress and menu during printing items only available while printing is in progress.

Regular menu operations

P.435

Menu operations during printing

P.435

Regular menu operations

To view available menus organized on tabs, select a tab on the Tab Selection screen and press the OK button.

Note

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus.

Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.

• If the Control panel access lock is set, pressing OK button will not display menus.Contact the printer administrator.

(See " Setting Control panel access lock .")

P.461

The following operations are available from the menu.

• Paper Menu

Paper menu settings

• Ink Menu

Ink menu operations

• Job Menu

Menu operations to manage print jobs

• Set./Adj. Menu

Menu operations for printer adjustment and maintenance

For a description of specific menu items available,

see " Menu Settings ."

➔ P.445

For instructions on selecting menu items,

see " Menu Operations ."

➔ P.436

Note

• By default, menu settings apply to all print jobs. However, for settings that are also available in the printer driver, the values specified in the printer driver take priority.

Menu operations during printing

During printing, only a limited set of menu items are displayed. Menu items that are not displayed during printing should be operated after printing has finished.

To display menus during printing, select a tab on the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel, and then press the OK button.

Note

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus.

Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.

• If the Control panel access lock is set, pressing OK button will not display menus.Contact the printer administrator.

(See " Setting Control panel access lock .")

➔ P.461

User's Guide

435

Menu Operations iPF840

The following operations are available from the menu during printing.

• Ink Menu

Ink menu operations

• Job Menu

Menu operations to manage print jobs

• Set./Adj. Menu

Fine-tuning paper feeding

Display of printer-related information

For a description of specific menu items available,

see " Menu Settings ."

➔ P.445

For instructions on selecting menu items during printing,

see " Menu Operations ."

➔ P.436

To view available menus organized on tabs, select a tab on the Tab Selection screen and press the OK button.

For details, see " Menu Settings ."

➔ P.445

• Menus (when the Ink tab is selected and the OK button is pressed)

436

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

Simply press buttons on the Control Panel to access menus on various tabs from the Tab Selection screen and set or execute Menu items.

The following section describes menu operations.

Accessing menus

P.436

Specifying menu items

➔ P.437

Specifying numerical values

➔ P.438

Executing menu commands

➔ P.438

Accessing menus

Printer menus are grouped by function.

Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. You can use the buttons on the Control Panel to access each menu.

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

OK

Plain Paper

Plain Paper button Back button

Paper Menu 㻝㻛㻞

Load Paper

Eject Paper

Chg. Paper Type

Chg. Paper Size

ManageRemainRoll

OK button

Back button

Paper Menu

Roll 1 (Upper)

Roll 2 (Lower)

Cut Sheet

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Operations

• Press Back to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press OK to access a lower one. If not all menu items are displayed, hold down ▲ or ▼ to scroll through higher and lower menu items. Items you select are highlighted.

The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.

• Lower menus are available if is displayed at left next to the second and subsequent rows. To access the lower menus, select the menu and press the OK button.

Specifying menu items

Menu items can be set as follows.

1

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting, and then press the OK button.

After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.

Note

• If a confirmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, follow the on-screen instructions.

• If you have changed the Interface Setup menu settings, a message confirming whether to register the settings is displayed if you press Back button or Menu button. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.

437

User's Guide

Menu Operations iPF840

Specifying numerical values

Follow these steps to enter numbers. In this example, network settings items are entered.

1

Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the next field for input.

2

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.

• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.

Note

3

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to complete the settings, and then press the OK button.

Note

• If a confirmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, follow the on-screen instructions.

• If you have changed the Interface Setup menu settings, a message confirming whether to register the settings is displayed if you press Back button or Menu button. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.

Executing menu commands

Menu commands can be executed as follows.

1

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the action to execute, and then press the OK button.

The menu command is now executed.

438

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Structure

The menu structure is shown categorized by tab. The * on the right side of an item indicates the default value.

The printer menu is classified into regular menu items available when no print job is in progress and menu during

printing items only available while printing is in progress. see " Printer Menu Operations ."

➔ P.435

Regular menu Menu during printing

Paper Menu

Not displayed

Ink Menu

Job Menu

The same

The same

A limited

Ink Menu

as normal is displayed.

Job Menu

as normal is displayed.

Set./Adj. Menu containing the following items is displayed.

Set./Adj. Menu

• Adj. Fine Feed

( *1

)

Printer Info

*1: Only displayed in the menu during printing. Not displayed in the regular menu.

For instructions on menu operations, see " Menu Operations ."

➔ P.436

For details on menu items,

see " Menu Settings ."

➔ P.445

Menus may change according to the optional products in use.

Paper Menu

The Paper Menu is not displayed during printing.

First Level

Load Paper

Eject Paper

Chg. Paper Type(

*1 )

Chg. Paper Size

ManageRemainRoll

Paper Details

Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level

Roll 1 (Upper) | Roll 2 (Lower) | Cut Sheet

Roll 1 (Upper) | Roll 2 (Lower) | Cut Sheet

Roll 1 (Upper)

Roll 2 (Lower)

Cut Sheet

Sheet Size( *4

)

(The paper type is displayed here.) (

*1

(The paper type is displayed here.) (

*1 )

(The paper type is displayed here.) (

(The size of paper is displayed here.) (

*2

)

CustomPaperSize

*1 )

)

(Set the length and width)

Roll1(Uppr)Lngth(

*3 )

Roll2(Lwr) Lngth( *3

)

Roll 1 Wdth(Upr)(

*4 )

Roll 2 Wdth(Lwr)(

*4 )

Off* | On

(Set the length)

(Set the length)

(Set the width)

(Set the width)

Head Height (The paper type is displayed here.) (

*1

)

Skew Check Lv.

Cutting Mode(

*6 )

Cut Speed

Trim Edge First

CutDustReduct.

VacuumStrngth

Automatic* | Highest | High | Standard | Low |

Lowest

Standard* | Loose | Off

Automatic | Eject | Manual

Fast | Standard | Slow

Automatic | Off | On (Preset Len) | On(Input

Length) | Manual

Off | On

Automatic* | Strongest | Strong | Standard | Weak

| Weakest

Scan Wait Time

Roll DryingTime

NearEnd RollMrgn

NearEnd Sht Mrgn

BordlessOversize

Dry time

Area( *5 )

Off* | 1 sec. | 3 sec. |

5 sec. | 7 sec. | 9 sec.

Entire area* | Leading edge

Off | 30 sec. | 1 min. | 3 min. | 5 min. | 10 min. | 30 min. | 60 min.

3mm | 20mm

3mm | 20mm

Standard* | Little

User's Guide

439

440

Menu Structure iPF840

First Level

Paper Details

Keep Paper Type

Second Level Third Level

Width Detection

Return Defaults

Fourth Level

Off | On*

Fifth Level

Off* | On

*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper

Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

Types of paper in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) are

updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper information with the Media

Configuration Tool.

(See " Updating paper information .")

➔ P.338

*2:

For information on the sizes of paper the printer supports, see " Paper Sizes ."

➔ P.332

*3: Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On .

*4: Available only if Width Detection is Off .

*5: Leading edge is not available as a setting option in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box of the printer driver.

*6:

see " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls ."

➔ P.360

Ink Menu

Rep. Ink Tank

Head Cleaning A

First Level

Job Menu

First Level

Print Job

Stored Job

Job Log( *2 )( *3

)

Print Job Log

Pause Print

HDD Information

Second Level Third Level

Job List

Mailbox List

(Choose from information about the latest three print jobs.)

(Choose a print job.)

(Enter a password if one has been set.)

Document Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status

Print Start Time

Print End Time

Print Time

Output Img. Size

Media Type

Paper Consumed

Paper Length

Paper Width

Interface

Ink Consumed

Print settings

Head Height

Temp./Humidity

Adjustment req.

Off* | On

Total capacity | Box free space

Fourth Level Fifth Level

Delete | Preempt Jobs( *1

)

Job List Print | Delete

Print Job List

OK | CANCELED yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss xxxsec.

(The image size is displayed)

USB | Network | HDD

Tot.Ink Consumed

(The ink color is displayed here.) xxx.xxx ml xxx.xxx ml

*1: If a pending job is selected, Print Anyway is displayed.

*2: This is displayed when Show Job Log is On in System Setup .

*3: Even if Show Job Log is Off in System Setup , it is displayed if a password is configured in Change Password in the

Admin. Menu and the password has been authenticated.

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Structure

Set./Adj. Menu

Limited items are displayed during printing. The displayed items are indicated by annotations.

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Eighth Level

Test Print

Adjust

Printer

Maintenance

GL2 Settings

Nozzle Check | Status Print | Interface Print | GL2 Set Print | Paper Details | Print Job Log | Menu Map | Color

Palette

Head Posi.

Adj.

Standard

Simple

Other Initial adjustmt | Manual(

*1

)

Head Inc. Adj.

Feed Priority

Head

Cleaning

Nozzle

Check

Replace P.head

Repl. maint cart

Adj. Priority Automatic* | Print Quality | Print Length

Adj. Quality(

*2 )

Auto(GenuinePpr) | Auto(OtherPaper) | Manual

Adjust

Length( *3

)

AdjustmentPrint

A:High | B:Standard/Draft

Change

Settings

A:High | B:Standard/Draft

Head Cleaning A | Head Cleaning B

Head Info

Quality

Manager

Paper Manager

Color Mode Monochrome | Color (CAD) 1* | Color (CAD) 2 | Color (CAD) 3 | Color (CAD) 4 |

Color (CAD) 5 | Color (CAD) 6

Fast | Standard* | High Print Quality

Input Resolution

Print (Economy)

600dpi* |

300dpi

Off* | On

Paper

Source

Margin

Automatic* | Roll 1 (Upper) | Roll 2 (Lower) | Cut Sheet

Oversize

3mm(Standard)* |

5mm

Off | On*

Line & Pen

Manager

Conserve

Paper

Off* | On

Auto Rotate Off* | On

Enlarge/

Reduce

Off* | Specify scaling | Fit to paper

Print centered

Standard cut

Nesting

Off* | On

Off* | On

Use Nesting

Off* | On xx min.

Enable merge

Nesting

Wait-

Time( *4 )

Cut

Lines(

*4

)

Off* | On

Off* | On

441

User's Guide

442

Menu Structure iPF840

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Eighth Level

Pen Setup Select Palette

Software* | Palette A | Palette B | Factory

Define Palette

Palette A (Select the pen number)

Width (Indicates the value of

Width )

Color 0 ~ 255

Line Attributes

No Setting |

Circle Setting

Palette B (Select the pen number)

(Indicates

Width, Color, and Line Attributes )

(Specify the values of

Width, Color, and Line Attributes )

Factory (Select the pen number)

(Indicates Width, Color, and

Line Attributes )

Reset Palette

All Palette | Palette A | Palette B

Smoothing Software* | Smooth

ThickenFineLines

Off* | On

Adjust-

FaintLines

Off | On*

Ln wdth correct

Black/gray | Color

ProcessingOption

Warning

On-the-Fly

Detect img size

Off* | On

Off* | On

Off* | Command priority | Detected size

GL2 Set Print

Interface

Setup(

*8 )

EOP Tim-

er( *8

)

TCP/IP( *8

)

10 sec. | 30 sec. | 1 min. | 2 min. | 5 min. | 10 min.* | 30 min. | 60 min.

IPv4(

*8

) Automatic | Manual* IPv4

Mode( *8

)

Protocol(

*5 )

( *8

)

DHCP( *8

BOOTP(

)

*8 )

On | Off*

On | Off*

On | Off*

IPv4 Set-

tings( *9 )

RARP(

*8 )

IP Address(

*9 )

Subnet

Mask(

*9

) xxx.xxx.xxx.xx

x xxx.xxx.xxx.xx

x

DNS Set-

tings( *9 )

Default G/

W(

*9

)

DNS Dync

update( *9

) xxx.xxx.xxx.xx

x

On | Off*

IPv6(

*8

) IPv6 Support(

*8 )

Pri. DNS SrvAddr(

Sec. DNS SrvAddr(

DNS Host Name(

On | Off*

*9

*9

)

*9

DNS Domain Name(

)

)

*9 )

IPv6 StlessAddrs(

*8

)

( *10 )

On* | Off

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Structure

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Eighth Level

DHCPv6(

)( *10

)

*8

On | Off*

DNS Set-

tings(

( *10 )

*9 )

DNS Dync

update( *9

)

Statefull

Addr(

*9 )

Stateless

Addr(

*9 )

On | Off*

On | Off*

Pri. DNS SrvAddr( *9

)

Sec. DNS SrvAddr( *9 )

DNS Host Name( *9

)

DNS Domain Name(

*9 )

Ethernet

Driver( *8

)

Auto De-

tect( *8

)

Comm.Mod

e(

*6 )( *8 )

On* | Off

Half Duplex* | Full Duplex

Ethernet

Type( *6

)(

*8 )

10 Base-T* | 100 Base-TX | 1000 Base-T

Spanning

Tree( *8

)

Not Use* | Use

MAC Address(

*8 )

xxxxxxxxxx xx

Interface Print(

*8 )

Return Defaults(

*8 )

System

Setup

Sleep Tim-

er( *11

Timer

)

Shut Down

5 min.* | 10 min. | 15 min. | 20 min. | 30 min. | 40 min. | 50 min. | 60 min. | 210 min.

Off | 5 min. | 10 min. | 30 min. | 1 hour | 4 hours | 8 hours* | 12 hours

Buzzer

Contrast

Adj.

Off | On*

-4,-3,-2,-1,0*,+1,+2,+3,+4

Date &

Time( *8

)

Date yyyy/mm/d d(

*7

)

Time hh:mm yyyy/mm/dd* | dd/mm/yyyy | mm/dd/yyyy Date Format(

*8

)

Language

Time

Zone( *8 )

English | 日本語 | Français | Italiano | Deutsch | Español | Português | Русский | 中文(简体字) 한

국어

0:London (GMT) | +1:Paris,Rome | +2:Athens,Cairo | +3:Moscow | +4:Eerevan,Baku | +5:Islamabad | +6:Dacca | +7:Bangkok | +8:Hong Kong | +9:Tokyo,Seoul | +10:Canberra | +11:NewCaledonia | +12:Wellington | -12:Eniwetok | -11:Midway is. | -10:Hawaii(AHST) | -9:Alaska(AKST) | -8:Oregon (PST) | -7:Arizona(MST) | -6:Texas (CST) | -5:NewYork(EST) | -4:Santiago | -3:Buenos Aires

| -2: | -1:Cape Verde

Length Unit

Detect Mismatch meter* | feet/inch

Pause | Warning | None* | Hold Job

Paper Size

Basis

Sht Selection 1

ISO A3+* | 13"x19"(Super B)

ISO B1* | 28"x40" (ANSI F) Sht Selection 2

Off* | On Keep Paper

Size

Roll Switching

Use Optimal Size | No RollSwitching

Automatic | Off* | On TrimEdge

Reload

Rep.P.head

Print

Off | On*

443

User's Guide

444

Menu Structure iPF840

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Eighth Level

Nozzle

Check

Frequency

Warning

Standard* | 1 page | 10 pages | Off

Off* | On

CarriageScanWdth

Automatic* | Fixed

Use

USB(

*8 )

On* | Off

Use Ether-

net( *8 )

On* | Off

Use RemoteUI(

*8

)

On* | Off

Reset PaprSetngs(

Erase HDD

Data

*8

)

High Speed( *8

) | Secure High Spd.(

*8 ) | Secure( *8 )

Output

Method

Print* | Print (Auto Del) | Save: Box XX

Print After

Recv

Off* | On

Common

Box Set.

( *5

)(

*8 )

Print* | Print (Auto Del)

Show Job

Log(

*8

)

Off | On*

Prep.Move-

Printer

Printer In-

fo( *12

)

Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3

Admin.

Menu( *8

)

Change

Pass-

word( *9

)

(The screen for setting the password is displayed)

Init.Admin.Pswd( *9 )

Adj. Fine Feed( *12 )( *13

)

Paper Info

Ink Info

Head Info

System Info

Error Log

Use Situation

Tot.Print Area | Duty Counter

*1: Available after you have used Standard or Initial adjustmt in Head Posi. Adj.

once.

*2: Available if Adj. Priority is Automatic or Print Quality .

*3: Available if Adj. Priority is Automatic or Print Length .

*4: Available only if Use Nesting is On .

*5: Not displayed if IPv4 Mode is Manual .

*6: Not displayed if Auto Detect is On .

*7: Follows the setting in Date Format .

*8: Restrictions apply if a password is configured using Change Password in the Admin. Menu .

Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators, and only viewing for other users.

*9: Restrictions apply if a password is configured using Change Password in the Admin. Menu .

Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators only.

*10: Not displayed if IPv6 Support is Off .

*11: Default setting for the time to enter the power save mode/Sleep mode is recommended.

*12: Displayed as the menu during printing while printing is in progress.

*13: Not displayed in the regular menu.

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Settings

Menu items are as follows.

The printer menu is classified into regular menu items available when no print job is in progress and menu during

printing items only available while printing is in progress. see " Printer Menu Operations ."

➔ P.435

Paper Menu

Regular menu

Not displayed

Menu during printing

Ink Menu

Job Menu

Set./Adj. Menu

The same

Ink Menu

as normal is displayed.

The same

Job Menu

as normal is displayed.

A limited Set./Adj. Menu containing the following items is displayed.

Adj. Fine Feed (

*1 )

• Printer Info

*1: Only displayed in the menu during printing. Not displayed in the regular menu.

For instructions on selecting menu items,

see " Menu Operations ."

P.436

For details on the displayed menu hierarchy,

see " Menu Structure ."

P.439

Paper Menu

The Paper Menu is not displayed during printing.

Load Paper

Eject Paper

Chg. Paper Type (

*1 )

Chg. Paper Size

ManageRemainRoll

Paper Details

Setting Item

(The type of paper is displayed here.)(

*1 )

Description, Instructions

Select one of Roll 1 (Upper) , Roll 2 (Lower) , or Cut Sheet .

Load the paper in the selected Paper Feed Slot.

Remove the paper.

(See " Removing the Roll from the Printer .")

➔ P.352

(See " Removing Sheets .")

➔ P.373

Change the media type.

(See " Changing the Type of Paper .")

➔ P.350

Change the size of paper loaded.

(See " Specifying the Paper

Length .")

➔ P.352

(See "

Paper Sizes .")

➔ P.332

Head Height

Skew Check Lv.

If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade paper that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off , note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

Cutting Mode Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed cutter.

If you choose Automatic , the roll will be cut automatically using the Cutter Unit, depending on the printer driver settings.

Select Eject to prevent printed documents from falling immediately after printing such as when you wait for the ink to dry, etc. Manual prints lines at the cut position instead of cutting after printing.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

Cut Speed

Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. Choose Off if you prefer not to print the barcode.

(See " Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left .")

➔ P.358

Adjust the Printhead height. (See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

Trim Edge First

Choose the cutting speed. The preset selection represents the optimal cutting speed for the type of paper. We recommend keeping the preset cutting speed.

If you use adhesive paper, choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.

Selects whether or not to automatically cut the leading edge of the roll paper when roll paper is loaded.

User's Guide

445

446

Menu Settings iPF840

Paper Details

Paper Details

Keep Paper Type

Setting Item

(The type of paper is displayed here.)(

*1 )

Trim Edge First

Description, Instructions

(See " Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically .")

P.366

CutDustReduct.

If you choose On , a line will be printed at the cut position when paper cutting is selected. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper.

(See " Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls .")

➔ P.367

VacuumStrngth Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.

(See " Adjusting the Vacuum Strength .")

➔ P.564

Scan Wait Time Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan (after the printhead finishes moving in one direction), in consideration of how quickly the ink dries. Also specify the applicable area for the ink drying time. Select Entire area to apply the ink drying time after each scan until the document is fully printed. Select Leading edge to apply the ink drying time after each scan only in the area

110–160 mm from the leading edge. (The applicable length varies depending on the Print Quality setting.) Note that printing will take longer if you specify the Scan Wait Time setting. In particular, when Leading edge is selected, colors may be uneven in the boundary between the areas with and without a drying time.

Roll DryingTime Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.

NearEnd

RollMrgn

Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.

NearEnd Sht

Mrgn

BordlessOversize

Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge.

Select the amount of oversize extension of the original during borderless printing.

Normally, we recommend that you set this to Standard .

If it is set to Little , although it will reduce soiling on the back surface, white patches may remain on the printed surface.

Width Detection Specify this option to print inside boundaries or in other cases when specifying a particular starting position for printing.

Paper width and skew are not detected if you select Off . If paper is loaded askew, paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

Return Defaults Choose OK to restore Paper Details to the default values.

Print the paper settings as specified in Paper Details .

Select On when printing on a particular type of paper regularly.

(See " Changing the Type of Paper .")

➔ P.350

*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

The types of paper indicated in the printer driver, related software, and the printer Control Panel as well are updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update the information about the paper by using the Media

Configuration Tool.

(See " Updating paper information .")

➔ P.338

}

Ink Menu

Rep. Ink Tank

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Replace the Ink Tank at this point. Follow the instructions displayed to complete the required procedure.

(See " Replacing

Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Settings

Setting Item

Head Cleaning A

Description, Instructions

Printhead cleaning options. (See " Cleaning the Printhead .")

P.578

Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

Job Menu

Setting Item

Print Job Job List (Choose a print job)

Stored

Job

Job

Log (

*2 )

(

*3

)

Mailbox

List

(Choose from information about the last three print jobs.)

Print Job Log

Pause Print

HDD Information

Delete

Preempt Jobs

(Enter a password if one has been set.)

Job List Print

Delete

Print Job List

Document Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status

Print Start Time

Print End Time

Print Time

Output Img. Size

Media Type

Paper Consumed

Paper Length

Paper Width

Interface

Ink Consumed

Print settings

Head Height

Temp./Humidity

Adjustment req.

Description, Instructions

Delete the current job or queued jobs.

(See " Managing the Job

Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) .")

➔ P.517

Print the job first after the current print job is finished.

(See

" Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other

Jobs) .")

P.517

Print the saved job.

Delete the saved job.

Print a list of saved print jobs.

Indicates the document name of the selected print job.

Indicates the name of the user who sent the print job.

Indicates the number of pages in the job.

Indicates the printing results.

Indicates when the print job was started.

Indicates when the print job was finished.

Indicates the time required to print the job.

Indicates the image size in the print job.

Indicates the type of paper in the print job.

Indicates the total amount of paper consumed.

Indicates the length of paper.

Indicates the width of paper.

Indicates the interface used for the print job.

Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per job.(

*1 )

A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates job print settings.

A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates the head height when jobs wereprinted.

A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates the temperature and humiditywhen jobs were printed.

A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates adjustment conditions appliedto jobs.

Print information to match the Job Log display state.

This is not printed when the Job Log is configured to not display.

The maximum number of history records in models fitted with a hard disk is 32.

The maximum number of history records in models not fitted with a hard disk is 10.

Choose On to stop printing.

Indicates the total hard disk capacity and the mail box free space.

*1: Canon cannot guarantee the accuracy of these estimates. These estimates will also vary depending on the conditions of printer use.

*2: This is displayed when Show Job Log is On in System Setup .

User's Guide

447

448

Menu Settings iPF840

*3: Even if Show Job Log is Off in System Setup , it is displayed if a password is configured in Change Password in the

Admin. Menu and the password has been authenticated.

Set./Adj. Menu

Limited items are displayed during printing. The displayed items are indicated by annotations.

Test

Print

Nozzle Check

Status Print

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Print information about the setting values and condition of the printer.

Adjust

Printer

Interface Print

GL2 Set Print

Paper Details

Print Job Log

Menu Map

Color Palette

Head

Posi.

Adj.

Standard

Simple

Other Initial adjustmt

Manual

Print interface settings information.

Print the settings as specified in GL2 Settings .

Print the paper settings as specified in Paper Details .

Print information to match the Job Log display state.

This is not printed when the Job Log is configured to not display.

The maximum number of history records in models fitted with a hard disk is 32.

The maximum number of history records in models not fitted with a hard disk is 10.

Print the menu structure.

Print the GL2 color palette.

An adjustment pattern is printed and the print position is automatically adjusted to fix misaligned printing. Select

Standard if vertical lines in printed material are warped or colors are out of alignment. Select Standard also if the printing results are not improved by executing Simple .

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

An adjustment pattern is printed and the print position is automatically adjusted to fix misaligned printing. Simple executes a simple adjustment in a short time. Select Simple when frequently adjusting the printhead, such as during daily maintenance.

(See " Automatic Adjustment to

Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

Printhead position adjustment is executed during the initial setup. If adjusting the printhead position has not been performed such as due to an error during initial setup or the state of the operating settings when replacing the printhead, select Initial adjustmt .

(See " Adjustment When Installing the Printhead .")

➔ P.553

Input the setting values from the adjustment pattern printing results and adjust the printing position to fix misaligned printing. Normally, select Standard . However, when printing on special paper, or if printing is not improved after Standard , try Manual

. (See " Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.552

Head Inc. Adj.

Feed

Priority

Adj. Priority

Adj.

Quality

Automatic

Print Quality

Print Length

Auto(GenuinePpr)

Print a test pattern for adjustment of the Printhead orienta-

tion. (See " Adjusting Line Misalignment .")

➔ P.554

Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select

Automatic . Choose Print Quality for attractive printing.

Choosing Print Quality also makes banding less noticeable. Choose Print Length if you prefer to feed the paper an exact amount.

Specify this mode with paper identified in the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference

Guide .")

➔ P.335

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Settings

Adjust

Printer

Maintenance

Feed

Priority

Adj.

Setting Item

Auto(GenuinePpr)

Quality

Adjust

Length

Head Cleaning

Nozzle Check

Replace P.head

Repl. maint cart

GL2

Settings

Head Info

Quality

Manager

Color

Mode

(

*4 )

Auto(OtherPaper)

Manual

Adjustment-

Print

A:High

B:Standard/Draft

Change

Settings

A:High

B:Standard/Draft

Monochrome

Color (CAD) 1

Color (CAD) 2

Color (CAD) 3

Description, Instructions

The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount.

(See " Automatic Banding

Adjustment .")

➔ P.559

Specify this mode with paper not in the Paper Reference

Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference

Guide .")

➔ P.335

The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount. Note that this function takes more time and consumes more ink than Auto(GenuinePpr) .

(See " Automatic Banding Adjustment .")

➔ P.559

Use this mode with highly transparent media or other paper for which Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper) cannot be used.

Print a test pattern for adjustment of the feed amount based on the type of paper.

(See " Manual Banding Adjustment .")

➔ P.560

Print a test pattern for particular types of paper to compensate for paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you enter the amount of adjustment.

(See " Adjusting Line

Length .")

➔ P.562

Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority > Adj.

Priority > Print Length .

Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of the current paper.

Enter either the adjustment results from AdjustmentPrint or the discrepancy that you measured (as a percentage).

For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by choosing a higher adjustment value. For paper that tends to shrink, decrease the feed amount by choosing a

lower adjustment value.

(See " Adjusting Line

Length .")

➔ P.562

Clean the Printhead. (See " Cleaning the Printhead .")

➔ P.578

Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A .

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Execute when replacing the Printhead. Follow the instruc-

tions displayed to complete the required procedure. (See

" Replacing the Printhead .")

P.579

Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.

Execute when replacing the Maintenance Cartridge. Follow the instructions displayed to complete the required

procedure. (See " Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .")

➔ P.585

Indicates information about the printhead.

Print in monochrome.

Print in standard colors.

Print with approximate colors emulating Canon iPF750, iPF755, iPF650, iPF655, iPF760, iPF765.

Print emulating the following printers, in colors resembling colors produced by these printers: Canon iPF500, iPF600, iPF700, iPF510, iPF610, iPF710, iPF605, iPF720, iPF810, iPF820, iPF815 and iPF825.

449

User's Guide

450

Menu Settings iPF840

GL2

Settings

Quality

Manager

Paper

Manager

Setting Item

Color

Mode

(

*4 )

Color (CAD) 4

Color (CAD) 5

Print Quality

Input Resolution

Print (Economy)

Paper Source

Margin

Oversize

Color (CAD) 6

Conserve Paper

Auto Rotate

Enlarge/Reduce

Print centered

Standard cut

Nesting Use Nesting

Nesting WaitTime

Cut Lines

Description, Instructions

Print emulating the HP Designjet 4000/4500, in colors resembling colors produced by these printers.

Print emulating the HP Designjet T1100, in colors resembling colors produced by this printer.

Print emulating the Oce ColorWave 300, in colors resembling colors produced by this printer.

Choose the print quality.

Choose the printer input resolution, 600dpi or 300dpi .

When On is selected, print using less ink.

However, the quality is lower than regular printing.

Select On to conserve ink such as the layout confirmation.

Note that although Print (Economy) is only available when Fast is selected in Print Quality , it might not be available depending on the paper type.

Choose the source of paper for HP-GL/2 printing.

Specify the margin around paper. The margin for the trailing edge of sheets is 23 mm (0.9 in).

However, if you have specified the leading margin in Paper Details , the larger of the setting values has priority.

Set the position of the margin relative to the image range.

Choose Off to set the margin inside the image range.

The image may be missing depending on the layout.

Choose On to set the margin outside the image range.

Although the image will not be missing, you should print on paper larger than the size of the image range plus the margins.

Conserves paper when printing.

If the long side of an original is shorter than the roll width, the original is automatically rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper. Similarly, if the long side of an original in landscape orientation is longer than the roll width and the short side is shorter than the roll width, the original is repositioned to fit on the paper.

HP RTL print jobs are not rotated. Because HP RTL images are not rotated even if the paper is rotated 90 degrees, images may be cut off or the blank paper may be ejected. In this case, set Auto Rotate to Off .

Enlarge or reduce the image.

Choose Specify scaling to print based on the specified scaling value.

The specified range is 25 to 400 %.

Choose Fit to paper to print by resizing to fit the paper loaded in the printer.

If Standard cut is On , the printing is resized to fit the standard paper size.

Print in the center of the paper.

Automatically selects the best standard paper size from the width of the loaded roll paper and the image size and cuts the roll paper.

Selecting On will store print jobs until multiple documents can be arranged to fill up the roll width, instead of printing each print job as it is received.

Specify a time to wait until printing, as desired.

Select On to print cut lines between each document on the roll.

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Settings

GL2

Settings

Line &

Pen

Manager

Setting Item

Enable merge

Pen Setup

Select Palette

Define Palette

Description, Instructions

Specify whether to merge or print over colors where lines overlap.

Choose Off to print the second line over the first. Choose

On to merge all overlapping colors.

As pen values, choose Software , Palette A , Palette B , or

Factory .

Choose Software to print according to software settings.

Choose Palette A or Palette B to print using the value specified in Define Palette .

Specify the Width , Color , and Line Attributes in the palette Pen no.

. Choose Factory to confirm the values when Factory is selected in Select Palette .

In Line Attributes , choose No Setting or Circle Setting as the processing for the ends and junctions of lines.

• If you choose No Setting

• If you choose Circle Setting

Smoothing

Reset Palette Restore Define Palette to the default palette settings.

Choose whether to print arcs as smooth curved lines or as multiple connected line segments.

• If you choose Software

Operation is determined by the application. If nothing is specified by the application, the result is as shown in the figure.

Note: By default, this is a 72-sided figure

• If you choose Smooth

ThickenFineLines

AdjustFaintLines

Ln wdth correct

Select On to print fine lines more distinctly.

If fine lines are printed in colors that do not match the colors of other shapes, selecting Off may help produce the expected results. However, lines in some colors may appear broken.

Corrects by using a correction value that specifies the pen width.

User's Guide

451

452

Menu Settings iPF840

GL2

Settings

Interface

Setup

Line &

Pen

Manager

ProcessingOption

Warning

On-the-Fly

Detect img size

GL2 Set Print

EOP Timer

TCP/IP IPv4

IPv6

Setting Item

Ln wdth correct

Description, Instructions

You can configure Black/gray and Color for each group.

The specified range is -20 to +20.

Select On to have any GL2-related warnings displayed.

Selecting On will start printing jobs sooner if you are printing only HP RTL print jobs and printing would not start until later. However, images may be incomplete in some cases, so be sure to check the printing results.

Sets the method of deciding the region to output in order to print efficiently while avoiding missing images.

If Off is selected and the data contains image range information, the image range information is followed.

If Off is selected and the data does not contain image range information, a size with the maximum roll paper width of the printer for the width and 1.5 times the maximum roll paper width for the length is used.

If Command priority is selected and the data contains image range information, the image range information is followed.

If Command priority is selected and the data does not contain image range information, the detected minimum image area is used.

If Detected size is selected, the detected minimum image area is used.

Print GL2 settings information.

Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer.

IPv4 Mode

Protocol

IPv4

Settings

DNS

Settings

DHCP

BOOTP

RARP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default G/W

Choose whether the printer IP address is configured automatically or a static IP address is entered manually.

Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address automatically.

Specify the printer network information when using a static IP address.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the network subnet mask and default gateway.

The value that was automatically configured is displayed if you have set IPv4 Mode to Automatic .

DNS Dync update Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically.

Specify the DNS server address.

Pri. DNS SrvAddr

Sec. DNS SrvAddr

DNS Host Name Specify the DNS host name.

DNS Domain Name Specify the DNS domain name.

IPv6 Support

IPv6 StlessAddrs

DHCPv6

DNS

Settings

DNS

Dync update

Statefull

Addr

Stateless

Addr

Pri. DNS SrvAddr

Specify whether to connect via IPv6.

Specify whether a IPv6 stateless address is used.

Specify whether DHCPv6 settings are used.

Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically.

Specify the DNS server address.

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Settings

Interface

Setup

System

Setup

TCP/IP IPv6

Setting Item

DNS

Settings

Ethernet

Driver

Sleep Timer

Buzzer

Date &

Time

Length Unit

Auto Detect

Comm.Mode

Ethernet Type

Spanning Tree

MAC Address

Interface Print

Return Defaults

Shut Down Timer

Contrast Adj.

Date

Time

Date Format

Language

Time Zone

Detect Mismatch

Paper

Size Basis

Sht Selection 1

Sht Selection 2

Sec. DNS SrvAddr

DNS Host Name

Description, Instructions

Specify the DNS server address.

Specify the DNS host name.

DNS Domain Name Specify the DNS domain name.

Specify the communication method. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting .

Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN communication protocol. Choose Off to use settings values of

Comm.Mode

and Ethernet Type .

Choose the LAN communication method.

Choose the LAN transfer rate.

Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the LAN.

Indicates the MAC address.

Print interface settings information.

Choose OK to restore Interface Setup settings to the default values.

Specify the period before the printer enters sleep mode.

Sets the time until the printer turns off automatically. If no operations are performed on the printer for the duration of the time set in Shut Down Timer after entering Sleep mode, the printer automatically turns off.

Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors.

Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.

Set the current date.

Set the current time. Available only if the Date setting is specified.

Specify the date format.

Specify the language used on the Display Screen.

Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the difference from Greenwich

Mean Time.

Choose the display unit for length. Change the unit displayed for the remaining amount of roll paper, Tot.Print

Area , and so on.

Specify printing behavior if the type and size of paper specified in the printer menu does not match the type and size in the printer driver.

Choose Pause to have printing paused under these circumstances. Choose Warning to continue printing after notification. Choose None to continue printing without notification. Choose Hold Job to store jobs with mismatched types and sizes of paper on the printer hard disk, in a print queue awaiting processing.

(See " Using the Printer Hard

Disk .")

➔ P.513

If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO

A3+ or 13"x19"(Super B) is applied when a sheet of an intermediate size is detected.

If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO

B1 or 28"x40" (ANSI F) is applied when a sheet of an intermediate size is detected.

453

User's Guide

Menu Settings iPF840

System

Setup

Setting Item

Keep Paper Size

Description, Instructions

Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for printing instead of other settings. The margin setting of the printer menu will be used instead of the margin setting of the printer driver if the latter is smaller, which may prevent text or images in the margin from being printed.

Choose Off to give priority to margin settings. The larger value is used if the margin specified in the printer driver does not match the margin in the printer menu.

454

Roll Switching

TrimEdge Reload

Rep.P.head Print

Nozzle Check

CarriageScanWdth

Use USB

Use Ethernet

Use RemoteUI

If you have selected Use Optimal Size , printing is performed by selecting the paper size that minimizes waste paper.

If you have selected No RollSwitching , printing is performed on the paper fed to the platen.

Specify whether to trim the leading edge of the currently retracted roll when the roll is advanced. Cut the edge if you are concerned about any marks left on the roll when the roll is left in the retracted position.

Specify On to have rolls cut when printing begins after

Sleep mode or when the power is restored. Selecting Automatic will trim the edge when the roll has been in the retracted position for two days or more.

If you have selected On , the adjustment pattern is printed after replacing the Printhead and Printhead adjustment is performed.

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten

Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

In Frequency , specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging. Choose Standard to have the printer adjust the timing for checks based on the frequency of nozzle use. Choose 1 page to check once per page. Choose

10 pages to check once per 10 pages. Choose Off to not execute check.

If On is selected in Warning , a warning may be displayed on the Control Panel depending on the result of the nozzle check.

Specify the scan width of the carriage during printing. Select Automatic for movement equivalent to the width of paper loaded. Selecting Fixed will reduce any soiling on the back of the paper, although printing may take a little longer.

When Off is selected, the device can no longer be accessed via USB.

When Off is selected, the device can no longer be accessed via Ethernet.

Choosing Off prohibits access from RemoteUI. Settings can only be configured from the control panel.

User's Guide

iPF840 Menu Settings

System

Setup

Admin.

Menu

Adj. Fine Feed (

*2 ) ( *3 )

Printer

Info

( *2

)

Setting Item

Reset PaprSetngs

Erase

HDD

Data

Output

Method

Paper Info

High Speed

Secure High Spd.

Secure

Print

Print (Auto Del)

Save: Box XX

Print After Recv

Common Box Set.

Show Job Log

Prep.MovePrinter

Change Password

Init.Admin.Pswd

Description, Instructions

Restores settings that you have changed with Media Configuration Tool to the default values.

Erases file management data for print job data stored on the printer's hard disk.

(See " Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk .")

➔ P.472

Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. (See

" Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk .")

➔ P.472

Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random data (one time each). Verification is performed to check if the data was correctly written.

(See " Erasing Data on the

Printer's Hard Disk .")

➔ P.472

Select the printing method for jobs received from software other than the printer driver. When using the printer driver, configure settings on the printer.

To print as usual, select Print . Selecting Print (Auto Del) will print the job and then delete the data from the printer's hard disk. Selecting Save: Box 01 will only save the print job in the box, without printing it.

A setting for jobs received from software other than the printer driver. When using the printer driver, configure settings on the printer. Select On to print the job after it has been saved.

Select Print (Auto Del) to print without saving jobs in the box shared among multiple users.

Selecting Off prevents display of the log in Job Menu >

Job Log . Additionally, the log is not printed if you choose

Job Menu > Print Job Log . Note that because job logs are not collected, the Status Monitor accounting functions will not work correctly.

When transferring the printer to another location, choose the level of transfer and follow the instructions on the

screen. (See " Preparing to Transfer the Printer .")

➔ P.594

Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.

The password that can be entered is a number from 0 to

9999999.

The restriction states and main items are shown below.

For more specific information on restricted items, see

" Menu Structure ."

➔ P.439

• Viewing and configuration by administrators only

Change Password

Init.Admin.Pswd

Etc.

• Viewing and configuration by administrators, and only viewing by other users

Date & Time

Time Zone

Use RemoteUI

Etc.

Choose OK to restore the Admin. Menu password to the default values.

Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority > Adj.

Priority > Automatic or Print Quality . Fine-tune the feed amount manually.

Select one of Roll 1 (Upper) , Roll 2 (Lower) , or Cut

Sheet .

User's Guide

455

Status Print iPF840

Printer

Info

( *2

)

Paper Info

Ink Info

Head Info

System Info

Error Log

Use Situation

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Displays information about the paper in the selected Paper Feed Slot.

Indicates ink levels and maintenance cartridge capacity.

Indicates information about the printhead.

Indicates the firmware version, serial number, and interface information.

Indicates the most recent error messages (up to five).

A counter for maintenance purposes.

Displays printer usage related information.

*1: A rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per job is displayed. Actual ink consumption may be different. The average margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement conditions for ink costs is ±15%. Canon does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates. Estimates may vary depending on conditions of use. Calculation of these estimates does not include ink consumed when cleaning printheads by forceful ejection of ink.

*2: Displayed as the menu during printing while printing is in progress.

*3: Not displayed in the regular menu.

*4: If you have selected Color (CAD) 2 , Color (CAD) 3 , Color (CAD) 4 , Color (CAD) 5 , or Color (CAD) 6 , it is not possible to match the colors and image quality produced by the specified printer exactly.

You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer.

With Status Print , information is printed regarding the printer firmware version, various settings, and the status of consumables.

Printing Status Print reports

1

Load paper.

When using sheets, load paper of A4/Letter size. You will need at least four sheets.

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print , and then press the OK button.

456

Checking the information in Status Print reports

The following information is included in Status Print reports.

Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Status Print

Firm

Boot

MIT(DBF)

Printer model

Firmware version

Boot ROM version

MIT database format version

User's Guide

iPF840 Status Print

MIT(DB)

S/N

Date

MIT database version

Printer serial number

Indicates when the status print report was printed.

Paper Menu

Paper Type

Roll1(Uppr)Media

Roll2(Lwr) Media

Cut Sheet

ManageRemainRoll

Keep Paper Type

Job Menu

Job Log

HDD Information

Total capacity

Box free space

Set./Adj. Menu

System Setup

Sleep Timer

Shut Down Timer

Buzzer

Contrast Adj.

Date Format

Language

Time Zone

Length Unit

Detect Mismatch

Paper Size Basis

Information on the loaded paper.

Job-related information.

A counter for maintenance purposes.

Various information about previous jobs.

Indicates the total hard disk capacity and the mail box free space.

Sht Selection 1

Sht Selection 2

Settings and adjustment information.

Printer system settings, as well as settings regarding warnings and errors.

Paper-related settings.

Keep Paper Size

Roll Switching

TrimEdge Reload

Rep.P.head Print

Nozzle Check

Frequency

Warning

Settings after a test pattern was printed following head replacement.

Nozzle-check settings.

CarriageScanWdth

Use USB

Use Ethernet

Use RemoteUI

Carriage scan width setting.

Use USB settings values.

Use Ethernet settings values.

Settings used by RemoteUI.

457

User's Guide

458

Printing Interface Setting Reports iPF840

Adjust Printer

Printer Info

HEAD LOT NUMBER/ DATE OF INSTALLATION

HEAD INFxx

PARTS STATUS

COUNTER

COUNTER

CUTTER

MEDIA

LIFE TTL

LIFE ROLL

LIFE ROLL2

LIFE CUTSHEET

MEDIA 1-7,OTHER

NAME

TTL

ROLL

ROLL2

CUTSHEET

AFTER INSTALLATION

DUTY

System Info

Error Log

UNIT:m2

UNIT:sq.f

UNIT:A4 Sheet

UNIT:Letter Sheet

Output Method

Print After Recv

Common Box Set.

Show Job Log

Head Posi. Adj.

Ink Info

Print job settings.

Adjust Log

MC

(The ink color is displayed here.)

RAM

Print job settings.

Adjustment settings.

A counter for maintenance purposes.

Head position adjustment values for previous jobs.

Ink information, RAM usage, and a record of errors.

Ink-related information.

Maintenance Cartridge capacity

(%)

Ink levels.

The remaining ink is displayed in a five-level scale.

Indicates the total amount of

RAM.

The past five error codes.

The printhead lot number and date and time when the Printhead was installed.

Utilization status of replacement parts that require servicing.

Utilization status of the cutter, media, and other items (indicating how much they have been used).

Counters for maintenance purposes. Needed when service is requested.

You can print an Interface Print report indicating the current interface settings values of the printer.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Interface Setting Reports

Printing Interface Print reports

1

Load the paper.

If using sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized, you will need at least three sheets.

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Print , and then press the OK button.

Confirming Interface Print information

The following information is included in the Interface Print report.

Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Interface Print Printer model

Firm

Boot

MIT(DBF)

MIT(DB)

S/N

Date

EOP Timer

TCP/IPv4 Frame Type

Use DHCP

Use BOOTP

Use RARP

Enable DNS Dynamic Update

Use Zeroconf Function

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

LPD Printing

IPP Printing

IPP Printer URI

RAW Printing

Raw Mode Bi-direction

Firmware Version

Boot ROM Version

MIT Database Format Version

MIT Database Version

Printer serial number

The date when the interface setup print report was printed.

Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer.

IPv4 settings values.

User's Guide

459

460

Printing Interface Setting Reports iPF840

TCP/IPv4

TCP/IPv6

FTP Printing

WSD Printing

Use Discovery

Scope

Primary DNS Server Address

Secondary DNS Server Address

DNS Host Name

DNS Domain Name

MulticastDNS ServiceName

SNMPv1

SNMPv3

IPv4 settings values.

Use IPv6

Use DHCPv6

Use a stateless address

Stateful Address

Prefix Length

Primary DNS Server Address

Secondary DNS Server Address

Stateless Address 1

Prefix Length 1

Stateless Address 2

Prefix Length 2

Stateless Address 3

Use a link-local Address

Use a manual address

Prefix Length

IP Address

Prefix Length

Default Router Address

Prefix Length

Primary DNS Server Address

Use the same host name and domain name as IPv4

Secondary DNS Server Address

DNS Host Name

DNS Domain Name

Perform dynamic updating of stateful addresses

Dynamically update the stateless address

Dynamically update the manual address

Frame Type

Use Zeroconf Function

MulticastDNS ServiceName

Prefix Length 3

Stateless Address 4

Prefix Length 4

Stateless Address 5

Prefix Length 5

Stateless Address 6

Prefix Length 6

Link-Local Address

IPv6 settings values.

User's Guide

iPF840 Setting Control panel access lock

TCP/IPv6 IPv6 settings values.

Network Interface

LPD Printing

IPP Printing

IPP Printer URI

RAW Printing

Raw Mode Bi-direction

Physical Interface

Transmission Rate

MAC Address

Auto Detect

Communication

Ethernet Type

Spanning Tree

Use the Jumbo Frame Function

Network interface settings values.

This section describes the procedure for setting and releasing the control panel access lock.

• The setting can only be changed in administrator mode.

Note

1

Start RemoteUI and log on to it.

Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://printer IP address or name/

Input example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2

Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .

• If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

Note

3

Click Device Selection on the left side to display the Extended Functions page.

4

Click Edit at the top right to display the Change Extended Functions page.

5

In the Control panel access lock setting, select the On check box to set the access lock and select the

Off check box to release the access lock.

6

Click OK .

7

When the change settings confirmation message is displayed, click OK .

Note

• Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer's IP address. As a result, the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.

Because of this, if you initialize the network settings while the Control panel access lock is set, the Control panel access lock can no longer be set to Off .

If this happens, configure the IP address again using the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .

(See " Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .")

➔ P.491

461

User's Guide

iPF840

462

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

15

29

157

267

331

Control Panel

425

Printer Parts

Printer parts .......................................................................................

464

Hard Disk ...........................................................................................

470

Optional accessories .........................................................................

474

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

635

657

661

475

495

549

565

603

imagePROGRAF

463

Front iPF840

Front ..............................................................................................................................................................

464

Back ..............................................................................................................................................................

466

Top Cover (Inside) ...........................................................................................................................................

467

Carriage .........................................................................................................................................................

468

Ink Tank Cover (Inside) ....................................................................................................................................

468

Wheeled Output Stacker ................................................................................................................................

375

Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................................

426

a h b i

464 l k o q j q l m p n c g c d e r d s g f a Top Cover

Open this cover to install the Printhead, load paper, and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer as needed.

(See " Top Cover (Inside) .")

➔ P.467

b Ejection Guide

Guides printed documents as they are ejected. Open this guide when loading a roll.

c Roll Holder Slot

Slide the Roll Holder into this slot.

d Roll Holder

Load the roll on this holder.

User's Guide

iPF840 Front e Roll Unit Lever

Hold this lever to pull out the Roll Unit.

f Paper Feed Slot

When loading a roll, insert the edge of the roll paper here. You can load rolls in two positions, on the printer side in the Roll 1 (Upper) position and on the roll unit side in the Roll 2 (Lower) position.

g Holder Stopper

Secure rolls on the Roll Holder with this part.

h Ink Tank Cover

Open this cover to replace an Ink Tank.

(See " Ink Tank Cover (Inside) .")

P.468

i Control Panel

Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status.

(See " Control Panel .")

➔ P.426

j Release Lever

Releases the Paper Retainer. Lift this lever toward the front of the printer when loading paper.

k Maintenance Cartridge

Ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning is absorbed. (Replace the cartridge when it is full.) l Carrying Handles

When carrying the printer, have six people hold it by these handles under both sides.

m Maintenance Cartridge Cover

Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

n Stand

A stand that holds the printer. Equipped with casters to facilitate moving it.

o Stand L

The left leg of the Stand.

p Stand R

The right leg of the Stand.

q Leg Covers

Covers for Stand L and Stand R.

r Stopper

Locks the Stand casters.

Always release the Stopper before moving the printer. Moving the printer while the Stopper is locked may scratch the casters or the floor.

s Roll Unit

A unit for loading two rolls.

465

User's Guide

Back iPF840 b c f g d a e a

466 a Carrying Handles

When carrying the printer, have six people hold it by these handles under both sides.

b USB Port

Connect a USB cable to this port. The printer is compatible with Hi-Speed USB connections.

c Ethernet Port

Connect an Ethernet cable to this port. The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly and communication is possible between the computer and printer.

d Manual Pocket

Store printer manuals in this pocket.

e Accessory Pocket

Store assembly tools, Roll Holder attachments, and other items in this pocket.

f Power Supply Connector

Connect the power cord to this connector.

g Roll Unit Power Supply Inlet

Connect the connection cord for the Roll Unit.

User's Guide

iPF840 Top Cover (Inside) h a i j c e f k d b g l a Top Cover Roller

Prevents paper from rising when ejected.

b Paper Alignment Line

Align paper with this line when loading it.

c Carriage

Moves the Printhead. The carriage serves a key role in printing. (See " Carriage .")

➔ P.468

d Carriage Shaft

The Carriage slides along this shaft.

e Paper Retainer

Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.

f Platen

The Printhead moves across the platen to print. Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.

g Borderless Printing Ink Grooves

For catching ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.

h Cleaning Brush

When cleaning inside the printer under the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen.

Also use the brush to move the blue Switch on the Platen.

i Cutter Rail

The Cutter Unit passes over this rail to cut paper.

467

User's Guide

Carriage iPF840 j Cutter Unit

A round-bladed cutter for automatic paper cutting.

k Linear Scale

The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position. Be careful not to touch this part when cleaning inside the Top Cover or clearing paper jams.

l Switch

Set the switch to the side opposite ● if the edges of printed images are blurred. Set the switch to the ● side before borderless printing.

(See " Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen .")

➔ P.621

b a c d a Printhead Fixer Cover

Holds the Printhead in place.

b Printhead

The printhead is equipped with ink nozzles. The carriage serves a key role in printing.

c Printhead Fixer Lever

Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover.

d Angle Adjustment Lever

Use this lever to fine-tune the printer to correct misalignment of printed lines.

d b a

Y

GY

MBK

BK

B

468

Note: The figure shows the printer as loaded with 700 ml (23.7 fl oz) Ink Tank.

a Ink Tanks

Cartridges of ink in various colors.

c

User's Guide

iPF840 Ink Tank Cover (Inside) b Ink Tank Lock Lever

A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Lift and lower the lever when replacing an Ink Tank. To open it, lift the stopper of the lever until it stops, and then push it down toward the front. To close it, push it down until it clicks into place.

c Ink Lamp (Red)

Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.

• On

The Ink Tank is installed correctly.

• Off

No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function is disabled.

• Flashing Slowly

Not much ink is left.

• Flashing Rapidly

Ink tank is empty.

d Ink Color Label

Load an Ink Tank that matches the color and name on this label.

User's Guide

469

Printer Hard Disk Operations iPF840

Printer Hard Disk Operations ..........................................................................................................................

470

Checking the Free Hard Disk Space ...............................................................................................................

471

Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk ..........................................................................................................

472

470

Printer hard disk operations are available from the following programs and interfaces.

• Printer driver

• Free Layout

• Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

• Preview

• imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

• imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

• RemoteUI

• Control Panel

The hard disk operations available through each interface are as follows.

Operation

Saving print jobs

Operations with saved jobs

Job queue management

Display job queue

Delete

Preempt Jobs

Operations with held jobs

Mail box management Move saved jobs

Modify saved jobs

Other operations

Modify mail boxes

Print a list of saved jobs

Display a list of saved jobs

Display free hard disk space

Initialize hard disk

Display the time of printing

Display error messages

Save in mail box

Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box

Save print jobs sent from sources other than the printer driver

Print saved jobs

Delete saved jobs

• Printer driver

Free Layout

Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy

Preview

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

• imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

• imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

RemoteUI

Control Panel

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

User's Guide

iPF840 Checking the Free Hard Disk Space

Check the space available on the printer's hard disk as follows.

This operation is available from the Control Panel, in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and image-

PROGRAF Printmonitor.

Using the Control Panel

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Job Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select HDD Information , and then press the OK button.

Using RemoteUI

To view the box list, select Stored Job in Job Management. On the Stored Job page, the free hard disk space is shown in the upper-right corner when boxes are listed.

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.

User's Guide

471

Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk iPF840

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

The Hard Disk sheet shows the free hard disk space.

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

The Hard Disk pane shows the free hard disk space.

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

472

When erasing all data on the hard disk, choose from the following three options.

This operation is only available from the Control Panel.

Erasure Method

High Speed

Details

Erases file management data for print job data stored on the printer's hard disk. Choose this method for relatively fast erasure. Because only the file management data is erased, the print job data itself is not erased. Note that it may be possible to read this data using commercial data recovery software.

Secure High Spd.

Secure

Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. No verification is performed to check if the data was correctly written. Choose this method to erase highly confidential data. Note that it may be possible to read the overwritten data using specialized data recovery tools.

Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random data (one time each). Verification is performed to check if the data was correctly written. Choose this method to erase especially confidential data. It is virtually impossible to recover the overwritten data. Conforms to the DoD5220.22-M standard of the

U.S. Department of Defense.

User's Guide

iPF840 Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk

1

Important

• For a more secure method of preventing data recovery, we recommend physically or magnetically destroying the hard disk. In this case, the hard disk can no longer be used.

• Erase HDD Data is not available if there is a job queue.

Additionally, print jobs are not processed during execution of Erase HDD Data .

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Erase HDD Data , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select High Speed , Secure High Spd.

, or Secure , and then press the OK button to display the confirmation screen.

Note

• If a password has been set on the printer, the Admin.Pswd

screen is displayed. In this case, enter the password and press the OK button to go to the next step.

• As for the time required for deletion, confirm it on the Control Panel. However, when High Speed is selected, this finishes in several seconds.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button to start erasure.

After the printer hard disk is erased, the printer automatically restarts.

User's Guide

473

iPF840

Roll Holder Set ...............................................................................................................................................

368

474

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

15

29

157

267

331

Control Panel

Printer Parts

425

463

Network Setting

Network Environment ........................................................................

476

Using RemoteUI ................................................................................

478

Initial Settings ....................................................................................

480

Mac OS Settings ...............................................................................

487

Other Settings ...................................................................................

488

Device Setup Utility (Windows) .........................................................

491

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

495

549

565

603

635

657

661

475 imagePROGRAF

Network Environment iPF840

476

System requirements

The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.

• Printing over a TCP/IP network (when using IPv4)

• Compatible operating systems

• Windows XP

• Windows Server 2003

• Windows Server 2003 x64

• Windows Server 2003 R2

• Windows Server 2003 R2 x64

• Windows Vista

• Windows Vista x64

• Windows Server 2008

• Windows Server 2008 x64

• Windows 7

• Windows 7 x64

• Windows Server 2008 R2 x64

• Windows 8

• Windows 8 x64

• Windows Server 2012 x64

• Windows 8.1

• Windows 8.1 x64

• Windows Server 2012 R2 x64

• OS X v10.6.8 or later

• Printing over a TCP/IP network (when using IPv6)

• Compatible operating systems

• Windows Vista

• Windows Vista x64

• Windows Server 2008

• Windows Server 2008 x64

• Windows 7

• Windows 7 x64

• Windows Server 2008 R2 x64

• Windows 8

• Windows 8 x64

• Windows Server 2012 x64

• Windows 8.1

• Windows 8.1 x64

• Windows Server 2012 R2 x64

• OS X v10.6.8 or later

Note

When using IPv6, you must specify IPv6 on the Control Panel or in RemoteUI. For instructions, " Configuring

TCP/IPv6 Network Settings "

➔ P.482

or see " Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI ."

➔ P.484

Network Environment

After confirming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and computers

as needed. For the specifications of the network interface, see " Specifications ."

➔ P.658

User's Guide

iPF840 Network Environment

• Example of a Windows network

In Windows networks, print over TCP/IP.

• NetBIOS is not supported.

Note

• Example of a Mac OS network

In Mac OS networks, print over TCP/IP using the Bonjour function.

User's Guide

477

Using RemoteUI iPF840

RemoteUI is software with which you can access the printer via the network from your Web browser to confirm the printer status, operate jobs, and configure the settings. Since the software (Web server) for using RemoteUI is built in the printer, preparing software other than a Web browser is unnecessary. You can use RemoteUI if an image-

PROGRAF printer on a network is connected to your computer. If you start your Web browser and specify the IP address of the printer, the RemoteUI screen is displayed, and you can use RemoteUI.

Important

• To use RemoteUI, an IP address must be set on the printer in advance. For the method of setting an IP address,

see " Configuring the IP Address on the Printer ."

➔ P.480

What You Can Do With RemoteUI

With RemoteUI, you can access the printer via a network, configure network settings, and display the current status of the printer, various types of information, the processing status of jobs, etc.

Starting RemoteUI

Start RemoteUI by the following operations.

1

Start your Web browser.

2

Enter the following URL in Address or Location .

http://printer IP address or name/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

3

The RemoteUI screen is displayed.

Note

• The screen slightly differs depending on the model of printer.

478

Configuring the Network With RemoteUI

For details on configuring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI

➔ P.484

Specifying Printer-Related Information

P.488

User's Guide

iPF840 Using RemoteUI

Important

• For the Web browser, use Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later, Internet Explorer 5.01 or later, or Firefox 1.5 or later.

For Mac OS X, Safari 1.32 or later or 2.03 or later also is supported.

• This cannot be used connected via a proxy server. In environments where a proxy server is used, add the printer's IP address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser proxy server settings. (Settings may vary depending on the network environment.)

• Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser.

• If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are correctly configured.

• Depending on the network environment, you may not be able to start RemoteUI.

• Confirm whether System Setup > Use RemoteUI is set to On on the Control Panel of the printer.

Note

• RemoteUI also offers many other features. You can display the ink levels, check error messages and other status information, and cancel print jobs.

• By factory default, the English screen is displayed. To change the display language, select the desired language under Language before logging on in administrator mode.

• If you login in Administrator Mode, you can configure to use the Jumbo Frame function in the Network page. However, this function might not be able to be used depending on the network environment.

User's Guide

479

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer iPF840

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer .......................................................................................................

480

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ....................................................

491

Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel .......................................................................

480

Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands ...................................................................

481

Configuring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings .........................................................................................................

482

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows) ......................................................................................

483

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Mac OS) ........................................................................................

483

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI .................................................................

484

You must configure the printer's IP address before using the printer in a TCP/IP network.

The printer's IP address is configured automatically when you install the printer driver following the instructions in the Setup Guide.

Configure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility , the printer Control Panel, or ARP or

PING commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer connection mode to a network connection. For details on configuring the IP address, refer to the following topics.

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

P.491

(Windows)

Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel

➔ P.480

Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands

➔ P.481

Important

• If you use a DHCP server for automatic assignment of the printer's IP address, printing may no longer be possible after the printer is turned off and on. This is because an IP address different from before has been assigned.

Thus, when using DHCP server functions, consult your network administrator and configure the settings in one of the following ways.

• Configure the setting for dynamic DNS updating

In the printer menu, either set DNS Dync update to On , or activate the setting Enable DNS Dynamic Update in

RemoteUI.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

(See " Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI .")

➔ P.484

• Configure the setting for assignment of the same IP address each time the printer starts up

Note

• We recommend configuring the printer's IP address even if you will use the printer in networks other than TCP/IP networks. Configuring the printer's IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to configure the network settings and manage the printer with a web browser.

For details on RemoteUI,

see " Using RemoteUI ."

➔ P.478

This topic describes how to configure the printer's IP address on the Control Panel.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

480

Note

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IPv4 , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IPv4 Settings , and then press the OK button.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address , and then press the OK button.

8

After you press ◀ or ▶ to select the input field, numerical input is possible.

9

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.

Note

• Pressing the ▲ button increases the number by 1. The maximum value is 9, after which 0 is displayed.

• Pressing the ▼ button decreases the number by 1. The minimum value is 0, after which 9 is displayed.

• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.

• Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address in your network.

10

Repeat steps 8 and 9 to complete the settings, and then press the OK button.

11

Press the Menu button.

If you have changed the settings, a confirmation message is displayed. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

Important

• Be sure to complete step 11. This will activate the values you have entered.

• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.

Note

• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel.

This topic describes how to configure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.

To use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer's MAC address. You can confirm the MAC address on the Control Panel.

1

Check the printer's MAC address.

You can confirm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:

1.

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or

▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

481

User's Guide

Configuring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings iPF840

2.

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver , and then press the OK button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select MAC Address , and then press the OK button.

Note

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

• You can investigate the MAC address by printing an interface setting report.

(See " Printing Interface Setting Reports .")

➔ P.458

2

In Windows, open a command prompt, or in Mac OS, start Terminal.

3

Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses.

arp -s [IP address] [the printer's MAC address you have verified]

Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-1E-8F-xx-xx-xx

Note

• In Mac OS when using Terminal, enter the arp command in the format arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00:1E:

8F:xx:xx:xx. For details, refer to the help file for the command line.

4

Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and configure it.

ping [IP address as specified in the ARP command] -l 479

Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479

Note

• In -l , the l is the letter l .

• In Mac OS when using Terminal, enter the ping command in the format ping -s 479 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. For details, refer to the help file for the command line.

Note

• The subnet mask and default gateway are set to 0.0.0.0. Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask and default gateway to match your network settings.

For details on RemoteUI,

see " Using RemoteUI ."

➔ P.478

When printing in a TCP/IPv6 network, you must configure the TCP/IPv6 settings on the Control Panel.

Follow the steps below to configure the TCP/IPv6 network settings.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

482

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IPv6 , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IPv6 Support , and then press the OK button.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On , and then press the OK button.

Important

• Once you set IPv6 Support to On , the IPv6 StlessAddrs setting takes effect.

Note

• You can also configure IPv6 StlessAddrs and DHCPv6 from the printer Control Panel.

This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer's IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

The procedure described below is the configuration based on the LPR or Raw protocol using the standard TCP/IP port in Windows ( Standard TCP/IP Port ).

Important

• If you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer's IP address is configured correctly.

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer

P.480

• This section describes the procedure in Windows 7.

Note

1

Open the Devices and Printers window.

2

Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Printer Properties to open the printer properties window.

3

Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.

4

Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.

5

In the Available Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port .

6

Click New Port .

After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port

Wizard .

7

Click Next .

8

In Printer Name or IP Address , enter the printer's IP address. If the DNS is configured, you can also enter the DNS Domain Name.

9

Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.

10

Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.

11

Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports , and that the port is selected.

12

Click Close to close the printer properties window.

483

Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer's IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

User's Guide

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI iPF840

• If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer's IP address is changed,

see " Configuring the

Destination in TCP/IP Networks ."

➔ P.487

If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see " Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network ."

P.487

484

Follow the steps below to configure the TCP/IP network settings.

When using an IPv4 IP address

1

Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http:// printer IP address or name /

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2

Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .

• If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

Note

3

Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

4

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IPv4 group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol Settings page.

5

Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.

TCP/IP Settings Items

Item Details

Use DHCP Activate this setting to use DHCP for configuring the IP address.

Use BOOTP

Use RARP

Enable DNS Dynamic

Update

Use Zeroconf Function

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

LPD Printing

IPP Printing

IPP Printer URI

Activate this setting to use BOOTP for configuring the IP address.

Activate this setting to use RARP for configuring the IP address.

Activate this setting to perform DNS server registration automatically.

Activate this setting to use Bonjour.

Specify the printer's IP address.

Specify the printer's subnet mask.

Specify the printer's default gateway.

Activate this setting to use LDP Printing.

Activate this setting to use IPP Printing.

Specify the URI of the printer used for IPP printing using up to 252 characters.

Activate this setting to use Raw Printing.

Activate this setting to use Raw mode bidirectional communication.

RAW Printing

RAW Mode Bi-direction

FTP Printing

Use Discovery

Scope

SMTP Server Address

Primary DNS Server

Address

Secondary DNS

Server Address

Activate this setting to use FTP Printing.

Activate this setting to use SLP Discovery function.

Enter the SLP search range.

Specify the SMTP server's IP address.

You can also specify the SMTP server domain name, if desired.

Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.

Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

On

On printer

On

Off

Default Setting

On

On default

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

User's Guide

iPF840 Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI

Item

DNS Host Name

DNS Domain Name

Multicast DNS Service Name

Details

Specify the printer host name, up to 63 characters (1–63 characters). Use single-byte letters, numbers, and (hyphens). Do not use numbers or for the first character or for the last character.

Specify the printer domain name, up to 63 characters. Use single-byte letters, numbers, (hyphens), and .

(periods). Do not use numbers, , or .

for the first character, or or .

for the last character.

Specify the printer's Multicast DNS service name. (1–63 characters)

This name will be displayed when Bonjour functions are used.

Default Setting

NB-18GBipxxxxxx blank

Canon iPFxxxx

(xxxxxx)

6

Click OK to display the Network page.

Note

• If you specify to configure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, there must be a server that supports such protocol running in the network.

• If you specify to configure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, the IP address obtained by this method is used first. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address specified in IP Address is used.

• It takes up to two minutes to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP are available. We recommend clearing check boxes of options you will not use.

• If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS servers and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address , Secondary DNS Server Address and DNS Domain

Name , respectively.

When using an IPv6 IP address

1

Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http:// printer IP address or name /

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2

Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .

• If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

Note

3

Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

4

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IPv6 group to display the Edit TCP/IPv6 Protocol Settings page.

5

Refer to the TCP/IPv6 Settings Items table to complete the settings.

TCP/IPv6 Settings Items

Item Details

Use IPv6 Activate to enable IPv6.

Use DHCPv6

Use a stateless address

Use a manual address

IP Address

Prefix Length

Default Router Address

Prefix Length

Primary DNS Server Address

Activate when using a DHCPv6 server to acquire the IP address.

Activate when using an IPv6-compatible router to acquire the

IP address.

Activate when configuring the IP address manually.

Enter the printer's IP address.

Enter the IP address prefix length.

Enter the default router address.

Enter the prefix length of the default router address.

Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.

Off

Default Setting

Off

On

Off

::

::

::

485

User's Guide

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI iPF840

Item

Secondary DNS Server Address

Use the same host name and domain name as IPv4

DNS Host Name

DNS Domain Name

Perform dynamic updating of stateful addresses

Dynamically update the stateless address

Dynamically update the manual address

Details

Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Activate when using the same DNS host and domain names as for IPv4.

Specify the printer host name, up to 63 characters (1–63 characters). Use single-byte letters, numbers, and (hyphens). Do not use numbers or for the first character or for the last character.

Specify the printer domain name, up to 63 characters. Use single-byte letters, numbers, (hyphens), and .

(periods). Do not use numbers, , or .

for the first character, or or .

for the last character.

Activate this setting to automatically register the stateful address with the DNS server.

Activate this setting to automatically register the stateless address with the DNS server.

Activate this setting to automatically register the manual address with the DNS server.

::

Off

Default Setting

NB-18GBip6xxxxxx blank

Off

Off

Off

6

Click OK to display the Network page.

Note

• If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS servers and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address , Secondary DNS Server Address and DNS Domain

Name , respectively.

486

User's Guide

iPF840 Configuring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks

Configuring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks ............................................................................................

487

Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network ...........................................................................................

487

If you use the printer in a TCP/IP network, register the printer in Print & Scan (This is identified as Printers &

Scanners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS.) in the Mac OS System Preferences .

• For details on how to register a printer using a TCP/IP network, see the OS User Manual.

Note

Important

• If you use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer's IP address is configured correctly.

(See

" Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel .")

➔ P.480

If you use the printer in a network that uses the Bonjour function, register the printer in Print & Scan (This is identified as Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS.) in the Mac OS System Preferences .

• For details on how to register a printer using Bonjour, see the OS User Manual.

Note

Important

• Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a router for connection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask your network administrator.

• By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer. You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using RemoteUI. For instructions on changing it,

see " Using RemoteUI ."

➔ P.478

User's Guide

487

Specifying Printer-Related Information iPF840

Specifying Printer-Related Information ............................................................................................................

488

Configuring the Communication Mode Manually .............................................................................................

489

Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur ...........................................................................

490

Initializing the Network Settings ......................................................................................................................

490

488

Follow the steps below to specify device information and security settings.

1

Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://printer IP address or name/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2

Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .

• If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

Note

3

Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.

4

To display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information or Security , depending on what information you want to specify.

To change the administrator password, click the Change Password button in the Security group.

5

Refer to the table of settings for device information and security as you complete these settings.

Security setting items are displayed when you click the Change Password button in the Security group.

Device Information Settings

Item

Device Name Enter a device name.

(0–32 characters)

Details Default Setting blank

Location blank

Administrator

Phone

Comments(E-mail)

Enter the location where the device is installed.

(0–32 characters)

Enter the administrator's name.

(0–32 characters)

Enter the administrator's contact information.

(0–32 characters)

Enter any comments regarding the administrator.

(0–32 characters) blank blank blank

Security Settings

New Password

Confirm

Item Details

Enter the new password.

(0-9999999)

Enter the new password again to confirm it.

(0-9999999)

Default Setting blank blank

*1: On the Security settings screen, besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related information, such as IP address-based SNMP or TCP usage restrictions, MAC address-based access restrictions, or IPP and FTP authentication settings.

6

Click OK to activate the settings.

User's Guide

iPF840 Configuring the Communication Mode Manually

This topic gives instructions for configuring the communication mode manually.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Detect , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off , and then press the OK button.

The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Comm.Mode

, and then press the OK button.

8

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button.

The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.

9

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Type , and then press the OK button.

10

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Ethernet type, and then press the OK button.

The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.

11

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spanning Tree , and then press the OK button.

12

Press ▲ or ▼ to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press the OK button.

The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.

13

Press the Menu button.

If you have changed the settings, a confirmation message is displayed. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

The new settings will take effect after the printer restarts.

489

User's Guide

Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur iPF840

The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer, you can know when printing is finished or if errors occur. Receive notification via email on your mobile phone or at your computer.

Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing. Besides being informed of finished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email notification when service is needed or it's time to replace consumables. For detailed instructions,

see " Specifying Printer-Related Information ."

➔ P.488

Note

• For details on email notification using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the imagePROG-

RAF Status Monitor help.

• Mail server authentication is only supported with imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .

490

Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.

• Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer's IP address. As a result, the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.

Important

For instructions on reconfiguring the IP address, see " Configuring the IP Address on the Printer ."

➔ P.480

• For details on RemoteUI,

see " Using RemoteUI ."

P.478

1

Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://printer IP address or name/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2

Select Administrator Mode and click Logon .

• If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

Note

3

Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

4

Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.

5

After confirming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.

Note

• You can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default network settings.

User's Guide

iPF840 imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ..............................................................................................................

491

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ...............................................................................................

491

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .........................................................

491

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and your computer by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to complete the network settings initially.

• Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this list, select the printer (specifically, the printer's MAC address) that you want to set up, and then configure the basic settings from your computer, such as the printer's IP address and the network frame type.

• You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication between your computer and these printers is possible.

Note

• We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using imagePROGRAF Device

Setup Utility .

• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.

Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:

1

Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

2

On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software .

3

Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .

4

Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.

On a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to configure the printer's IP address. This topic describes how to configure the IP address using imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility .

Important

• To configure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as Administrator account.

We recommend that your network administrator configure the network settings.

Note

• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

, see " Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup

Utility ."

➔ P.491

491

User's Guide

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility iPF840

When specifying an IPv4 IP address

1

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2

In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to configure.

3

Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4

Select the IPv4 tab.

492

5

In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual .

6

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.

7

Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed.

8

Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .

Note

• To configure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select DHCP , BOOTP , or RARP .

• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.

User's Guide

iPF840 Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

When specifying an IPv6 IP address

1

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2

In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to configure.

3

Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4

Select the IPv6 tab.

5

In IPv6 , select On .

6

When there is an IPv6-compatible router in the network environment, select On in Stateless Address .

Additionally, when there is an DHCPv6-compatible server in the network environment, select On in

DHCPv6 .

Note

• When there is no IPv6-compatible router or DHCPv6-compatible server, select On in Manual and enter the IPv6 Address and Prefix Length .

7

Click Set .

8

Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed.

9

Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .

493

User's Guide

iPF840

494

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

15

29

157

267

331

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

425

463

475

Print Job Management

Status Monitor (Windows) .................................................................

496

Printmonitor (Mac OS) .......................................................................

499

Accounting (Windows) ......................................................................

501

Basic Print Job Operations ...............................................................

513

Advanced Print Job Operations ........................................................

532

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

549

565

603

635

657

661

imagePROGRAF

495

The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor iPF840

The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ............................................................................................

496

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ...............................................................................

497

imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : Printer List shows a list of printers, and Status

Monitor shows details for each printer.

496

• You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers connected to your computer, and printers found on the network.

• If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.

• Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.

• Displays the ink level of every color in the printer. An icon and warning message will notify you when ink levels are low.

• The type of paper loaded in each media source is identified. You can also check to see if paper has run out.

• This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance for optimal printing results.

• You can also set up automatic email notification of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you designate in advance.

• You can check the status of the hard disk and the documents saved on the hard disk.

• You can use the Accounting Manager to collect the print job logs for the printers and check information such as the printing costs.

For details of the Accounting Manager, see " Accounting Manager ."

➔ P.501

User's Guide

iPF840 Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

Note

• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

You can use the Job sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor for operations such as pausing and canceling print jobs.

Important

• Unless otherwise noted, the job operation buttons only affect your own print jobs.

The print jobs of other users cannot be controlled.

• Preempting Other Jobs

If you select a print job and click the Preempt Other Jobs , the selected job is printed ahead of other jobs including the jobs of other users.

• You cannot print ahead of the currently printing job.

Note

• Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs

Selecting a print job and clicking the Pause button pauses printing of the selected job.

To resume printing of a paused print job, select the print job and click the Resume button.

• Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer, the job can no longer be paused/resumed.

Note

• Canceling Print Jobs

Selecting a print job and clicking the Cancel Job button cancels printing of the selected job.

• You cannot cancel other users' print jobs.

Note

• Printing Held Jobs

Printing of the job with a Status of Holding is paused because the paper specified by the driver does not match the paper currently loaded in the printer.

Use the procedure below to print the held job.

1

Select the held job and click the Replace Paper button.

497

User's Guide

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor iPF840

2

Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper.

Note

• To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer, select the held job and click Continue to print button.

• The printing behavior when the paper specified by the driver does not match the paper currently loaded in the printer can be changed by using Detect Mismatch

in the operation panel menu. Refer to " Menu Settings "

➔ P.445

for details.

498

User's Guide

iPF840 The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ...............................................................................................

499

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ...................................................................................

500

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

• Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.

• You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.

• If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.

• You can also set up automatic email notification of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you designate in advance.

• You can check the status of the hard disk and the documents saved on the hard disk.

Note

• If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer again as follows.

1.

Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.

2.

In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer. After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.

3.

If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu. Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.

4.

In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer. After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.

499

User's Guide

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor iPF840

You can use the Driver Panel in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor for operations such as pausing and canceling print jobs.

500

• Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs

Selecting a print job and clicking the button pauses printing of the selected job.

To resume printing of a paused print job, select the print job and click the button.

• Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer, the job can no longer be paused/resumed.

Note

• Canceling Print Jobs

Selecting a print job and clicking the button cancels printing of the selected job.

• You cannot cancel other users' print jobs.

Note

• Preempting Other Jobs

If you select a print job and click the precedes it in the print queue.

button, the selected job is printed ahead of the job that currently

• Printing Held Jobs

Printing of the job with a Status of Holding is paused because the paper specified by the driver does not match the paper currently loaded in the printer.

Use the procedure below to print the held job.

1

Select the held job and click the Replace Paper button.

2

Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper.

Note

• To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer, select the held job and click Continue to print button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Accounting Manager

Accounting Manager ......................................................................................................................................

501

Launching the Accounting Manager ...............................................................................................................

501

Accounting Manager Main Window ................................................................................................................

502

Job List Area ........................................................................................................................................

504

Accounting Manager Basic Procedures ..........................................................................................................

505

Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager ...............................................................................................

505

Setting the Unit Cost for Ink ......................................................................................................................

506

Setting the Unit Cost for Paper ..................................................................................................................

507

Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper ..........................................................................

508

Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager ......................................................................

509

Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals ............................................................................

509

Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition ..................................................................................................

510

Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs ..................................................

510

Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File ...........................................................................................................

510

Displaying Job Properties or Period Properties ...............................................................................................

511

Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data ..................................................................................

512

Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed .................................................................................

512

The Accounting Manager stores the printer's print job logs so that you can use the information for checking printing costs, etc.

The benefits of using the Accounting Manager are outlined below.

• Print Job Log Collection

This allows you to check which documents were printed from each printer, who printed them and when.

• Calculation of the Total Pages Used and the Total Cost

This allows you to use the collected print job logs to calculate totals for items such as the number of pages printed, the amount of paper used and the printing costs incurred.

• Regular Data Acquisition for Print Jobs

Job logs can be automatically collected periodically.

• Exporting Print Job Data

This allows you to export collected print job data as a CSV file.

Important

• The Accounting Manager in Status Monitor displays approximate estimates of the amount of paper consumed and the ink consumed per job. Canon cannot guarantee the accuracy of these estimates. These estimates will also vary depending on the conditions of printer use.

• Print job log collection is not performed when Set./Adj. Menu -> System Setup -> Show Job Log of the control panel is Off . However,

• even if Show Job Log is set to Off , regularly acquired jobs that already have been retrieved at that time are displayed.

• When Show Job Log has been set to On again, all jobs within the printer at that time are displayed.

501

The procedure for launching the Accounting Manager is shown below.

1

Open the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor window.

User's Guide

Accounting Manager Main Window iPF840

2

Select Accounting in the Accounting menu.

Or, open the Accounting sheet and click the Accounting button.

Note

• If Show Job Log is set to off and an administrator password is configured in the printer, the administrator password needs to be entered on startup.

If the password is correct, you are logged on as administrator and Accounting starts.

Furthermore, when you exit from Accounting, you can choose to log off as administrator.

• If you log off as administrator, you need to enter the password again the next time it starts.

• The administrator password can be set or cleared using Chg.Admin.Pswd/Init.Admin.Pswd in the Admin. Menu in the Set./Adj. Menu in the printer.

The administrator menu can only be displayed and configured by the administrator.

The Accounting Manager main window consists of a title bar, menu bar, toolbars, listed job selection area, job list area, totals area and status bar.

• Title Bar

This displays the printer model, its serial number and the port number it is using.

502

• Menu Bar

Allows you to select the menu options required for operation.

• Toolbars

Provide tool buttons and pull-down menus for the main operations.

User's Guide

iPF840 Accounting Manager Main Window

• You can opt to either show or hide the toolbars in the View menu.

Note

• Listed Job Selection Area

You can use this area to select which job log is displayed.

If you are using regular data acquisition, this area allows you to view the collective job logs for each specified period.

For more information on how to select the job logs displayed,

see " Switching Between Displaying Jobs on

Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs ."

➔ P.510

• Job List Area

This area lists the details of acquired jobs.

Displays a list of the jobs in the printers or periodically acquired jobs.

(See " Job List Area .")

P.504

Note

• You can change the items that are displayed and the display order using the Advanced Display Settings dialog box. The Advanced Display Settings dialog box can be displayed by selecting Advanced Display

Settings from the Show menu.

• Totals Area

Displays the total costs for the selected job and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.

Note

• If you are viewing regularly acquired print jobs, selecting a period on the left side of the window displays the total costs for that period and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.

User's Guide

503

Job List Area iPF840

• Status Bar

Displays messages and other information.

504

The job items and details that can be displayed in the job list area are as follows.

• No.

The job serial number.

• Job Cost

The cost of printing.

• If the ink and paper unit costs are not set, **** is displayed.

Note

• Document Name

This is the name of the printed document.

• Printing Results

OK is displayed when the print process was executed, and Cancel is displayed if the print process was not executed.

• Media Type

This is the type of paper used in printing.

• Output Image Size

The size of the image used for printing.

• If the job has multiple pages, the size of the last page is displayed.

Note

• Paper Consumed

The area of paper used for printing.

• The Paper Consumed may differ from the product of Paper Width and Paper Length .

Note

• Paper Width

The width of paper used for printing.

• If the job has multiple pages, the width of the last page is displayed.

Note

• Paper Length

The length of paper used for printing.

• Ink Consumed

The amount of ink used for printing.

User's Guide

iPF840 Accounting Manager Basic Procedures

• Owner

The sender of the job.

• Print Job Start Time / Print Time

The time when printing started and the time taken to print.

• Number of Pages

The number of pages printed.

• Roll Paper Width

The width of roll paper used for printing.

• Paper Cost

The cost of paper used for printing.

• If the paper unit cost is not set, **** is displayed.

Note

• Total Ink Cost

The total value of the cost of ink used for printing.

• If the ink unit cost is not set, **** is displayed.

Note

• Total of Other Costs

The total value of costs other than paper and ink.

• Ink Cost Details

The cost of each ink color.

• Ink Consumption Details

The amount of each color of ink used.

The first time you use the Accounting Manager, use the following procedures to configure the settings.

1

Configure unit costs, including the costs of ink and paper.

For details of the unit cost settings, see " Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager ."

➔ P.505

2

Set options such as the units displayed.

For details of the unit settings,

see " Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager ."

➔ P.509

3

If you are using Regular Data Acquisition, configure the Regular Data Acquisition settings.

For details of the Regular Data Acquisition settings, see " Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular

Intervals ."

➔ P.509

4

Specify the jobs to be listed.

For details of how to select the job logs displayed, see " Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and

Regularly Acquired Jobs ."

➔ P.510

This displays the required print job logs and lists the details.

505

Select Unit Costs in the Settings menu to open the Unit Costs dialog box. Configure the unit cost settings in this dialog box.

Note

• When you select a job and then open the Unit Costs dialog box, items with unit costs that have not yet been configured for that job are shown highlighted.

User's Guide

Setting the Unit Cost for Ink iPF840

Setting the Unit Cost for Ink

➔ P.506

Setting the Unit Cost for Paper

➔ P.507

Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper

➔ P.508

Open the Ink sheet. Set the unit cost for ink in this sheet.

506

To set the same unit cost for all the inks

1

Select the Use same price for all ink checkbox.

2

Enter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price .

3

Click the OK button.

Important

• Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button.

To set different unit costs for each ink color

1

Select the ink color to be costed.

2

Enter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price .

3

Click the Overwrite button.

4

Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the inks.

5

Click the OK button.

Important

• Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Setting the Unit Cost for Paper

Opens the Paper sheet. This sheet is used to configure the unit cost of paper.

Setting Standard Prices

1

Select the media type in Media Type .

2

Enter the Width and Length of the paper, as well as the Price for the area of the configured width x height.

3

Click the Add button. To change the unit cost of a media type that has already been configured, click the

Overwrite button.

4

Click the OK button.

Important

• The settings are not applied until you click the OK button.

Specifying Price by Roll Paper

1

Select the media type in Media Type .

2

Click the Roll Paper Width Settings button to display the

Roll Paper Width Settings dialog box.

507

User's Guide

Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper iPF840

3

Enter the Roll Paper Width and Length of the paper, as well as the Price for the configured length.

4

Click the Add button to return to the Paper sheet.

5

To change the unit cost of a media type that has already been configured, click the Overwrite button.

6

Click the OK button.

• If you do not set the standard prices, you cannot set the price for each roll paper.

Important • If the Roll Paper Width is set to the same value as the Width of the paper configured in the standard prices, the cost is calculated using the price configured in the Roll Paper Width Settings dialog box.

• The settings are not applied until you click the OK button.

Open the Other sheet. Use this sheet to set any price for items other than inks and paper.

508

1

Enter any name in the Name field.

2

Enter a value in Unit Cost .

3

Use Allocated to specify whether the costs are allocated as being incurred by the print job.

4

Click the Add button. To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set, click the Overwrite button.

5

Click the OK button.

Important

• Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager

Note

• You can set unit costs for up to 5 items.

Select Units and Display in the Settings menu to open the Units and Display dialog box. Use this dialog box to configure the display settings.

• Date Display Format

Use this option to select the display format for dates. "YYYY" indicates the year, "MM" the month and "DD" the day.

• Currency Unit

Enter the currency unit. Enter a text string up to 3 characters long.

• 1000 Separator

Use this option to select the symbol used as a separator in numbers. The symbol is inserted every 3 digits.

• Decimal Symbol

Use this option to select the symbol used as a decimal point.

• Ink Consumed

Use this option to select the unit used for ink consumption.

• Paper Width

Use this to select the unit used for paper width.

• Paper Length

Use this to select the unit used for paper length.

• Area Display Format

Use this to select the unit used for paper area.

This feature collects print job logs from the printer at regular intervals and saves the logs on your computer.

1

Select Regular Data Acquisition in the Settings menu.

2

Select Acquire print job logs regularly .

3

Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

Important

• Print job log collection is not performed when Set./Adj. Menu -> System Setup -> Show Job Log of the control panel is Off . However, even if Show Job Log is set to Off , regularly acquired jobs that already have been retrieved at that time are displayed.

User's Guide

509

Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition iPF840

Note

• Immediately after you configure Regular Data Acquisition, no print jobs are displayed. Wait a few moments and then select Refresh in the View menu to display the print jobs.

• A maximum of 10,000 records are saved in a print job log. If this number is exceeded, jobs are deleted from the log starting from the oldest record. To save old data, it is recommended that you export the data as a CSV file.

For details of how to export print job logs as CSV files,

see " Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File ."

➔ P.510

You can use this procedure to cancel the regular acquisition of print job logs from printers.

1

Select Regular Data Acquisition in the Settings menu.

2

Uncheck the Acquire print job logs regularly option.

3

Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

The print job logs displayed by the Status Monitor Accounting Manager contain two types of job: Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs.

You can select whether to display Jobs on Printer or Regularly Acquired Jobs in the Listed Job Selection Area on the left side of the window.

• Jobs on Printer

This shows a list of the print jobs currently held on printers.

You can change the number of jobs displayed per page using the Print Jobs Shown Per Page setting in the

View menu or the toolbar.

You can skip to a particular page using the Go to option in the View menu or the toolbar.

Note

• For printers with built-in hard disks, you can view up to 500 print jobs per printer.

• For printers without built-in hard disks, you can view up to 32 print jobs per printer. However, only 10 jobs can be displayed if the printer is switched off.

• Regularly Acquired Jobs

This shows a list of regularly acquired print jobs.

To view all the jobs in a set period, specify the period using Calculate Total for Period and then Starting

Date (or Starting Day of Week or Starting Month ) in the View menu or the toolbar.

For example, to view monthly job logs starting on the 1st of each month, set Calculate Total for Period to

Monthly and set Starting Date to 1 .

• Up to 10,000 regularly acquired jobs are displayed for each printer.

Note

510

You can export the collected print job data in the form of a CSV file by selecting Export Job Cost Data in the File menu.

• You can also select Export Job Cost Data using the icon in the toolbar.

Note

• Selected Jobs

Exports the data for the selected print jobs in the job list as a CSV file.

• You can select multiple jobs by holding down the Shift key or Ctrl key as you click the job names.

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Displaying Job Properties or Period Properties

• Listed Jobs

Exports the data for the print jobs currently displayed in the list as a CSV file.

You can display the Job properties dialog box or Period Properties dialog box to check detailed cost information and other items.

The Job properties dialog box displays detailed information about the selected job.

The Period Properties dialog box displays detailed information within the Regularly Acquired Jobs period.

• Displaying the Job properties Dialog Box

Select a job from the job list, and then select Show Job Properties from Job properties in the File menu.

You can also select multiple jobs at once.

Note

• You can also display the dialog box by selecting a job, right-clicking it, and then selecting Show Job Properties , or by using the icon in the toolbar.

• Displaying the Period Properties Dialog Box

Select a period from the Regularly Acquired Jobs list, and then select Show Period Properties from Job properties in the File menu. You can also select multiple periods at once.

Note

• You can also display the dialog box by selecting and right-clicking a period and then selecting Show Period

Properties , or by using the icon in the toolbar.

• Components of the Job properties Dialog Box/ Period Properties Dialog Box

• Job tab

Displays detailed information about the selected job. You can display detailed information about each job by selecting the corresponding Document Name .

• Owner tab

You can display detailed information about each owner by selecting the corresponding Owner .

• Copy button

Click this button to copy the displayed text information to the clipboard.

User's Guide

511

Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data iPF840

• Show Unit Cost Data

Select Show Unit Cost Data in the File menu to open the Unit Cost Data dialog box. This lists the unit costs for items such as the selected ink and paper.

You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button.

• Save Unit Cost Data

Select a destination folder using Save Unit Cost Data in the File menu. The unit cost data for items such as the selected ink and paper is saved as a file.

• Load Unit Cost Data

Selecting Load Unit Cost Data in the File menu loads saved unit cost data.

Select Show Ink and Paper Consumed in the File menu to open the Show Ink and Paper Consumed dialog box.

This lists the total amounts of ink and paper consumed by the printer so far.

You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button.

Note

• Up to 7 types of media are listed in order of the amount consumed. The total consumption for other media types is shown as Other .

512

User's Guide

iPF840 Using the Printer Hard Disk

Using the Printer Hard Disk ............................................................................................................................

513

Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk .....................................................................................................

514

Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) .......................................................................

517

Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold) ...........................................................................

519

Printing Saved Jobs .......................................................................................................................................

521

Deleting Saved Jobs .......................................................................................................................................

525

Moving Saved Jobs ........................................................................................................................................

528

The printer can save print jobs on the built-in hard disk.

Using print jobs stored on the printer enables you to print the jobs again as needed without using a computer.

Print Send print jobs

HDD

Save print jobs

Saving print jobs offers the following benefits.

• Save the time spent using a computer

When you send a print job to the printer, you can save it on the printer after printing or simply save it on the printer without printing it yet. Saved print jobs can be printed in the required quantity later without the need to use a computer again.

• Simplify reprinting, if any errors occur

If errors occur in the middle of printing (as when paper runs out), you can resume printing after clearing the error without resending the print job from a computer.

• Streamline printing work

Without using a computer, you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity. You can also select multiple print jobs to print during the same period. This enables unattended operation at night, for example.

Output Method

To save print jobs on the printer's hard disk, configure the printer driver.

In Windows, this is set using the Output Method dialog box.

In Mac OS, this is set using the Additional Settings pane.

• Print

Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk after printing.

• Save in mail box

Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk.

• Print after reception is complete

This option is available in combination with Print . You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle.

513

User's Guide

Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk iPF840

Storage destination

The storage area on the printer's hard disk is divided into a temporary storage area and a permanent storage area.

The temporary storage area stores print jobs in the job queue or shared mailbox. The permanent storage area stores jobs in personal boxes.

㸺 Permanent storage area 㸼

Personal mail boxes

01 02 03 04 05

06 28 29

㸺 Temporary storage area 㸼

Common mail box

Job queue

00

• Job queue

The job queue refers to print jobs that are being processed by the printer (saved, received, prepared for processing, printed, deleted, or held). Up to 64 jobs can be stored in the temporary storage area.

When the job queue is full, additional jobs sent from a computer are treated as "standby" jobs, to be processed when possible.

However, if all queued jobs are simply being held, the oldest job is deleted and the print job sent from the computer is processed.

• Shared mailbox

Jobs for which you have specified Print in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS) are saved in the shared mailbox and classified as saved jobs.

There is one shared mailbox, numbered 00 . A password cannot be set for the shared mailbox.

Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here, but they will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations.

• If there are more than 100 jobs queued and saved in the shared mailbox combined

• If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs for which you have selected Print in Output

Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS) are received

• If there is not enough space in the temporary or permanent storage area when jobs for which you have selected Save in mail box in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS) are received

• Personal boxes

Jobs are classified as saved jobs and saved in personal boxes in the following situations.

• When a saved job stored in the shared mailbox is moved to a personal box

• When you have selected Save in mail box as the option in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to

(in Mac OS)

There are 29 personal boxes, numbered 01 to 29 . You can specify a name and password for each personal box.

Up to 100 print jobs can be saved in all personal boxes combined.

514

To save print jobs on the printer's hard disk, configure the printer driver.

Print jobs

HDD

User's Guide

iPF840 Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk

Note

• Printing from the following software also enables you to save print jobs on the printer's hard disk.

Windows

Free Layout

P.199

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

➔ P.221

Preview

➔ P.189

Mac OS

Free Layout

➔ P.307

Preview

P.189

Configuring the Printer Driver in Windows

1

Access the Page Setup sheet.

2

Click Output Method to display the Output Method dialog box.

3

Make your selection in Output Method .

• Print

Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk after printing.

• Save in mail box

Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk.

User's Guide

515

Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk iPF840

If you choose Save in mail box , also specify the destination personal box in the Mail box list.

• Print after reception is complete

This option is available in combination with Print . You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle.

Note

• Click Acquire Mail Box Name to display personal box names in the Mail box list, as acquired from the printer.

4

In Name of data to be saved , specify how to name saved print jobs.

• To use the file name, choose Use file name .

• Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name .

5

Click OK to close the Output Method dialog box.

Configuring the printer driver in Mac OS

1

Access the Additional Settings pane.

2

Make your selection in Send job to .

• Print

Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk after printing.

• Save in mail box

Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk.

The Destination dialog box is displayed if you select Save in mail box . Here, specify the name and personal box number for saved print jobs.

516

1.

In Document title , enter a name to identify saved print jobs.

• If printed from Free Layout or Preview, the Document title is saved under the name image-

PROGRAF.

Note

2.

Select the personal box number in the Mail box list.

User's Guide

iPF840 Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs)

3.

Click OK to close the Destination dialog box.

• Print after reception is complete

This option is available in combination with Print . You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle.

Print jobs being processed by the printer are collectively called the job queue. You can delete or preempt jobs in the job queue as needed.

These operations are available from the Control Panel, in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and image-

PROGRAF Printmonitor.

• Delete

Note that only jobs that are not currently being deleted can be deleted from the job queue.

Print jobs

HDD

• Preempting other jobs

You can preempt other jobs by printing jobs that are currently being received or prepared for processing first.

HDD

Print job

C

Print job

B

Print job

A

Note

For information on managing jobs being held, see " Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on

Hold) ."

P.519

Using the Control Panel

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).

Note

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

User's Guide

517

Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) iPF840

2

Press the OK button.

The Job Menu is displayed.

3

Manage the job queue as needed.

• Deleting jobs

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job , and then press the OK button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the print job to delete, and then press the OK button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete , and then press the OK button.

• Preempting other jobs

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job , and then press the OK button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the job to print first, and then press the OK button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Preempt Jobs , and then press the OK button.

Using RemoteUI

Manage jobs as needed on the Print Job page. For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

Manage jobs as needed on the Job sheet. For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

518

User's Guide

iPF840 Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold)

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)

Manage jobs as needed on the Driver sheet. For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

If the type or size of paper loaded does not match the settings in the print job received when you have set Detect

Mismatch to Hold Job in the Control Panel menu, the print job is held on the printer as a pending job in the job queue.

Manage held jobs such as these as follows.

These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

Note

• As long as you do not manage held jobs from the Control Panel, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, or imagePROG-

RAF Printmonitor, they will remain in the job queue. In this case, the printer processes the next job in the queue without pausing.

• To print held jobs, replace the loaded paper with the paper specified in the print job.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

Using the Control Panel

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).

" There are held jobs.

" is displayed if jobs are being held.

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Job Menu menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job , and then press the OK button.

519

User's Guide

Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold) iPF840

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the print job to manage, and then press the

OK button.

Held jobs are labeled with an icon.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Anyway or Delete , and then press the OK button.

• If you choose Print Anyway

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes or No , and then press the OK button.

• If you choose Delete

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes or No , and then press the OK button.

Using RemoteUI

Manage jobs as needed on the Print Job page. For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

Manage jobs as needed on the Job

sheet. For details, see " Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ."

➔ P.497

520

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Saved Jobs

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

Manage jobs as needed on the Driver sheet. For details,

see " Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ."

➔ P.500

Print saved print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk as follows.

These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

Print

HDD

Print jobs

Using the Control Panel

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Job Menu menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00–29), and then press the OK button.

• Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.

Note

User's Guide

521

Printing Saved Jobs iPF840

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job, and then press the OK button.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , and then press the OK button.

8

Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.

Using RemoteUI

1

On the Stored Job page, choose the box.

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

2

Select the print job and click Resume .

3

On the Print Saved Document page, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK .

522

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Saved Jobs

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

1

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click

Open .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

2

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and click Print .

3

In the Print dialog box, enter the quantity to print in

Copies and click OK .

User's Guide

523

Printing Saved Jobs iPF840

Note

• The printing time initially indicates how long it took to finish printing one copy during the previous print job.

If you change the value in Copies , the printing time indicates the time it took to print one copy during the previous print job multiplied by the number of copies.

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

1

On the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ by Inbox No./Name .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

The password is a four-digit number.

2

Select the saved job and click Resume Printing .

524

User's Guide

iPF840 Deleting Saved Jobs

3

In the Resume Printing dialog box, enter the quantity to print and click OK .

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

Delete saved print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk as follows.

This operation is available from the Control Panel, in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and image-

PROGRAF Printmonitor.

Using the Control Panel

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Job Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00–29), and then press the OK button.

• Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.

Note

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job, and then press the OK button.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete , and then press the OK button.

8

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

525

User's Guide

Deleting Saved Jobs iPF840

Using RemoteUI

1

On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

2

Select the print job and click Delete .

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

1

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click

Open .

526

User's Guide

iPF840 Deleting Saved Jobs

• Enter a password if one has been set.

Note

2

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and click Delete .

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

1

In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./

Name .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

The password is a four-digit number.

527

User's Guide

Moving Saved Jobs iPF840

2

Select the print job and click the Delete button.

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

Print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be moved from the current box to another box as follows.

However, jobs saved in personal boxes cannot be moved to the shared mailbox.

This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

Important

• Jobs stored in the shared mailbox may be automatically deleted under some conditions. To prevent jobs from

being deleted, move them from the shared mailbox to personal boxes. (See " Using the Printer Hard

Disk .")

➔ P.513

Using RemoteUI

1

On the Stored Job page, choose the box.

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

528

User's Guide

iPF840 Moving Saved Jobs

2

Select the print job and click Move Document .

3

On the Move Document page, select the name or number of the destination personal box in the Destination mail box list and click OK .

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

1

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click

Open .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

529

User's Guide

Moving Saved Jobs iPF840

2

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and click Move .

3

In the Move dialog box, select the destination personal box and click OK .

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)

1

In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./

Name .

530

User's Guide

iPF840 Moving Saved Jobs

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

The password is a four-digit number.

2

Select the print job and click Move .

3

In the Move Document dialog box, select the destination personal box and click OK .

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

User's Guide

531

Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver iPF840

Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver .................................................................

532

Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box ..........................................................................................

533

Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes ...........................................................................................................

534

Naming Personal Boxes .................................................................................................................................

537

Displaying a List of Saved Jobs ......................................................................................................................

539

Printing a List of Saved Jobs ..........................................................................................................................

542

Displaying Details of Saved Jobs ....................................................................................................................

543

Renaming Saved Jobs ...................................................................................................................................

545

Printer Hard Disk Operations ....................................................................................................................

470

Checking the Free Hard Disk Space .........................................................................................................

471

To save print jobs sent from software or systems other than the printer driver or applications provided with the printer, complete the Output Method and Print After Recv settings in the Control Panel menu.

Print jobs

HDD

Note

• Contact the software or system developer for information about support for this printer function.

Specifying Output Method

In Output Method , specify how to manage jobs, regarding printing and saving them.

• Print

Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)

• Print (Auto Del)

Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.

• Save: Box 01 (Here, the number represents a box number)

Save print jobs on the printer.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

532

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Output Method , and then press the OK button.

Note

• If a password has been set on the printer, the Logon screen is displayed.

To change the settings, select Administrator and press the OK button. When the Admin.Pswd

screen is displayed, enter the password and press the OK button to proceed to the next step.

If you select User and press the OK button, you can check settings values but cannot change them.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , Print (Auto Del) , or Save: Box 01 .

Follow these steps only when you select Save: Box 01 .

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box, and then press the OK button.

Specify Print After Recv

To save print jobs on the hard disk before printing, specify Print After Recv .

Printing will start when Print After Recv is set to On , even if you have selected Save: Box 01 in Output Method .

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print After Recv , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On or Off , and then press the OK button.

Jobs sent from a computer for which you have selected Print in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in

Mac OS) in the printer driver are saved in the shared mailbox. (See " Using the Printer Hard Disk .")

➔ P.513

When Common Box Set.

is Print (Auto Del) in the Control Panel menu, print jobs for which you have selected

Print in the Output Method dialog box of the printer driver are deleted from the shared mailbox after printing.

Use this function when printing highly confidential documents.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

User's Guide

533

Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes iPF840

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Common Box Set.

, and then press the OK button.

Note

• If a password has been set on the printer, the Logon screen is displayed.

To change the setting, select Administrator and press the OK button.

When the Admin.Pswd

screen is displayed, enter the password and press the OK button to proceed to the next step.

If you select User and press the OK button, you can check settings values but cannot change them.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print (Auto Del) , and then press the OK button.

For greater security, you can specify a password for personal boxes. After you set a password, it will be required to modify the personal box settings, as well as to display, print, delete, move, and modify jobs saved in the personal box.

This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

Enter the password

Personal mail box

Modify settings

(Print jobs in the personal mail box)

· Display

· Print

· Delete

· Move

· Modify settings

Note

• By default, no passwords are set for personal boxes.

• A password cannot be set for the shared mailbox.

• Enter a four-digit number as the password, in the range 0001–9999.

• Even if you have set passwords, they are not required to access personal boxes in Administrator Mode in RemoteUI.

Using RemoteUI

1

On the Stored Job page, choose the personal box.

2

Click Edit .

534

3

In the Set/Register User's Inbox dialog box, specify the password and click OK .

• Set Password

Select the check box.

• Password

Enter the password. (This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001–9999.)

• Confirmation Number

Re-enter the password to confirm it.

User's Guide

iPF840 Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

1

On the Hard Disk sheet, select the personal box and click Open .

2

In the Documents dialog box, click Settings .

3

In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK .

• Set password

Select the check box.

• Password

Enter the password. (This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001–9999.)

• Re-enter to confirm

Re-enter the password to confirm it.

User's Guide

535

Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes iPF840

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)

1

On the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ by Inbox No./Name .

Select a saved job in the list and click Set .

2

In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK .

• Set password

Select the check box.

• Password

Enter the password. (This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001–9999.)

• Verify

Re-enter the password to confirm it.

536

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

User's Guide

iPF840 Naming Personal Boxes

For easier identification, you can assign names to personal boxes.

This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

Using RemoteUI

1

On the Stored Job page, choose the personal box.

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box.

2

Click Edit .

3

In the Set/Register User's Inbox dialog box, enter the name in Inbox Name and click OK .

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.

537

User's Guide

Naming Personal Boxes iPF840

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

1

On the Hard Disk sheet, select the personal box and click Open .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box.

2

In the Documents dialog box, click Settings .

3

In the Settings dialog box, enter the name and click

OK .

538

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

User's Guide

iPF840 Displaying a List of Saved Jobs

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)

1

In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./

Name . Select a saved job in the list and click Set .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

The password is a four-digit number.

2

In the Settings dialog box, enter the name and click

OK .

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

Print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be listed by box as follows.

These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

539

User's Guide

Displaying a List of Saved Jobs iPF840

Using the Control Panel

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Job Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00–29), and then press the OK button.

• Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.

Note

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List , and then press the OK button.

Using RemoteUI

On the Stored Job page, choose the box.

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

540

User's Guide

iPF840 Displaying a List of Saved Jobs

Jobs saved in the box are listed.

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click Open .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

Jobs saved in that box are displayed in the Documents dialog box.

User's Guide

541

Printing a List of Saved Jobs iPF840

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)

On the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ by Inbox No./Name .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

The password is a four-digit number.

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

The list of print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be printed by box as follows.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).

542

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Job Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Displaying Details of Saved Jobs

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00–29), and then press the OK button.

• Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.

Note

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List , and then press the OK button.

Details of print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be displayed as follows.

This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

Using RemoteUI

1

On the Stored Job page, choose the box.

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

2

Select the print job and click Details .

The Details of the saved document page is displayed.

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.

User's Guide

543

Displaying Details of Saved Jobs iPF840

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

1

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click

Open .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

2

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and click Properties .

The Properties dialog box is displayed.

544

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

User's Guide

iPF840 Renaming Saved Jobs

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)

1

In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./

Name .

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

The password is a four-digit number.

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

Print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be renamed as follows.

This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

Using RemoteUI

1

On the Stored Job page, choose the box.

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

User's Guide

545

Renaming Saved Jobs iPF840

2

Select the print job and click Details .

3

On the Details of the saved document page, click

Change Document .

4

In the Rename Saved Document dialog box, enter the name and click OK .

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

1

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click

Open .

546

User's Guide

iPF840 Renaming Saved Jobs

• Enter a password if one has been set.

Note

2

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and click Properties .

3

In the Properties dialog box, enter the new name and click OK .

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)

1

In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./

Name .

User's Guide

547

Renaming Saved Jobs iPF840

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

The password is a four-digit number.

2

Select the print job and click Set .

3

In the Settings dialog box, enter the new name and click OK .

548

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

15

29

157

267

331

425

463

475

495

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the Printhead .....................................................................

550

Adjusting the feed amount ................................................................

558

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

565

603

635

657

661

imagePROGRAF

549

Adjusting the Printhead iPF840

Adjusting the Printhead ..................................................................................................................................

550

Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors ...............................................................................

550

Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors ....................................................................................

552

Adjustment When Installing the Printhead ..................................................................................................

553

Adjusting Line Misalignment ...........................................................................................................................

554

Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images ........................................................................................

556

If printed documents are affected by the following problems, try adjusting the printhead.

• Printing is faint or affected by banding in different colors

Execute Nozzle Check in the Control Panel menu to check for printhead nozzle clogging.

For instructions, see " Checking for Nozzle Clogging ."

➔ P.577

• Printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment

Execute Head Posi. Adj.

in the Control Panel menu to adjust the printhead position.

• Normally, execute Standard .

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

• When printing on special paper, or if printing is not improved after Standard , try Manual .

(See " Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.552

Note

• In the next case, execute Initial adjustmt .

(See " Adjustment When Installing the Printhead .")

P.553

• If adjusting the printhead position has not been performed such as due to an error during initial setup

• If Rep.P.head Print in the Control Panel menu is set to Off and adjusting the printhead position has not been performed when replacing the printhead

• Paper rubs against the printhead, or image edges are blurred

Selecting Head Height in the Control Panel menu and changing the printhead height may improve the situation.

(See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

550

If vertical lines in printed documents are warped or colors are out of alignment, execute Head Posi. Adj.

. The printer will print and read a test pattern, and the Printhead position will be adjusted automatically.

There are two modes for automatic Printhead adjustment: Standard and Simple .

• Standard

Execute if vertical lines in printed material are warped or colors are out of alignment.

Furthermore, if Simple does not improve printing, try Standard .

• Simple

Executes simple adjustment in a short time.

Execute this when frequently adjusting the printhead, such as during daily inspection.

User's Guide

iPF840 Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors

Important

• This function is not available with Tracing Paper, Translucent Matte Film, or Clear Film.

• If adjustment is not possible as expected using special media, try another type of paper, or try Manual adjustment.

(See " Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.552

Note

• Because the results of adjustment vary depending on the type of paper used for adjustment, use the same type of paper as you will use for printing.

• If Standard does not improve printing, try adjusting the printhead manually.

(See " Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

P.552

• If the printhead position was not adjusted during initial setup or when the printhead was replaced, execute Initial adjustmt .

(See " Adjustment When Installing the Printhead .")

➔ P.553

Items to Prepare

When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide

When Using Sheets Standard : Two sheets of unused paper, A4/Letter size (or one sheet when using A3 or larger)

Simple : One sheet of unused paper, A4/Letter size

Perform adjustment as follows.

1

Load paper.

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

P.342

Loading Rolls in the Printer

➔ P.345

Loading Sheets in the Printer

➔ P.369

Important

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Posi. Adj.

, and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Standard or Simple , and then press the OK button.

A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

Adjustment is now finished if you have printed on a roll.

7

If you are printing on cut sheets, a confirmation message is displayed on the Display Screen asking you whether to continue printing.

Press the OK button and follow the instructions on the Display Screen.

551

User's Guide

Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors iPF840

If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, execute Head Posi. Adj.

to adjust the Printhead alignment.

Normally, execute Standard .

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

However, when printing on special paper, or if printing is not improved after Standard , try Manual .

Manual adjustment requires you to examine the printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value.

Note

• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.

• If the printhead position was not adjusted during initial setup or when the printhead was replaced, execute Initial adjustmt .

(See " Adjustment When Installing the Printhead .")

➔ P.553

Items to Prepare

When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide

When Using Sheets Two sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size (or one sheet when using A2 or larger)

Perform adjustment as follows.

1

Load paper.

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

P.342

Loading Rolls in the Printer

➔ P.345

Loading Sheets in the Printer

➔ P.369

Important

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

552

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Posi. Adj.

, and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Other , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Adjustment When Installing the Printhead

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual , and then press the OK button.

A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

Note

• Manual may be unavailable in some cases, even if it is displayed in the menu.

If so, execute Standard once.

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

8

Press ▲ or ▼ to select D , and then press the OK button.

9

Press ▲ or ▼ to select D-1 , and then press the OK button.

10

Examine adjustment test pattern D-1 and determine the number with straight lines.

Note

• If two patterns seem equally good and you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value.

For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

11

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.

12

Repeat steps 9–11 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-23 .

Note that D-6 , D-12 , D-18 , and D-24 cannot be configured.

13

Press the Back button.

14

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Register Setting , and then press the OK button.

15

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.

Printhead position adjustment is executed when the printhead is first installed.

This adjustment should be executed in the following situations.

• If adjusting the printhead position has not been performed such as due to an error during initial setup

• If Rep.P.head Print in the Control Panel menu is set to Off and adjusting the printhead position has not been performed when replacing the printhead

• We recommend that the same paper as the paper included with the printer is used for this adjustment.

Note

Items to Prepare

When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide

When Using Sheets Three sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size (or one sheet when using A3 or larger)

553

User's Guide

Adjusting Line Misalignment iPF840

Perform adjustment as follows.

1

Load paper.

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

P.342

Loading Rolls in the Printer

➔ P.345

Loading Sheets in the Printer

➔ P.369

Important

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Posi. Adj.

, and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Other , and then press the OK button.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Initial adjustmt , and then press the OK button.

A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

Adjustment is now finished if you have printed on a roll.

8

If you are printing on sheets, a confirmation message is displayed requesting you to continue printing.

Press the OK button and follow the instructions.

554

If printed lines are misaligned, execute Head Inc. Adj.

to adjust the angle of inclination of the Printhead. Executing

Head Inc. Adj.

requires you to examine a printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value.

Paper to Prepare

Rolls An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide

Sheets One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size

Perform adjustment as follows.

1

Load the paper.

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

P.342

Loading Rolls in the Printer

P.345

Loading Sheets in the Printer

➔ P.369

Note

• When loading paper, specify the type of paper correctly. Using paper that you have not specified on the printer may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality.

• We recommend loading a type of paper that you use often.

User's Guide

iPF840 Adjusting Line Misalignment

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Inc. Adj.

, and then press the OK button.

After the Carriage is moved, a message is displayed requesting you to open the Top Cover.

6

Open the Top Cover.

7

Align the Angle Adjustment Lever with the red square and close the Top Cover.

555

User's Guide

Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images iPF840

A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

Important

• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these parts may damage them.

a c b

8

Examine the test pattern for adjustment. Determine the straightest set of lines.

9

Open the Top Cover and move the Angle Adjustment Lever to match the number (or the square) of the straightest set of lines.

If no single set of lines is perfectly straight, move the Angle

Adjustment Lever to a position between the numbers (or between the number and the square) of the two sets of lines that are least misaligned.

10

Close the Top Cover.

The Printhead is now straight, and adjustment is complete.

556

The Printhead height setting affects printing quality.

Specifying a low Printhead height makes images clearer and enhances printing quality but may cause paper to rub against the Printhead.

On the other hand, specifying a high Printhead height will prevent paper from rubbing against the Printhead but may reduce the printing quality.

User's Guide

iPF840 Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images

Important

• Paper rubbing against or becoming caught on the Printhead may jam or result in printed documents that are soiled.

1

Note

• Raise or lower the printhead, depending on the nature of the problem.

(See " Paper rubs against the Printhead .")

➔ P.618

(See " The edges of the paper are dirty .")

➔ P.618

(See " Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs .")

➔ P.621

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

Note

• When Head Height is set to Automatic , the setting value selected for the previous print job is displayed

(to the right of Automatic ) once you select the type of paper currently supplied.

Note that this is not displayed if any of the following is executed.

• Turning off the power

• Replacing paper

• Entering sleep mode

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Height , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting value, and then press the OK button.

Note

• Using Automatic will ensure that the printer adjusts the Printhead height to the optimal level before printing, accounting for the ambient temperature and humidity. When a setting other than Automatic is used, that value will always be applied.

• Depending on the type of paper, some setting values may not be available.

557

User's Guide

Adjusting the Feed Amount iPF840

Adjusting the Feed Amount ............................................................................................................................

558

Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method ...........................................................................................

558

Automatic Banding Adjustment .................................................................................................................

559

Manual Banding Adjustment ......................................................................................................................

560

Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount .........................................................................................................

562

Adjusting Line Length ................................................................................................................................

562

Adjusting the Vacuum Strength ......................................................................................................................

564

If printed documents are affected by the following problems, try adjusting the feed amount.

• Banding in different colors

• Line length is not accurate in the direction paper is fed

To adjust the feed amount, do the following, in this order.

1

Depending on the issue, adjust Adj. Priority to suit the particular type of paper.

(See " Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method .")

➔ P.558

2

Execute Adj. Quality or Adjust Length , depending on the selection in Adj. Priority .

(See " Automatic Banding Adjustment .")

➔ P.559

(See " Manual Banding Adjustment .")

➔ P.560

(See " Adjusting Line Length .")

➔ P.562

3

After executing Adj. Quality , execute Adj. Fine Feed for further adjustment as needed.

(See " Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount .")

➔ P.562

558

Methods of adjusting the amount paper is fed are set in Adj. Priority .

Adjust Adj. Priority to suit your particular printing application.

• Print Quality : Adjusts the feed amount to reduce banding across the sheet in printed documents.

Adj. Quality settings are applied. When Adj. Fine Feed is executed, the Adj. Fine Feed settings are applied in addition to the Adj. Quality settings.

• Print Length : Adjusts the feed amount for better accuracy of lines in printed documents.

The settings of A:High or B:Standard/Draft in Adjust Length are applied.

• Automatic : Print Quality or Print Length is selected, depending on Print Priority as selected in the printer driver at the time of printing.

Image or Office Document : Print Quality is selected.

Line Drawing/Text : Print Length is selected.

Note

• Either A:High or B:Standard/Draft in the Adjust Length menu is applied, depending on printer driver settings at the time of printing.

• If you have selected Easy Settings in the printer driver, follow these steps to confirm the Print Priority setting.

• Windows: Click View Settings on the Main tab to display the View Settings dialog box.

• Mac OS: Click View set.

on the Main pane to display the View set.

dialog box.

Follow these steps to configure the settings.

1

Load the paper.

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

➔ P.342

Loading Rolls in the Printer

➔ P.345

Loading Sheets in the Printer

➔ P.369

User's Guide

iPF840 Automatic Banding Adjustment

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj. Priority , and then press the OK button.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Automatic , Print Quality , or Print Length , and then press the OK button.

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors across the sheet, execute Adj. Quality for automatic adjustment of the paper feed amount.

There are two modes of automatic adjustment to correct banding: Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper) . In either mode, the printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount.

• Auto(GenuinePpr)

Use this mode with paper identified in the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Types of Paper .")

➔ P.332

• Auto(OtherPaper)

Use this mode with paper not in the Paper Reference Guide , or if Auto(GenuinePpr) does not eliminate banding.

(See " Types of Paper .")

P.332

Important

• Adjustment is not possible with Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper) when using highly transparent media.

In this case, use Manual adjustment.

(See " Manual Banding Adjustment .")

➔ P.560

Note

• We recommend executing the adjustment if you have changed the paper type or paper size.

• Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper) .

(See " Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method .")

➔ P.558

• If additional fine-tuning is necessary after Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper) , execute Adj. Fine Feed .

(See " Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount .")

➔ P.562

• Use Adjust Length to ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length.

(See " Adjusting Line Length .")

➔ P.562

• This may take some time, depending on the type of paper.

Items to Prepare

When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide

When Using Sheets Auto(GenuinePpr) : One sheet of unused paper, A4/Letter size

Auto(OtherPaper) : Two sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size (or one sheet when using A2 or larger)

559

User's Guide

Manual Banding Adjustment iPF840

Perform adjustment as follows.

1

Load the paper.

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

P.342

Loading Rolls in the Printer

➔ P.345

Loading Sheets in the Printer

➔ P.369

Important

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified in the settings. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj. Quality , and then press the OK button.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper) , and then press the OK button.

A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

Adjustment is now finished if you have printed on a roll or a sheet of A2 size or larger.

8

If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Auto(OtherPaper) , a confirmation message is shown on the Display Screen requesting you to continue printing.

Press the OK button and follow the instructions on the Display Screen.

560

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, execute Adj. Quality for adjustment of the paper feed amount.

Use Manual adjustment with highly transparent media or other paper for which Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(Other-

Paper) cannot be used.

(See " Automatic Banding Adjustment .")

➔ P.559

Manual adjustment requires you to enter an adjustment value after a test pattern is printed.

Note

• We recommend executing the adjustment if you have changed the paper type or paper size.

• Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Manual adjustment.

(See " Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method .")

➔ P.558

• If additional fine-tuning is necessary after Manual adjustment, use Adj. Fine Feed

(See " Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount .")

➔ P.562

• Use Adjust Length to ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length.

(See " Adjusting Line Length .")

➔ P.562

User's Guide

iPF840 Manual Banding Adjustment

Paper to Prepare

When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide

When Using Sheets Two sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size

Perform adjustment as follows.

1

Load the paper.

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

➔ P.342

Loading Rolls in the Printer

➔ P.345

Loading Sheets in the Printer

➔ P.369

Important

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj. Quality , and then press the OK button.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual , and then press the OK button.

Test pattern A is printed for manual adjustment.

• When printing on sheets, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and remove the sheet.

Note

8

Examine test pattern A for adjustment. Determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable.

Note

• If banding seems least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value.

For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

561

User's Guide

Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount iPF840

9

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.

Test pattern B is printed for adjustment.

Note

• If you printed test pattern A on a sheet, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and use another sheet of the same type of paper.

Additionally, after test pattern B is printed, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and remove the sheet.

10

Examine test pattern B for adjustment. Determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable.

11

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.

The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.

If the contrast is uneven or banding in different colors appears at 50 mm (2.0 in) intervals in printed documents, try executing Adj. Fine Feed during printing to fine-tune the feed amount.

Note

• The Adj. Fine Feed menu is only displayed during printing.

Additionally, it is displayed when you have selected Automatic or Print Quality in Adj. Priority in Feed Priority .

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

• Always execute Adj. Quality before Adj. Fine Feed .

Once you execute Adj. Quality , the Adj. Fine Feed value will revert to 0.

(See " Automatic Banding Adjustment .")

P.559

(See " Manual Banding Adjustment .")

P.560

Perform adjustment as follows.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj. Fine Feed , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select a setting value in the range -5 to 5, and then press the OK button.

At this time, if banding in dark colors appears, select a setting value in the range 1 to 5, and if banding in light colors appears, select a setting value in the range -1 to -5.

562

To ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, use Adjust Length to adjust the amount that paper is advanced.

There are two options in Adjust Length : AdjustmentPrint and Change Settings .

• AdjustmentPrint

After a test pattern is printed, you will measure the discrepancy based on the results of printing.

• Change Settings

No test pattern is printed. Instead, you will measure a document already printed to determine the discrepancy.

User's Guide

iPF840 Adjusting Line Length

Additionally, two modes are available in both AdjustmentPrint and Change Settings : A:High or B:Standard/

Draft . Choose the mode that suits your particular printing application.

• A:High

This setting is applied when Highest or High is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver.

• B:Standard/Draft

This setting is applied when Standard or Fast is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver.

Note

• We recommend executing the adjustment if you have changed the paper type or paper size.

• Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Adjust Length

. (See " Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment

Method .")

➔ P.558

Paper to Prepare

When Using Rolls

When Using Sheets

An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide

• High-precision ruler

One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size

• High-precision ruler

Perform adjustment as follows.

1

Load the paper.

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

P.342

Loading Rolls in the Printer

P.345

Loading Sheets in the Printer

P.369

Important

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Length , and then press the OK button.

7

Press ▲ or ▼ to select AdjustmentPrint or Change Settings , and then press the OK button.

When you select AdjustmentPrint , a test pattern is printed for you to measure the scale and calculate the discrepancy. The scale bar prints Millimeter in 50 mm increments and Inch in 1-inch increments.

Millimeter Inch

User's Guide

563

Adjusting the Vacuum Strength iPF840

Note

• A test pattern is printed in black when you choose A:High or in magenta if you choose B:Standard/Draft .

• To cancel printing the test pattern for adjustment, hold down the Stop button. When " Stop printing?

" is displayed, press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

8

Press ▲ or ▼ to enter the amount of discrepancy, and then press the OK button.

If the scale is shorter than the actual size, use a positive setting value. If it is longer, use a negative value.

The feed amount can be adjusted in 0.02% increments.

When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily, if the Printhead rubs against paper, adjusting the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve results.

Important

• Paper rubbing against or becoming caught on the Printhead may jam or result in printed documents that are soiled.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Paper tab ( ).

Ready

OK: Paper Menu

Plain Paper

Plain Paper

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

Note

• When VacuumStrngth is set to Automatic , the setting value selected for the previous print job is displayed (to the right of Automatic ) once you select the type of paper currently supplied.

Note that this is not displayed if any of the following is executed.

• Turning off the power

• Replacing paper

• Entering sleep mode

564

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select VacuumStrngth , and then press the OK button.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting value, and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

15

29

157

267

331

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

425

463

475

495

549

Maintenance and Consumables

Ink Tanks ...........................................................................................

566

Printheads .........................................................................................

577

Maintenance Cartridge ......................................................................

585

Cleaning the Printer ...........................................................................

591

Other Maintenance ............................................................................

594

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

603

635

657

661

imagePROGRAF

565

Ink Tanks iPF840

Ink Tanks ........................................................................................................................................................

566

Replacing Ink Tanks ........................................................................................................................................

566

Checking Ink Tank Levels ...............................................................................................................................

575

When to Replace Ink Tanks ............................................................................................................................

575

When purchasing, check the Model number.

Shape Colors

Matte black

Black

Cyan

Magenta

Yellow

Shape Colors

Matte black

Black

Cyan

Magenta

Yellow

Model number

PFI-307 MBK

PFI-307 BK

PFI-307 C

PFI-307 M

PFI-307 Y

Model number

PFI-707 MBK

PFI-707 BK

PFI-707 C

PFI-707 M

PFI-707 Y

Ink Type

Pigment ink

Dye ink

Ink Type

Pigment ink

Dye ink

Capacity

330 ml (11.2 fl oz)

Capacity

700 ml (23.7 fl oz)

Note

• For instructions on Ink Tank replacement,

see " Replacing Ink Tanks ."

➔ P.566

566

Compatible ink tanks

For information on the compatible ink tanks for this printer,

see " Ink Tanks ."

➔ P.566

Replacement ink tanks in 330 ml (11.2 fl oz) and 700 ml (23.7 fl oz) capacities are supported.

• Depending on the color, you can also use an ink tank with a different capacity.

Note

Precautions when handling ink tanks

Take the following precautions when handling ink tanks.

Caution

• For safety, keep ink tanks out of the reach of children.

• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.

User's Guide

iPF840 Replacing Ink Tanks

Important

• There may be ink around the ink supply section of ink tanks you removed. Handle ink tanks carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

• Do not install used ink tanks in another model of printer.

This will prevent correct ink level detection, which may damage the printer or cause other problems.

• We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal. Printing quality may be affected if you use older ink tanks.

• Do not leave the printer without ink tanks installed for extended periods (a month or more). Residual ink may become clogged inside the printer and affect printing quality.

How to replace an Ink Tank

1.

Confirm the message

➔ P.567

2.

Access the menu for Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement

➔ P.568

(Otherwise, open the Ink Tank Cover.)

3.

Remove the Ink Tank.

Remove the Ink Tank (330 ml)

➔ P.568

Remove the Ink Tank (700 ml)

➔ P.569

4.

Load the new Ink Tank.

Load the Ink Tank (330 ml)

➔ P.570

Load the Ink Tank (700 ml)

➔ P.572

Confirm the message

When the ink level becomes low, a message is displayed on the Display Screen.

According to the message, replace the ink tank or prepare a new ink tank. (See " When to Replace Ink

Tanks .")

P.575

Printing

OK: Ink Menu

C M Y M

K

B

K

Printing

OK: Ink Menu

Not much ink is left. Prepare to replace the ink.

If a message requests you to replace an Ink Tank, press the OK button. In this case, you can skip the step Access the menu for ink tank replacement.

Follow the instructions in Remove the ink tanks.

No ink left.

Replace ink tank.

OK

C M Y

B

K

B

K

Important

• Do not remove an Ink Tank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, or during printhead cleaning. Ink may leak out.

Note

• Ink Tank replacement is possible even during printing, when print jobs are being canceled, or when paper is being advanced.

567

User's Guide

Replacing Ink Tanks iPF840

Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Ink tab ( ).

Ready

OK: Ink Menu

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Ink Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Rep. Ink Tank , and then press the OK button.

Instructions are displayed on the Display Screen.

Remove the Ink Tank (330 ml)

1

Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp.

The Ink Lamp flashes quickly if there is no ink left.

C M Y

B

K

B

K

2

Important

• Avoid hitting the printer when replacing an Ink Tank. Handle the printer gently when replacing tanks.

Jolting the printer during printing may deteriorate print quality.

Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever for the color to replace. Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.

GG

568

Note

• Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks.

• Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the original position.

a

User's Guide

iPF840 Replacing Ink Tanks

3

Hold the Ink Tank by the grips (a) and remove it. Press the

OK button.

a

Important

• If there is still ink in the Ink Tank you removed, store it with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains. Put the removed Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.

a

Note

• Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations.

Remove the Ink Tank (700 ml)

1

Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp.

The Ink Lamp flashes quickly if there is no ink left.

2

Important

• Avoid hitting the printer when replacing an Ink Tank. Handle the printer gently when replacing tanks.

Jolting the printer during printing may deteriorate print quality.

Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever for the color to replace. Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.

569 a

User's Guide

Replacing Ink Tanks iPF840

3

Note

• Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks.

• Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the original position.

Hold the Ink Tank by the handle (a) and remove it. Press the OK button.

a

BK

Important

• If there is still ink in the Ink Tank you removed, store it in the box with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

a

Note

• Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations.

Load the Ink Tank (330 ml)

1

Before opening the pouch, tilt the Ink Tank to the left and right gently seven or eight times.

570

Important

• Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.

• If you do not agitate the Ink Tank, the ink may settle, which may affect printing quality.

• If the Ink Tank is cold, allow it to adjust to room temperature before attaching it to the printer.

Note

User's Guide

iPF840 Replacing Ink Tanks

2

Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.

3

Important

• Never touch the ink holes or electrical contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and affect printing quality.

Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown, with the ink holes down.

4

Important

• Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect.

If the Ink Tank does not fit in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the Ink

Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it.

Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down until it clicks into place.

571

User's Guide

Replacing Ink Tanks iPF840

5

Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.

6

• If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red, reload the tank.

Note

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

Important

• After Ink Tank replacement, always close the Ink Tank Cover. If the Ink Tank Cover cannot close, some

Ink Tank Lock Lever may not be closed completely. Make sure all ink tank lock levers are fully closed.

• To close the Ink Tank Cover when no Ink Tank is installed (as when moving the printer), push the release lever (a) as shown while returning the Ink Tank Lock

Lever to the original position.

a

Y

GY

MBK

BK

M

Load the Ink Tank (700 ml)

1

Before opening the pouch, hold the new Ink Tank with both hands and tilt it to the left and right as shown, shaking gently it seven or eight times.

572

User's Guide

iPF840 Replacing Ink Tanks

2

Caution

• 700 ml ink tanks are heavy, so use your whole arm to agitate it instead of just your wrist. If you agitate it using just your wrist, you may injure your wrist.

• Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.

Important • If you do not agitate the Ink Tank, the ink may settle, which may affect printing quality.

• If the Ink Tank is cold, allow it to adjust to room temperature before attaching it to the printer.

Note

Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.

3

Important

• Never touch the ink holes or electrical contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and affect printing quality.

Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown, with the ink holes down.

Important

• Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect.

If the Ink Tank does not fit in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the Ink

Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it.

573

User's Guide

Replacing Ink Tanks iPF840

4

Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down until it clicks into place.

M

5

Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.

6

• If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red, reload the tank.

Note

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

574

Important

• After Ink Tank replacement, always close the Ink Tank Cover. If the Ink Tank Cover cannot close, some

Ink Tank Lock Lever may not be closed completely. Make sure all ink tank lock levers are fully closed.

• To close the Ink Tank Cover when no Ink Tank is installed (as when moving the printer), push the release lever (a) as shown while returning the Ink Tank Lock

Lever to the original position.

a

Y

GY

MBK

BK

M

User's Guide

iPF840 Checking Ink Tank Levels

On the Display Screen, you can check how much ink is left in the ink tanks.

To check remaining Ink Tank levels, access the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel and press ◀ or ▶ to select the Ink tab ( ).

Ready

OK: Ink Menu

C M Y M

K

B

K

Note

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

• If an error has occurred and the Tab Selection screen cannot be displayed, display Ink Info as follows.

1.

Press the OK button to display Printer Info .

2.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Ink Info .

3.

Press the OK button.

The remaining ink levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identified by the Color Label on the bottom of the Display Screen.

These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: !

if ink is low, × if no ink is left, and ?

if you have deactivated ink level detection.

The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below.

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank, replace the Ink Tank. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format printing or head cleaning, check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed.

(See " Replacing Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

Replace or prepare to replace ink tanks in the following situations.

If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen

When there is little ink left, the Message Lamp is lit and " Not much ink is left.

" is shown on the Display Screen.

You can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink Tank.

(See " Checking Ink Tank Levels .")

➔ P.575

Printing

OK: Ink Menu

C M Y

B

K

B

K

Printing

OK: Ink Menu

Not much ink is left. Prepare to replace the ink.

575

User's Guide

When to Replace Ink Tanks iPF840

Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink

If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which require a lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance.

Ink insufficient.

Replace ink tank.

OK

C M Y

B

K

B

K

If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When ink runs out, the Message Lamp flashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the Display Screen, and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink Tank at this point.

No ink left.

Replace ink tank.

OK

C M Y

B

K

B

K

576

User's Guide

iPF840 Printhead

Printhead ........................................................................................................................................................

577

Checking for Nozzle Clogging .........................................................................................................................

577

Cleaning the Printhead ...................................................................................................................................

578

Replacing the Printhead .................................................................................................................................

579

When purchasing, check the Model number.

Shape Model number

PF-04

Note

• For instructions on replacing the Printhead,

see " Replacing the Printhead ."

➔ P.579

If printing is faint or affected by banding in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Note

• By default, nozzles are checked at fixed intervals.

Configure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check .

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Paper to Prepare

When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide

When Using Sheets One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size

1

Load paper.

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

➔ P.342

Loading Rolls in the Printer

➔ P.345

Loading Sheets in the Printer

P.369

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

577

Note

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

User's Guide

Cleaning the Printhead iPF840

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Nozzle Check , and then press the OK button.

The printer now prints a test pattern for checking the nozzles.

6

Check the printing results.

If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are clear.

If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the nozzles for those colors are clogged.

If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below and check again for nozzle clogging.

1.

Clean the Printhead.

(See " Cleaning the Printhead .")

➔ P.578

2.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Note

• If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, the Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

578

If printing is faint, cleaning the Printhead may improve results.

Choose one of two Printhead cleaning modes ( Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B ), depending on the problem to resolve.

• Head Cleaning A

Use this mode if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink.

It takes about three minutes to complete.

• Head Cleaning B

Use this mode if no ink is ejected at all, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem.

It takes about three and a half minutes to complete.

Important

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or ink tanks during either Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B .

Ink may leak or an error may occur.

• If printing does not improve even if you execute Head Cleaning B , try repeating Head Cleaning B once or twice.

If this still does not improve printing, the Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Note

• By default, nozzles are checked at fixed intervals.

Configure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check .

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Perform cleaning as follows.

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

User's Guide

iPF840 Replacing the Printhead

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning , and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B , and then press the OK button.

Head cleaning is now executed.

6

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles.

(See

" Checking for Nozzle Clogging .")

➔ P.577

When to replace the Printhead

Replace the Printhead in the following situations.

• If the printing quality does not improve even after one or two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the printer menu

• If the Display Screen indicates " Open top cover and replace the printhead.

"

• If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead

Compatible printheads

For information on compatible printheads,

see " Printhead ."

➔ P.577

Precautions when handling the Printhead

Take the following precautions when handling the Printhead.

Caution

• For safety, keep the Printhead out of the reach of children.

• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.

• Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and there is a risk of burns.

Important

• There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

• Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead from the pouch, install it right away. If the Printhead is left after the pouch is opened, the nozzles may dry out, which may affect printing quality.

Access the menu for Printhead replacement

Caution

• When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing it. The metal parts of the Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from touching these parts.

Important

• Your hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. Use the gloves provided with the new Printhead for replacement.

Note

• Prepare a new Ink Tank when ink levels are low.

• When the remaining capacity of Maintenance cartridge is low, prepare a new Maintenance cartridge.

User's Guide

579

Replacing the Printhead iPF840

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Replace P.head

, and then press the OK button.

Ink begins being drawn in. When it finishes, instructions are displayed on the Display Screen.

It takes about two minutes to complete.

Replace the Printhead

1

Open the Top Cover.

Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding Printhead replacement.

2

If the Printhead Fixer Cover or Printhead Fixer Lever is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean.

580

User's Guide

iPF840 Replacing the Printhead

Important

• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these parts may damage them.

a c b

3

If the ventilation duct (a) is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean. Move the Carriage out of the way manually if the Carriage is concealing the ventilation duct, and then clean the duct.

4

Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely.

a

5

Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely.

581

User's Guide

Replacing the Printhead iPF840

6

Remove the Printhead and press the OK button.

7

Important

• Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage. Furthermore, do not allow any dirt or debris to become adhered to the metal contacts of the Carriage. These may damage the printer.

• Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations.

Note

Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the pouch.

a a

Important

• When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or metal contacts (c). This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality.

• Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause printing problems.

a d c

8

While firmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your other hand to remove the orange Protective Part (a). Squeeze the grips (c) of Protective Part (b) and pull it down to remove it.

d b c a b

582

User's Guide

iPF840 Replacing the Printhead

9

Important

• The inside surface of the Protective Part (a) and Protective Part (b) is coated with ink to protect the nozzles. Be careful not to touch these surfaces when removing the caps.

• The Printhead contains ink to protect the nozzles. We recommend removing Protective Part (b) as you hold it over the Printhead package or safely out of the way to avoid spilling ink and staining your clothes or the surrounding area. If ink accidentally spills, wipe off the ink with a dry cloth.

• If you need to put a Printhead somewhere temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles and metal contacts facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may affect the printing quality.

• Do not reattach the removed Protective Part. Dispose of these materials in accordance with local regulations.

With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, insert the Printhead into the Carriage. Carefully push the printhead firmly into the Carriage, ensuring that the nozzles and metal contacts do not touch the carriage.

10

Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.

11

Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.

12

Close the Top Cover.

Ink now fills the system.

It takes about six minutes to complete.

User's Guide

583

Replacing the Printhead iPF840

Important

• While ink is being filled, definitely do not remove the Ink Tank or Maintenance Cartridge. Ink may leak out.

Note

• The procedure is now finished if you have set Rep.P.head Print to Off in the Control Panel menu.

In this case, execute Initial adjustmt in Head Posi. Adj.

in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Adjustment When Installing the Printhead .")

➔ P.553

13

Feed paper by following the instructions on the Display Screen.

After the paper has advanced, Initial adjustmt in Head Posi. Adj.

is executed automatically.

584

User's Guide

iPF840 Maintenance Cartridge

Maintenance Cartridge ...................................................................................................................................

585

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .............................................................................................................

585

Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity ..............................................................................

589

When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ..................................................................................................

590

When purchasing, check the Model number.

Shape Model number

MC-10

Note

For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, see " Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ."

➔ P.585

• The MC-09 can also be used.

However, the Shaft Cleaner included with the MC-09 cannot be used with this printer.

Compatible maintenance cartridges

For information on compatible maintenance cartridges,

see " Maintenance Cartridge ."

➔ P.585

Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge

Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge.

Caution

• For safety, keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.

• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it. Ink may leak out.

Important • Do not remove an Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, during

Printhead cleaning, while ink is being drawn out, or during initialization immediately after replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.

The Maintenance Cartridge may become damaged or ink may leak out.

• To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge, avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it at an angle. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance Cartridge carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

585

User's Guide

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge iPF840

Confirm the message

When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost empty, a message is shown on the Display Screen. According to the message, replace the Maintenance Cartridge or prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge.

(See " When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge .")

➔ P.590

If a message is displayed requesting Maintenance Cartridge replacement, you can skip the step Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement.

Follow the instructions in Replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

Maintenance cartridge full.

>Ⴑ3DXVH@

Replace the

MaintCart, keeping it level.

>Ⴑ3DXVH@

㻝㻛㻞 㻞㻛㻞

Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. maint cart , and then press the OK button.

Instructions are displayed on the Display Screen.

586

User's Guide

iPF840 Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

Replace the Maintenance Cartridge

1

Open the box, remove the plastic bag and packaging material, and take out the Maintenance Cartridge.

Important

• Never touch the metal contacts (a). This may damage the

Maintenance Cartridge.

a

2

At this point, open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

3

Hold the used Maintenance Cartridge by the grip (a) with one hand and put your other hand under the Maintenance

Cartridge to hold it firmly on the bottom, keeping it level as you pull it out.

a

Important

• Used maintenance cartridges are heavy. Always grasp the cartridge firmly and keep the cartridge level during removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle, ink may leak and cause stains.

• The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer. Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.

587

User's Guide

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge iPF840

4

Keep the used Maintenance Cartridge level as you put it in the plastic bag. Expel excess air from the plastic bag and seal the zipper.

5

Confirm the Maintenance Cartridge is right-side up, put it in the box with the packaging material attached, and store it so that it stays level.

6

Important

• Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a flat surface. Also, seal the zipper thoroughly. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

Note

• Put the used Maintenance Cartridge in the plastic bag of the new cartridge, and dispose of it in accordance with local regulations.

Wipe away any soiling on the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

7

Important

• Support the Maintenance Cartridge Cover from underneath as you wipe it.

Keeping the new Maintenance Cartridge level, insert it all the way in.

The printer now initializes the Maintenance Cartridge.

588 a

Important

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after replacing the Maintenance Cartridge. The Maintenance Cartridge may become damaged.

User's Guide

iPF840 Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity

8

Close the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

9

Note

• If you did not perform the operation in Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement , this is the end of the procedure and you do not need to press the OK key in the next step.

Press the OK button.

The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other processes.

You can confirm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the Maintenance Cartridge capacity shown on the Display Screen.

To check remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity, access the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel and press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, replace the Maintenance Cartridge. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge, or before tasks that deplete much of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer, check the remaining Mainte-

nance Cartridge capacity and prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge as needed. (See " Replacing the Maintenance

Cartridge .")

➔ P.585

589

User's Guide

When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge iPF840

Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.

If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost full, the Message Lamp is lit and " The level is low " is shown on the

Display Screen. You can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and prepare to

replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. (See " Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity .")

P.589

When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted

Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (In particular, preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity.)

Check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity before this maintenance and replace the Maintenance Cartridge if necessary.

If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message Lamp flashes and a message to replace the Maintenance

Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen. Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the Printhead or transfer the printer. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.

Maintenance cartridge full.

>Ⴑ3DXVH@

Replace the

MaintCart, keeping it level.

>Ⴑ3DXVH@

㻝㻛㻞 㻞㻛㻞

590

User's Guide

iPF840 Cleaning the Printer Exterior

Cleaning the Printer Exterior ...........................................................................................................................

591

Cleaning Inside the Top Cover ........................................................................................................................

591

Cleaning the Printhead ...................................................................................................................................

578

Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

To ensure a comfortable working environment, clean the printer exterior about once a month.

1

Turn the printer off. (See " Turning the Printer On and Off .")

➔ P.17

2

Unplug the power cord from the outlet.

Caution

• Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.

3

Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe away any dirt or paper dust from the Paper Feed Slot

(a), power cord plug, and so on. Dry these parts with a dry cloth.

a

Warning

• Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of fire or electrical shock.

Important

• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

4

Plug the power cord into the outlet.

Clean inside the Top Cover about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

Also clean inside the Top Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.

• If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing

• After you have used up a roll

• After borderless printing

• After printing on small paper

• After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris

• If you have replaced the roll

• After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust

• If the message " Blue platen switch is dirty.

" is displayed

• If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. We recommend cleaning the

Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.

Important

• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the

Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

591

User's Guide

Cleaning Inside the Top Cover iPF840

1

Open the Top Cover.

2

If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes (a) on the Platen or in the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves (b), use the Cleaning Brush (c) provided with the printer to wipe it away.

c

Important

• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft

(b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these parts may damage them.

Avoid cleaning where the Carriage is retracted, in position (d) or (e).

b a b c a

592 d e

Note

• If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.

User's Guide

iPF840 Cleaning Inside the Top Cover

3

Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe away dirt or paper dust (debris from cutting) inside the Top Cover.

Wipe away any ink residue and paper dust (debris from cutting) on the Top Cover Roller (a), all over the

Platen (b), the Paper Retainer (c), the Borderless

Printing Ink Grooves (d), the Ejection Guide (e), the blue Switch (f), the section around the right-side Borderless Printing Ink Grooves (g), and so on.

a g e

4 b d f c

Warning

• Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of fire or electrical shock.

• Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover. This may create a static charge, which may attract dust and affect the printing quality.

Important

• Do not touch the clear sheet on the side of the Top Cover Roller. This may damage the roller.

Close the Top Cover.

593

User's Guide

Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF840

Preparing to Transfer the Printer .....................................................................................................................

594

Reinstalling the Printer ....................................................................................................................................

599

Updating the Firmware ...................................................................................................................................

602

To protect the internal parts in transit, always follow these steps before transferring the printer to a new location.

Refer to the Setup Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer.

Important

• Be sure to contact your Canon dealer before transferring the printer to a new location. Ink may leak and damage the printer if you do not prepare the printer correctly and it is tipped or stood on end in transit.

Note

• Depending on the state of the printer, part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer the printer

(that is, when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer).

• Ink must be drawn into the Maintenance Cartridge before Level 2 or Level 3 printer transfer, as described in the following table. Prepare the Maintenance Cartridge in advance.

• Always follow the instructions of the service representative when transferring the printer under Level 3 conditions.

Level

Transport and Storage

In Low Temperature Environments

Permitted Angle of Inclination

Amount of Ink to

Dispose of

Required

Maintenance

Cartridg-

es( *1 )

Usage Examples

1 No Lengthwise: 0–30º 0(

*2 )

Moving Within a Room and Storage In Room

Temperature Environments

Rotation: 0–10º

594

2

3

Yes

Yes

All directions: 0–30º

Lengthwise: 0–90º

Rotation: 0–30º

Approx. 700 ml (20.3 fl oz)

Approx. 700 ml (20.3 fl oz)

1 or 2

1 or 2

Transport By Vehicle

Move by temporarily standing vertically

*1: This is the number of new Maintenance Cartridges required when you execute the Prep.MovePrinter

menu.

The number varies depending on the amount remaining in the Maintenance Cartridge being used.

*2: If a message instructing you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge is displayed on the Display Screen, the

Maintenance Cartridge needs to be replaced.

Remove paper

1

Disassemble and repackage the Wheeled Output Stacker by following the installation procedure in reverse.

2

Remove the paper.

Rolls (See " Removing the Roll from the Printer .")

➔ P.352

User's Guide

iPF840 Preparing to Transfer the Printer

• Sheets

(See " Removing Sheets .")

➔ P.373

Access the Prep.MovePrinter

menu

1

If a message instructing you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge is displayed on the Display Screen, replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

(See " Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .")

➔ P.585

2

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

3

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Prep.MovePrinter

, and then press the OK button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of transfer, and then press the OK button.

Displays the confirmation screen.

6

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Execute , and then press the OK button.

The printer is now prepared for transfer.

• Level 1

Once preparations are finished, a message on the Display Screen requests you to turn off the printer.

Turn off and pack the printer. There is no need to remove the ink tanks.

(See "Pack the printer.")

P.597

• Level 2 and Level 3

When the preparation is finished, instructions are displayed on the Display Screen.

Remove the ink tanks before packing the printer.

(See "Removing Ink Tanks.")

➔ P.595

Important

• If consumables must be replaced, the message " Consumables must be replaced. Call for service.

" is shown on the Display Screen and preparation is not possible. If this message is displayed, press the OK button and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Removing Ink Tanks

1

Open the Ink Tank Cover.

595

User's Guide

Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF840

2

Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever (a). Lift the

Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.

a

3

Hold the Ink Tank by the handle (a) and remove it.

a

BK

Important

• Store the Ink Tank you removed in the box with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

a

596

4

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove all ink tanks.

User's Guide

iPF840 Preparing to Transfer the Printer

5

Push down the release lever (a) as shown as you gently return all ink tank lock levers to the original position.

a

6

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

At this point, ink is drawn out from inside the tubes.

Important

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except when the message for replacing it is displayed.

If you remove the Maintenance Cartridge while ink is being drawn out, the ink may leak out.

7

When the process is finished, " Preparations for moving the printer finished. Turn the power off " is displayed.

When this happens, replace the Maintenance Cartridge currently being used with a new Maintenance Cartridge.

8

Press the Power button and turn off the printer.

Pack the printer

1

Disconnect the printer power cord and interface cable, as well as the Roll Unit power cord.

Important

• Turn off the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is off and transfer it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer, plug it in again, reinstall the ink tanks, and follow this procedure again.

597

User's Guide

Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF840

2

Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.

3

Grasp the Belt, insert it between the Belt Stopper, and affix the Belt Stopper with a hex screw at the position indicated.

Important

• Here, the Belt Stopper is the one that was removed and stored after initial installation. Neglecting to attach the Belt Stopper may damage the printer.

• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these parts may damage them.

a c b

598

User's Guide

iPF840 Reinstalling the Printer

4

Close the Top Cover.

5

Tape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse order of tape removal during installation.

6

Remove and package the Stand by reversing the installation procedure, when it was attached to the printer.

7

Disassemble and repackage the Stand by following the installation procedure in reverse.

8

Repack the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, and printer in shipping materials, and then package them in a shipping box.

The basic workflow for reinstalling the printer is as follows.

For detailed instructions, see the Setup Guide.

Assemble the stand

1

Referring to the Printer Stand Setup Guide, assemble the Stand.

Caution

• The Stand must be assembled by at least two people on a flat surface. Attempting assembly by yourself poses a risk of injury or bending the Stand.

• When assembling the Stand, lock the casters. In addition, always unlock the casters before moving the assembled Stand. Attempting to move the stand when the casters are locked poses a risk of injury or damage to the location site.

2

Attach the Roll Unit to the Stand.

599

User's Guide

Reinstalling the Printer iPF840

Install the printer

1

Mount the printer on the assembled Stand and tighten the screws firmly.

Caution

• Moving the printer requires at least six people, holding it on both sides. Be careful to avoid back strain and other injuries.

• When moving the printer, firmly grasp the Carrying

Handles (a) under each side. The printer may be unsteady if you hold it at other positions, which poses a risk of injury from dropping the printer.

a

2

Remove tape and packaging material attached to the printer. Also open the Top Cover and remove stoppers and spacers inside the printer.

3

Connect the power cord to the Power Supply Connector on the back of the printer.

600

4

Plug the power cord into the outlet.

User's Guide

iPF840 Reinstalling the Printer

5

Press the power button to turn the printer on.

When the message " Has printer been reinstalled? (Do not load ink tanks yet.) " is displayed, select Yes and press the OK button.

6

Open the Ink Tank Cover and install the ink tanks.

7

Attach the Roll Holder to the Roll Media.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls .")

➔ P.342

8

Load the Roll Media in the printer.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

9

Install the software.

Note that the driver installation procedure varies depending on the type of connection.

10

Attach the Wheeled Output Stacker to the printer by referring to the Wheeled Output Stacker Setup Guide.

User's Guide

601

Updating the Firmware iPF840

Update the printer firmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.

Confirming the firmware version

1

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).

• If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Note

2

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Printer Info , and then press the OK button.

4

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Info , and then press the OK button.

The firmware version is displayed.

Updating the Firmware

To obtain the latest firmware, visit the Canon website. If the firmware available online is newer than the installed firmware, update the printer firmware. For details on downloading and updating the firmware, visit the Canon website.

602

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

15

29

157

267

331

425

463

475

495

549

Maintenance and Consumables

565

Troubleshooting

Frequently Asked Questions .............................................................

604

Problems Regarding Paper ...............................................................

605

Printing does not start .......................................................................

614

The printer stops during a print job ...................................................

616

Problems with the printing quality .....................................................

617

Cannot print over a network ..............................................................

626

Installation problems .........................................................................

627

HP-GL/2 problems ............................................................................

628

Other problems .................................................................................

630

Error Message

Specifications

Appendix

635

657

661

603 imagePROGRAF

Frequently Asked Questions iPF840

This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. To view more detailed explanations, click the hyperlinks in the answer column.

Question

I want to easily create vertical or horizontal banners.

Answer

You can print originals that are in landscape (or portrait) orientation automatically enlarged to fit the roll width. This is an easy way to create vertical or horizontal banners.

(See " Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) .")

P.101

Does this printer support sub-ink tank system?

I want to know how to configure roll cutting.

I want to configure so that the roll is cut automatically after waiting for the ink to dry.

How do I print without borders?

This printer supports sub-ink tank system.

Even if an ink tank becomes empty during printing, since a certain amount of ink always is stored in a sub-ink tank, you can replace the ink tank while printing.

(See " Replacing Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

You can select the cutting method by the setting of the printer driver and the setting of the printer.

To cut rolls automatically after printing, set Cutting Mode of the printer to Automatic and Automatic

Cutting of the printer driver to Yes .

When using paper for which ink adhesion takes time or the print surface is easily scratched, we recommend that you set the Cutting Mode setting of the printer to Eject .

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

(See " Cutting Roll Paper After Printing .")

➔ P.152

In the printer driver, you can set the time for waiting until the ink dries.

Also, you can set likewise on the printer.

(See " Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls .")

P.358

(See " Menu Structure .")

➔ P.439

When printing on rolls, you can perform borderless printing by configuring the printer driver. (when printing on cut sheets, you cannot perform borderless printing)

(See " Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size .")

➔ P.92

(See " Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width .")

➔ P.95

(See " Borderless Printing at Actual Size .")

➔ P.87

Concerning the paper that can be used in this printer, refer to the Canon website or the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

I want to know the paper types that can be used in this printer.

The paper type that I want to print is not displayed on the Display

Screen.

Can I perform duplex printing?

I want to perform enlargement printing.

In order to use newly released paper, you need to register the media information in the printer and printer driver. Use the Media Configuration Tool to register the new media information.

(See " Adding Media Types (Windows) .")

➔ P.386

(See " Adding Media Types (Mac OS) .")

➔ P.409

This printer cannot perform duplex printing.

If you use the Folded Duplex function in the Free Layout of Windows software, you can print two pages one-sided, fold them at the center and suspend them to substitute for duplex printing.

(See " Prints using Folded Duplex (Windows) .")

➔ P.220

With the printer driver, you can specify the ratio matching the document with the paper size and width and perform enlargement printing or reduction printing.

(See " Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size .")

➔ P.72

(See " Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width .")

➔ P.74

(See " Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value .")

➔ P.78

604

User's Guide

iPF840 Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper ..........................................................................................................................

605

Clearing a Jammed Sheet ..............................................................................................................................

608

Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found ..........................................................................................

610

Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot ..................................................................................

612

Cannot load sheets ........................................................................................................................................

612

Paper is not cut neatly ....................................................................................................................................

612

Paper is not cut ..............................................................................................................................................

613

The size of clear film cannot be detected ........................................................................................................

613

If roll paper jams, follow the steps below to remove jams.

If you do not find any scraps or jams, see " Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found ."

P.610

Note

1

Turn the printer off. (See " Turning the Printer On and Off .")

P.17

2

Open the Top Cover.

3

Note

• If the leading edge of the roll jams in the carriage such as when the paper curls strongly, you may be able to avoid paper jamming by setting the roll cutting method to Manual and setting the detection of paper leading edge to Do not perform .

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage out of the way, away from the paper.

605

User's Guide

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper iPF840

Important

• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these parts may damage them.

a c b

4

If the Cutter is out, move the Cutter to the right side, away from the paper.

5

Important

• If the Cutter is on the left side, be sure to move it to the right. If the Cutter is on the left side when you turn the printer on, the printer may rip the paper.

Lift the Release Lever.

606

User's Guide

iPF840 Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

6

Holding the paper on both sides, pull the jammed portion out toward the front. Use a scissors or cutting tool to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion.

7

Caution

• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid injury and damaging the printer.

If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.

8

Important

• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may occur when you turn on the printer.

Hold the edge of the roll paper in the middle as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the Ejection Guide (a). Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment

Line (b), keeping this side parallel to the line, and then lower the Release Lever.

a b

• Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line (b). This may prevent the paper from being advanced straight.

Important

• If you pull out too much of the roll, an excessive amount will be cut away.

607

User's Guide

Clearing a Jammed Sheet iPF840

9

Close the Top Cover.

10

Turn the printer on. (See " Turning the Printer On and Off .")

P.17

The roll is now advanced. After it is finished being advanced, you can resume printing.

Note

• You can ensure that the edge is cut neatly by selecting Paper Cutting in the printer menu.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

If a sheet jams, follow the steps below to remove it.

1

Turn the printer off. (See " Turning the Printer On and Off .")

➔ P.17

2

Open the Top Cover.

3

If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage out of the way, away from the paper.

Important

• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these parts may damage them.

b a c

608

User's Guide

iPF840 Clearing a Jammed Sheet

4

Lift the Release Lever.

5

Hold the paper and pull it out, toward the front.

6

• If you do not find any scraps or jams,

see " Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found ."

➔ P.610

Note

If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.

7

Important

• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may occur when you turn on the printer.

Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.

8

Turn the printer on. (See " Turning the Printer On and Off .")

➔ P.17

User's Guide

609

Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found iPF840

If you cannot find a paper jam, search for the paper as follows.

1

Turn the printer off. (See " Turning the Printer On and Off .")

➔ P.17

2

Remove the Wheeled Output Stacker from the printer. (See " Using the Wheeled Output Stacker .")

➔ P.375

3

Holding the Roll Unit Lever (a), pull out the Roll Unit.

a

4

Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.

5

Check for paper in the lower part of the printer. Remove any jammed paper here by pushing it to the floor with your fingers.

610

User's Guide

iPF840 Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found

6

Lift the Release Lever.

7

Open the Top Cover, and if there is a paper jam at the position shown, push it inside with your fingers.

The paper will drop to the floor or to the lower part of the printer.

Note

• If paper remains in the lower part of the printer, push it to the floor with your fingers.

• If the paper does not drop to the floor or to the lower part of the printer, fold an A4 sheet three times, insert it through the gap of the Platen (a) and the Paper Retainer (b), and push the jammed paper out.

a b

User's Guide

611

Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot iPF840

8

Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.

9

In a crouching position, push the Roll Unit in.

10

Position the Wheeled Output Stacker by the printer. (See " Using the Wheeled Output Stacker .")

➔ P.375

11

Turn the printer on. (See " Turning the Printer On and Off .")

➔ P.17

Cause

The roll paper is warped.

Paper is jammed by the paper feed slot.

The paper source selection is incorrect.

If paper cannot be advanced from Roll 2 (Lower), the Roll Unit Cable is disconnected.

Corrective Action

Straighten out curls and reload the roll.

Remove the jammed paper.

(See " Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .")

P.605

(See " Clearing a Jammed Sheet .")

➔ P.608

Press the Load button and select the paper source.

Connect the Roll Unit Cable firmly to the Roll Unit Power Supply Inlet and the inlet on the roll unit.

Cause Corrective Action

The paper source selection is incorrect. Press the Load button and select the paper source.

612

Cause

The paper is bent or curled at the cut position.

Paper rises by the ends of the cut position before it is cut.

You are using paper that cannot be cut with the

Cutter Unit.

Corrective Action

Straighten out any curling by the edges of the paper.

Reload the paper correctly.

Specify Manual in Cutting Mode in the Control Panel menu and use scissors or a cutting tool to cut the roll after printing.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

P.360

User's Guide

iPF840 Paper is not cut

Cause

Cut Speed is not configured correctly in the

Control Panel menu.

During cutting, printed documents fall out at an angle.

Corrective Action

Change the Cut Speed setting in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Structure .")

P.439

In the Control Panel menu, set Cutting Mode to Eject . Hold documents after printing, as they are cut.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

Cause

In the printer driver, No or Print Cut Guideline is specified in

Automatic Cutting .

In the Control Panel menu, Cutting Mode is set to Eject or

Manual .

Corrective Action

Specify Yes in Automatic Cutting in the printer driver.

(See " Page Setup Sheet (Windows) .")

➔ P.177

(See " Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS) .")

➔ P.276

If the Cutting Mode is Eject , press the Cut button to cut the paper.

If the Cutting Mode is Manual , cut rolls with scissors or the like.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

Cause Corrective Action

The Platen is soiled with ink or other substances. Open the Top Cover and clean the entire Platen.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

User's Guide

613

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up iPF840

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up ....................................................................................

614

The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent ..................................................................................

614

Ink Filling.. is displayed ...................................................................................................................................

614

The display screen indicates Agitating ............................................................................................................

615

Cause

The printer is not on.

The target printer was not selected when printing.

The print job is paused.

Corrective Action

Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in, all the way. Press the Power button to turn on the printer.

• In Windows, select the printer by clicking again.

Select Printer or Printer in the printing dialog box and try printing

In Mac OS, open the dialog box of the printer driver, select the printer from the list of Printer , and try printing again.

• In Windows, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Click the printer icon in the Devices and Printers window.

2.

Click See what's printing to open a window.

3.

Click Pause Printing in the Printer menu to clear the check box.

Note, depending on the version, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Right-click the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.

2.

Click Resume Printing in the menu.

• In Mac OS, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Click Print & Scan . (This is identified as Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac

OS.)

2.

Choose the printer.

3.

Click Open Print Queue to open a window.

4.

Click Resume Printer (or Resume ).

614

Cause

In the Control Panel menu, Pause Print is On .

In the Control Panel menu, Use USB or Use Ethernet is set to Off .

You have selected Save in mail box in Output

Method on the printer.

Print jobs are pending.

Corrective Action

Set Pause Print to Off .

(See " Pausing Printing .")

➔ P.27

Set Use USB or Use Ethernet to On .

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Print the job saved on the printer's hard disk.

(See " Printing Saved Jobs .")

➔ P.521

Manage the jobs on hold and print as needed.

(See " Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on

Hold) .")

P.519

Cause Corrective Action

The printer was forced off during operation. Wait until the system has been filled with ink.

User's Guide

iPF840 The display screen indicates Agitating

Cause Corrective Action

Ink agitation is in progress. Please wait until ink agitation is finished.

The time for agitation varies depending on how long the printer has been off.

User's Guide

615

An error message is shown on the Display Screen iPF840

An error message is shown on the Display Screen .........................................................................................

616

The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper ........................................................................................................

616

The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving) ....................................................

629

Cause

The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job, and paper could not be advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll.

Corrective Action

Remove the used roll and insert a new roll.

(See " Removing the Roll from the Printer .")

P.352

(See " Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls .")

➔ P.356

(See " Loading and Printing on Rolls .")

➔ P.18

Cause

The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to straighten it.

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Corrective Action

The leading edge of rolls may be cut to straighten it if Trim Edge First is set to a value other than Off in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically .")

➔ P.366

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make sure the Printhead is in good condition for printing.

(See " Checking for Nozzle Clogging .")

➔ P.577

Use the correct imagePROGRAF printer driver for the printer and try printing again.

A print job was received from an incompatible printer driver.

The printer has received print data that includes HP RTL commands when Auto Rotate is On in the Control Panel menu.

The printer is damaged.

In the Control Panel, set Auto Rotate to Off and print again.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

616

User's Guide

iPF840 Printing is faint

Printing is faint ................................................................................................................................................

617

Paper rubs against the Printhead ....................................................................................................................

618

The edges of the paper are dirty .....................................................................................................................

618

The surface of the paper is dirty .....................................................................................................................

619

The back side of the paper is dirty ..................................................................................................................

619

Printed colors are inaccurate ..........................................................................................................................

619

Banding in different colors occurs ...................................................................................................................

620

Colors in printed images are uneven ...............................................................................................................

620

Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs ..........................................................................................

621

Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen ........................................................................................................

621

The contrast becomes uneven during printing ................................................................................................

624

The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction ..................................................................

624

Images are printed crooked ............................................................................................................................

624

Documents are printed in monochrome ..........................................................................................................

624

Line thickness is not uniform ..........................................................................................................................

625

Lines are misaligned .......................................................................................................................................

625

Cause

You may be printing on the wrong side of the paper.

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Print on the printing surface.

Corrective Action

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(See " Checking for Nozzle Clogging .")

➔ P.577

To check for nozzles after printing, set Frequency in Nozzle Check in the Control Panel menu to a setting other than Off .

Furthermore, to have a warning displayed depending on the result of the nozzle check, set

Warning in Nozzle Check in the Control Panel menu to On .

Note that when Warning is set to On , printing may stop depending on the content of the warning.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

After the ink tanks have been installed for 24 hours, run Head Cleaning B from the Control Panel.

(See " Cleaning the Printhead .")

➔ P.578

Because the printer was left without ink tanks installed for some time, ink has become clogged in the ink supply system.

Paper is jammed inside the Top

Cover.

The ink was not dry when paper was cut.

Printing may be faint if Print

Quality in Advanced Settings in the printer driver is set to

Standard or Fast .

You are printing on paper that tends to generate dust when cut.

Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece of paper inside the Top Cover.

1.

Open the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage is not over the Platen.

2.

Remove any scraps of paper inside the Top Cover.

(See " Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .")

P.605

(See " Clearing a Jammed Sheet .")

P.608

3.

Close the Top Cover.

Specify a longer drying period in the Control Panel menu, in Paper Details > Roll DryingTime .

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose Highest or High in Print Quality .

Printing in Fast or Standard mode is faster and consumes less ink than in Highest or High modes, but the printing quality is lower.

(See " Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing .")

➔ P.66

In the Control Panel menu, set CutDustReduct.

in Paper Details to On .

(See " Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls .")

P.367

617

User's Guide

Paper rubs against the Printhead iPF840

Cause

The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer.

Paper has been loaded incorrectly, causing it to wrinkle.

The Printhead is set too low in the

Control Panel menu.

You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.

When you have loaded paper, the paper you have loaded does not match the type selected on the Control Panel.

Corrective Action

Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

2.

Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.

Reload the paper.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

In the Control Panel menu, set Head Height to Automatic .

(See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

For paper-based media such as Heavyweight Coated Paper, set the VacuumStrngth to

Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel menu. If the paper still rubs against the printhead, set the Head Height in the Control Panel menu to a higher value than the current setting.

(See " Adjusting the Vacuum Strength .")

➔ P.564

(See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

For film-based media such as Tracing Paper, set the VacuumStrngth to Standard , Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel menu. If the paper still rubs against the printhead, set the

Head Height in the Control Panel menu to a higher value than the current setting.

(See " Adjusting the Vacuum Strength .")

➔ P.564

(See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

When printing on paper 0.1 mm (0.004 in) thick or less, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of

Weakest in the Control Panel menu. If rubbing still occurs, in the Control Panel menu, use a higher Head Height setting.

(See " Adjusting the Vacuum Strength .")

➔ P.564

(See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

Be sure to select the correct type of paper in the Control Panel menu when loading paper.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

P.369

618

Cause

The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing or printing on small paper.

The type of paper as specified on the printer does not match the type specified in the printer driver.

The paper is wrinkled or warped.

A cut line is printed because CutDustReduct.

is On in the Control Panel menu to reduce cutting dust.

The Printhead is set too low in the

Control Panel menu.

Corrective Action

Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

Make sure the same type of paper is specified on the printer as in the printer driver.

(See " Changing the Type of Paper .")

➔ P.350

Make sure the same paper type is specified in the printer driver as on the printer.

1.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

2.

Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.

Straighten out the wrinkles or curls and reload the paper. Do not use paper that has been printed on previously.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

If this function is not needed, set CutDustReduct.

to Off in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

In the Control Panel menu, set Head Height to Automatic .

(See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

User's Guide

iPF840 The surface of the paper is dirty

Cause

You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.

The Ejection Guide is soiled.

Corrective Action

For paper-based media such as Heavyweight Coated Paper, set the VacuumStrngth to

Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel menu. If the paper still rubs against the printhead, set the Head Height in the Control Panel menu to a higher value than the current setting.

(See " Adjusting the Vacuum Strength .")

➔ P.564

(See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

For film-based media such as Tracing Paper, set the VacuumStrngth to Standard ,

Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel menu. If the paper still rubs against the printhead, set the Head Height in the Control Panel menu to a higher value than the current setting.

(See " Adjusting the Vacuum Strength .")

➔ P.564

(See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

Clean the Ejection Guide.

(See " Cleaning the Printer Exterior .")

P.591

Cause

The Paper Retainer is soiled.

You are using a paper that does not dry easily.

Corrective Action

Clean the Paper Retainer.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

P.591

In the Control Panel menu, set Roll DryingTime to at least 1 min.

(See " Menu Settings .")

P.445

When paper that does not dry easily is used for printing, it may curl during printing and touch the

Output Tray.

In this case, in the Control Panel menu, complete the settings for Dry time and Area in Scan

Wait Time .

However, note that printing will now take longer.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Cause

The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing or printing on small paper.

The Platen has become soiled because you have set Width Detection to Off in the Control Panel menu.

The Platen suction is too strong.

Corrective Action

Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

In the Control Panel menu, set CarriageScanWdth to Fixed .

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Set Width Detection to On in the Control Panel menu, and then open the Top

Cover and clean the Platen.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen. After this, manually advance the roll onto the Platen before printing.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

(See " Feeding Roll Paper Manually .")

➔ P.357

In the Control Panel menu, reduce the level of VacuumStrngth .

(See " Adjusting the Vacuum Strength .")

P.564

Cause

Color adjustment has not been activated in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver.

Colors have not been adjusted on the computer or monitor.

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Corrective Action

In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, access Color Settings in Color Mode to adjust colors.

(See " Main Sheet (Windows) .")

P.166

(See " Main Pane (Mac OS) .")

➔ P.272

Refer to the computer and monitor documentation to adjust the colors.

Adjust the settings of the color management software, referring to the software documentation as needed.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.

User's Guide

619

Banding in different colors occurs iPF840

Cause

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Application Color Matching Priority is set to Off in the Windows printer driver.

Color may change slightly even on the same model of printer if you use a different version of the firmware or printer driver, or when you print under different settings or in a different printing environment.

Corrective Action

(See " Checking for Nozzle Clogging .")

P.577

Click Special Settings in the Layout sheet of the printer driver, and set Application Color Matching Priority to On in the dialog box that is displayed.

(See " Layout Sheet (Windows) .")

➔ P.182

Follow these steps to prepare the printing environment.

1.

Use the same version of firmware or printer driver.

2.

Specify the same value for all settings items.

Cause

The paper feed amount is out of adjustment.

Printing does not proceed smoothly because print jobs are interrupted during transmission.

In the Control Panel menu, Adj. Priority is set to Print Length .

The Printhead is out of alignment.

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Streaks may occur if you set the Print

Quality too low.

The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer.

Corrective Action

Adjust the feed amount.

(See " Adjusting the Feed Amount .")

➔ P.558

Exit other applications and cancel other print jobs.

Setting Adj. Priority to Print Quality in the Control Panel menu and adjusting the feed amount may improve results.

(See " Adjusting the Feed Amount .")

➔ P.558

Adjust the Printhead alignment.

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(See " Checking for Nozzle Clogging .")

➔ P.577

Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver and try printing again.

Printing in Fast or Standard mode is faster and consumes less ink than in Highest or

High modes, but the printing quality is lower.

(See " Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing .")

➔ P.66

Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

2.

Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.

620

Cause

Line Drawing/Text is selected when printing images in many solid colors.

You are printing on paper that curls easily.

Printed colors may be uneven if you set the Print Quality too low.

Color may be uneven between dark and light image areas.

Corrective Action

In Print Priority in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose Image .

Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading edge of paper that is susceptible to curling. Select a stronger level in VacuumStrngth in the Control Panel menu to increase suction against the paper, or specify a leading margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) or more.

(See " Adjusting the Vacuum Strength .")

➔ P.564

Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver.

Printing in Fast or Standard mode is faster and consumes less ink than in Highest or

High modes, but the printing quality is lower.

(See " Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing .")

➔ P.66

Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver.

User's Guide

iPF840 Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs

Cause

When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing.

Thus, ink density may be slightly uneven at the leading edges.

The Printhead is out of alignment.

Corrective Action

Specify No in Automatic Cutting in the printer driver before printing. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the printed document ejected from the printer, and then use scissors or a cutting tool to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.

Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver.

(See " Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing .")

➔ P.66

Adjust the Printhead alignment.

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

To avoid uneven colors, we recommend drying each sheet separately.

Allowing printed documents to dry on top of each other may cause uneven colors.

Density may be uneven if you use

Glossy Paper or Coated Paper.

The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer.

Scan Wait Time > Area in the Control

Panel menu is set to Leading edge .

In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose Highest or High in Print Quality .

Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

2.

Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.

When Scan Wait Time > Area is set to Leading edge , colors may be uneven 110–160 mm from the leading edge. (The position varies depending on the Print Quality setting.)

In this case, select Scan Wait Time > Area > Entire area .

However, note that printing will now take longer.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Cause

The Platen suction is too strong.

Incorrect Printhead alignment value.

The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer.

Corrective Action

In the Control Panel menu, reduce the level of VacuumStrngth .

(See " Adjusting the Vacuum Strength .")

➔ P.564

Close the blue Switch on the platen so that it matches the paper size.

(See " Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen .")

➔ P.621

In the Control Panel menu, set Head Height to a lower height.

(See " Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .")

➔ P.556

Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

P.369

Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

2.

Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.

If printed documents exhibit the following symptoms, adjust the setting of the blue Switch on the Platen.

• Image edges are blurred

• Image edges are affected by white banding

Important

• Always set all of the blue Switches on the Platen to the ● side for borderless printing. If the Switch are not set correctly, the print quality may deteriorate.

1

Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.

Rolls (See " Removing the Roll from the Printer .")

➔ P.352

User's Guide

621

Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen iPF840

Sheet (See " Removing Sheets .")

➔ P.373

2

Open the Top Cover.

3

Remove the Cleaning Brush (a).

a

4

Using the back of the Cleaning Brush, move the first Switch to the side opposite ●.

622

User's Guide

iPF840 Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen

5

Refer to the following table to confirm the number on the

Platen (a) that corresponds to the size of paper for printing.

a

11

10

9

8

7

6 5 4

3

2

8

9

6

7

10

11

4

5

2

3

Number Dimensions

254.0 mm (10.00 in)

355.6 mm (14.00 in)

431.8 mm (17.00 in)

515.0 mm (JIS B2 or B3)

594.0 mm (ISO A1 or A2) or 609.6 mm (24.00 in)

841.0 mm (ISO A0 or A1)

914.4 mm (36.00 in)

1030.0 mm (JIS B0 or B1)

1066.8 mm (42.00 in)

1117.6 mm (44.00 in)

6

Using the back of the Cleaning Brush, move the Switch to the side opposite ●, corresponding to the size of the paper for printing.

In this case, note that you will move the switch in the opposite direction from the direction in step 4.

Note

• The Switch only moves number 1 and the number that matches the paper size. Set all of the switches where the number does not match the paper size in switches number 2 and higher to the ● side.

623

User's Guide

The contrast becomes uneven during printing iPF840

7

Close the Top Cover.

Cause Corrective Action

The paper feed amount is out of adjustment.

Adjust the feed amount.

(See " Adjusting the Feed Amount .")

P.558

The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer.

Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

2.

Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.

Cause

In the Control Panel menu, Adj. Priority is set to Print Quality .

The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer.

Corrective Action

Set Adj. Priority to Print Length in the Control Panel menu, and then execute Adjust

Length .

(See " Adjusting the Feed Amount .")

P.558

Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

2.

Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.

Cause Corrective Action

In the Control Panel menu, Skew Check Lv.

is set to Loose or Off . In the Control Panel menu, set Skew Check Lv.

to Standard .

In the Control Panel menu, Width Detection is set to Off .

Set Width Detection to On in the Control Panel menu.

624

Cause

In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, Monochrome , Monochrome (BK ink) , or Monochrome

Bitmap is specified in Color Mode .

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Corrective Action

In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, specify Color in Color Mode and try printing again.

Print a test pattern to check the color ink nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(See " Checking for Nozzle Clogging .")

P.577

User's Guide

iPF840 Line thickness is not uniform

Cause

In the Special Settings dialog box of the Windows printer driver, Fast

Graphic Process is set to On .

The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer.

The blue Switch on the platen is set incorrectly.

Corrective Action

Access the printer driver Properties dialog box from Print in the File menu of the source application, and follow these steps to print.

1.

Clear the option Open Preview When Print Job Starts on the Main sheet.

2.

Clear the option Page Layout on the Layout sheet.

3.

Click the Special Settings button in the Layout sheet, open the Special Settings dialog box, and set Fast Graphic Process to Off .

Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

P.369

Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

2.

Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.

Move the Switch numbered corresponding to the size of paper for printing opposite to the ● position.

(See " Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen .")

P.621

Cause

The Printhead alignment is not adjusted.

The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer.

Corrective Action

Adjust the Printhead alignment.

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

P.550

(See " Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

P.552

(See " Adjusting Line Misalignment .")

➔ P.554

Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

2.

Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.

User's Guide

625

Cannot connect the printer to the network iPF840

Cannot connect the printer to the network .....................................................................................................

626

Cannot print over a TCP/IP network ...............................................................................................................

626

Cannot print over a Bonjour network ..............................................................................................................

626

Cause

The Ethernet cable is not connected correctly to the printer's Ethernet port.

Corrective Action

1.

Make sure the printer is connected to the network with the correct Ethernet cable, and then turn the printer on. For instructions on connecting the cable, refer to the Setup Guide.

2.

Make sure the Link indicator is lit.

The top indicator is lit in green and the bottom indicator is lit in orange when the printer is connected via

1000Base-T.

The top indicator is lit in green when the printer is connected via 100Base-TX.

The bottom indicator is lit in orange when the printer is connected via 10Base-T.

If the Link indicator is not lit, check the following points.

• Make sure the connection point is on.

• Make sure the end of the Ethernet cable is connected correctly.

Insert the Ethernet cable until it clicks and locks in place.

• Make sure there is no problem with the Ethernet cable.

If there is any problem, replace the Ethernet cable.

• Check the communication mode with the connection point.

Although the printer normally detects the communication mode and transmission rate of the communication point automatically (in auto negotiation mode), sometimes the communication point settings cannot be detected. In this case, configure the connection method manually, specifying the communication mode in use.

(See " Configuring the Communication Mode Manually .")

➔ P.489

Cause

The printer's IP address is not configured correctly.

The printer's TCP/IP network settings are not configured correctly.

The computer you are trying to print from is not configured correctly.

Corrective Action

Make sure the printer's IP address is configured correctly.

(See " Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .")

➔ P.491

(See " Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel .")

➔ P.480

Make sure the printer's TCP/IP network settings are configured correctly.

(See " Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI .")

➔ P.484

Make sure the computer's TCP/IP network settings are configured correctly.

(See " Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows) .")

P.483

(See " Configuring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks (Mac OS) .")

P.487

626

Cause

The computer you are trying to print from is not configured correctly.

The computer and printer are not on the same network.

Corrective Action

Make sure the computer is configured correctly.

(See " Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Mac OS) .")

P.487

Due to the nature of Bonjour, you cannot print if the printer is on another network behind a router. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask your network administrator.

User's Guide

iPF840 Removing Installed Printer Drivers

Follow these steps to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.

Removing printer drivers (Windows)

Remove the printer driver as follows.

Note

• The following procedure is for Windows 7. The method of removing printer drivers varies depending on the version of Windows.

1

From the Windows start menu, select All Programs > Canon Printer Uninstaller > imagePROGRAF

Printer Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window.

2

Select the printer in the list and click Delete .

3

Click Yes after the Warning message is displayed.

4

Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and then click Exit .

Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.

Note

• The following procedure is for Windows 7. The method of removing printer drivers varies depending on the version of Windows.

1

Select Control Panel from the start menu.

2

Select Uninstall a program .

• If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed, click Yes .

Note

3

Select imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , and then click the Uninstall button.

Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.

Note

• The following procedure is for Windows 7. The method of removing printer drivers varies depending on the version of Windows.

1

Select Control Panel from the start menu.

2

Select Uninstall a program .

• If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed, click Yes .

Note

3

Select imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility , and then click the Uninstall button.

627

User's Guide

With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned iPF840

With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned ..............................................................................................................

628

Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2 jobs. .....................................................................................

628

Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print jobs ..................................................................................

628

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color) ........................................................................................

628

Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2 printing ........................................................................

629

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specified .....................................................................................

629

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specified ..............................................

629

HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time .................................................................................................................

629

The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving) ....................................................

629

Cause

The plotter origin is incorrect.

The Margin setting in the Control Panel menu is incorrect.

Corrective Action

Check the printing commands.

Set Detect img size to Command priority or Detected size in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

P.445

Adjust the Margin setting values in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Cause

The memory is full.

An HP-GL/2 command not supported by this printer was received.

The printer has received print data that includes HP RTL commands when Auto Rotate is On in the Control Panel menu.

The plotter origin is incorrect.

Oversize in the Control Panel menu is set to Off .

Corrective Action

Check the size of the data in the print job.

Check the print job and settings.

In the Control Panel, set Auto Rotate to Off and print again.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Set Detect img size to Command priority or Detected size in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Set Oversize to On in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

628

Cause

The Width setting in the Control Panel menu is incorrect.

ThickenFineLines menu is set to

The

Off .

in the Control Panel

Ln wdth correct setting in the Control

Panel menu is incorrect.

Corrective Action

Change the Width setting configured in Pen no.

of the Palette A or Palette B selected in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

If fine lines are printed faintly, setting ThickenFineLines to On will print the lines more distinctly.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Change the Ln wdth correct setting in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Cause

The Color Mode setting in the

Control Panel menu is incorrect.

Corrective Action

Check the Color Mode setting in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

However, for optimal Printhead performance, the printer consumes trace amounts of color ink even when Monochrome is selected as Color Mode .

User's Guide

iPF840 Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2 printing

Cause

AdjustFaintLines is On in the Control Panel menu.

Corrective Action

Setting AdjustFaintLines to Off in the Control Panel menu may help produce the expected results. However, lines in some colors may appear broken.

Cause

The page size of the HP-GL/2 print job, as created in the source application, is incorrect.

Corrective Action

In the Control Panel menu, set Oversize to Off .

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Cause

The page size of the HP-GL/2 print job, as created in the source application, is incorrect.

Corrective Action

Set Detect img size to Command priority or Detected size in the

Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

➔ P.445

Set Conserve Paper to On in the Control Panel menu.

(See " Menu Settings .")

P.445

Cause

Large print jobs with a lot of data take longer to print.

A job was printed when Input Resolution in the Control

Panel menu was set to 600dpi .

Corrective Action

Please wait a while until printing is finished.

In the Control Panel menu, set Input Resolution to 300dpi and print again.

(See " Menu Settings .")

P.445

Cause

The printer is analyzing the print job.

A job was printed when Input Resolution in the Control

Panel menu was set to 600dpi .

Corrective Action

Please wait a while until printing is finished.

In the Control Panel menu, set Input Resolution to 300dpi and print again.

(See " Menu Settings .")

P.445

User's Guide

629

The printer does not go on iPF840

The printer does not go on .............................................................................................................................

630

Cannot operate from the Control Panel ..........................................................................................................

630

The printer takes time to start up ....................................................................................................................

630

If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound .............................................................................................................

631

Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared .........................................................

631

The printer consumes a lot of ink ....................................................................................................................

631

Ink Level Detection .........................................................................................................................................

631

Cause

The printer is unplugged.

Corrective Action

Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on the printer.

The specified voltage is not supplied. Check the voltage of the outlet and breaker.

(See " Specifications .")

➔ P.658

Cause Corrective Action

The control panel access lock is set. Release the control panel access lock.

(See " Setting Control panel access lock .")

➔ P.461

Cause

The printer may have shut down incorrectly last time. This may happen after power outages or if the printer is unplugged before it is turned off.

In this case, the next time power is restored, the printer's hard disk is checked, and startup may take some time.

Corrective Action

Please wait a while, because it may take several minutes to finish checking the hard disk.

If an error message is displayed after the hard disk check, follow the instructions indicated to resolve the problem.

630

User's Guide

iPF840 If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound

Cause

The printer makes a sound during operation.

Corrective Action

The following sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer.

There is a sound of suction from the Platen

To prevent paper from rising, paper is held against the Platen by suction from Vacuum holes under it.

• There is a sound when a different size of paper is used and when the Carriage goes from side to side

When paper of a different size is used, a valve is automatically activated to switch the area for paper suction, which may make a sound. This mechanism prevents suction from Vacuum holes where there is no paper.

In addition, ink is ejected in sync with the movement of the Carriage back and forth to ensure optimal ink flow.

At this time, the valve automatically switches the area for paper suction, which may make a sound.

Roll paper makes a fluttering sound during printing

There may be a fluttering sound when large paper is advanced.

• If you suddenly hear the tone for cleaning operations

At regular intervals, for printer maintenance, cleaning operations will begin automatically, even if the printer is in Sleep mode.

If you suddenly hear the tone for ink agitation

At regular intervals, to ensure optimal printing quality, the ink is agitated automatically, even if the printer is in

Sleep mode.

The ink is also agitated automatically under the following conditions. Note that other operations are not possible while " Agitating " is displayed on the control panel.

• After the printer is turned on

In other cases, contact your Canon dealer.

Cause

The printer has not detected the new Maintenance Cartridge that was used to replace the old one.

Corrective Action

Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have just installed and insert it again firmly.

(See " Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .")

➔ P.585

Cause

Many full-page color images are printed.

Head Cleaning B in the Control

Panel menu is executed frequently.

You have just finished initial installation, when more ink is consumed to fill the system.

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Corrective Action

In print jobs such as photos, images are filled with color. This consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a problem with the printer.

Head Cleaning B in the Control Panel menu consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a problem with the printer. Unless the printer has been moved or stored for a long period or you are troubleshooting Printhead problems, we recommend not performing Head Cleaning B , to the extent possible.

After initial installation or at the first-time use after transfer, ink flows into the system between the

Ink Tank and Printhead.

Although the amount of remaining ink may drop as a result, it does not indicate a problem.

Check for nozzle clogging.

(See " Checking for Nozzle Clogging .")

P.577

Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.

Ink level detection

Ink tanks specified for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out during printing, which prevents printer damage.

(See " Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

This function will not work correctly if you use refill ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using refill ink tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.

Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc. is not liable for any damage that may occur as a result of refilling ink.

User's Guide

631

Ink Level Detection iPF840

Important

• After ink level detection has been released, this function cannot be reactivated for currently loaded Ink Tank. To use ink level detection again, replace the Ink Tank with new ones specified for use with the printer.

• Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and the printer, which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer.

Releasing ink level detection

1

On the Display Screen, a message indicates that the ink level cannot be detected. After checking the message, press the ▶ button.

2

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information , and then press the OK button.

3

A confirmation message is shown on the Display Screen about releasing ink level detection. After checking the message, press the ▶ button.

4

After checking the message, press the ▶ button.

5

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

632

6

Check the message and press the ▶ button.

User's Guide

iPF840 Ink Level Detection

7

Check the message and press the ▶ button.

8

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

9

A confirmation message about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen. After checking the message, press the ▶ button.

10

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes , and then press the OK button.

Ink level detection is now released.

User's Guide

633

iPF840

634

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

15

29

157

267

331

425

463

475

495

549

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

565

603

Error Message

Error Messages .................................................................................

636

Messages regarding paper ................................................................

638

Messages regarding ink ....................................................................

647

Messages regarding printing or adjustment ......................................

649

Messages regarding printheads ........................................................

650

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge ...............................

652

Messages regarding the hard disk ....................................................

653

Messages regarding HP-GL/2 ...........................................................

654

Other Messages ................................................................................

655

Specifications

Appendix

657

661

635 imagePROGRAF

iPF840

636

Before borderless printing, move the blue platen switch. ................................................................................

649

Blue platen switch is dirty. ..............................................................................................................................

649

Borderless printng not possible. .....................................................................................................................

645

Borderless printng not possible. Paper stretched or shrank. ...........................................................................

649

Cannot adjust printhead. ................................................................................................................................

650

Cannot print as selected. Another roll is in use. ..............................................................................................

641

Cannot print as specified. ...............................................................................................................................

649

Cannot recognize print head. ..........................................................................................................................

650

Check printed document. ...............................................................................................................................

649

Close Ink Tank Cover ......................................................................................................................................

647

End of paper feed. ..........................................................................................................................................

645

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .......................................................................................

655

Execute printhead cleaning. ............................................................................................................................

651

File read error. ................................................................................................................................................

653

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ............................................................................................................

655

GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. ...................................................................................................

654

GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. ...............................................................................................

654

GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) .......................................................................

654

Hard disk error. ...............................................................................................................................................

653

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .....................................................................

655

Ink insufficient. ................................................................................................................................................

647

Ink tank is empty. ...........................................................................................................................................

647

Insert the maintenance cartridge. ...................................................................................................................

652

Insufficient paper for job .................................................................................................................................

640

Mail box full. Delete unwanted data ................................................................................................................

653

Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. ...............................................................................................

653

Mail box nearly full. .........................................................................................................................................

653

Maint. cart. The level is low .............................................................................................................................

652

Maintenance cartridge full. ..............................................................................................................................

652

Maintenance cartridge problem. .....................................................................................................................

652

Maximum jobs stored. ....................................................................................................................................

653

MediaType Mismatch ......................................................................................................................................

638

Move the blue platen switch No.xx to the right. (xx represents a number) .......................................................

649

Multi-sensor error ...........................................................................................................................................

656

No ink left. ......................................................................................................................................................

647

No ink tank loaded. ........................................................................................................................................

648

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. ...............................................................................................................

652

No Roll Unit. ...................................................................................................................................................

642

Not much ink is left. ........................................................................................................................................

648

Paper cutting failed. ........................................................................................................................................

644

Paper jam. ......................................................................................................................................................

643

Paper loaded askew. ......................................................................................................................................

644

Paper position not suitable for borderless printing. .........................................................................................

646

Paper size not detected. .................................................................................................................................

640

PaprTypeMismatch .........................................................................................................................................

638

PaprWidth Mismatch ......................................................................................................................................

639

Parts replacement time has passed. ...............................................................................................................

656

Prepare for parts replacement. .......................................................................................................................

656

Printhead error ...............................................................................................................................................

650

Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. .............................................................................................

643

Rel lever is in wrong position. .........................................................................................................................

645

User's Guide

iPF840

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. Check ink tank. ........................................................

647

Roll feed unit error. .........................................................................................................................................

646

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. ..............................................................................................

641

Roll printing is selected. ..................................................................................................................................

641

Roll x is empty. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) .....................................................................................................

642

Roll x is selected. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) .................................................................................................

641

Roll x jam (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) .............................................................................................................

644

Sheet printing is selected. ...............................................................................................................................

643

Sheet removed. ..............................................................................................................................................

643

The following ink tanks cannot be recognized. ................................................................................................

648

The mail box is full. .........................................................................................................................................

653

The paper is too small. ...................................................................................................................................

639

The paper is too small. ...................................................................................................................................

639

The roll feed unit is loose. ...............................................................................................................................

646

This paper cannot be used as size is not supported. ......................................................................................

641

This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2. ........................................................................................

654

Top cover is open. ..........................................................................................................................................

655

Unknown file. ..................................................................................................................................................

656

Wrong ink tank. ..............................................................................................................................................

648

Wrong maintenance cartridge. ........................................................................................................................

652

Wrong printhead. ............................................................................................................................................

650

User's Guide

637

MediaType Mismatch iPF840

MediaType Mismatch ......................................................................................................................................

638

PaprTypeMismatch .........................................................................................................................................

638

The paper is too small. ...................................................................................................................................

639

The paper is too small. ...................................................................................................................................

639

PaprWidth Mismatch ......................................................................................................................................

639

Paper size not detected. .................................................................................................................................

640

Insufficient paper for job .................................................................................................................................

640

This paper cannot be used as size is not supported. ......................................................................................

641

Cannot print as selected. Another roll is in use. ..............................................................................................

641

Roll printing is selected. ..................................................................................................................................

641

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. ..............................................................................................

641

Roll x is selected. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) .................................................................................................

641

Roll x is empty. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) .....................................................................................................

642

No Roll Unit. ...................................................................................................................................................

642

Sheet removed. ..............................................................................................................................................

643

Sheet printing is selected. ...............................................................................................................................

643

Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. .............................................................................................

643

Paper jam. ......................................................................................................................................................

643

Roll x jam (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) .............................................................................................................

644

Paper loaded askew. ......................................................................................................................................

644

Paper cutting failed. ........................................................................................................................................

644

End of paper feed. ..........................................................................................................................................

645

Rel lever is in wrong position. .........................................................................................................................

645

Borderless printng not possible. .....................................................................................................................

645

Paper position not suitable for borderless printing. .........................................................................................

646

Roll feed unit error. .........................................................................................................................................

646

The roll feed unit is loose. ...............................................................................................................................

646

Cause

You tried to print a test pattern for printer adjustment on several sheets, but sheets of different types of paper were used.

When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is set to Warning , the type of paper loaded does not match the type specified in the printer driver.

Corrective Action

When printing a test pattern for adjustment, use sheets of the same type of paper, in the required quantity. Replace the paper as follows and perform adjustment again.

1.

Lift the Release Lever and stop printing.

2.

Replace the paper.

(See " Loading and Printing on Sheets .")

➔ P.21

3.

Execute adjustment again from the control panel menu.

You can continue to print, but note that this error may cause paper jams or problems in the printing results.

638

Cause

When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is set to Pause , the type of paper loaded does not match the type specified in the printer driver.

Corrective Action

Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches on the printer and in the printer driver.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

2.

Change the paper type setting in the printer driver to the type loaded in the printer and try printing again.

User's Guide

iPF840 The paper is too small.

Cause

When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is set to Pause , the type of paper loaded does not match the type specified in the printer driver.

Corrective Action

Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches on the printer and in the printer driver.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper , and then press the OK button.

2.

Replace the loaded paper with paper of the type and size you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Loading and Printing on Rolls .")

➔ P.18

(See " Loading and Printing on Sheets .")

➔ P.21

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , and then press the OK button to resume printing.

However, note that this error may cause paper jams and affect the printing quality.

Cause

When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is set to Pause or Hold Job , paper smaller than the size specified in the printer driver is loaded.

When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is set to Warning , paper smaller than the size specified in the printer driver is loaded.

Corrective Action

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , and then press the OK button to resume printing.

However, note that this error may cause paper jams and affect the printing quality.

Adjust the paper size setting in the printer driver to match the size loaded in the printer as follows.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

2.

Change the paper size setting in the printer driver to the size loaded in the printer and try printing again.

Replace the loaded paper with paper of a size that matches the size setting in the printer driver as follows.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper , and then press the OK button to stop printing.

2.

Replace the loaded paper to match the settings in the printer driver and try printing again.

(See " Loading and Printing on Rolls .")

➔ P.18

(See " Loading and Printing on Sheets .")

➔ P.21

You can continue to print, but note that this error may cause problems in the printing results.

" Replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger "

Cause

The loaded paper is too small.

(When you have attempted to print a test print sheet or other printer status information.)

Corrective Action

Replace the paper with paper of A4/Letter (vertical) size or larger as follows.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper , press the OK button, and remove the paper.

(See " Removing Sheets .")

➔ P.373

2.

Switch to paper A4/Letter (vertical) or larger.

(See " Loading and Printing on Sheets .")

➔ P.21

The printer will resume printing.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

Cause

When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is set to Pause or Hold Job , the width of the loaded roll does not match the width specified in Fit Roll Paper

Width in the printer driver.

Corrective Action

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , and then press the OK button to resume printing.

However, note that this error may cause paper jams and affect the printing quality.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

User's Guide

639

Paper size not detected.

iPF840

Cause

When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is set to Pause or Hold Job , the width of the loaded roll does not match the width specified in Fit Roll Paper

Width in the printer driver.

Corrective Action

Follow these steps to replace the roll to match the width specified in the printer driver.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper , and then press the OK button.

(See " Removing the Roll from the Printer .")

P.352

(See " Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls .")

➔ P.356

2.

Replace with paper of the width configured in the printer driver.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls .")

➔ P.342

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

The printer now starts printing the print job.

Make sure the roll width selected in the dialog box displayed when you select Fit Roll Paper Width in the printer driver matches the width of the roll loaded in the printer, and then try printing again.

Cause

Paper has been loaded askew, or warped paper has been loaded.

Because the Platen is soiled with ink or other substances, the size of the clear film cannot be detected.

Corrective Action

Lift up the Release Lever and reload the paper.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

P.369

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is displayed on the Display Screen, press the OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

If this error recurs after you reload the roll, remove the Roll Holder from the printer, push the roll firmly in until it touches the

Roll Holder flange, and reload the Roll

Holder in the printer.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to

Rolls .")

P.342

Open the Top Cover and clean the entire

Platen.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

➔ P.591

640

Cause

The printer has received a print job longer than the amount of roll paper left when ManageRemainRoll in the Control Panel menu is On .

Corrective Action

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , and then press the OK button to resume printing.

However, the roll paper may run out during the print job and you may not be able to print all of the document.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper , and then press the OK button to stop printing.

(See " Removing the Roll from the Printer .")

➔ P.352

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

Press ▲ or ▼ and select Stop Printing or press the Stop button to stop printing.

User's Guide

iPF840 This paper cannot be used as size is not supported.

Cause

Paper that is too large for the printer has been loaded.

Paper that is too small for the printer has been loaded.

Paper has been loaded that is too small to print the test pattern for printhead adjustment or nozzle checking.

Corrective Action

Lift the Release Lever and load paper of the correct size.

(See " Paper Sizes .")

➔ P.332

Lift the Release Lever and load paper of the correct size.

(See " Paper Sizes .")

➔ P.332

Lift the Release Lever and load unused paper A4/Letter (vertical) or larger.

More than one sheet may be required depending on the adjustment.

Cause

A printed document remains in the Output Tray without being cut and a print job was received that specifies the other roll.

Corrective Action

Press the OK button to stop printing.

Cut the printed document.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

Load the other roll and resend the print job.

(See " Loading and Printing on Rolls .")

P.18

Cause

You have attempted to print on a roll, but no roll is loaded.

Corrective Action

Press ▲ or ▼ to select " Load Roll Paper ", and then press the OK button. Load the roll, and then print.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls .")

➔ P.342

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

P.345

Press ▲ or ▼ and select Stop Printing or press the Stop button to stop printing.

Cause

A print job for rolls was received when a sheet is loaded.

Corrective Action

Follow these steps to load and print on a roll.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject Cut Sheet , press the OK button, and remove the sheet.

(See " Removing Sheets .")

➔ P.373

2.

Load a new roll.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

The printer now starts printing the print job.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

Cause

The indicated roll is specified for a print job sent from a computer, but that roll is not loaded.

Corrective Action

Press ▲ or ▼ to select " Load Roll Paper ", and then press the OK button.

Load the roll, and then print.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls .")

➔ P.342

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

Press ▲ or ▼ and select Stop Printing or press the Stop button to stop printing.

641

User's Guide

Roll x is empty. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) iPF840

Cause

The tailing edge of the paper was detected because cut sheets were loaded in the roll paper Paper Feed Slot.

Corrective Action

Follow these steps to install the roll paper.

1.

Press the OK button and remove the paper.

2.

Load the new roll.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls .")

➔ P.342

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

3.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the type of paper.

(See " Changing the Type of Paper .")

➔ P.350

4.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper length.

(See " Specifying the Paper Length .")

➔ P.352

5.

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is shown on the Display Screen, press the OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

" Lift the release lever and replace the roll.

"

Cause

The roll is empty.

There is remaining roll paper, but because it could not be advanced, it could not be detected.

Corrective Action

Follow these steps to replace the used roll with a new roll of the same type and size.

1.

Lift the Release Lever and remove the roll.

(See " Removing the Roll from the Printer .")

➔ P.352

(See " Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls .")

➔ P.356

2.

Load the new roll.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls .")

➔ P.342

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

3.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the type of paper.

(See " Changing the Type of Paper .")

➔ P.350

4.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper length.

(See " Specifying the Paper Length .")

➔ P.352

5.

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is shown on the Display Screen, press the OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

The unused portion of the roll is heavy, and this is placing a burden on the printer. It may be helpful to change the printing mode, which will change the paper feed timing.

Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver.

(See " Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for

Printing .")

➔ P.66

642

Cause

The printer has received a print job that specifies Roll 2 (Lower), but the Roll

Unit is not installed.

Corrective Action

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

1.

Turn the printer off and install the Roll Unit.

Connect the Roll Unit Cable firmly and completely.

2.

Turn the printer on and resend the print job.

User's Guide

iPF840 Sheet removed.

Cause

A sheet has come out of the printer during printing.

Corrective Action

1.

Lift the Release Lever and remove the paper.

2.

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is shown on the Display Screen, press the OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

Cause

You have attempted to print on a sheet, but no sheet is loaded.

Corrective Action

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Load Paper , and then press the OK button. Load a sheet, and then print.

(See " Loading and Printing on Sheets .")

➔ P.21

Press ▲ or ▼ and select Stop Printing or press the Stop button to stop printing.

Cause

A print job for printing on sheets was sent when a roll is loaded.

Corrective Action

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Remove Roll Paper , and then press the OK button to stop printing.

2.

After removing the roll, load and print on a sheet of the type and size of paper you have specified in the printer driver.

(See " Removing the Roll from the Printer .")

➔ P.352

(See " Loading and Printing on Sheets .")

➔ P.21

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button to stop printing.

" Lift the release lever.

"

Cause

A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.

Corrective Action

1.

Lift the Release Lever and remove the jammed paper.

(See " Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .")

➔ P.605

(See " Clearing a Jammed Sheet .")

➔ P.608

2.

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is shown on the Display Screen, press the

OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

" Manually rewind the roll all the way and press OK.

"

Cause

A paper jam occurred when advancing the paper.

Corrective Action

1.

Rewind paper on the Roll Holder manually, all the way, and then press the OK button.

2.

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is shown on the Display Screen, press the OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

" Lift the release lever and remove the paper.

"

Cause Corrective Action

A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing. Lift the Release Lever and remove the jammed paper.

(See " Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .")

P.605

(See " Clearing a Jammed Sheet .")

P.608

643

User's Guide

Roll x jam (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) iPF840

" Lift the release lever.

"

Cause

A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.

Corrective Action

1.

Lift the Release Lever and remove the jammed paper.

(See " Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .")

P.605

(See " Clearing a Jammed Sheet .")

➔ P.608

2.

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is shown on the Display Screen, press the

OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

" Manually rewind the roll all the way and press OK.

"

Cause

A paper jam occurred when advancing the paper.

Corrective Action

1.

Rewind paper on the Roll Holder manually, all the way, and then press the OK button.

2.

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is shown on the Display Screen, press the OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

Cause

Paper loaded crooked was detected when the paper was advanced.

Corrective Action

Lift up the Release Lever and reload the paper.

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

(See " Loading Sheets in the Printer .")

➔ P.369

If this error recurs after you reload the roll, remove the Roll Holder from the printer, push the roll firmly in until it touches the

Roll Holder flange, and reload the Roll

Holder in the printer.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to

Rolls .")

➔ P.342

Important

• To disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper, for example), choose Off or Loose in the Skew Check Lv.

setting of the printer menu. However, this may cause jams and printing problems because paper may be askew when printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled, which may soil the back of the next document when it is printed.

644

Cause

There are sheets left on the

Ejection Guide.

There is a foreign object by the Output Tray, obstructing the Cutter Unit.

You are not using the printer under the recommended environmental conditions for the paper.

Corrective Action

1.

Lift the Release Lever and remove the paper.

2.

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is shown on the Display Screen, press the OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

1.

Lift the Top Cover and remove the foreign object.

2.

If " Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?

" is shown on the Display Screen, press the OK button.

Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.

Use the printer only where the recommended environmental conditions for the paper are met. Note that various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper. For details on the recommended environmental conditions for paper, see the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

User's Guide

iPF840 End of paper feed.

Cause

You are using paper that is not compatible with automatic cutting.

The Cutter Unit stops in the middle of cutting.

In other cases, the Cutter

Unit may be damaged.

Corrective Action

Specify Manual as the cutting method and cut the roll manually.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

P.360

For information about paper that is compatible with automatic cutting, see the Paper Reference

Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage out of the way, away from the paper.

If the Cutter is out, move the Cutter to the right side (away from the paper) and remove the jammed paper.

(See " Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .")

➔ P.605

If the paper cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit, specify Manual as the roll cutting method and cut the roll manually.

(See " Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .")

➔ P.360

Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Cause

Although an attempt was made to advance the paper manually, it reached the limit position that can be advanced.

Corrective Action

Canceling manual advancing.

(See " Feeding Roll Paper Manually .")

➔ P.357

Cause

The Release Lever is up. Lower the Release Lever.

Corrective Action

If the error occurs again, turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power.

Cause

The print job received specifies a type or width of paper that is not compatible with borderless printing.

The loaded paper is a size not compatible with borderless printing.

Because paper expands or contracts depending on the environment of use, it may become narrower or wider than the supported width for borderless printing.

Corrective Action

Follow these steps to change the settings of the print job to enable borderless printing.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

2.

Make sure the correct printer driver for the printer is selected and try printing again.

For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper

Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print With Border , and then press the OK button to continue printing.

The document will be printed with a border.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

Replace the paper with paper compatible for borderless printing as follows.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper , and then press the OK button.

(See " Removing the Roll from the Printer .")

➔ P.352

(See " Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls .")

➔ P.356

2.

Replace the paper with paper compatible for borderless printing.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls .")

P.342

(See " Loading Rolls in the Printer .")

➔ P.345

The printer now starts printing the print job.

For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper

Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print With Border , and then press the OK button to continue printing.

The document will be printed with a border.

Use each type of paper only where the recommended environmental conditions are met. For details on environmental conditions for various paper, see the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

User's Guide

645

Paper position not suitable for borderless printing.

iPF840

Cause

Because paper expands or contracts depending on the environment of use, it may become narrower or wider than the supported width for borderless printing.

The paper is loaded askew.

Corrective Action

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

Use each type of paper only where the recommended environmental conditions are met. For details on environmental conditions for various paper, see the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

P.335

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper and straighten the paper so that the edges are between the ink grooves for borderless printing.

Insert the roll firmly until it touches the flange of the Roll Holder.

(See " Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls .")

➔ P.342

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print With Border , and then press the OK button to continue printing.

The document will be printed with a border.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

Cause

There is a problem with the

Roll Unit.

Corrective Action

Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power. If the message is displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Cause Corrective Action

The Roll Unit is detached from the printer. Push the Roll Unit firmly all the way in.

646

User's Guide

iPF840 Ink insufficient.

Ink insufficient. ................................................................................................................................................

647

No ink left. ......................................................................................................................................................

647

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. Check ink tank. ........................................................

647

Close Ink Tank Cover ......................................................................................................................................

647

Ink tank is empty. ...........................................................................................................................................

647

Not much ink is left. ........................................................................................................................................

648

No ink tank loaded. ........................................................................................................................................

648

The following ink tanks cannot be recognized. ................................................................................................

648

Wrong ink tank. ..............................................................................................................................................

648

Cause

The ink level is low, so you cannot print, clean the Printhead, or do other operations that require ink.

There is not enough ink of the color with × displayed above the remaining ink indicator.

Corrective Action

Press the OK button, open the Ink Tank Cover, and replace the Ink Tank for the color that does not have enough ink.

(See " Replacing Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

Cause

There is no ink left.

There are no ink colors with × displayed above the remaining ink indicator.

Corrective Action

Press the OK button, open the Ink Tank Cover, and replace the Ink Tank for the color that is out of ink.

(See " Replacing Ink Tanks .")

P.566

Cause

Ink level detection cannot work correctly if you use refill ink tanks.

Corrective Action

The refill ink tank can no longer be used. See the section Ink level detection and take the appropriate action.

(See " Ink Level Detection .")

➔ P.631

Cause

The Ink Tank Cover is open.

Corrective Action

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

Cause

There is no ink left in an ink tank.

There are no ink colors with × displayed above the remaining ink indicator in the Ink tab top screen.

(See " Checking Ink Tank Levels .")

P.575

Corrective Action

Open the Ink Tank Cover, and replace the Ink Tank for the color that is out of ink.

(See " Replacing Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

647

User's Guide

Not much ink is left.

iPF840

Cause Corrective Action

Not much ink is left. Prepare a new Ink Tank.

We recommend replacing the Ink Tank with a new Ink Tank at this point if you plan to print large-format or high-quantity jobs.

Cause Corrective Action

There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the printer. Load or reload the Ink Tank.

(See " Replacing Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

There is a problem with the Ink Tank.

Replace it with a new Ink Tank.

(See " Replacing Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

Cause Corrective Action

An Ink Tank that is incompatible with the printer is loaded. Load an Ink Tank that is compatible with the printer.

(See " Replacing Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

Cause Corrective Action

The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible. Load an Ink Tank specified for use with the printer.

(See " Replacing Ink Tanks .")

➔ P.566

648

User's Guide

iPF840 Cannot print as specified.

Cannot print as specified. ...............................................................................................................................

649

Cannot adjust printhead. ................................................................................................................................

650

Borderless printng not possible. Paper stretched or shrank. ...........................................................................

649

Before borderless printing, move the blue platen switch. ................................................................................

649

Borderless printng not possible. .....................................................................................................................

645

Blue platen switch is dirty. ..............................................................................................................................

649

Move the blue platen switch No.xx to the right. (xx represents a number) .......................................................

649

Check printed document. ...............................................................................................................................

649

" Lift the release lever and replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger.

"

Cause Corrective Action

The loaded paper is too small. Switch to paper A4/Letter (vertical) or larger.

" Lift the release lever and replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll.

"

Cause Corrective Action

The loaded paper is too small. Load a roll 10 inches wide or larger.

Cause

The loaded roll has expanded or contracted due to environmental conditions, making it wider or narrower than the supported width for borderless printing.

Corrective Action

Press the OK button to stop printing.

Use each type of paper only where the recommended environmental conditions are met. For details on environmental conditions for various paper, see the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

Cause

The blue Switch on the platen was set to the side opposite ● when a borderless print job was received.

Corrective Action

Before borderless printing, set the blue Switch on the platen to the ● side.

(See " Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen .")

➔ P.621

Cause Corrective Action

The blue Switch on the platen is dirty. Open the Top Cover and clean the blue Switch on the platen.

(See " Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .")

P.591

Cause

The printer has detected that the blue Switch on the platen needed in maintenance during printing is set away from the ● mark.

Corrective Action

Set blue platen Switch of the indicated number toward the ● side.

(See " Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen .")

➔ P.621

649

Cause Corrective Action

The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged. If printing is faint, clean the Printhead.

(See " Cleaning the Printhead .")

➔ P.578

User's Guide

Cannot adjust printhead.

iPF840

Cannot adjust printhead. ................................................................................................................................

650

Wrong printhead. ............................................................................................................................................

650

Printhead error ...............................................................................................................................................

650

Cannot recognize print head. ..........................................................................................................................

650

Execute printhead cleaning. ............................................................................................................................

651

Cause

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

The Printhead cannot be aligned; highly transparent film is loaded.

The Printhead is installed crooked.

Corrective Action

Execute Head Posi. Adj.

again, as follows.

1.

Press the OK button to clear the error.

2.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.

(See " Checking for Nozzle Clogging .")

➔ P.577

3.

Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.

(See " Cleaning the Printhead .")

➔ P.578

4.

Execute Head Posi. Adj.

again.

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

Press the OK button to clear the error.

We recommend using a type of paper that you often use, other than film, for Printhead adjustment.

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

Straighten the Printhead as follows, and then execute Head Posi. Adj.

again.

1.

Press the OK button to clear the error.

2.

Use Head Inc. Adj.

to adjust the angle of inclination of the Printhead.

(See " Adjusting Line Misalignment .")

➔ P.554

3.

Execute Head Posi. Adj.

again.

(See " Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .")

➔ P.550

Cause Corrective Action

An incompatible Printhead has been installed. Open the Top Cover and replace the Printhead with a new one.

(See " Replacing the Printhead .")

P.579

Cause Corrective Action

There is a problem with the Printhead. Open the Top Cover and replace the Printhead with a new one.

(See " Replacing the Printhead .")

➔ P.579

650

No Printhead is installed.

Cause Corrective Action

Follow these steps to install the Printhead.

1.

Open the Top Cover.

2.

Install the Printhead.

(See " Replacing the Printhead .")

➔ P.579

The Printhead cannot be recognized because it is not installed correctly. Follow these steps to reinstall the Printhead.

1.

Open the Top Cover.

2.

Reinstall the Printhead.

(See " Replacing the Printhead .")

➔ P.579

User's Guide

iPF840 Execute printhead cleaning.

Cause

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Corrective Action

Follow these steps to clean the Printhead.

1.

Stop printing by pressing ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing .

2.

Clean the Printhead.

(See " Cleaning the Printhead .")

➔ P.578

If the message is still displayed when printing, replace the Printhead.

(See " Replacing the Printhead .")

➔ P.579

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , and then press the OK button to resume printing. However, note that this error may affect the printing quality.

User's Guide

651

Insert the maintenance cartridge.

iPF840

Insert the maintenance cartridge. ...................................................................................................................

652

Wrong maintenance cartridge. ........................................................................................................................

652

Maint. cart. The level is low .............................................................................................................................

652

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. ...............................................................................................................

652

Maintenance cartridge full. ..............................................................................................................................

652

Maintenance cartridge problem. .....................................................................................................................

652

Cause Corrective Action

The Maintenance Cartridge is not installed. Install the Maintenance Cartridge.

(See " Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .")

P.585

Cause

A Maintenance Cartridge for a different model of printer is installed.

Corrective Action

Replace it with the Maintenance Cartridge for your particular model.

(See " Maintenance Cartridge .")

➔ P.585

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full.

Corrective Action

You can continue to print, but prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for replacement is displayed.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation.

Corrective Action

After confirming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance

Cartridge.

(See " Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .")

➔ P.585

Cause Corrective Action

The Maintenance Cartridge is full. After confirming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

(See " Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .")

P.585

Cause

An incompatible or used Maintenance Cartridge has been installed.

Corrective Action

Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specified for use with the printer.

(See " Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .")

➔ P.585

652

User's Guide

iPF840 Hard disk error.

Hard disk error. ...............................................................................................................................................

653

File read error. ................................................................................................................................................

653

The mail box is full. .........................................................................................................................................

653

Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. ...............................................................................................

653

Mail box nearly full. .........................................................................................................................................

653

Maximum jobs stored. ....................................................................................................................................

653

Mail box full. Delete unwanted data ................................................................................................................

653

Cause

The format of the printer's hard disk is invalid.

Corrective Action

Press the OK button to start reformatting the hard disk. When formatting is finished, data on the printer hard disk is erased and the printer automatically restarts.

Cause

Files on the printer's hard disk have become corrupted.

Corrective Action

Restart the printer. Only the corrupted files will be deleted, and the printer will restart.

Cause Corrective Action

There is no more space on the printer's hard disk. Press the Stop button and stop printing.

Delete print jobs from the queue.

(See " Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) .")

➔ P.517

Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes.

(See " Deleting Saved Jobs .")

➔ P.525

Cause

No more space is available on the printer's hard disk, so jobs are now printed without saving them. (Print jobs can no longer be saved on the hard disk.)

Corrective Action

After printing, this message is cleared.

Cause

The free hard disk space left for Personal Boxes in the printer's hard disk does not have more than 1 GB, combined.

Corrective Action

Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.

(See " Deleting Saved Jobs .")

➔ P.525

Cause Corrective Action

100 jobs are stored in the personal box. Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes.

(See " Deleting Saved Jobs .")

➔ P.525

Cause Corrective Action

100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box. Press the Stop button and stop printing.

Delete print jobs from the queue.

(See " Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) .")

➔ P.517

Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes.

(See " Deleting Saved Jobs .")

➔ P.525

User's Guide

653

This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2.

iPF840

This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2. ........................................................................................

654

GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) .......................................................................

654

GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. ...................................................................................................

654

GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. ...............................................................................................

654

Cause

The printer has received a HP-GL/2 print job that cannot be printed on the paper that has been advanced.

Corrective Action

Follow these steps to replace the type of paper in the printer.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper , and then press the OK button.

2.

Replace the paper with a type compatible with HP-GL/2. For details on paper compatible with HP-GL/2, refer to the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing , and then press the OK button.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print , and then press the OK button to resume printing. However, note that this error may cause paper jams and affect the printing quality.

Cause

The printer memory is full.

Corrective Action

Because the entire print job could not be received, the printer may not be able to print the entire original.

Check the printing results.

In the Control Panel menu, setting On-the-Fly to On may enable printing. However, check the printing results because the image may be incomplete in some cases.

Cause

A parameter specified in a HP-GL/2 command is out of the supported range.

Corrective Action

Check the print job.

If you have specified ProcessingOption > Warning > On in the Control Panel menu, set it to Off instead.

Cause

The printer has received an unsupported HP-GL/2 command.

Corrective Action

Check the print job.

If you have specified ProcessingOption > Warning > On in the

Control Panel menu, set it to Off instead.

654

User's Guide

iPF840 GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ............................................................................................................

655

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .......................................................................................

655

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .....................................................................

655

Top cover is open. ..........................................................................................................................................

655

Prepare for parts replacement. .......................................................................................................................

656

Parts replacement time has passed. ...............................................................................................................

656

Unknown file. ..................................................................................................................................................

656

Multi-sensor error ...........................................................................................................................................

656

No Roll Unit. ...................................................................................................................................................

642

Cause Corrective Action

There is a problem with the print job. Try printing again, using the correct printer driver.

It is also possible to continue printing in this state.

However, you may not be able to obtain the desired printing results.

Cause Corrective Action

An error requiring service may have occurred. Write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Cause

The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job. The paper was not advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll.

Fastening tape or the Belt Stopper has not been removed inside the Top Cover.

An error requiring service may have occurred.

Corrective Action

Turn off the printer and remove the roll from the printer before restoring power.

Turn off the printer, open the Top Cover and remove the tape or the Belt Stopper before restoring power.

Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power.

If the message is displayed again, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Cause

The printer has detected that the Top Cover is open.

Corrective Action

Open the Top Cover fully, remove any foreign objects, and close the Top Cover again.

If the error occurs again, close the Top Cover, turn off the printer, and wait a while before restoring power.

User's Guide

655

Prepare for parts replacement.

iPF840

Cause

It is almost time to replace consumables for which service is required.

Corrective Action

You can continue to use the printer for some time until " Parts replacement time has passed.

" will be displayed.

Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Cause Corrective Action

It is past the recommended time to replace consumables for which service is required. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Cause

Data sent to keep the printer up to date (such as paper information) is in the wrong format.

You have uploaded firmware for a different model.

Corrective Action

Check the data. Turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power, and then resend the data.

Check the firmware version. Turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power, and then resend the firmware.

If the message is displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Cause

Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.

The performance of a sensor inside the printer may be impaired.

Corrective Action

Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.

Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power.

If the message is displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

656

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

15

29

157

267

331

425

463

475

495

549

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

565

603

635

Specifications

Printer Specifications ........................................................................

658

Appendix

661

imagePROGRAF

657

Specifications iPF840

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................

658

Print Area .......................................................................................................................................................

659

658

Important

• The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.

Printer

Power supply

Power consumption

Operating noise ( *2 )

Operating environment

Dimensions (W × D × H)

Weight

Space for installation (W × D

× H) (

*3

)

Environmental Standards

During operation

Sleep mode

Off

Sound pressure level

100–240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

190 W max.

5 W max.

0.5 W max. (

*1 )

During operation

Standby

Audio power level (during operation)

Temperature 15–30°C (59–86°F)

Approx. 52 dB (A)

35 dB (A) max.

Approx. 6.8 bels

Humidity

Printer, Stand, and Wheeled

Output Stacker (When the output stacker is used)

10–80%, non-condensing

1,893×1,291×1,144 mm (74.52×50.82×45.03 in)

Printer, Stand, and Wheeled

Output Stacker (Includes the

Roll Holder. Does not include the Printhead or Ink Tank.)

Approx. 189 kg (416.7 lb)

Printer, Stand, and Wheeled

Output Stacker

2,293×1,991×1,518 mm (90.27×78.38×59.76 in)

International Energy Star Program, Eco Mark (Japan), Law on Promoting Green

Purchasing/GPN (Japan), RoHS, EPEAT (Silver) technical compliance

*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off. To stop all power consumption, turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

*2: Calculation based on ISO 7779. Operating conditions: On the Main sheet of the printer driver, Media Type > Plain Paper,

Advanced Settings > Print Priority > Line Drawing/Text , and Print Quality > Standard .

*3: These are the recommended dimensions taking the workspace into account.It is recommended that you ensure these dimensions so that you can work in the surrounding areas when using the Printer.

Printing performance

Print method

Maximum resolution

Printhead

Number of nozzles

Bubblejet

2400 dpi horizontally ( *1 ) × 1200 dpi vertically

PF-04

MBK: 5120; Others: 2560 each color

*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.

Memory and hard disk

Memory

Hard disk capacity

32 GB (640 MB physical memory)

320 GB

User's Guide

iPF840 Print Area

Hard disk capacity

Print job storage capacity

Personal mail boxes (Permanent storage area)

Common Box

Personal Boxes

180 GB

100 jobs

100 jobs

Interface

USB

Ethernet

Format

Mode

Connector

Format

Specification

Protocols

Internal port

Full-speed (12 Mbps), high-speed (480 Mbps), bulk transfer

Series B (4-pin)

Internal port

IEEE 802.3 10Base-T,

IEEE 802.3u 100Base-TX/Auto-Negotiation,

IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T/Auto-Negotiation,

IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex

IEEE 802.3az EEE

SNMP (supports Canon-MIB), HTTP, TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6)

Ink

For information on the ink the printer supports,

see " Ink Tanks ."

➔ P.566

Paper

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Displaying the Paper Reference Guide .")

➔ P.335

Paper width

Minimum paper length

Maximum printable length ( *1

)

Thickness

Roll maximum outer diameter

Supported paper core inner diameter

Print area

For information on the paper widths the printer supports,

see " Paper Sizes ."

P.332

Rolls 203 mm (8.0 in)

Sheets

Rolls

Sheets

Rolls

Sheets

18 m (19.7 yd)

1,600 mm (63.0 in)

0.07–0.8 mm (0.0028–0.031 in)

0.07–0.8 mm (0.0028–0.031 in)

For details,

see " Print Area ."

➔ P.659

150 mm (6 in) or shorter

2 inches / 3 inches

*1: Varies depending on the operating system or application.

Optional

Roll Holder Set Roll Holder Set RH2-44

A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer. Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.

Note

• Printable Area: The area that can be printed.

• There is no margin (that is, a margin of 0 mm) during borderless printing on rolls.

• Recommended Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.

• To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes the required

margin. (See " Printing on Oversize Paper .")

➔ P.83

659

User's Guide

Print Area iPF840

Top Edge

Sheets 3 mm (0.12 in)

Margins of Printable Area

Bottom Edge

23 mm (0.91 in)

Sides

3 mm (0.12 in)

Margins of Recommended Print Area

Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides

20 mm (0.79 in) 23 mm (0.91 in) 5 mm (0.20 in)

Rolls 0/3 mm (0/0.12 in) 0/3 mm (0/0.12 in) 0/3 mm (0/0.12 in) 20 mm (0.79 in) 5 mm (0.20 in) 5 mm (0.20 in)

Sheets

• Printable Area a margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 3 mm (0.12 in) on left and right sides is required.

• Recommended Print Area

A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right sides is required.

Rolls

• Printable Area

A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides is 0 mm.

For information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference Guide .

(See " Types of Paper .")

➔ P.332

• Recommended Print Area

A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 5 mm (0.20 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right sides is required.

660

User's Guide

iPF840

User's Guide

Basic Printing Workflow

Enhanced Printing Options

Windows Software

Mac OS Software

Handling and Use of Paper

Control Panel

Printer Parts

Network Setting

Print Job Management

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Maintenance and Consumables

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Specifications

15

29

157

267

331

425

463

475

495

549

565

603

635

657

Appendix

Safety Precautions .........................................................................

662

Manuals for this printer .....................................................................

666

Disposal of the product .....................................................................

668

imagePROGRAF

661

Safety Precautions iPF840

Safety Precautions .........................................................................................................................................

662

Legal Notices .................................................................................................................................................

664

662

Follow the warnings and precautions below to use the printer safely. Do not perform any operations or procedures other than as described in this manual. Doing so may result in unexpected accidents and can cause a fire or electrical shocks.

Printer location

Warning

• Do not set up the printer in any location exposed to alcohol, thinner, or other volatile liquids. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of fire or electrical shock.

Caution

• Never install the printer on an unstable or vibrating surface. If it falls over, this could cause personal injury.

• Never set up the printer in a location that is exposed to high humidity or large amounts of dust, or exposed to direct sunlight, high temperature, or open flame. This could cause a fire or electrical shock. Use the printer location in an environment where temperature and humidity are within the ranges of 15 °C to 30 °C (59 °F to 86 °F) and 10 to 80% RH (with no condensation).

• Never place the printer on a heavy wool or shag carpet. The fibers may enter the printer and cause a fire.

• Keep the area around the power outlet clear of items so that you can disconnect the power cable immediately if the printer starts operating abnormally. In the event of a printer malfunction, remove the power cable from the outlet as soon as possible to prevent fire and electrical shocks.

• Do not install the printer near sources of strong electromagnetic fields, whether equipment that generates such fields or places where such fields occur. This could damage the printer or cause malfunction.

Power Supply

• Never handle the power cable with wet hands. Doing so may cause electrical shock.

Warning • Insert the power cable securely and completely into the power source. If the power cable is not inserted completely, this could cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not use any power cable other than the one provided. This could cause a fire or electrical shock. Never use the power cable with any other electrical device.

• Never cut the power cable or attempt to modify it, and never stretch it or bend it forcefully. Never place a heavy object on the power cable. Damaged sections of the power cable could cause a short circuit and may cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Never connect the power cable to a power strip or any power source shared by other electrical devices. This could cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Never knot the power cable or wrap it around itself. This could cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Periodically disconnect the power cable and use a dry cloth to wipe away dust that has collected on the plug and the area around the power outlet. Leaving the power cable plugged in and not cleaned for a long period, especially in an area subject to dust, oil, and humidity, could cause the insulation material to deteriorate and lead to a fire.

• Always grip the plug to remove the power cable from the power outlet. Pulling on the power cable could damage the cable and lead to a fire or electrical shock.

Caution

• Never use an extension cord. This could cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Never use any power source other than 100–120 / 220–240 V AC. This could cause a fire or electrical shock. The printer operating conditions are described below. Use the printer under the following conditions.

Power supply voltage: 100–120 / 220–240 V AC

Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz

User's Guide

iPF840 Safety Precautions

In an Emergency

Warning

• If the printer emits smoke or strange odors, continuing to use the printer may cause a fire or electrical shock.

Switch the printer off immediately and remove the power plug from the power outlet. Contact your Canon dealer or support center.

Cleaning the Printer

Warning

• For cleaning, use a cloth dampened in water. Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner.

If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of fire or electrical shock.

Caution

• Always disconnect the power cable from the outlet before cleaning the printer. If the printer is switched on accidentally, moving parts inside the printer may cause personal injuries.

Pacemakers

Warning

• This printer generates a low-level magnetic field. Anyone wearing a pacemaker who experiences discomfort while working around the printer should leave the area. Consult a physician before continuing to work around the printer.

Moving the Printer

• Moving the printer requires at least six people, holding it on both sides. Be careful to avoid back strain and other injuries.

Caution

• When moving the printer, firmly grasp the Carrying Handles under each side. The printer may be unsteady if you hold it at other positions, which poses a risk of injury from dropping the printer.

Printhead, Ink Tanks, and Maintenance Cartridge

Caution

• Always store consumables in a safe location out of the reach of small children. If a child licks or ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance immediately.

• If ink accidentally gets in your eyes, immediately rinse with water.

If ink gets on your skin, immediately clean it off with soap and water.

If irritation persists in your eyes or on your skin, contact a physician immediately.

• Avoid dropping or shaking printheads, ink tanks, and maintenance cartridges. Spilled ink can stain clothing and the work area.

• Never touch the electrical contacts of the Printhead after printing. The contacts become extremely hot and can cause minor burns.

User's Guide

663

Legal Notices iPF840

Other

• Never disassemble the printer or attempt repairs. There are high voltage parts inside the printer that can cause a fire or electrical shock.

Warning

• Never use flammable sprays around the printer. The gas of flammable sprays can cause a fire or electrical shock, if it contacts high voltage points inside the printer.

• Never touch the cutting edge of Cutter Unit (a). This could cause personal injury.

a

Caution

• Never insert your hand into the printer while it is printing. Moving parts inside the printer can cause injuries.

• Never place anything on the printer such as small metal objects (paper clips, staples), liquids, any type of liquid container that contains flammable liquids (alcohol, benzene, etc.). If such objects fall into the printer, this could cause a fire or electrical shock.

• To prevent a fire hazard or dangerous electric shock, if a foreign object falls into or a liquid spills into the printer, press the Power button immediately to switch the printer off, unplug the printer power cable from the outlet, and then contact your Canon dealer or support center. If you continue to use the printer, this could cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Connect the interface cable correctly. To avoid damage, before connection make sure that the shape of the cable connector matches the connection point on the printer.

Important

• During printing, turn on the ventilation system in the room.

• We recommend ensuring ample space for installation.

664

FCC Regulations (U.S.A)

Canon Large Format Printer iPF840

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.

User's Guide

iPF840 Legal Notices

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual.

If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

Canon U.S.A. Inc.

One Canon Park Melville, NY 11747 , U.S.A.

Tel No. 1-800-652-2666

For CA, USA Only

Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.

See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for detail.

Trademarks

• Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of CANON INC.

• Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

• Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

• Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

• Excel, Internet Explorer and PowerPoint are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

• Mac, Mac OS, Bonjour, Safari and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• Adobe RGB, a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated, is color space proposed by Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Copyright

• Unauthorized reproduction of this user manual in whole or part is prohibited.

Legal Notice

• It is illegal to reproduce currency, bills, negotiable securities and other documents prohibited by law. Reproduction of such items may be subject to criminal prosecution.

• It is illegal to reproduce legal certificates, licenses, travel tickets, and certain public and private documents prohibited from reproduction by law. Reproduction of such items may be subject to criminal prosecution.

• Please note that intellectual property protected by copyright may not be reproduced without the express permission of the copyright holder except for personal or household use under limited circumstances.

User's Guide

665

Manuals for this printer iPF840

Manuals for this printer ...................................................................................................................................

666

About This User Manual .................................................................................................................................

666

This printer has the following manuals.

Name

Setup Guide

Quick Guide

Basic Guide

User's Guide

Paper Reference Guide

Contents

Instructions for unpacking and setting up the printer, and for installing the software and electronic manuals.

Contains information such as a guide to exchanging paper, Ink

Tank, and Printhead, and cautions for using the product safely.

Descriptions of basic printer operations.

Detailed instructions for using the printer.

This guide describes about the types and specifications of the available media on the printer.

Medium

Printed Manuals

Electronic manuals

Setup Guide Quick Guide Basic Guide User's Guide Paper Reference Guide

• Symbols

The following symbols are used in this user manual to indicate safety information and explanations on restrictions or precautions in use.

Warning Indicates warning items for which operating error poses a risk of death or serious injury. To ensure safe use, always follow these warnings.

Caution Indicates caution items for which operating error poses a risk of injury. To ensure safe use, always follow these cautions.

Important Indicates important information and restrictions that definitely are to be followed during operation. Be sure to read this information to prevent troubles, malfunctions, or damage to equipment or property by operating errors.

Note Indicates helpful reference information and supplemental information on particular topics.

666

• Button names and user interface elements

Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and buttons) are indicated as follows in this user manual.

Control panel buttons Example: Press the OK button.

Control panel messages Example: Head Cleaning is displayed.

Example: Click OK .

Software interface items

(menus and buttons)

Keyboard keys Example: Press the Tab key.

User's Guide

iPF840 About This User Manual

• Cross-reference

Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this user manual.

Cross-reference in the same user manual Example: see " Menu Structure ."

➔ P.439

Click the link to jump to the corresponding page.

Cross-reference in related manuals

Other cross-reference

Example: Refer to the Paper Reference Guide.

Example: See the printer driver help.

• Figures and software screens

• Figures in this user manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some cases.

• Screens depicted in this user manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from the actual screens because of subsequent updates.

• May we request

• The information in this user manual is subject to change without notice.

• We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this user manual, but if you notice errors or omissions, contact support center.

User's Guide

667

WEEE Directive iPF840

668

Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the

WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those

Directives.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.

This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with

EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.

For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit

www.canon-europe.com/weee , or

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Nur für Europäische Union und EWR (Norwegen, Island und Liechtenstein)

Diese Symbole weisen darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt gemäß WEEE-Richtlinie (2012/19/EU; Richtlinie über Elektro- und Elektronik-Altgeräte), Batterien-Richtlinie (2006/66/EG) und nationalen Gesetzen zur Umsetzung dieser

Richtlinien nicht über den Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.

Falls sich unter dem oben abgebildeten Symbol ein chemisches Symbol befindet, bedeutet dies gemäß der Batterien-Richtlinie, dass in dieser Batterie oder diesem Akkumulator ein Schwermetall (Hg = Quecksilber, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Blei) in einer Konzentration vorhanden ist, die über einem in der Batterien-Richtlinie angegebenen Grenzwert liegt.

Dieses Produkt muss bei einer dafür vorgesehenen Sammelstelle abgegeben werden. Dies kann z. B. durch Rückgabe beim Kauf eines neuen ähnlichen Produkts oder durch Abgabe bei einer autorisierten Sammelstelle für die

Wiederaufbereitung von Elektro- und Elektronik-Altgeräten sowie Batterien und Akkumulatoren geschehen. Der unsachgemäße Umgang mit Altgeräten kann aufgrund potenziell gefährlicher Stoffe, die generell mit Elektro- und

Elektronik-Altgeräten in Verbindung stehen, negative Auswirkungen auf die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit haben.

Durch Ihre Mitarbeit bei der umweltgerechten Entsorgung dieses Produkts tragen Sie zu einer effektiven Nutzung natürlicher Ressourcen bei.

Um weitere Informationen über die Wiederverwertung dieses Produkts zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihre Stadtverwaltung, den öffentlich-rechtlichen Entsorgungsträger, eine autorisierte Stelle für die Entsorgung von Elektround Elektronik-Altgeräten oder Ihr örtliches Entsorgungsunternehmen oder besuchen Sie

www.canon-europe.com/weee , oder

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Union Européenne, Norvège, Islande et Liechtenstein uniquement.

Ces symboles indiquent que ce produit ne doit pas être mis au rebut avec les ordures ménagères, comme le spécifient la Directive européenne DEEE (2012/19/UE), la Directive européenne relative à l'élimination des piles et des accumulateurs usagés (2006/66/CE) et les lois en vigueur dans votre pays appliquant ces directives.

Si un symbole de toxicité chimique est imprimé sous le symbole illustré ci-dessus conformément à la Directive relative aux piles et aux accumulateurs, il indique la présence d'un métal lourd (Hg = mercure, Cd = cadmium, Pb = plomb) dans la pile ou l'accumulateur à une concentration supérieure au seuil applicable spécifié par la Directive.

User's Guide

iPF840 WEEE Directive

Ce produit doit être confié au distributeur à chaque fois que vous achetez un produit neuf similaire, ou à un point de collecte mis en place par les collectivités locales pour le recyclage des Déchets des Équipements Électriques et

Électroniques (DEEE). Le traitement inapproprié de ce type de déchet risque d'avoir des répercussions sur l'environnement et la santé humaine, du fait de la présence de substances potentiellement dangereuses généralement associées aux équipements électriques et électroniques.

Votre entière coopération dans le cadre de la mise au rebut correcte de ce produit favorisera une meilleure utilisation des ressources naturelles.

Pour plus d'informations sur le recyclage de ce produit, contactez vos services municipaux, votre éco-organisme ou les autorités locales compétentes, ou consultez le site

www.canon-europe.com/weee , ou

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Uitsluitend bestemd voor de Europese Unie en EER (Noorwegen, IJsland en Liechtenstein)

Met deze symbolen wordt aangegeven dat dit product in overeenstemming met de AEEA-richtlijn (2012/19/EU), de richtlijn 2006/66/EG betreffende batterijen en accu's en/of de plaatselijk geldende wetgeving waarin deze richtlijnen zijn geïmplementeerd, niet bij het normale huisvuil mag worden weggegooid.

Indien onder het hierboven getoonde symbool een chemisch symbool gedrukt staat, geeft dit in overeenstemming met de richtlijn betreffende batterijen en accu's aan dat deze batterij of accu een zwaar metaal bevat (Hg = kwik,

Cd = cadmium, Pb = lood) waarvan de concentratie de toepasselijke drempelwaarde in overeenstemming met de genoemde richtlijn overschrijdt.

Dit product dient te worden ingeleverd bij een hiervoor aangewezen inzamelpunt, bijv. door dit in te leveren bij een hiertoe erkend verkooppunt bij aankoop van een gelijksoortig product, of bij een officiële inzameldienst voor de recycling van elektrische en elektronische apparatuur (EEA) en batterijen en accu's. Door de potentieel gevaarlijke stoffen die gewoonlijk gepaard gaan met EEA, kan onjuiste verwerking van dit type afval mogelijk nadelige gevolgen hebben voor het milieu en de menselijke gezondheid. Uw medewerking bij het op juiste wijze weggooien van dit product draagt bij tot effectief gebruik van natuurlijke hulpbronnen.

Voor verdere informatie over recycling van dit product kunt u contact opnemen met uw plaatselijke gemeente, afvaldienst, officiële dienst voor klein chemisch afval of afvalstortplaats, of kunt u terecht op

www.canon-europe.com/weee , of

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Sólo para la Unión Europea y el Área Económica Europea (Noruega, Islandia y Liechtenstein)

Estos iconos indican que este producto no debe desecharse con los residuos domésticos de acuerdo con la Directiva sobre RAEE (2012/19/UE) y la Directiva sobre Pilas y Acumuladores (2006/66/CE) y/o la legislación nacional.

Si aparece un símbolo químico bajo este icono, de acuerdo con la Directiva sobre Pilas y Acumuladores, significa que la pila o el acumulador contiene metales pesados (Hg = Mercurio, Cd = Cadmio, Pb = Plomo) en una concentración superior al límite especificado en dicha directiva.

Este producto deberá entregarse en un punto de recogida designado, por ejemplo, entregándolo en el lugar de venta al adquirir un producto nuevo similar o en un centro autorizado para la recogida de residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos (RAEE), baterías y acumuladores. La gestión incorrecta de este tipo de residuos puede afectar al medio ambiente y a la salud humana debido a las sustancias potencialmente nocivas que suelen contener estos aparatos.

Su cooperación en la correcta eliminación de este producto contribuirá al correcto aprovechamiento de los recursos naturales.

Los usuarios tienen derecho a devolver pilas, acumuladores o baterías usados sin coste alguno. El precio de venta de pilas, acumuladores y baterías incluye el coste de la gestión medioambiental de su desecho, y no es necesario mostrar la cuantía de dicho coste en la información y la factura suministradas a los usuarios finales.

Si desea más información sobre el reciclado de este producto, póngase en contacto con su municipio, el servicio o el organismo encargado de la gestión de residuos domésticos o visite

www.canon-europe.com/weee , o

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Solo per Unione Europea e SEE (Norvegia, Islanda e Liechtenstein)

Questi simboli indicano che il prodotto non può essere smaltito con i rifiuti domestici, ai sensi della Direttiva RAEE

(2012/19/UE), della Direttiva sulle Batterie (2006/66/CE) e/o delle leggi nazionali che attuano tali Direttive.

Se sotto il simbolo indicato sopra è riportato un simbolo chimico, in osservanza della Direttiva sulle batterie, tale simbolo indica la presenza di un metallo pesante (Hg = Mercurio, Cd = Cadmio, Pb = Piombo) nella batteria o nell'accumulatore con un livello di concentrazione superiore a una soglia applicabile specificata nella Direttiva sulle batterie.

669

User's Guide

670

WEEE Directive iPF840

Il prodotto deve essere conferito a un punto di raccolta designato, ad esempio il rivenditore in caso di acquisto di un nuovo prodotto simile oppure un centro di raccolta autorizzato per il riciclaggio di rifiuti di apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche (RAEE) nonché di batterie e accumulatori. Un trattamento improprio di questo tipo di rifiuti può avere conseguenze negative sull'ambiente e sulla salute umana a causa delle sostanze potenzialmente nocive solitamente contenute in tali rifiuti.

La collaborazione dell'utente per il corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto contribuirà a un utilizzo efficace delle risorse naturali ed eviterà di incorrere in sanzioni amministrative ai sensi dell'art. 255 e successivi del Decreto Legislativo n. 152/06.

Per ulteriori informazioni sul riciclaggio di questo prodotto, contattare le autorità locali, l'ente responsabile della raccolta dei rifiuti, un rivenditore autorizzato o il servizio di raccolta dei rifiuti domestici, oppure visitare il sito

www.canon-europe.com/weee , o

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Apenas para a União Europeia e AEE (Noruega, Islândia e Liechtenstein)

Estes símbolos indicam que este produto não deve ser eliminado juntamente com o seu lixo doméstico, segundo a

Diretiva REEE de 2012/19/UE, a Diretiva de Baterias (2006/66/CE) e/ou a sua legislação nacional que transponha estas Diretivas.

Se houver um símbolo químico impresso como mostrado abaixo, de acordo com a Diretiva de Baterias, isto indica que um metal pesado (Hg = Mercúrio, Cd = Cádmio, Pb = Chumbo) está presente nesta pilha ou acumulador, numa concentração acima de um limite aplicável especificado na Diretiva.

Este produto deve ser entregue num ponto de recolha designado, por exemplo num local autorizado de troca quando compra um equipamento novo idêntico, ou num local de recolha autorizado para reciclar equipamento elétrico e eletrónico (EEE) em fim de vida, bem como pilhas e baterias. O tratamento inadequado deste tipo de resíduos pode ter um impacto negativo no ambiente e na saúde humana, devido a substâncias potencialmente perigosas que estão associadas com equipamentos do tipo EEE.

A sua cooperação no tratamento correto deste produto irá contribuir para a utilização mais eficaz dos recursos naturais.

Para obter mais informações acerca de como reciclar este produto, por favor contacte as suas autoridades locais responsáveis pela matéria, serviço de recolha aprovado para pilhas e baterias ou serviço de recolha de resíduos sólidos domésticos da sua municipalidade, ou visite

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , ou

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Gælder kun i Europæiske Union og EØS (Norge, Island og Liechtenstein)

Disse symboler betyder, at produktet ikke må bortskaffes sammen med dagrenovation i henhold til WEEE-direktivet

(2012/19/EU), batteridirektivet (2006/66/EF) og/eller den lokale lovgivning, som disse direktiver er gennemført i.

Hvis der i overensstemmelse med batteridirektivet er trykt et kemisk symbol under det symbol, der er vist ovenfor, betyder det, at batteriet eller akkumulatoren indeholder tungmetaller (Hg = kviksølv, Cd = cadmium, Pb = bly) i en koncentration, som ligger over de grænseværdier, der er beskrevet i batteridirektivet.

Produktet skal afleveres på et godkendt indsamlingssted, f.eks. i overensstemmelse med en godkendt én-til-énprocedure, når du indkøber et nyt tilsvarende produkt, eller på et godkendt indsamlingssted for elektronikaffald samt for batterier og akkumulatorer. Forkert håndtering af denne type affald kan medføre negative konsekvenser for miljøet og menneskers helbred på grund af de potentielt sundhedsskadelige stoffer, der generelt kan forefindes i elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr.

Når du foretager korrekt bortskaffelse af produktet, bidrager du til effektiv brug af naturressourcerne. Kontakt din kommune, den lokale affaldsmyndighed, det lokale affaldsanlæg, eller besøg

www.canon-europe.com/weee , eller

www.canon-europe.com/battery for at få flere oplysninger om genbrug af dette produkt.

Μόνο για την Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και τον ΕΟΧ (Νορβηγία, Ισλανδία και Λιχτενστάιν)

Αυτά τα σύμβολα υποδεικνύουν ότι αυτό το προϊόν δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται μαζί με τα οικιακά απορρίμματα,

σύμφωνα με την Οδηγία για τα Απόβλητα Ηλεκτρικού και Ηλεκτρονικού Εξοπλισμού (ΑΗΗΕ) (2012/19/ΕΕ), την

Οδηγία για τις Ηλεκτρικές Στήλες (2006/66/ΕΚ) ή/και την εθνική νομοθεσία που εφαρμόζει τις Οδηγίες εκείνες.

Εάν κάποιο χημικό σύμβολο είναι τυπωμένο κάτω από το σύμβολο που φαίνεται παραπάνω, σύμφωνα με την

Οδηγία για τις Ηλεκτρικές Στήλες, υποδηλώνει ότι κάποιο βαρύ μέταλλο (Hg = Υδράργυρος, Cd = Κάδμιο, Pb =

Μόλυβδος) υπάρχει στην μπαταρία ή τον συσσωρευτή σε συγκέντρωση μεγαλύτερη από το ισχύον επίπεδο που

καθορίζεται στην Οδηγία για τις Ηλεκτρικές Στήλες.

Αυτό το προϊόν πρέπει να παραδίδεται σε καθορισμένο σημείο συλλογής, π.χ. σε μια εξουσιοδοτημένη βάση

ανταλλαγής όταν αγοράζετε ένα νέο παρόμοιο προϊόν ή σε μια εξουσιοδοτημένη θέση συλλογής για την

ανακύκλωση των αποβλήτων ηλεκτρικού και ηλεκτρονικού εξοπλισμού (ΗΗE) και των ηλεκτρικών στηλών και

συσσωρευτών. Ο ακατάλληλος χειρισμός αυτού του τύπου αποβλήτων μπορεί να έχει αρνητικό αντίκτυπο στο

περιβάλλον και την υγεία του ανθρώπου, λόγω δυνητικά επικίνδυνων ουσιών που γενικά συνδέονται με τον ΗΗΕ.

User's Guide

iPF840 WEEE Directive

Η συνεργασία σας για τη σωστή απόρριψη αυτού του προϊόντος θα συμβάλει στην αποτελεσματική χρήση των

φυσικών πόρων.

Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά με ανακύκλωση αυτού του προϊόντος, επικοινωνήστε με το τοπικό γραφείο

της πόλης σας, την υπηρεσία απορριμμάτων, το εγκεκριμένο σχήμα ή την υπηρεσία απόρριψης οικιακών

αποβλήτων ή επισκεφθείτε τη διεύθυνση

www.canon-europe.com/weee ή

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Gjelder kun den europeiske union og EØS (Norge, Island og Liechtenstein)

Disse symbolene indikerer at dette produktet ikke skal kastes sammen med husholdningsavfall, i henhold til

WEEE-direktivet (2012/19/EU), batteridirektivet (2006/66/EF) og/eller nasjonal lov som har implementert disse direktivene.

Hvis et kjemisk symbol vises under symbolet vist ovenfor, i samsvar med batteridirektivet, indikerer dette at et tungmetall (Hg = kvikksølv, Cd = kadmium, Pb = bly) finnes i batteriet eller akkumulatoren i en konsentrasjon over en gjeldende øvre grense som er spesifisert i batteridirektivet.

Produktet må leveres til et dertil egnet innsamlingspunkt, det vil si på en autorisert en-til-en-basis når en kjøper et nytt lignende produkt, eller til et autorisert innsamlingssted for resirkulering av avfall fra elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr (EE ‑ utstyr) og batterier og akkumulatorer. Feil håndtering av denne typen avfall kan være miljø- og helseskadelig på grunn av potensielt skadelige stoffer som ofte brukes i EE ‑ utstyr.

Din innsats for korrekt avhending av produktet vil bidra til effektiv bruk av naturressurser.

Du kan få mer informasjon om resirkulering av dette produktet ved å kontakte lokale myndigheter, avfallsadministrasjonen, et godkjent program eller husholdningens renovasjonsselskap, eller gå til

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , eller

➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Vain Euroopan unionin sekä ETA:n (Norja, Islanti ja Liechtenstein) alueelle.

Nämä tunnukset osoittavat, että sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromua koskeva direktiivi (SER-direktiivi, 2012/19/EU), paristoista ja akuista annettu direktiivi (2006/66/EY) sekä kansallinen lainsäädäntö kieltävät tuotteen hävittämisen talousjätteen mukana.

Jos yllä olevan symbolin alapuolelle on paristodirektiivin mukaisesti painettu kemiallisen aineen tunnus, kyseinen paristo tai akku sisältää raskasmetalleja (Hg = elohopea, Cd = kadmium, Pb = lyijy) enemmän kuin paristodirektiivin salliman määrän.

Tuote on vietävä asianmukaiseen keräyspisteeseen, esimerkiksi kodinkoneliikkeeseen uutta vastaavaa tuotetta ostettaessa tai viralliseen sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun tai paristojen ja akkujen keräyspisteeseen. Sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun virheellinen käsittely voi vahingoittaa ympäristöä ja ihmisten terveyttä, koska laitteet saattavat sisältää ympäristölle ja terveydelle haitallisia aineita. Tuotteen asianmukainen hävittäminen säästää myös luonnonvaroja.

Jos haluat lisätietoja tämän tuotteen kierrätyksestä, ota yhteys kunnan jätehuoltoviranomaisiin tai käyttämääsi jätehuoltoyhtiöön tai käy osoitteessa

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , tai

➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Endast för Europeiska unionen och EES (Norge, Island och Liechtenstein)

De här symbolerna visar att produkten inte får sorteras och slängas som hushållsavfall enligt WEEE-direktivet

(2012/19/EU), batteridirektivet (2006/66/EG) och/eller nationell lagstiftning som implementerar dessa direktiv.

Om en kemisk symbol förekommer under ovanstående symbol innebär detta enligt Batteridirektivet att en tungmetall (Hg = Kvicksilver, Cd = Kadmium, Pb = Bly) förekommer i batteriet eller ackumulatorn med en koncentration som överstiger tillämplig gräns som anges i Batteridirektivet.

Produkten ska lämnas in på en avsedd insamlingsplats, t.ex. på en återvinningsstation auktoriserad att hantera elektrisk och elektronisk utrustning (EE-utrustning) samt batterier och ackumulatorer eller hos handlare som är auktoriserade att byta in varor då nya, motsvarande köps (en mot en). Olämplig hantering av avfall av den här typen kan ha negativ inverkan på miljön och människors hälsa på grund av de potentiellt farliga ämnen som kan återfinnas i elektrisk och elektronisk utrustning.

Din medverkan till en korrekt avfallshantering av produkten bidrar till effektiv användning av naturresurserna.

Om du vill ha mer information om var du kan lämna in den här produkten, kontakta ditt lokala kommunkontor, ber-

örd myndighet eller företag för avfallshantering eller se

www.canon-europe.com/weee , eller

➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Pouze Evropská unie a EHP (Norsko, Island a Lichtenštejnsko)

Tento symbol znamená, že podle směrnice OEEZ (2012/19/EU), směrnice o bateriích (2006/66/ES) a/nebo podle vnitrostátních právních prováděcích předpisů k těmto směrnicím nemá být tento výrobek likvidován s odpadem z domácností.

671

User's Guide

672

WEEE Directive iPF840

Je-li v souladu s požadavky směrnice o bateriích vytištěna pod výše uvedeným symbolem chemická značka, udává, že tato baterie nebo akumulátor obsahuje těžké kovy (Hg = rtuť, Cd = kadmium, Pb = olovo) v koncentraci vyš-

ší, než je příslušná hodnota předepsaná směrnicí.

Tento výrobek má být vrácen do určeného sběrného místa, např. v rámci autorizovaného systému odběru jednoho výrobku za jeden nově prodaný podobný výrobek, nebo do autorizovaného sběrného místa pro recyklaci odpadních elektrických a elektronických zařízení (OEEZ), baterií a akumulátorů. Nevhodné nakládání s tímto druhem odpadu by mohlo mít negativní dopad na životní prostředí a lidské zdraví, protože elektrická a elektronická zařízení zpravidla obsahují potenciálně nebezpečné látky. Vaše spolupráce na správné likvidaci tohoto výrobku napomůže efektivnímu využívání přírodních zdrojů.

Chcete-li získat podrobné informace týkající se recyklace tohoto výrobku, obraťte se prosím na místní úřad, orgán pro nakládání s odpady, schválený systém nakládání s odpady či společnost zajišťující likvidaci domovního odpadu, nebo navštivte webové stránky

www.canon-europe.com/weee nebo

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Csak az Európai Unió és az EGT (Norvégia, Izland és Liechtenstein) országaiban

Ezek a szimbólumok azt jelzik, hogy a termék hulladékkezelése a háztartási hulladéktól különválasztva, az elektromos és elektronikus berendezések hulladékairól (WEEE) szóló (2012/19/EU) irányelvnek és az elemekről és akkumulátorokról, valamint a hulladék elemekről és akkumulátorokról szóló (2006/66/EK) irányelvnek megfelelően és/ vagy ezen irányelveknek megfelelő helyi előírások szerint történik.

Amennyiben a fent feltüntetett szimbólum alatt egy vegyjel is szerepel, az elemekről és akkumulátorokról szóló irányelvben foglaltak értelmében ez azt jelzi, hogy az elem vagy az akkumulátor az irányelvben meghatározott határ-

értéknél nagyobb mennyiségben tartalmaz nehézfémet (Hg = higany, Cd = kadmium, Pb = ólom).

E terméket az arra kijelölt gyűjtőhelyre kell juttatni – pl. hasonló termék vásárlásakor a régi becserélésére vonatkozó hivatalos program keretében, vagy az elektromos és elektronikus berendezések (EEE) hulladékainak gyűjtésére, valamint a hulladék elemek és hulladék akkumulátorok gyűjtésére kijelölt hivatalos gyűjtőhelyre. Az ilyen jellegű hulladékok nem előírásszerű kezelése az elektromos és elektronikus berendezésekhez (EEE) általánosan kapcsolható potenciálisan veszélyes anyagok révén hatással lehet a környezetre és az egészségre.

E termék megfelelő leselejtezésével Ön is hozzájárul a természeti források hatékony használatához.

A termék újrahasznosítását illetően informálódjon a helyi polgármesteri hivatalnál, a helyi közterület-fenntartó vállalatnál, a hivatalos hulladéklerakó telephelyen vagy a háztartási hulladék begyűjtését végző szolgáltatónál, illetve látogasson el a

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , vagy

➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery internetes oldalra.

Tylko dla krajów Unii Europejskiej oraz EOG (Norwegia, Islandia i Liechtenstein)

Te symbole oznaczają, że produktu nie należy wyrzucać razem z odpadami gospodarstwa domowego, zgodnie z dyrektywą WEEE w sprawie zużytego sprzętu elektrycznego i elektronicznego (2012/19/UE) lub dyrektywą w sprawie baterii (2006/66/WE) bądź przepisami krajowymi wdrażającymi te dyrektywy.

Jeśli pod powyższym symbolem znajduje się symbol chemiczny, zgodnie z dyrektywą w sprawie baterii oznacza to, że bateria lub akumulator zawiera metal ciężki (Hg = rtęć, Cd = kadm, Pb = ołów) w stężeniu przekraczającym odpowiedni poziom określony w dyrektywie w sprawie baterii.

Użytkownicy baterii i akumulatorów mają obowiązek korzystać z dostępnego programu zwrotu, recyklingu i utylizacji baterii oraz akumulatorów.

Niewłaściwe postępowanie z tego typu odpadami może mieć wpływ na środowisko i zdrowie ludzi ze względu na substancje potencjalnie niebezpieczne, związane ze zużytym sprzętem elektrycznym i elektronicznym.

Państwa współpraca w zakresie właściwej utylizacji tego produktu przyczyni się do efektywnego wykorzystania zasobów naturalnych.

W celu uzyskania informacji o sposobie recyklingu tego produktu prosimy o kontakt z właściwym urzędem miejskim lub zakładem gospodarki komunalnej bądź zapraszamy na stronę

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , lub

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Platí len pre štáty Európskej únie a EHP (Nórsko, Island a Lichtenštajnsko)

Tieto symboly označujú, že podľa Smernice o odpade z elektrických a elektronických zariadení (OEEZ)

2012/19/EÚ, Smernice o batériách (2006/66/ES) a podľa platnej legislatívy Slovenskej republiky sa tento produkt nesmie likvidovať spolu s komunálnym odpadom.

Ak je chemická značka vytlačená pod vyššie uvedeným symbolom, znamená to, že táto batéria alebo akumulátor obsahuje ťažký kov (Hg = ortuť, Cd = kadmium, Pb = olovo) v koncentrácii vyššej, ako je príslušná povolená hodnota stanovená v Smernici o batériách.

Produkt je potrebné odovzdať do určenej zberne, napr. prostredníctvom výmeny za kúpu nového podobného produktu, alebo na autorizované zberné miesto, ktoré spracúva odpad z elektrických a elektronických zariadení (EEZ), batérií a akumulátorov. Nesprávna manipulácia s takýmto typom odpadu môže mať negatívny vplyv na životné prostredie a ľudské zdravie, pretože elektrické a elektronické zariadenia obsahujú potenciálne nebezpečné látky.

User's Guide

iPF840 WEEE Directive

Spoluprácou na správnej likvidácii tohto produktu prispejete k účinnému využívaniu prírodných zdrojov.

Ďalšie informácie o recyklácii tohto produktu získate od miestneho úradu, úradu životného prostredia, zo schváleného plánu OEEZ alebo od spoločnosti, ktorá zaisťuje likvidáciu komunálneho odpadu. Viac informácií nájdete aj na webovej stránke:

www.canon-europe.com/weee , alebo

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Üksnes Euroopa Liit ja EMP (Norra, Island ja Liechtenstein)

Antud sümbolid viitavad sellele, et vastavalt elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmete jäätmeid käsitlevale direktiivile

(2012/19/EL), patareisid ja akusid ning patarei- ja akujäätmeid käsitlevale direktiivile (2006/66/EÜ) ja/või nimetatud direktiive rakendavatele riiklikele õigusaktidele ei või seda toodet koos olmejäätmetega ära visata.

Kui keemiline sümbol on trükitud eespool toodud sümboli alla, siis tähendab see, et antud patareis või akus leiduva raskemetalli (Hg = elavhõbe, Cd = kaadmium, Pb = plii) kontsentratsioonitase on kõrgem kui patareisid ja akusid ning patarei- ja akujäätmeid käsitlevas direktiivis sätestatud piirmäär.

Antud tootest tekkinud jäätmed tuleb anda vastavasse kogumispunkti, nt müügipunkti, mis on volitatud üks ühe vastu vahetama, kui ostate uue sarnase toote, või vastavasse elektri- ja lektroonikaseadmete jäätmete ning patareide ja akude ümbertöötlemiseks mõeldud kogumispunkti. Antud liiki jäätmete vale käitlemine võib kahjustada keskkonda ja inimeste tervist elektri- ja elektroonikajäätmetes tavaliselt leiduvate potentsiaalselt ohtlike ainete tõttu.

Antud tootest tekkinud jäätmete nõuetekohase kõrvaldamisega aitate kasutada loodusvarasid efektiivselt.

Täiendava teabe saamiseks elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmetest tekkinud jäätmete ning patarei- ja akujäätmete tagastamise ja ümbertöötlemise kohta võtke ühendust kohaliku omavalitsusega, asjakohase valitsusasutusega, asjakohase tootjavastutusorganisatsiooniga või olmejäätmete käitlejaga. Lisateavet leitate ka Interneti-leheküljelt

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee või

➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Tikai Eiropas Savienībai un EEZ (Norvēģijai, Islandei un Lihtenšteinai)

Šie simboli norāda, ka atbilstoši ES Direktīvai (2012/19/ES) par elektrisko un elektronisko iekārtu atkritumiem

(EEIA), Direktīvai (2006/66/EK) par baterijām un akumulatoriem, un akumulatoru atkritumiem, ar ko atceļ Direktīvu

91/157/EEK, un vietējiem tiesību aktiem šo izstrādājumu nedrīkst izmest kopā ar sadzīves atkritumiem.

Ja zem iepriekš norādītā simbola ir uzdrukāts ķīmiskais simbols, saskaņā ar direktīvu par baterijām un akumulatoriem tas nozīmē, ka šīs baterijas vai akumulatori satur smagos metālus (Hg = dzīvsudrabs, Cd = kadmijs, Pb = svins) un to koncentrācijas līmenis pārsniedz direktīvā par baterijām un akumulatoriem minēto piemērojamo slieksni.

Šis izstrādājums ir jānodod piemērotā savākšanas vietā, piemēram, apstiprinātā veikalā, kur iegādājaties līdzīgu jaunu produktu un atstājat veco, vai apstiprinātā vietā izlietotu elektrisko un elektronisko iekārtu un bateriju un akumulatoru pārstrādei. Nepareiza šāda veida atkritumu apsaimniekošana var apdraudēt vidi un cilvēka veselību tādu iespējami bīstamu vielu dēļ, kas parasti ir elektriskajās un elektroniskajās iekārtās.

Jūsu atbalsts pareizā šāda veida atkritumu apsaimniekošanā sekmēs efektīvu dabas resursu izmantošanu.

Lai saņemtu pilnīgāku informāciju par šāda veida izstrādājumu nodošanu otrreizējai pārstrādei, sazinieties ar vietējo pašvaldību, atkritumu savākšanas atbildīgo dienestu, pilnvaroto organizāciju vai iestādi, kas veic sadzīves atkritumu apsaimniekošanu, vai apmeklējiet tīmekļa vietni

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , vai

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Tik Europos Sąjungai ir EEE (Norvegijai, Islandijai ir Lichtenšteinui)

Šie simboliai reiškia, kad šio gaminio negalima išmesti į buitines atliekas, kaip reikalaujama WEEE Direktyvoje

(2012/19/ES) ir Baterijų direktyvoje (2006/66/EB) ir (ar) jūsų šalies nacionaliniuose įstatymuose, kuriais šios Direktyvos yra įgyvendinamos.

Jeigu cheminio ženklo simbolis yra nurodytas žemiau šio ženklo, tai reiškia, kad vadovaujantis Baterijų direktyvą, baterijų ar akumuliatorių sudėtyje yra sunkiųjų metalų (Hg = gyvsidabrio, Cd = kadmio, Pb = švino), kurių koncentracija viršija Baterijų direktyvoje nurodytas leistinas ribas.

Šį gaminį reikia pristatyti į specialųjį surinkimo punktą, pavyzdžiui, mainais, kai jūs perkate naują panašų gaminį, arba į specialiąją surinkimo vietą, kurioje perdirbamos elektrinės ir elektroninės įrangos atliekos bei naudotos baterijos ir akumuliatoriai. Dėl netinkamo šio tipo atliekų tvarkymo gali nukentėti aplinka ir iškilti grėsmė žmogaus sveikatai dėl galimai kenksmingų medžiagų, iš esmės susijusių su elektrine ir elektronine įranga.

Bendradarbiaudami ir teisingai utilizuodami šiuos gaminius, jūs padėsite efektyviai naudoti gamtinius išteklius.

Daugiau informacijos apie gaminio perdirbimą jums gali suteikti vietinis biuras, atliekų tvarkymo bendrovė, sertifikuoti organai ar buitinių atliekų surinkimo įmonės. Taip pat siūloma apsilankyti interneto svetainėje

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , arba

➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Samo za Evropsko unijo in EGP (Norveška, Islandija in Lihtenštajn)

Ti simboli pomenijo, da tega izdelka skladno z Direktivo OEEO (2012/19/EU), Direktivo 2006/66/ES in/ali nacionalno zakonodajo, ki uvaja ti direktivi, ne smete odlagati z nesortiranimi gospodinjskimi odpadki.

User's Guide

673

674

WEEE Directive iPF840

Če je pod zgoraj prikazanim simbolom natisnjen kemijski simbol, to v skladu z Direktivo pomeni, da je v tej bateriji ali akumulatorju prisotna težka kovina (Hg = živo srebro, Cd = kadmij, Pb = svinec), in sicer v koncentraciji, ki je nad relevantno mejno vrednostjo, določeno v Direktivi.

Ta izdelek je potrebno odnesti na izbrano zbirno mesto, t. j. pooblaščeno trgovino, kjer ob nakupu novega (podobnega) izdelka vrnete starega, ali na pooblaščeno zbirno mesto za ponovno uporabo odpadne električne in elektronske opreme (EEO) ter baterij in akumulatorjev. Neustrezno ravnanje s to vrsto odpadkov lahko negativno vpliva na okolje in človeško zdravje zaradi potencialno nevarnih snovi, ki so pogosto povezane z EEO.

Vaše sodelovanje pri pravilnem odlaganju tega izdelka predstavlja pomemben prispevek k smotrni izrabi naravnih virov.

Za več informacij o ponovni uporabi tega izdelka se obrnite na lokalen mestni urad, pristojno službo za odpadke, predstavnika pooblaščenega programa za obdelavo odpadkov ali na lokalno komunalo. Lahko pa tudi obiščete na-

šo spletno stran

www.canon-europe.com/weee , ali

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Само за Европейския съюз и ЕИП (Норвегия, Исландия и Лихтенщайн)

Тези символи показват, че този продукт не трябва да се изхвърля заедно с битовите отпадъци съгласно

Директивата за ИУЕЕО (2012/19/ЕC), Директивата за батерии (2006/66/ЕО) и/или Вашето национално законодателство, прилагащо тези Директиви.

Ако под показания горе символ е отпечатан символ за химически елемент, съгласно разпоредбите на

Директивата за батерии, този втори символ означава наличието на тежък метал (Hg = живак, Cd = кадмий,

Pb = олово) в батерията или акумулатора в концентрация над указаната граница за съответния елемент в

Директивата.

Този продукт трябва да бъде предаден в предназначен за целта пункт за събиране, например на база размяна, когато купувате нов подобен продукт, или в одобрен събирателен пункт за рециклиране на излязло от употреба електрическо и електронно оборудване (ИУЕЕО), батерии и акумулатори. Неправилното третиране на този тип отпадъци може да доведе до евентуални отрицателни последствия за околната среда и човешкото здраве поради потенциално опасните вещества, които обикновено са свързани с ЕЕО.

В същото време Вашето съдействие за правилното изхвърляне на този продукт ще допринесе за ефективното използване на природните ресурси.

За повече информация относно това къде можете да предадете за рециклиране на този продукт, моля свържете се с Вашите местни власти, с органа, отговорен за отпадъците, с одобрената система за ИУЕЕО или с Вашата местна служба за битови отпадъци, или посетете

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , или

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Doar pentru Uniunea Europeană şi EEA (Norvegia, Islanda şi Liechtenstein)

Aceste simboluri indică faptul că acest produs nu trebuie aruncat împreună cu deşeurile menajere, în conformitate cu Directiva DEEE (2012/19/UE), Directiva referitoare la baterii (2006/66/CE) şi/sau legile dvs. naţionale ce implementează aceste Directive.

Dacă un simbol chimic este imprimat sub simbolul de mai sus, în conformitate cu Directiva referitoare la baterii, acest simbol indică prezenţa în baterie sau acumulator a unui metal greu (Hg = Mercur, Cd = Cadmiu, Pb = Plumb)

într-o concentraţie mai mare decât pragul admis specificat în Directiva referitoare la baterii.

Acest produs trebuie înmânat punctului de colectare adecvat, ex: printr-un schimb autorizat unu la unu atunci când cumpăraţi un produs nou similar sau la un loc de colectare autorizat pentru reciclarea reziduurilor de echipament electric şi electronic (EEE) şi baterii şi acumulatori. Administrarea neadecvată a acestui tip de deşeuri, ar putea avea un impact asupra mediului şi asupra sănătăţii umane datorită substanţelor cu potenţial de risc care sunt în general asociate cu EEE.

Cooperarea dvs. în direcţia reciclării corecte a acestui produs va contribui la o utilizare eficientă a resurselor naturale.

Pentru mai multe informaţii despre reciclarea acestui produs, vă rugăm să contactaţi biroul dvs. local, autorităţile responsabile cu deşeurile, schema aprobată sau serviciul dvs. responsabil cu deşeurile menajere sau vizitaţi-ne la

www.canon-europe.com/weee , sau

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Samo za Europsku uniju i EEA (Norveška, Island i Lihtenštajn)

Oznaka pokazuje da se ovaj proizvod ne smije odlagati s komunalnim i ostalim vrstama otpada, u skladu s direktivom WEEE (2012/19/EC), Direktivom o baterijama (2006/66/EC) i Pravilnikom o gospodarenju otpadnim baterijama i akumulatorima te Pravilnikom o gospodarenju otpadnim električnim i elektroničkim uređajima i opremom.

Ako je ispod prethodno prikazane oznake otisnut kemijski simbol, u skladu s Direktivom o baterijama, to znači da se u ovoj bateriji ili akumulatoru nalazi teški metal (Hg = živa, Cd = kadmij, Pb = olovo) i da je njegova koncentracija iznad razine propisane u Direktivi o baterijama.

User's Guide

iPF840 WEEE Directive

Ovaj bi proizvod trebalo predati ovlašenom skupljaču EE otpada ili prodavatelju koji je dužan preuzeti otpadni proizvod po sistemu jedan za jedan, ukoliko isti odgovara vrsti te je obavljao primarne funkcije kao i isporučena EE oprema. Otpadne baterije i akumulatori predaju se ovlaštenom skupljaču otpadnih baterija ili akumulatora ili prodavatelju bez naknade i obveze kupnje za krajnjeg korisnika. Neodgovarajuće rukovanje ovom vrstom otpada može utjecati na okoliš i ljudsko zdravlje zbog potencijalno opasnih supstanci koje se najčešće nalaze na takvim mjestima.

Vaša suradnja u pravilnom zbrinjavanju ovog proizvoda pridonijet će djelotvornom iskorištavanju prirodnih resursa.

Dodatne informacije o recikliranju ovog proizvoda zatražite od svog lokalnog gradskog ureda, službe za zbrinjavanje otpada, odobrenog programa ili komunalne službe za uklanjanje otpada ili pak na stranicama

www.canon-europe.com/weee ili

www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Només per a la Unió Europea i a l’Espai Econòmic Europeu (Noruega, Islàndia i Liechtenstein)

Aquests símbols indican que aquest producte no s’ha de llençar amb les escombraries de la llar, d’acord amb la

RAEE (2012/19/UE), la Directiva relativa a piles i acumuladors (2006/66/CE) i la legislació nacional que implementi aquestes directives.

Si al costat d’aquest símbol hi apareix imprès un símbol químic, segons especifica la Directiva relativa a piles i acumuladors, significa que la bateria o l’acumulador conté un metall pesant (Hg = mercuri, Cd = cadmi, Pb = plom) en una concentració superior al límit aplicable especificat en la Directiva.

Aquest producte s’hauria de lliurar en un dels punts de recollida designats, com per exemple, intercanviant un per un en comprar un producte similar o lliurant-lo en un lloc de recollida autoritzat per al reciclatge de residus d’aparells elèctrics i electrònics (RAEE) i piles i acumuladors. La manipulació inadequada d’aquest tipus de residus podria tenir un impacte negatiu en l’entorn i en la salut humana, a causa de les substàncies potencialment perilloses que normalment estan associades a l'RAEE.

La vostra cooperació a l’hora de rebutjar correctament aquest producte contribuirà a la utilització efectiva dels recursos naturals.

Els usuaris tenen dret a retornar les bateries o els acumuladors usats sense cap càrrec. El preu de venda de les bateries i els acumuladors inclou el cost de la gestió ambiental dels residus i no es necessari mostrar l’import d’aquest cost en aquest fullet o en la factura que es lliuri a l’usuari final.

Per a més informació sobre el reciclatge d’aquest producte, contacteu amb l’oficina municipal, les autoritats encarregades dels residus, el pla de residus homologat o el servei de recollida d’escombraries domèstiques de la vostra localitat o visiteu

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , o

➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .

Korisnici u Srbiji

Ovaj simbol označava da ovaj proizvod ne sme da se odlaže sa ostalim kućnim otpadom, u skladu sa WEEE Direktivom (2012/19/EU), Direktivom o baterijama (2006/66/EC) i nacionalnim zakonima.

Ukoliko je ispod gore navedenog simbola odštampan hemijski simbol, u skladu sa Direktivom o baterijama, ovaj simbol označava da su u ovoj bateriji ili akumulatoru prisutni teški metali (Hg – živa, Cd – kadmijum, Pb - olovo) u koncentracijama koje premašuju prihvatljivi prag naveden u Direktivi o baterijama.

Ovaj proizvod treba predati određenom centru za prikupljanje, npr. po principu „jedan-za-jedan“ kada kupujete sličan novi proizvod, ili ovlašćenom centru za prikupljanje za reciklažu istrošene električne i elektronske opreme

(EEE), baterija i akumulatora. Nepravilno rukovanje ovom vrstom otpada može imati negativne posledice po životnu sredinu i ljudsko zdravlje usled potencijalno opasnih materijala koji se uglavnom vezuju za EEE.

Vaša saradnja na ispravnom odlaganju ovog proizvoda će doprineti efikasnom korišćenju prirodnih resursa.

Više informacija o tome kako možete da reciklirate ovaj proizvod potražite od lokalnih gradskih vlasti, komunalne službe, odobrenog plana reciklaže ili servisa za odlaganje kućnog otpada, ili posetite stranicu

➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , ili

➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .

675

User's Guide

iPF840

676

User's Guide

Index

A

Accounting ............................................

501

, 502 ,

505 ,

509

Additional Settings Pane ...............................................

284

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ............................

60

Adjusting the Vacuum Strength ......................................

564

B

Bonjour Network ..........................................................

487

C

CAD ............................................................

52 ,

56 ,

57

, 58

Checking Ink Tank Levels .............................................

575

Cleaning .............................................................

578 ,

591

Clearing a Jammed Sheet ............................................

608

Color Adjustment ...................................

172

, 176 ,

296 ,

314

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ................

221 ,

222

Configuring the IP Address .............................

480 ,

481 ,

491

D

Deleting Saved Jobs ....................................................

525

Device Settings Sheet ..................................................

188

Device Setup Utility ......................................................

491

Drying Time ................................................................

358

F

Favorites Sheet ...........................................................

185

Free Layout ...........................................

199

, 201 ,

307 ,

308

G

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ...........................

655

H

Hardware error ............................................................

655

I

Interface .....................................................................

458

L

Large-Format Printing ..................................................

101

Layout Sheet ..............................................................

182

Loading and Printing on Sheets .......................................

21

M

Main Pane ..................................................................

272

Main Sheet .................................................................

166

Maintenance Cartridge ............................

585

, 589 ,

590 ,

652

Menu Operations ..................................................

435 ,

436

Menu Structure ...........................................................

439

N

Navigate ....................................................................

432

Nozzle .......................................................................

577

O

Orientation .....................................

148 ,

149 ,

150 ,

246

,

256

Output Method ............................................................

180

Oversize ......................................................................

83

P

Page Setup Pane ........................................................

283

Page Setup Sheet .......................................................

177

Paper Feed Slot ..........................................................

612

Personal Box .......................................................

534

,

537

PosterArtist ..................................................................

50

Power .............................

247

,

249

, 250 ,

252 ,

254 ,

255

,

256

Preparing to Transfer the Printer ....................................

594

Print Job Log .......................................................

509

,

510

Printer Driver Settings ...........................................

158

,

268

Printer Hard Disk Operations .........................................

470

Printhead ........................

550

,

553

, 577 ,

578 ,

579 ,

618

,

650

Printing Posters in Sections ..........................................

126

Printing Saved Jobs .....................................................

521

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners .............

101 ,

102

,

105

Printing at Actual Size .........................................

87 ,

88 ,

89

Printing on Rolls ............................................................

18

R

Removing the Roll ................................................

352

,

356

Replacing Ink Tanks .....................................................

566

Roll Holder ..........................................................

342

,

368

S

Saving Print Jobs .................................................

514

,

532

Size Options ...............................................................

181

Special Settings ...................................................

184

,

265

Specifications .............................................................

658

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver .................

30 ,

160

,

269

Status Print .................................................................

456

Support Sheet .............................................................

187

U

Utility Sheet ................................................................

186

W

Watermark ..........................................................

146

,

147

When to Replace Ink Tanks ..........................................

575

677

iPF840

User's Guide

ENG

© CANON INC. 2015

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents